Page 1

ACADEMIC CATALOGUE 2017–2018

INNOVATION AND BEST PRACTICE FOR BUSINESS SUCCESS


About Us Kogan Page is the leading independent global publisher of specialist content, from books and supporting resources to toolkits and case study libraries. Founded in 1967, our award-winning work offers solutions for study in the following areas: Business, Risk and Information Management HR, Organizational Development and Coaching Marketing, PR and Sales Logistics, Operations and Supply Chain Management Employability, Careers and Entrepreneurship Our author experts are members of the most prestigious academic institutions, international commercial organizations and professional associations.

Ebooks All Kogan Page books are available as ebooks from major ebook retailers. We can also offer multiple access for students through digital textbook platforms such as Koretext

Inspection Copies Our books are available to lecturers through our inspection copy service. We will consider requests from any instructor with a registered academic address, teaching a class of 12 or more students. You can request an inspection copy by registering for an academic account at www.koganpage.com/inspectioncopies

Stay Informed Join your peers and subscribe to our newsletters for expert articles, free downloads and special offers. Sign up today at www.koganpage.com/newsletters

Connect with Us:

Kogan Page: @KoganPage HR, Organizational Development & Coaching: @KPCoachHR Logistics, Operations & Supply Chain Management: @KPLogistics Business, Risk & Information Management: @KPMgmtLeaders Marketing, PR & Sales: @KPMktng Employability, Careers and Entrepreneurship: @KPEmployability

You can also find us on:

Contact Customer Services T: +44 (0) 20 7278 0433 | E: kpinfo@koganpage.com


Table of Contents Marketing, PR and Sales

  5

Advertising

  7

B2B Marketing

 10

Branding

 13

Consumer Behaviour

 27

Digital Marketing

 28

Event Management

Logistics, Operations and Supply Chain Management

207

Logistics

209

Operations Management

228

Procurement

233

 36

Supply Chain Management

239

Key Account Management

 37

Transport

258

Luxury Marketing

 41

Market Research

 45

Marketing Communications

 49

Employability, Careers and Entrepreneurship

261

Marketing Fundamentals

 53

Business Skills

263

Marketing Science

 54

Employability

273

Marketing Strategy

 60

Entrepreneurship

289

Product Design

 62

Public Relations

 63

Full Title Index

300

Retail Studies

 71

Sales

 73

Business, Risk and Information Management

 75

Accounting & Finance

 77

Banking

 85

Business & Management Skills

 91

Corporate Governance & Corporate Social Responsibility

100

Information & Data Management

104

International Business

105

Leadership

108

Professional Services

113

Risk Management

115

Strategy

121

HR, Organizational Development and Coaching

122

Change Management

124

Coaching

132

Employee Engagement

136

Employment Law / Relations

138

Human Resources Management

146

International Human Resources Management

165

Leadership

169

Learning and Development

174

Organizations

186

Performance Management

195

Project Management

200

Reward Management

201

Talent Management

204


New Books by Month April 2017

February 2018

Myths of PR

9780749479596

May 2017 Confident Coding

9780749479633

June 2017 Content – The Atomic Particle of Marketing

9780749479756

July 2017

9780749479930

Defence Logistics

9780749478032

E-Business and Supply Chain Integration

9780749478452

The Business Plan Workbook

9780749481797

March 2018 Video Marketing Strategy

9780749481599

Contract Management

9780749480646

User Research

9780749481049

Continuing Professional Development

9781843981664

The Business Model Handbook

9780749481872

Business Ethics in Practice

9781843982722

50 Top Tools for Coaching

9780749482329

Developing Leadership and Management Skills

9781843984559

50 Top Tools for Employee Wellbeing

9780749482183

Designing and Developing Digital and Blended Learning Solution Enhancing Participant Engagement in the Learning Process Developing and Using Consultancy Skills

9781843984221

The Inventory Toolkit

9780749482121

9781843984238

Successful Integrated Planning for the Supply Chain April 2018

9780749477684

Facilitating Collective and Social Learning

9781843984542

Questionnaire Design

9780749481971

Understanding Organisation Development

9781843984306

Marketing Analytics

9780749482169

Sales and Marketing Channels

9780749482145

Cyber Risk Management

9780749482596

Data-Driven HR

9780749482466

Strategic Supply Chain Management

9780749478841

Warehousing and Transportation Logistics

9780749482206

9781843984269

August 2017 Innovative B2B Marketing

9780749480806

Malcolm McDonald on Key Account Management Forensic Accounting and Finance

9780749480776

Financial Management for Technology Start-ups

9780749481346

Professional Services Leadership Handbook

9780749477349

The Leadership Skills Handbook

9780749480332

Starting a Successful Business

9780749480868

Starting a Business From Home

9780749480844

How to Prepare a Business Plan

9780749481100

9780749479992

September 2017 Accounting for Non-Accountants

9780749480769

The Leader’s Guide to Lateral Thinking Skills

9780749481025

October 2017 Native Advertising

9780749481162

The Escape Industry

9780749473501

Branding Inside Out

9780749478902

Myths of Management

9780749480233

Myths of Leadership

9780749480745

Myths of Work

9780749481285

Marketing and Logistics Led Organizations

9780749478735

November 2017 Design Management

9780749478414

Investment and Portfolio Management

9780749480059

International Human Resource Management

9780749480981

Warehouse Management

9780749479770

Supply Chain Risk Management

9780749480158

December 2017 B2B Marketing Strategy

9780749481063

Digital Branding

9780749481698

Experiential Marketing

9780749480967

Accounting and Finance for Managers

9780749481148

Armstrong’s Handbook of Performance Management Port Management

9780749481209 9780749474324

January 2018

4

Predictive Analytics for Marketers

Managing the Retail Supply Chain

9780749480622

Confident Data Skills

9780749481544

Confident Digital Content

9780749480943

Confident Web Design

9780749481001

www.koganpage.com

May 2018 Anti-Money Laundering

9780749481896

Humanitarian Logistics

9780749481445

Container Logistics

9780749481247

Supply Chain Strategy and Financial Metrics

9780749482572

The Lean Supply Chain

9780749482060

The A-Z of Careers and Jobs

9780749482305

June 2018 B2B Customer Experience

9780749481858

The Management of Luxury

9780749481827

Relationship Management in Banking

9780749482831

Responsible Business

9780749480608

The Agile Organization

9780749482657

Packaging Logistics

9780749481704

Decarbonising Logistics

9780749480479

Leading Procurement Strategy

9780749481643

Supplier Relationship Management

9780749480134

July 2018 The Definitive Guide to Strategic Content Marketing Wellbeing at Work

9780749482220

Ultimate Job Search

9780749481407

Ultimate Interview

9780749481384

Ultimate Aptitude Tests

9780749482084

Ultimate Psychometric Tests

9780749481636

Superconductors

9780749482367

9780749480684

August 2018 Implementing Key Account Management

9780749482756

Retail and Digital Banking

9780749482718

Assessment Centre Success

9780749483135

September 2018 Commercial Lending

9780749482770

Culture, Conduct and Ethics in Banking

9780749482909

Marine Insurance

9780749482633

Global Liner Shipping

9780749481087


Marketing & Public Relations Innovation and Best Practice in Advertising B2B Marketing Branding Consumer Behaviour CRM Digital Marketing Key Account Management Luxury Marketing Market Research Marketing Communications Marketing Fundamentals Marketing Science Marketing Strategy Public Relations Retail Studies Sales

www.koganpage.com

5


Featured Titles NEW BOOK

Disruptive Selling

A New Strategic Approach to Sales, Marketing and Customer Service Patrick Maes Apr 2018 9780749482343 Page 5

NEW BOOK

Video Marketing Strategy

Harness the Power of Online Video to Drive Brand Growth Jon Mowat Mar 2018 9780749481599 Page 6

Content

The Atomic Particle of Marketing Rebecca Lieb Jun 2017 9780749479756 Page 13

NEW BOOK

Participation Marketing

Unleashing Employees to Participate and Become Brand Storytellers

In Your Creative Element The Formula for Creative Success in Business Claire Bridges Dec 2016 9780749477325 Page 27

6

Discover our full portfolio of books at www.koganpage.com

Michael Brito Mar 2018 9780749482107 Page 17


<< Takes a cross-disciplinary

approach, explores the diverse ways advertising is interpreted by psychologists, sociologists, economists, historians, marketers, and media researchers – giving students the skills to respond sensitively to any advertising challenge.

<< Brings big picture, theoretical

concepts down to earth, linking them to everyday practice with thought-provoking examples from international companies.

<< Builds awareness of the different

ways advertising is interpreted across industries, enabling students to develop careers aligned with their abilities and interests, both client and agency side.

<< Includes in-depth coverage of

Essentials of Advertising Edition 1

Date: Price:

03/02/2017 £29.99

ISBN Paperback: e-book:

9780749478391 9780749478407

Pages: Format (mm): Subject:

216 234x156 Advertising

ethics, encouraging students to think critically about advertising in different contexts, and respond appropriately when faced with ethically subjective situations throughout their careers.

Description

Author Information

Essentials of Advertising is designed to help students navigate their way through the field of advertising. As a subject, advertising affects us all – it surrounds us every day. Yet there is a great deal of variety in the way advertising is interpreted, and practitioners and academics from different backgrounds and disciplines study advertising in vastly different ways. For example, psychologists try to understand what happens to our brains when we see adverts, while economists try to understand whether money spent on advertising is worth it. Essentials of Advertising will introduce readers to the key concepts of advertising as they have been developed not only by psychologists and economists, but also by sociologists, historians, marketers and media researchers – not to mention advertising practitioners themselves. 

Dr Robert Cluley is assistant professor at Nottingham University Business School. He has contributed to a range of texts on branding and advertising, along with a plethora of research publications and edited collections. He teaches in the fields of branding, advertising and marketing communications.

Meticulously researched, Essentials of Advertising will allow readers to understand not just what different research traditions say about advertising, but why they say it. This will help students develop key analytic skills, and to critically evaluate and exploit the existing research into advertising, based on a greater understanding of where it comes from. This allows them to develop greater perception and awareness professionally, and acts as a springboard for students to jump into the wider area of advertising studies and develop their careers according to their own interests. Also includes online resources including PowerPoint lecture slides, separate lecture slides containing full colour figures and tables from the text, further reading consisting of inspiring books and research articles, activity sheets for students, lists of case study research ideas (for students and/or lecturers), group activities for each chapter, lists of self-test questions for each chapter, and web links to Industry Award training resources, Industry body training resources, documentaries, movies, shows and talks.

Table of Contents 1

The Essentials of Advertising: What are advertisements, and why should we study them? 2 Big questions: Advertising, communication, rhetoric and persuasion 3 Art or science: What do legendary advertisers think about advertising? 4 Work, agencies and contexts: Organizational perspectives on advertising 5 Information and value: The economics of advertising 6 The hierarchy of effects: The psychology of advertising

7

The society of the spectacle: The sociology of advertising 8 The magic system: Cultural studies of advertising 9 The medium is the message: Media studies and advertising 10 The distorted mirror: Advertising and ethics 11 Where next? The new essentials of advertising

Marketing and PR

7


Native Advertising

This book

The Essential Guide

<< Authored by the Chief Digital

Edition 1 Date: Price:

Officer of Adyoulike, the UK’s foremost native advertising agency. In 2015 Dale was named one of the British Interactive Media Association’s (BIMA) Hot 100 in recognition for championing native advertising in the UK

03/10/2017 £19.99

ISBN Paperback: e-book:

9780749481162 9780749481179

Pages: Format (mm): Subject:

240 234x156 Advertising

<< Offers practical advice and

straightforward explanations on key topics marketers need to consider when embracing native advertising, including content marketing, ad-blocking, social media and publisher monetization

<< Features real world examples,

interviews, and case studies from big brands down to solo enterprises. Case studies include eBay, Netflix, Barclays, Coca-cola, BMW, The Guardian, BuzzFeed, New York Times and more

Author Information

Description

Dale Lovell is Chief Digital Officer at Adyoulike, the UK’s first and leading native advertising agency, with over $20M global turnover per year, operating across Europe, Latin America, Australiasia, Middle East, Asia and North America. Dale sits on the UK IAB (Internet Advertising Bureau)’s Native and Content Council, and is soon to join the IAB US. Through this, he leads a number of working groups on specific niche topics. In 2015, Dale was named by the British Interactive Media Association as one of the Hot 100 in recognition for championing native advertising in the UK.

Native advertising, which most online shoppers have experienced in the form of targeted social media ads or promoted tweets, is one of the biggest digital marketing trends of recent years. It sits at the heart of all major developments in marketing and advertising today: content marketing, ad-blocking, social media, mobile marketing, publisher monetization, experiential marketing and much more. Native Advertising provides a comprehensive guide to this exhilarating, multi-billion dollar marketing channel, written by one of the industry’s foremost authorities. Highly international in its scope, Native Advertising is packed full of real-life examples and interviews from big brands down to solo enterprises. It goes beyond the best-known forms of native advertising, such as Facebook sponsored posts, promoted tweets, and BuzzFeed branded articles, to provide insight into the underpinning factors of audience, budget, content, and success measurement. Featuring fascinating case studies from Netflix, e-Bay, Barclays, The New York Times and more, this book is essential reading for anyone looking to understand and execute native advertising.

Table of Contents 1 2 3

Introduction How Did We Get Here? Why Native Advertising Really Matters: It’s Not Another Buzzword 4 Who Can Benefit From Native Advertising? 5 Getting Started With Native Advertising – What You Need to Know 6 The Different Types of Native Advertising – Which is Right for You? 7 Creating Native Advertising – What You Need to Know 8 Is It Working? 9 Questions to Ask about Native Advertising 10 The Future

8

Marketing and PR


This book

<< Demonstrates how to write

enjoyable, compelling copy which stands out in today’s cluttered marketplace

Persuasive Copywriting Using Psychology to Engage, Influence and Sell

<< Demystifies advanced copywriting

skills with examples, exercises and tips

Edition 1

<< Helps copywriters hone their skills with easy-to-use tools included in the book

Date: Price:

03/03/2015 £19.99

ISBN Paperback: e-book:

9780749473990 9780749474003

Pages: Format (mm): Subject:

256 234x156 Advertising

Description

Author Information

“We ordered coffee, cut open a human brain and discovered the secret of persuasive copywriting.”

Andy Maslen is Managing Director of Sunfish, a writing agency specialising in corporate communications and digital content. A lifetime Fellow of the Institute of Direct Marketing, Andy has worked with The NHS, The Prudential, The Economist, Emap, the DTI, BBC Worldwide, Hamleys, The London Stock Exchange, The British Standards Institution, the RSPB, Time Out, The New York Times Company and PricewaterhouseCoopers. He writes and speaks regularly on copywriting and is a bestselling author.

A chance encounter with a neuroscientist showed Andy Maslen that his belief in the power of emotion was founded on hard science. Over coffee, the two discussed brain anatomy and the reason-defying power of human emotions. Andy’s subsequent research led him to realise that how people think and feel haven’t changed since the time of cavemen. We make decisions on emotional grounds and rationalise them later. Persuasive Copywriting takes you deep inside customers’ brains. You’ll learn the relationship between selling and storytelling. And the market-tested techniques that get people to engage with, and be persuaded by, your copy. Use it to modify people’s behaviour by tapping into their deepest psychological drives. Gain copywriting confidence This course-in-a-book explains the neuroscience behind our appetite for stories. It demystifies advanced copywriting skills with examples, exercises and tips. And it helps you hone your skills with easy-to-use tools included in the book, and online... 13 real-world case studies; 25 psychological copywriting techniques; 75 practical exercises; 125 words and phrases that trigger emotions; 125-question copywriting quiz All help you improve your copywriting skills and perfect the emotion-driven sale. Now you can employ this powerful psychological approach. This enjoyable book helps you find the right tone of voice, avoid common copywriting traps and tap into customers’ deepest drives. You’ll find yourself writing enjoyable, compelling copy that stands out in today’s cluttered marketplace. Andy has achieved amazing results for his clients by focusing on stories and their deep connection to customers’ needs and wants. With this book by your side, you can too.

Table of Contents 1

Introduction: how to write like an angel and sell like a demon 2 Emotion matters more than reason: tapping into your customer’s deepest drives 2.1 Harnessing the power of emotional copywriting to persuade your prospects 2.2 Three big ideas you should use before benefits 2.3 A powerful process for developing customer empathy 2.4 Flattery will get you everywhere 2.5 The Ancient Greek secret of emotionally engaging copy

2.6 Copywriting and connecting on social media 2.7 Yes! I want your tips on the best way to ask for the order 3 The pleasure principle: making your writing more enjoyable and compelling 3.1 Five pleasure-inducing techniques for copywriters 3.2 How to engage your imagination and free your creativity 3.3 Finding your voice (and that of others) 3.4 The definitive way to judge when grammar matters in copywriting 3.5 An age-old method of injecting life into your sales pitch

Marketing and PR

9


Innovative B2B Marketing

This book

<< Authored by one of the Chartered

Institute of Marketing’s leading professional trainers, who has designed and currently directs a multitude of relevant professional courses

New Models, Processes and Theory Edition 1

<< Demonstrates how the modern

Date: Price:

03/08/2017 £19.99

ISBN Paperback: e-book:

9780749480806 9780749480813

Pages: Format (mm): Subject:

256 234x156 B2B Marketing

B2B marketing landscape has changed, with traditional marketing methods (such as funnels and swim lane advertising) being replaced by innovative new models and processes (such as lead nurturing and modern events marketing)

<< Cuts through the inundation of

noise surrounding B2B marketing to provide clear, comprehensive coverage of all of the most recent developments, including social marketing, B2B-specific brand building, channel strategy, and much more

Author Information

Description

Simon Hall has over 20 years’ experience in B2B marketing within EMEA and UK roles. He was the UK Chief Marketing Officer at Dell between 2010 and 2016, and has held numerous senior roles at Microsoft, Acer and Toshiba. During his time at Acer, Simon was responsible for building a business from the ground up, topping over £250 million in just 4 years. He is an active member of several marketing associations including DMA & IDM B2B Council, CMO Council, European CMO Council, and CIM. He is a familiar face at marketing conferences in Europe, delivering keynotes and presentations.

Innovative B2B Marketing is a clear, practical guide that demystifies modern aspects of B2B marketing, including marketing models, processes and thought leadership pieces. New customer buying habits, the digital era and the new industry landscape (influenced by the application economy) have all had a great impact, with marketing professionals consequently facing a shift away from traditional practices. The focus of Innovative B2B Marketing is to cut through the noise and make sense of the new models, methods and processes that have recently emerged in the B2B marketing sphere. Authored by one of the Chartered Institute of Marketing’s leading trainers, Innovative B2B Marketing brings together a wealth of insight and information sourced from the author’s own first-hand experience. Featuring real-life examples from diverse sectors, plus topical discussion points and problems from key B2B marketing forums and associations, marketers will find new approaches, models and solutions to help deal with any B2B marketing challenge.

Table of Contents 1 2 2.1 2.2 3 3.1 3.2 3.3

Introduction to Innovative B2B Marketing Developing Your Marketing Strategy The New Marketing Mix B2B Strategy & Planning Improve B2B Customer Centric Marketing B2B Buyers and Their Changing Behaviours Acquisition Marketing Customer Loyalty & Retention – the Stickiness Factor 3.4 Understanding C-suite Marketing 3.5 B2B Product & Solutions Marketing 3.6 B2B Influencer Marketing 4 ‘Transform’ Through Content and Digital Marketing 4.1 B2B Digital and Content Marketing Landscape 4.2 B2B Digital Marketing Channels 4.3 B2B Digital Marketing Planning and Strategy 4.4 B2B Content Marketing 4.5 B2B Social Marketing 4.6 B2B Brand Building 5 ‘Collaborate’ with Channel Partners 5.1 The Channel Landscape

10

Marketing and PR

5.2 Marketing to Channel Partners and Enabling Them 5.3 How to Market Through Channel Partners 5.4 Channel Strategy, Planning and Control 6 Optimizing Marketing Performance and Execution 6.1 Sales and Marketing Alignment 6.2 Account Based Marketing 6.3 Lead Generation and Nurturing 6.4 Modern Events Marketing 6.5 Marketing Performance Management


This book

<< Help marketers refocus on the

OUTCOME of their marketing, rather than the TACTICS they use in marketing, which is the only way to win ongoing customer engagement

<< Confronts and refutes widely

accepted – but misguided – beliefs that are currently dominating the B2B marketing realm, and uses case studies and evidence to prove that they are misleading

<< Presents a completely original

model – the 3D Marketing Strategy – to shift focus from continually changing technologies and channels to lasting customer engagement and measurable results

B2B Marketing Strategy Differentiate, Develop and Deliver Lasting Customer Engagement Edition 1

Date: Price:

03/12/2017 £19.99

ISBN Paperback: e-book:

9780749481063 9780749481070

Pages: Format (mm): Subject:

240 234x156 B2B Marketing

Description

Author Information

B2B marketing is facing a multitude of challenges. Fast moving digital trends and a wealth of new technologies and channels mean that customers have the ability to seize control of the buying process more completely than ever before. Marketers are often left scrambling to keep up, but B2B Marketing Strategy shows readers how to remain ahead of the curve and focus on what truly matters – namely, the customer – in order to achieve true competitive advantage in today’s multi-channelled marketing realm.

Heidi Taylor is a consultant, speaker and prolific blogger with a significant global following. Her expertise is in strategy, and creating powerful multi-channel, multi-format marketing campaigns. In 2015 Heidi was named a top 25 UK B2B Marketing Influencer by Onalytica. She has won 2 awards at the Chartered Institute of Marketing’s prestigious annual Marketing Excellence Awards, including the coveted overall Marketer of the Year. She contributes to industry journals including Marketing Week, B2B Marketing magazine and the PSMG magazine. She regularly speaks at marketing conferences in the UK and internationally.

Written by a globally recognised industry expert, B2B Marketing Strategy provides a new and game-changing model to help marketers hone their focus and employ effective strategies to win lasting customer engagement. Filled with real-world case studies and practical insights, B2B Marketing Strategy takes the unique approach of confronting and refuting several fallacies that are dominating the current state of B2B marketing, including the belief that the digital revolution has fundamentally changed the very core of marketing. By fostering an understanding of what truly drives and grows a business, B2B Marketing Strategy will help companies become truly memorable in the hearts and minds of their customers.

Table of Contents 1 2

Introduction Think Different – Fallacy #1; Marketing Has Forever and Fundamentally Changed 2.1 Change Happens – The Seismic Shift in Our B2B Marketing Environment 2.2 All That Glitters – B2B Marketing’s Obsession With the Latest Tools and Tactics 2.3 5 Essential Steps to Think Different 3 Do Different – Fallacy #2; The Marketing Plan is The Marketing Strategy 3.1 Getting Back to Basics – Brand, Strategy, Customers and Measurement 3.2 An Introduction to 3D Marketing – Differentiate, Develop and Deliver 3.3 5 Essential Steps to Do Different 4 Be Different – Fallacy #3; The Purpose of Marketing is Lead Generation 4.1 What is the Purpose of Marketing? 4.2 7 rules of Engagement For The Social Era 4.3 Taking a Big Idea to Market – 5 Lessons 4.4 5 Essential Steps to Be Different 5 Conclusion 5.1 Tactics are For The Moment, Ideas are Forever

Marketing and PR

11


B2B Customer Experience

This book

<< Shows readers how to deliver

against the six pillars of customer experience – commitment, fulfilment, seamlessness, responsiveness, proactivity, and evolution

A Practical Guide to Delivering Exceptional CX Edition 1

<< Features case studies and examples

from leading companies such as Zappos, Nordstrom and John Lewis

Date: Price:

03/06/2018 £19.99

ISBN Paperback: e-book:

9780749481858 9780749481865

Pages: Format (mm): Subject:

240 234x156 B2B Marketing

<< Specifically written for B2B

companies, with bespoke journey plans and strategies for the B2B realm

Author Information

Description

Paul Hague is a founder of B2B International. With 35 years of experience running market research agencies, his clients include some of the largest corporations in Europe and the United States. He has written, co-authored and contributed to numerous publications on market research tools and techniques.

B2B Customer Experience shows readers how to deliver the very best customer experience (often referred to as CX), within the business-to-business realm. Marketers have long known that emotions are important in driving our experiences, and the subject is now high on the agenda of B2B companies who want to deliver a ‘wow’ to their customers. Achieving this ‘wow’ factor helps organisations distinguish themselves from their competition, while simultaneously winning new business and retaining existing clients. B2B Customer Experience is the essential handbook that guides the reader though the process of creating an exceptional customer experience.

Nick Hague is also a founder of B2B International. Over the last two decades, Hague has made his name as an expert in customer experience market research. He is chairman of B2B International and has co-authored the bestselling book on market research – Market Research In Practice.

Intensely practical in its approach, B2B Customer Experience is divided into five parts to walk readers through the journey of planning, mapping, structuring, implementing and controlling an effective customer experience, all bespoke for the B2B environment. Clearly argued and supported by real-world examples, this text will help readers understand critical features including the difference between customer experience, loyalty and inertia; how to use journey maps to establish strengths and weaknesses in an organisation, and how to ensure that sales teams are engaged in the customer experience programme. Discussing some of the best known examples of consumer-focused customer experiences from companies such as Zappos, Nordstrom and John Lewis, B2B Customer Experience is the must-have text for any marketing professional working within a B2B environment.

Table of Contents 1

Customer Experience in Business to Business Markets 2 Exploring Customer Experience, Loyalty & Inertia 3 Understanding Customer Experience and Profitability 4 The Six Key Pillars of Customer Experience 5 Essential Metrics for Measuring Customer Experience 6 How to Benchmark Customer Experience 7 What are the Key Drivers of Customer Experience? 8 Customer Journey Mapping and How to Apply It 9 Delivering Customer Experience: The Six Pillars 10 How to Ensure Buy In at All Levels of Customer Experience 11 Working with the Sales and Marketing Teams to Streamline Customer Experience

12

Marketing and PR

12 How to Create an Internal Service Culture 13 The Role of Brands in Creating a Better Customer Experience 14 The Role of Products in Creating Better Customer Experiences 15 Price and its Role in Creating Better Customer Experiences 16 Place and its Role in Creating Better Customer Experiences 17 Promotion and its Role in Creating Better Customer Experiences 18 The Role of People in Creating a Better Customer Experience 19 Measuring Performance of Customer Experience Initiatives


This book

<< Reveals and explains the latest branding techniques used by companies worldwide

<< Includes expert advice on best

practice for adding culture and content into brands

<< Enables students and practitioners

to stay up to date with targeting, adding recent research and market knowledge to the discipline

The New Strategic Brand Management Advanced Insights and Strategic Thinking Edition 5

Date: Price:

03/01/2012 £39.99

ISBN Paperback: e-book:

9780749465155 9780749465162

Pages: Format (mm): Subject:

512 246x189 Branding

Description

Author Information

Adopted internationally by business schools and MBA programmes, The New Strategic Brand Management is simply the reference source for senior strategists, positioning professionals and postgraduate students. Over the years it has not only established a reputation as one of the leading works on brand strategy, but also has become synonymous with the topic itself. Using an array of international case studies, Jean-Noël Kapferer covers all the leading issues faced by the brand strategist today. With both gravitas and intelligent insight, the book reveals new thinking on topics such as putting culture and content into brands, the impact of private labels and the comeback of local brands.

Jean-Noël Kapferer is one of the world’s foremost thought leaders on luxury and its brands. An active researcher, he is an HEC Paris graduate and holds a PhD from Northwestern University’s Kellogg Business School. Kapferer is author of Kapferer on Luxury and co-author of The Luxury Strategy (both published by Kogan Page) and has written many seminal articles. He is a sought after speaker, leading seminars on luxury all around the world at institutions including HEC Paris, Tsing Hua University Beijing, Seoul Luxury Business Institute and LBI Shanghai. He is also advisor to the president of Inseec Business School (Paris).

This updated fifth edition of The New Strategic Brand Management builds on its impressive reputation by including new information to enable students and practitioners to stay up to date with targeting, adding recent research and market knowledge to the discipline. With dedicated sections for specific types of brands (luxury, corporate and retail), international examples and case studies from companies such as Audi, Nivea, Toyota and Absolut Vodka, plus models and frameworks such as the Brand Identity Prism, it remains at the forefront of strategic brand thinking.

Table of Contents 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15

Introduction: Building the brand when the clients are empowered Why is branding so strategic? Brand equity in question Strategic implications of branding Brand and business models Brand diversity: how specific are different sectors? Managing retail brands The challenges of modern markets The new brand management Brand identity and positioning Creating and sustaining brand equity Launching the brand Growing the brand Sustaining a brand long term Brand and products: identity and change Growth through brand extensions Brand architecture Multi-brand portfolios

16 Handling name changes and brand transfers 17 Brand turnaround and rejuvenation 18 Managing global brands Brand valuation 19 Financial valuation and accounting for brands

Marketing and PR

13


Digital Branding

This book

<< Frames a process to plan, analyse,

A Complete Step-by-Step Guide to Strategy, Tactics, Tools and Measurement Edition 2

optimize and measure tangible results on brand campaigns

<< Includes a practical checklist for the digital branding process and tools to implement it

<< New to this edition: advances in

Date: Price:

03/12/2017 ÂŁ19.99

ISBN Paperback: e-book:

9780749481698 9780749481681

Pages: Format (mm): Subject:

232 234x156 Branding

mobile marketing, augmented/ virtual reality, mobile payments and a full overhaul of industry tools, models and case studies

Author Information

Description

Daniel Rowles has more than 20 years of digital marketing experience on both client and agency sides. He is a Course Director for the CIM, lecturer at Imperial College London and Cranfield School of Management and lead judge of the CIM Marketing Excellence awards. Rowles hosts the Digital Marketing Podcast, a global top-ten business podcast on iTunes. Through his digital marketing company TargetInternet.com, he supports clients such as the BBC, Vodafone, Sony, Oracle and Tesco.

Digital Branding, second edition gives step-by-step, practical guidance on how to build a brand online and quantify it through tangible results. This succinct handbook draws together each of the core marketing avenues like content marketing, social media, search engine optimization and web analytics, to deliver a robust framework for brand planning, identity, channel selection and measuring the effectiveness of campaigns. The second edition of Digital Branding contains a complete overhaul of tools and techniques for straightforward application, plus new high profile case studies including Accenture, Tesco and Imperial College London. Important updates are made on how to tackle advancements in mobile marketing, mobile payments as well as augmented and virtual reality. The book includes an insightful toolkit of free and paid tools to measure digital branding across the multiple channels and purposes. Updates on social guidelines and policy also accompany a valuable checklist, outlining the digital branding process from start to finish. Written by a highly respected CIM professional, marketers and brand strategists will gain a highly efficient handbook to enhance their online brand identity.

Table of Contents 1 Digital Branding in Perspective 1.1 What Digital Branding Really Means 1.2 Focusing on Value 1.3 Considering the User Journey 1.4 Objectives and Authenticity 2 The Digital Toolkit 2.1 Social Media 2.2 Search 2.3 Mobile 2.4 Online Advertising 2.5 E-mail Marketing 2.6 CRM and Marketing Automation 2.7 From Integration to Transmedia Campaigns 3 Digital Brand Strategy and Measurement 3.1 Measuring Digital Branding 3.2 Primaries and Indicators 3.3 The Role of Analytics 3.4 Bridging the Gaps 3.5 The Importance of Asking Questions

14

Marketing and PR


This book

Audio Branding

<< Explains why audio branding

Using Sound to Build Your Brand

<< Explores immediate and upcoming

Edition 1

<< Provides practical, step-by-step

Date: Price:

03/03/2017 £19.99

ISBN Paperback: e-book:

9780749478575 9780749478582

Pages: Format (mm): Subject:

224 234x156 Branding

is a crucial element of brand development.

topics such as audio-enabled devices, digital touch points, and continuous partial attention.

instructions to enable readers to build an audio language to enhance their brand.

Description

Author Information

Audio Branding: Using Sound to Build your Brand will offer the reader a thorough overview of the world of audio branding – what it is, why it’s important, and how it can be used to enhance a brand. Containing fascinating insights into this burgeoning field of marketing, this text is extremely practical and underpinned by research supported by clearly explained realworld examples.

Laurence Minsky is an award winning copywriter and marketer, with extensive professional experience working on a range of marketing campaigns. He also has an extensive academic background, and teaches in communications, media and marketing.

Written by authors who have contributed directly to the development of the field, the text will contain detailed case studies on companies such as Peugeot (a rule-breaking audio brand), Atlanta Convention and Tourism Body (an emerging audio brand), and Michelin (a global audio brand). Covering relevant issues such as the dominance of audio-enabled devices and the phenomenon of continuous partial attention, Audio Branding will show readers how audio branding extends to everything from the sounds made by an app, to music played instore, to the noise a key makes when inserted into an ignition. Combined, all such elements allow a compelling audio language to develop and enhance brand identity.

Table of Contents 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

Colleen Fahey is a seasoned creative executive with deep expertise in branding and the multiple marketing touch points. She is the US Managing Director of Sixieme Son, the world’s leading audio branding and sound design agency. Throughout her career, Colleen has worked for major marketing organizations on some of the leading brands in the US, Europe, Latin America and Asia.

What is audio branding – and why should I care Branding in the digital age Meet audio branding’s parent: sensory branding Welcome to the world of audio branding Process: Developing the (audio) brand Finding direction for your audio brand The creative process Research and testing How to launch an audio brand Keep your audio style guide handy Ongoing and updating Start Now

Marketing and PR

15


The Escape Industry

This book

<< Reveals the branding secrets of

travel’s legendary players and new digital innovators

How Iconic and Innovative Brands Built the Travel Business Edition 1

<< Explains how online booking,

user-generated review sites, CRM, ebooks and other digital developments have transformed the industry

Date: Price:

03/10/2017 £19.99

ISBN Paperback: e-book:

9780749473501 9780749473518

Pages: Format (mm): Subject:

272 234x156 Branding

<< Provides lessons which can be applied across other evolving industries

Author Information

Description

Mark Tungate is a British journalist based in Paris. He is the author of several books, including Fashion Brands and Adland. His articles have appeared in publications including Campaign, Advertising Age, The Financial Times and The Daily Telegraph. He has a monthly column in the French marketing journal Stratégies and is a regular contributor to the ad industry intelligence site AdForum.

Travel as a concept is universally attractive and the opportunities for fun, engaging branding and marketing in this sector are arguably limitless. Glamour and appeal aside, travel is a hugely competitive, multi-million pound industry and marketers of all sectors can learn important lessons from it. Catering for mass consumer travel, from business travel, adventure travel and specialist and niche interests galore, the providers of escape have been impacted as much by technology as they have by the changing habits and desires of travellers themselves. The Escape Industry presents an expert view of travel marketing and branding, focusing particularly on how travel has been utterly transformed for both consumers and providers since the beginning of the 21st century. Mark Tungate focuses on some of the travel industry’s most famous brands and shares how all marketers can learn from the industry’s rich experience of digital transition.

Tungate is also editorial director of the Epica Awards, where journalists who are specialists in their field celebrate excellence in design, advertising, PR and branded content. He lectures on advertising and branding at universities and conferences globally.

Tungate traces the evolution of this fascinating industry, from nineteenth century trailblazers such as Thomas Cook and The Ritz, to today’s innovations such as TripAdvisor, Couchsurfing and Airbnb, and explores the branding secrets that have enabled them to survive. A lively read full of incidents, anecdotes, unexpected encounters and a ground-breaking report from the final frontier and space tourism, The Escape Industry is at the cutting edge of this attractive sector, examining some of the biggest names in the industry. It will take travel and tourism students, as well as marketing and branding practitioners, on a journey to the heart of a rapidly changing business.

Table of Contents 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17

16

Marketing and PR

Introduction Grand Tourists The Enterprising Mr Cook Legendary Havens: The Rise of the Grand Hotel From Rags to Ritz The Return of the Orient Express The Battle for High Seas The Airline Pioneers Pan Am: From Seaplanes to the Jet Age Business or Pleasure? How Boutique Became Chic Rivals in the Sky Flying for Less Lastminute and Other Dot Coms Mobile and Social Explorers Special Agents The World Between Two Covers

18 19 20 21

Rise of the ‘Poshtel’ Airbnb and the Sharing Economy The Only Way is Ethics The Final Frontier


This book

<< Inspires the reader to improve

and encourage their own internal branding strategies and techniques for external brand success, through the use of unique models and tools

<< Provides insight into the principles of ‘Living the Brand’ for readers to use and apply within their own organization

<< Grounded in relevant primary

and secondary research, which is described in an accessible and engaging way

Branding Inside Out Internal Branding in Theory and Practice Edition 1

Date: Price:

03/10/2017 £19.99

ISBN Paperback: e-book:

9780749478902 9780749478919

Pages: Format (mm): Subject:

240 234x156 Branding

Description

Author Information

A multi-authored book combining new concepts derived from academic research over the last 10 years, with case studies to reflect the latest approaches to brand building. Branding Inside Out builds on the core principles explored in the author’s previously successful publication, Living the Brand, and demonstrates how a company’s workforce is its most valuable asset. After all; employees are the ones who are interacting with consumers, and therefore have a critical role in maintaining and reflecting a corporate brand.

Nicholas Ind is a writer and brand consultant based in Scandinavia. He is the author of a number of business books including Living the Brand, The Corporate Image, Great Advertising Campaigns, Branding Governance and The Corporate Brand.

This text covers all aspects of the ‘Living the Brand’ concept and takes it to new levels, with particular emphasis on the active involvement of employees, consumers and other stakeholders in brand development. This includes online communities and co-creation events, having more open approaches to employee learning and development, and a more organic philosophy of branding, as well as brand citizenship behaviour and employee based brand equality. With contributions from some of the leading brand builders in the world today, and cases from a range of fascinating corporations, Branding Inside Out provides an opportunity for readers to update their thinking and focus on business efforts.

Table of Contents 1 Introduction, by Nicholas Ind 2 New Thinking 2.1 How Brand Citizenship Leads to Better Customer Relations, by Christoph Burmann 2.2 Employee Based Brand Equity 2.3 An Organization- Wide Approach to Brand Building, by Majken Schultz and Mary Jo Hatch 2.4 Living Brands, by Rik Riezebos 2.5 The Narratives of Brands, by Oriol Iglesias and Eduard Bonet 3 New Practice 3.1 Hakkasan, by Nicholas Ind 3.2 DNV GL, by Mark Irvine 3.3 Adidas, by Christian Kuhna 3.4 VSO, by Hannah Gilman 3.5 Patagonia Revisited, by Vincent Stanley 3.6 Conclusion, by Nicholas Ind

Marketing and PR

17


How Cool Brands Stay Hot

This book

<< Includes an entirely new chapter

on Generation Z based on detailed new research

Branding to Generations Y and Z Edition 3 Date: Price:

<< Reveals what drives Generations Y and Z, and how these groups have been impacted by recent events like the recession along with the rise of social media and mobile marketing

03/04/2016 £19.99

ISBN Paperback: e-book:

9780749477172 9780749477219

Pages: Format (mm): Subject:

312 234x156 Branding

<< Features interviews with global

marketing executives of successful brands such as Converse, Heineken, DIESEL, Coca-Cola, MasterCard, eBay and the BBC

Author Information

Description

Joeri Van den Bergh is the co-founder of InSites Consulting, a global new generation research agency with offices in Belgium, the UK, France, Switzerland and the Netherlands. His clients include global customers such as Lego, Nokia, Sony, MTV Networks, Danone, Unilever and Coca-Cola.

How Cool Brands Stay Hot analyses Generations Y and Z, the most marketing savvy and advertising-critical generations yet. It reveals how millennials think, feel and behave, offering proven strategies to market to these groups more effectively and remain a relevant, appealing brand. Featuring interviews with global marketing executives of successful brands such as the BBC, Converse, Coca-Cola, eBay and MasterCard along with case studies from companies including H&M, MTV and Diesel, it guides readers in developing the right strategies to leave a lasting business impact. Previous editions of How Cool Brands Stay Hot have won the prestigious 2012 BerryAMA Book Prize for the best book in marketing and the 2011 Expert Marketing Magazine’s Marketing Book of the Year award. This fully revised 3rd edition of How Cool Brands Stay Hot goes beyond the discussion of Generation Y, expanding its reach with an entirely new chapter on Generation Z and a detailed analysis of the impact that issues such as recession, social media and mobile marketing have had on these consumers. Based on new figures, case studies and interviews, it provides a fresh take on what remain critical issues for anyone hoping to market to those who come after Generation X.

Table of Contents 1 2

Defining Generation Y Developing a brand model for the new consumer 3 What cool means to brands 4 The real thing: brand authenticity 5 We all want unique brands 6 Self-identification with the brand 7 Happiness: Gen Y’s adoration for branded emotions 8 Who’s Next? Generation Z

18

Marketing and PR


This book

<< Uses a wide range of examples

from major broadcasters around the world to expertly illustrate the marketing, advertising and design approaches that work best in television

<< Includes 50 interviews with

leading practitioners in global TV brands, providing the insider perspective on the challenges and opportunities of marketing television programmes

<< Includes examples drawn from

globally recognised channels and networks, Sky TV, BBC, Fox, ITV, NBCU, AMC, Comedy Central, HBO, UKTV etc. It also includes examples drawn from universally loved television shows including Doctor Who, Mad Men, Game of Thrones, American Horror Story, and major sporting events such as the Olympics and Paralympics.

The TV Brand Builders How to Win Audiences and Influence Viewers Edition 1

Date: Price:

03/04/2016 ÂŁ19.99

ISBN Paperback: e-book:

9780749476687 9780749476700

Pages: Format (mm): Subject:

328 234x156 Branding

Description

Author Information

The TV Brand Builders is the definitive account of how the biggest television networks, channels and programmes are created as brands, with rare privileged access to the marketing strategies and creative thinking behind culturally defining TV promos, digital and social media campaigns and design identities. Practical advice and strategic insight is blended with insightful stories from the ratings front line.

Andy Bryant is Managing Director of Red Bee, a London-based, internationally acclaimed creative agency. He is a recognised thought leader and frequent speaker at leading industry conferences globally on TV brand strategy, marketing and creativity. He is Honorary Professor in Film and Media at the University of Nottingham.

Written by two leading practitioners responsible for work as famous as the BBC One hippos, the creation of a TV channel called Dave and the re-launch of Doctor Who, and featuring interviews with 50 leading industry experts from 8 countries, from HBO to ESPN, from DreamWorks to CANAL+.

Table of Contents 1 1.1 2 2.1 2.2

The context Marketing in the world of television Building tv channel brands Whatâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s the point of a tv channel brand? Relaunching a tv channel: waving a flag on the horizon 2.3 The 800lb gorillas: building a big broadcast brand 2.4 The risk takers: building a TV channel brand with attitude 2.5 Idents: giving a channel a personality 3 Building and promoting tv programme brands 3.1 Marketing drama: glimpsing the future, unravelling the helix and speed dating 3.2 Timing and other secrets: a guide to promoting TV comedy 3.3 Selling the news 3.4 Promoting entertainment shows: scrubbing the shiny floors 3.5 Documentaries and reality: stories and storytellers 3.6 Faster, higher, stronger, longer: the hyperbolic world of TV sports promotion 3.7 Marketing to children: nailing jelly to a moving train

4 Building brands in the age of online tv 4.1 Storyworlds: blurring the lines between content and marketing 4.2 Social media: from viewers to fans to friends 4.3 The future of tv marketing: seismic change, timeless principles 4.4 TV channel design in a multiscreen world

Charlie Mawer is Executive Creative Director of Red Bee, responsible for their global creative output. A BAFTA nominee and former Promax UK chairman, Charlie has lectured around the world including for a number of universities, TEDx, the BFI and D&AD.

Marketing and PR

19


Brands with a Conscience

This book

<< Provides exemplary guidance on

building a conscientious brand strategy, underpinned with not just stories of success, but also caveats based on real world challenges and failures

How to Build a Successful and Responsible Brand Edition 1

<< Allows you to place responsible

Date: Price:

03/03/2016 £19.99

ISBN Paperback: e-book:

9780749475444 9780749475451

Pages: Format (mm): Subject:

240 234x156 Branding

practice at the heart of your organization with numerous inspirational case studies including Adidas, H&M, Tata Steel, Dilmah Tea and the John Lewis Partnership

<< Illustrates how to create and

sustain a culture that meets the needs of internal and external stakeholders

Author Information

Description

Nicholas Ind is an associate professor at Oslo School of Management and a partner in Equilibrium Consulting. Previously he ran Icon Medialab’s brand consultancy arm in Sweden. He is former director of the Design Business Association (UK), a member of the advisory board of Corporate Reputation Review and the editorial board of the Journal of Brand Management. He was a founder member of the Medinge Group, an international branding think tank.

The definitive expert guide to ethical brand practice from the prestigious Medinge Group, Brands with a Conscience dissects the philosophies underpinning sustainable brands to arrive at a set of eight clear guiding attributes which can be used as the foundation of a strategy for responsible growth. These attributes span the public persona of an organization, the actions to take when things go wrong, the effort invested in developing relationships, the promotion of core values and balancing measures of success across economic, human, social and environmental factors. They are then used as the criteria to assess twelve carefully selected case studies, which include Dilmah Tea, H&M, Dr. Hauschka, Merci and the John Lewis Partnership, amongst other leading international brands. Because the potential to have bad practice unmasked or to have successes amplified online is greater than ever, it pays to adopt a strategy that builds customer loyalty and trust.

Sandra Horlings is a branding and marketing consultant specializing in sustainable business development in a circular economy. Before she founded Wonderwings in 2008, she was a member of the BBDO board in the Netherlands and responsible for Proximity in Amsterdam. She is a member of Medinge and a founder of Wereldmarketeers, a Dutch knowledge and inspiration platform for marketers and entrepreneurs on sustainable innovation, endorsed by NIMA, the Dutch Marketing Association.

Brands with a Conscience inspires via examples of brands which not only exhibit a genuine desire to operate ethically, but also have seen impressive success in terms of engagement with consumers, reputation, and return on investment. The book includes a range of practical tools to bring together the main concepts in an easy-to-adopt framework for building a brand strategy based upon real world experience. If you are a brand manager or marketing professional seeking a conscientious approach to consumer engagement, then Brands with a Conscience will support you every step of the way.

Table of Contents 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

20

Marketing and PR

Introduction, by Ava Hakim Case Study 1: Dilmah Tea, by Jack Yan Case Study 2: John Lewis Partnership, by Erika Uffindell & Simon Paterson Case Study 3: Dr. Hauschka by Brigitte Stepputtis Case Study 4: Merci by Philippe Mihailovich Case Study 5: Tony’s Chocolonely by Sandra Horlings Case Study 6: Slow Food by Peter Brown Case Study 7: DNV GL by Nicholas Ind Case Study 8: Cosentino by Cristián Saracco Case Study 9: TATA Steel by Horo Sudhir Case Study 10: Placebranding by Nikolaj Stagis Case Study 11: Leadership by Enric Bernal


On Purpose

This book

<< Provides advice and techniques

for applying customer experience management principles to your company based on case studies and examples from leading brands, including Best Western, giffgaff, LEGO, IKEA and many more

<< Demonstrates clearly how to

achieve brand differentiation and customer loyalty with real world interviews and anecdotes

<< Shows how to ensure authenticity flows through each touchpoint of your brand

Delivering a Branded Customer Experience People Love Edition 1

Date: Price:

03/11/2015 £19.99

ISBN Paperback: e-book:

9780749471910 9780749471927

Pages: Format (mm): Subject:

288 234x156 Branding

Description

Author Information

Brands growing rapidly have a clear sense of purpose and the value they bring to their customers and employees. On Purpose is a practical guide to executing business purpose successfully by delivering a branded customer experience people love. It presents a framework for success based on being clear about your brand purpose and promise so you can achieve exceptional results through exceptional experiences. It provides the tools for brands to stand out by defining, designing and delivering distinctive, valuable customer experiences across multiple channels.

Shaun Smith is founder and partner of the customer experience consultancy Smith+Co, working with leading brands. A thought leader on customer experience strategy, he has featured many times on CNBC’s Ask the Expert. He is the co-author of Bold (Kogan Page), Uncommon Practice and Managing the Customer Experience.

Because purpose is what you do, not what you claim, On Purpose helps you act on your business purpose by showing you how to make your brand stand out. Each chapter illustrates how to succeed in a specific channel by presenting interviews with purpose-driven leaders such as Vernon Hill (Metro Bank), John Forrest (Premier Inn) and Gav Thompson (giffgaff) and case studies of companies including: - Altro

- IKEA

- Barclays Bank

- LEGO

- Best Western

- L iberty Global Business Services

- citizenM

- London 2012 Olympics - Lush - Nissan

- O2 - Timpson - Zappos

Andy Milligan is a leading consultant on brand culture. He has worked for almost 20 years advising major organizations on brand building, customer experience and internal culture. Andy appears regularly in the media. He is the author of Brand it Like Beckham and co-author of Bold (Kogan Page), Uncommon Practice and Don’t Mess with the Logo.

Table of Contents 1 1.1 1.2 2 2.1 2.2 2.3 3 3.1 3.2 3.3 3.4 3.5 3.6 3.7

Stand up Purpose driven Purposeful leadership Stand out Infectious communication Distinctive customer experience Continuous innovation Stand firm Cult-like culture Distinctive employee experience Experience measurement Never stand still On Purpose profile How to implement – successfully Putting the principles into practice

Marketing and PR

21


Paid Attention

This book

Innovative Advertising for a Digital World

<< Discusses the shifts due to rapid

Edition 1

<< Provides tools for working in

Date: Price:

changes in communication technologies and proposes new commercial advertising models

the new media environment, with handy tips and case studies throughout

03/04/2015 £19.99

ISBN Paperback: e-book:

9780749473600 9780749473617

Pages: Format (mm): Subject:

216 234x156 Branding

<< Helps readers generate new

ideas and package them using a creativity toolkit in Chapter 8 inspired by the author’s own practice

Author Information

Description

Faris Yakob is the founder of Genius Steals LLC, an ideas and innovation consultancy. Previously he was Chief Innovation Officer at MDC Partners and Executive Vice President, Chief Technology Strategist at McCann Erickson. He regularly writes about brands, media, communications and technology in publications such as the Financial Times, Forbes, Advertising Age and Media Week. He is a frequent speaker at international conferences and lectures at MIT and USC. He is also a contributor to What is a 21st Century Brand?, also published by Kogan Page.

As ever, the onus is on brands to find compelling ways to earn the attention of the consumer. Yet content scarcity has given way to overload, fixed channels have dissolved into fluid networks, and audiences have become participants in consumer-driven conversations. This shift requires a new course of action for brands; it demands new marketing imperatives. Paid Attention is a guide to modern advertising ideas: what they are, why they are evolving and how to have them. Spanning communication theory, neuroscience, creativity and innovation, media history, branding and emerging technologies, it explores the strategic creation process and how to package ideas to attract the most attention in the advertising industry. Packed with real-world examples of advertising campaigns for companies including Sony, Red Bull, HP and many more, Paid Attention provides a robust model for influencing human behaviour. Referencing a wide body of theory and praxis, from behavioural economics and sociology to technology and even science fiction, Faris Yakob maps advertising onto a wider analysis of culture. Containing practical advertising and branding templates, including a new advertising planning toolkit, it is ideal for students and practitioners looking to get noticed in today’s cluttered marketplace.

Table of Contents 1 Paid attention 1.1 Introduction: Paid attention – how much is it worth? 1.2 Logocentrism: What’s in a name? 2 Attention deficit disorders 2.1 Uncovering hidden persuaders: Why all market research is wrong 2.2 Advertising works in mysterious ways: Modern theories of communication 2.3 Is all advertising spam? Communication planning in an on-demand world 2.4 The spaces between: The vanishing difference between content, media and advertising 3 Attention arts and sciences 3.1 Do things, tell people: How to behave in a world of infinite content 3.2 Recombinant culture: Talent imitates, genius steals 3.3 Combination tools: How to have ideas: a genius steals process 3.4 Advertising for advertising: Is the industry paying attention?

22

Marketing and PR

3.5 Integrative strategy and social brands: Be nice or leave! 3.6 Prospection: Planning for the future we want


This book

<< Covers all areas of modern

advertising from multiple points of view to help professionals put their fingers on the pulse of best practice

What is a 21st Century Brand? New Thinking from the Next Generation of Agency Leaders

<< Teaches how to build a great brand and how it can add value to a business

Edition 1

<< Enables readers to think more

broadly about brands and to better serve their clients

Date: Price:

03/04/2015 £39.99

ISBN Paperback: e-book:

9780749472627 9780749472634

Pages: Format (mm): Subject:

432 234x156 Branding

Description

Author Information

What is a 21st Century Brand? How is it changing? What is critical now? What are the new mantras and principles? What are the new ideas for how to do it? What do you believe and what would you do therefore?

Nick Kendall is an award-winning brand and advertising specialist with over 25 years’ experience. He has worked on famous global accounts such as Johnnie Walker and Unilever’s ‘Dirt is Good’ laundry brand. Nick is a founding partner of Bro-Ken and member of The Garage, which helps start-ups build brands. He designed and created the IPA Excellence Diploma, which is described as ‘the MBA of brands’ for the advertising industry, and is its Chief Examiner. He received the IPA President’s Medal for his services to the industry and is the author of Advertising Works 10.

This book features 20 of the best papers produced during the 10 years of The IPA Excellence Diploma. Each is a fresh, original and uniquely personal perspective from the new generation of leaders across creative, media and digital agencies. Produced in partnership with internationally recognised advertising body, the IPA, they are accompanied by commentary from leading industry thinkers including Stephen Woodford, Mark Earls, David Wilding and Ian Priest, and edited by Nick Kendall. Together they offer you multiple perspectives and the opportunity for you to challenge yourself to consider what you believe. Structured as 20 provocations written in the form of ‘I believe... and therefore...’, the essays are organised into three sections: 1. What is a brand? 2. How should we engage to build them? 3. How should we organise to deliver? Highlighting that today’s most successful agencies are those which are embracing the new ways in which we consume content, What is a 21st Century Brand? delivers cutting-edge thinking across all areas of advertising practice. If you want to take time to think about the real fundamentals of what we do as a businesscreate and build brands – this book will be all the stimulation you would want.

Table of Contents 1 2

Introduction: How to read this book and some observations – Nick Kendall What is a brand?

2.1 I believe brand is a word that has outlived its usefulness – Nick Docherty 2.2 I believe in the Darwinian evolution of brands – Ian Edwards 2.3 We believe the people should control the means of branding – David Bonney 2.4 I believe in gaming your brand – Tim Jones 2.5 I believe in a brand new religion – Graeme Douglas 2.6 I believe communities are the future of brand communications – John V Willshire 2.7 I believe brands should go supergnova – James Borrodell Brown 2.8 What is a brand idea? 2.9 I believe the children are our future – Faris Yakob 2.10 I believe in the power of the self-fulfilling prophecy – David Young

2.11 I believe in the age of osmosis – Alex Dunsdon 2.12 I believe it’s what brands don’t say that matters – Pete Buckley 2.13 I believe brands must be superhuman – Emily Fairhead-Keen 2.14 I believe that brands should embrace the dark side – Simon Robertson 2.15 Hey, what’s the long idea? I believe it’s time the big idea had a counterpart – Sarah Morning 3 How should we organize to deliver? 3.1 I believe that the future of brands depends on confronting complexity – Gethin James 3.2 Data is our future: Welcome to the age of infomagination – Matt Sadler 3.3 I believe brands need to adopt an outside-in brand management approach – Sam D’Amato 3.4 I believe we must manage brand ideas from the bottom up – Tom Roach 3.5 I believe it’s time for a new system for leading beliefs – Ross Farquhar 3.6 I believe brands must shift from vanity to value – Matthew Philip

Marketing and PR

23


Brand Psychology

This book

Consumer Perceptions, Corporate Reputations Edition 1

<< Combines practical ‘how to’

advice in areas such as media relationships, crisis management and more with an exploration of reputation psychology and consumer motivation

<< Provides tools and techniques to Date: Price:

internally and externally deal with a crisis situation that affects a brand’s reputation

03/03/2015 £24.99

<< Presents a robust vision for modern

ISBN Paperback: e-book:

9780749471736 9780749471743

Pages: Format (mm): Subject:

440 234x156 Branding

brand reputation strategy

Author Information

Description

Jonathan Gabay is a creative strategist, educator and writer. His career spans three decades, during which time he has held several major advertising and marketing roles, including that of Group Creative Head at Saatchi and Saatchi Direct. He has worked with some of the most respected names in the world of creative advertising, marketing, PR, the media and education. Jonathan’s books are featured throughout academia and his business insights are regularly sought by news media including CNN, ABC, BBC and Bloomberg.

Why do we trust some brands more than others? How important is integrity for a brand’s survival? How can brand confidence be rebuilt during a crisis? Using both new and classic insights from social psychology, cognitive psychology and neuroscience, Brand Psychology reveals the hidden processes behind why certain brands command our loyalty, trust and – most importantly – disposable income. Reputation management authority Jonathan Gabay takes readers on a tour of the corporate, political, and personal brands whose understanding of consumer psychology has either built or broken them. Suitable for marketing, branding and PR professionals, reputation management specialists and students, Brand Psychology takes examples from e-cigarette legislation, the iPhone 5S’s fingerprint ID technology, Barclays’ branded bikes and the London 2012 Olympics, Miley Cyrus and the UK National Health Service’s big data to reveal how to build a meaningful brand that resonates with the public.

Table of Contents 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19

24

Marketing and PR

Introduction Believing is not seeing. Seeing is believing Lies, excuses and further justifications for inconvenient truths Brains, brands, bytes, Bolshevik brawls and teenage tantrums Cloud-high reputations, big media personalities and bigger data Smoke and mirroring Rings of confidence Egg whites, whitewash and snowflakes Flattered trusted minds and fluttery trusting hearts Under the influence From addictive self-interests to interesting selves Brand me Maslow: misunderstood? The church of brand ideology. Open for redemption 24/7 In the spotlight Can we still be friends? IDs and CEGOs You don’t have to be mad to work here: brand leadership and psychosis Big boys don’t cry

20 21 22 23

The authentic employer brand Brand stories: tell – don’t yell Rhetoric, rules, reasoning The final question first


This book

<< Inspires readers to look at their

brands more critically to see what’s missing

<< Addresses the rise of celebrity-

endorsed products and fashion ranges

<< Looks at the impact of blogging on fashion brands

Fashion Brands Branding Style from Armani to Zara Edition 3

Date: Price:

03/10/2012 £19.99

ISBN Paperback: e-book:

9780749464462 9780749464479

Pages: Format (mm): Subject:

240 234x156 Branding

Description

Author Information

Once a luxury that only the elite could afford, fashion is now accessible to all. High street brands such as Zara, Topshop and H&M have put fashion within the reach of anyone, whilst massive media attention has turned designers such as Tom Ford, Alexander McQueen and Stella McCartney into brands in their own right. Fashion Brands takes you ‘behind the seams’, so to speak, exposing how the use of advertising, store design and the media has altered our fashion ‘sense’ and how a mere piece of clothing can be transformed into something with mystical allure.

Mark Tungate is a British journalist based in Paris. He is the author of six books about branding and marketing including Adland and The Escape Industry, both published by Kogan Page. His articles have appeared in publications ranging from Campaign and Advertising Age to the Financial Times. He also has a weekly column in the French marketing journal Strategies. Alongside his writing, he heads the jury of the Epica Awards.

Packed with first-hand interviews with fashion brand gurus and industry insiders, this fully updated 3rd edition of the international bestselling Fashion Brands has its finger on the fashion pulse more firmly than ever. It now includes more on celebrity fashion brands and the rise of the ‘It’ girls and their influence to further analyse every aspect of fashion from a marketing perspective.

Table of Contents 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23

Introduction A history of seduction Fashioning an identity When haute couture meets high street The designer as brand The store is the star Anatomy of a trend The image-makers They shoot dresses, don’t they? This year’s model Celebrity sells Press to impress The collections Accessorize all areas Retro brands retooled Targeted male Urban athletes Virtually dressed Rise of the bloggers The faking game Trendy toddlers Style goes back to the future Behind the seams

Marketing and PR

25


Branded Beauty

This book

How Marketing Changed the Way We Look

<< The beauty sector is worth £16.3bn to the UK economy

<< Full of first hand interviews with Edition 1

senior figures in the beauty industry and in advertising

<< Describes how brands are using Date: Price:

03/10/2011 £19.99

ISBN Paperback: e-book:

9780749461812 9780749461829

Pages: Format (mm): Subject:

288 234x156 Branding

the internet to get close their customers

Author Information

Description

Mark Tungate is a British writer and branding specialist based in Paris. His best-selling book Fashion Brands has been translated into a dozen languages. As a journalist Mark has written for publications such as The Times, The Telegraph and The Independent. He has a weekly column in the French media magazine Stratégies and writes about marketing, fashion and design for the website Stylus. com. Alongside his writing, he lectures at Parsons Paris School of Art and Design and at conferences around the world. www.tungateinparis.com

Beauty is a multi-billion dollar global industry embracing make-up, skincare, hair care, fragrances, cosmetic surgery – even tattooing and piercing. Over the years it has used flattery, seduction, science and shame to persuade consumers that they’ll have to invest if they want to look their best. In Branded Beauty, Mark Tungate delves into the history and evolution of the beauty business. From luxury boutiques in Paris to tattoo parlours in Brooklyn, he talks to the people who’ve made skin their trade. He analyses the marketing strategies used by those who create and sell beauty products. He visits the labs where researchers seek the key to eternal youth. He compares attitudes to beauty around the world and examines the rise of organic beauty products. Full of fascinating detail on great names such as Rubinstein and Arden, Revlon, Estée Lauder, L’Oréal and Max Factor, Branded Beauty also considers the future of the beauty business.

Table of Contents 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21

26

Marketing and PR

Introduction Chasing Cleopatra The glamour professionals Out come the talons The beauty queen of Corona The French beauty factory Giants in the bathroom The stardust factor The 5 per cent solution The lure of luxury How to launch a cream The quest for eternal youth Beauty goes global A face in the crowd: finding a niche Beauty from shelf to street Digital beauty Under the knife The new male order Ethical, organic and sustainable The needle artists The future of beauty


This book

<< Endows practitioners with

all the key conceptual and theoretical tools to take control of understanding subconscious responses and become neuroliterate

<< Covers behavioural economics,

eye-tracking, implicit response measures, facial coding and other research tools which can measure and illuminate the irrational drives of consumers

<< Aligns with new understandings

in behavioural science and developments in data-processing technology to meet the demand for new insights into decision making

Decoding the Irrational Consumer How to Commission, Run and Generate Insights from Neuromarketing Research Edition 1

Series: Date: Price:

Marketing Science 03/08/2015 £29.99

ISBN Paperback: e-book:

9780749473846 9780749473853

Pages: Format (mm): Subject:

224 234x156 Consumer Behaviour

Description

Author Information

Decoding the Irrational Consumer is written to help marketing practitioners demystify neuromarketing, a relatively new field of marketing research used to understand consumer response to marketing stimuli.

Darren Bridger works as a consultant to marketers, advising on using and analysing data that tap into consumers’ non-conscious thinking and motivations. He was one of the original pioneers of the consumer neuroscience industry, co-founding both the world’s first full-service agency, Neuroco, and the first agency dedicated to serving the public relations industry, MindLab International, then joining the world’s largest agency, Neurofocus, as its second employee outside of the US.

Decoding the Irrational Consumer presents in plain terms the key theoretical tools required to implement neuromarketing studies and achieve desired research outcomes. Marketers and researchers will learn how to effectively and confidently brief data processors, and confer with neuroscientists and technicians. They will gain keen understanding of recent developments in behavioural science and data-processing technology, as well as sophisticated neuromarketing tools used to understand subconscious responses including behavioural economics, eyetracking, implicit response measures, and facial coding. The author discusses when to apply these techniques and others, how to combine them effectively and how to correctly interpret resulting data to generate valuable insights that aid in decision making. The book is also suppotrted by an online guide for students and lecturers with helpful chapter summaries.

Table of Contents 1 Theoretical insights 1.1 The irrational consumer: introduction 1.2 The brain: attention, memory and emotion 1.3 Neuroaesthetics 1.4 Behavioural economics 2 The new research tools 2.1 Guidelines for experiments 2.2 Eye-tracking 2.3 Implicit response measures 2.4 Facial action coding 2.5 Biometrics 2.6 Neuro-measures 3 Putting it all together 3.1 Computational neuroscience 3.2 Smarter survey design 3.3 Combining techniques 3.4 Conclusions

Marketing and PR

27


Digital Marketing Strategy

This book

<< Walks readers through every step

of creating a digital marketing strategy, from analysing the essential digital platforms, through to planning, implementation and success measurement

An Integrated Approach to Online Marketing Edition 1

<< Shows you how to integrate digital

Date: Price:

03/05/2016 ÂŁ29.99

ISBN Paperback: e-book:

9780749474706 9780749474713

Pages: Format (mm): Subject:

344 234x156 Digital Marketing

marketing techniques into an overall coherent business strategy and how to present your strategy to obtain approval from decisionmarkers

<< Includes real-world case studies

including Hertz, Adidas, Google, Amazon, Bitcoin and more so you can view best-practice examples and improve your own digital marketing strategy

Author Information

Description

Simon Kingsnorth is a senior digital leader and strategist with a core skillset in digital marketing, digital transformation and user experience. His specialities include paid search, SEO, social media, affiliate and email marketing, as well as website design and development, acquisition, CRM, analytics, targeting and personalization.

The modern marketer needs to learn how to employ strategic thinking alongside the use of digital media to deliver measurable and accountable business success. Digital Marketing Strategy covers the essential elements of achieving exactly this by guiding you through every step of creating your perfect digital marketing strategy. It contains analysis of the essential techniques and platforms of digital marketing including social media, content marketing, SEO, user experience, personalization, display advertising and CRM, as well as the broader aspects of implementation including planning, integration with overall company aims and presenting to decision makers. Simon Kingsnorth brings digital marketing strategy to life through best practice case studies, illustrations, checklists and summaries, to give you insightful and practical guidance. Rather than presenting a restrictive â&#x20AC;&#x2DC;one size fits allâ&#x20AC;&#x2122; model, this book gives you the tools to tailormake your own strategy according to your unique business needs and demonstrates how an integrated and holistic approach to marketing leads to greater success. Digital Marketing Strategy is also supported by a wealth of online resources, including budget and strategy templates, lecture slides and a bonus chapter.

Table of Contents 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15

28

Marketing and PR

What is digital marketing? Aligning with your business strategy Barriers and considerations Planning Search engine optimization Paid search Display Social media User experience and transformation CRM and retention True personalization Customer service Content strategy Analytics and reporting Presenting your strategy


<< Explains how to choose appropriate

Understanding Digital Marketing

<< Provides tips on how to connect

Marketing Strategies for Engaging the Digital Generation

This book online marketing channels

with customers and give them the engagement and interaction they require

<< Looks to the future and the

trends which are shaping those opportunities, such as media sharing, ongoing interactive refinement, and co-creation content marketing

Edition 4

Date: Price:

03/11/2016 ÂŁ19.99

ISBN Paperback: e-book:

9780749478438 9780749478445

Pages: Format (mm): Subject:

472 234x156 Digital Marketing

Description

Author Information

The world of digital media is changing at a phenomenal pace. Constantly evolving technologies are transforming not just how we access our information but how we interact and communicate with one another on a global scale. Understanding Digital Marketing is a practical, no-nonsense guide to web-marketing, the rules of new media and researching the new generation of digital consumers. Clear, informative and entertaining, it covers key topics such as search marketing, social media, Google, mobile marketing, affiliate marketing, email marketing, performance marketing, customer engagement and digital marketing strategies.

Damian Ryan is author of Understanding Digital Marketing, the bestselling academic book which is required reading by more than 100 universities and colleges including Harvard University and the Chartered Institute of Marketing. He is also author of The Best Digital Marketing Campaigns in the World and Understanding Social Media.

One of the best-selling books in the industry, this fourth edition of Understanding Digital Marketing has been thoroughly revised with more information, fresh examples and case studies, and the latest developments in the industry. Complete with in-depth insider accounts of digital marketing successes from internationally recognised brands and digital marketing campaigns, it is essential reading for both practitioners and students alike.

Table of Contents 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14

Digital Marketing... The Origin of Have a plan and stick to it... #Strategy Crouch, touch, pause... #Engage Search: Being found online Understanding Social Media Understanding Email Marketing Understanding Mobile Marketing Content Marketing and Native Advertising Understanding Programmatic Understanding Online PR Understanding Performance Marketing Understanding the IOT Optimising the customer and user experience The Future of Digital Marketing Online Chapters 15 Measurement and Data: Is it working? 16 Internationalisation: Cross Border Digital 17 Digital Transformation 101: A journey of change towards a transformed customer experience

Damian is founder and chairman of The Global Academy of Digital Marketing, a collaborative movement of digital marketers seeking knowledge, case studies, contacts and credible data to help them prosper. Damian is also a partner with Mediaventura, the UKâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s leading corporate finance firm for the TIME (Technology, Internet, Media and Entertainment) sector.

Marketing and PR

29


Leading Digital Strategy

This book

<< Provides practical tools and models to support a customer-centric digital strategy

Driving Business Growth Through Effective E-commerce Edition 1

<< Explains how to gather and use real data in real time to inform strategy and improve performance

<< Shows how to successfully build

Date: Price:

03/03/2015 £19.99

ISBN Paperback: e-book:

9780749473099 9780749473105

Extent: Dimensions: Subject:

240 234x156 Digital Marketing

a multichannel mindset through interviews with e-commerce pioneers from O2, Barclays, Sky and Fitness First, and a case study of the Open University

Author Information

Description

Professor Christopher Bones is an established thought leader in people, organization strategy and change and a widely acclaimed, award-winning author. He has over 30 years’ experience in senior leadership positions, working with companies such as Diageo, Cadbury Schweppes and Shell. Appointed the first non-academic Principal of Henley Business School in 2004, he is now Dean Emeritus at Henley and Professor of Creativity and Leadership at Manchester Business School.

For a business to thrive competitively in today’s marketplace, it needs to have an effective e-commerce channel. Getting it right opens up new markets and opportunities; getting it wrong leads to declining revenues and profitability. To ensure effectiveness, business leaders and decision-makers must understand how e-commerce channels work to make the best strategic choices for their business. Drawing on experience in consulting to large complex organisations and ground-breaking primary research with senior executives from leading corporations, Leading Digital Strategy creates a convincing case for action and offers practical strategies, methodologies and models to improve the effectiveness of a company’s online offering. It explores how to align organizational structure with wider goals and implement a customer-centric culture. With coverage of the key digital trends, tools and technologies affecting business today, it provides a practical framework for multi-channel success.

James Hammersley founded Good Growth with Christopher Bones, an innovative digital change consultancy, whose clients have included Bupa, The Open University, Barclays Connector and O2 among others. Having worked on introducing digital performance to large organizations as a sales specialist he has witnessed first-hand the potential of digital to transform how we listen to and respond to customers.

30

Marketing and PR

This book challenges leaders to become as fluent and creative in digital as they are in finance, sales and marketing, and equips them to choose the right strategy and the right people to make it happen. With strategies for improved operational performance and enhanced engagement from senior management, Leading Digital Strategy gives readers the power to drive forward effective digital initiatives and realize rewarding opportunities for change.

Table of Contents 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

Introduction 21st-century markets Identifying the e-commerce opportunity Putting customers first The new marketing model The business of e-commerce The growth organization Leadership in change Digital leadership in practice The e-commerce leadership model


This book

<< Clear-cut guide on how to structure mobile marketing in a planned and coordinated way

<< Demystifies terms, tools and

techniques, helping readers connect and coordinate the different dynamics across their business

<< High-profile case studies including Heineken, Nike Training Club, Google Play and MailChimp

Mobile Marketing How Mobile Technology is Revolutionizing Marketing, Communications and Advertising

Edition

2

Date: Price:

03/02/2017 £19.99

ISBN Paperback: e-book:

9780749479794 9780749479800

Pages: Format (mm): Subject:

272 234x156 Digital Marketing

Description

Author Information

Mobile Marketing is a clear, practical guide to harnessing the mobile consumer and tackling the rising challenges of divided user attention across multiple screens at the same time. It demystifies the vast spectrum of tools and techniques now available and explains how to optimize these dynamics into an innovative and effective mobile marketing strategy. Now that website search rankings take into account mobile optimization, no serious marketer can do without a thorough understanding of mobile.

Daniel Rowles has worked in digital marketing for almost 15 years on both the client and agency sides. He is a Course Director for the CIM, trains on behalf of Econsultancy and Utalk Marketing, and has been a judge for the CIM Marketing Excellence Awards since 2010. He is also the co-host of the Digital Marketing Podcast, a global top-ten business podcast on iTunes. His company – TargetInternet.com – has helped clients of all types to use digital marketing more effectively, including the BBC, Vodafone, Mastercard, Aviva and Warner Brothers.

The first edition of Mobile Marketing won the Judge’s Choice Award in Social Media at the Small Business Trend’s 2014 Book Awards. This fully revised 2nd edition includes straightforward explanations on mobile optimized content, app development, social media and proximity based marketing. It has also expanded to include two brand new chapters on mobile and email and on location-based devices, plus cutting-edge updates on advances in wearable technology, mobile payments, virtual reality and strategies for the changing user journey. Integrated with tactical checklists, easy application frameworks and powerful case study insights such as Heineken, WordPress, MailChimp, Nike Training Club (NTC), Google Play and Moz, if provides a full overview from service provision and technology integration to content strategy, ready to capture fast-moving consumers on the go.

Table of Contents 1 1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4 1.5

Mobile Marketing in Perspective Introduction Understanding the user journey Technology change and adoption Disruption and integration Devices, platforms and technology: why it doesn’t matter 1.6 The future of mobile marketing 2 The Tactical Toolkit 2.1 Introduction 2.2 Mobile sites and responsive design 2.3 Mobile and email 2.4 How to build an app 2.5 Social media and mobile 2.6 Mobile search 2.7 Mobile advertising 2.8 Augmented reality (AR) and virtual reality (VR) 2.9 Quick Response (QR) codes 2.10 Location based devices and beacons 2.11 Near field communication (NFC) and mobile payments

2.12 Instant messenger apps and Short messaging service (SMS) 2.13 Mobile analytics 3 Mobile Marketing Checklists 3.1 Introduction 3.2 Checklists 3.3 Conclusions

Marketing and PR

31


The Definitive Guide to Strategic Content Marketing

This book

<< Features contributions from leading academics, industry experts, thought leaders and influencers around the globe

Perspectives, Issues, Challenges and Solutions Edition 1

<< Presents a wealth of varying

perspectives on content marketing, grouped into key subject areas, allowing the reader to move through the book according to their interests and absorb the most useful aspects of each

Date: Price:

03/07/2018 £19.99

ISBN Paperback: e-book:

9780749482220 9780749482237

Pages: Format (mm): Subject:

272 234x156 Digital Marketing

<< Includes coverage of core subjects

including media publishing, text vs visuals vs gaming, the ethics of native advertising, content marketing measurement, content blockers, storytelling through data, and much more

Author Information

Description

Lazar Dzamic is the former Google ZOO Head of Brand Planning EMEA, a creative strategist, writer and academic. He is an award-winning Planning Director in several integrated agencies, and lectures at the Faculty for Media & Communications at the Singidunum University in Belgrade.

Marketers everywhere are talking about content, but not everyone is saying the same thing. Some professionals love content and believe it has revolutionalized the practice of marketing. To others, it’s mere hype: a new name for what marketers have always done. The Definitive Guide to Content Marketing brings together all these diverse perspectives, structuring them around useful key topics that provide insight into the multi-faceted nature of content marketing. Containing contributions from, and interviews with, leading academics, industry experts, thought leaders and influencers, this book is a truly unique resource.

Justin Kirby is an academic, writer and speaker with a 20+ year career in industry as a digital strategist, producer and entrepreneur. He lectures on Advertising at London College of Communications at the University of the Arts, London.

The editors of The Definitive Guide to Content Marketing weave different voices together to present a balanced view of content marketing, grouping the discussion around relevant subjects such as content monetization, native advertising, visuals vs video, and the challenge of measuring results. This structure allows readers to move through the book according to their interests, and cherry-pick the most useful aspects of each discussion to apply to their own marketing initiatives.

Table of Contents 1

Introduction – Mapping the Content Marketing Territory 2 Content Marketing – A New and Better Promise? 2.1 Is Content Marketing the New Conclusion? 2.2 Exponomy – Brand and Customer Experience as a Content Enabler 2.3 Using Content as an Opportunity to Build Sustainable Brands with Social Impact 3 The Business of Content Marketing – Impact on Business Models, Processes and Revenue 3.1 Client Perspectives – How is Content Changing the Way Brands Go to Market? 3.2 Creative Agency Perspectives – How is Content Changing the Way Brands Go to Market? 3.3 Media Agency Perspectives – How is Content Changing the Way Brands Go to Market? 3.4 Publisher Perspectives – How is Content Changing the Way Brands Go to Market? 4 Creativity, Media Planning and the Role of Content in the Consumer Journey 4.1 Content Distribution and its Role in the Consumer Journey 4.2 Content as a Creative Melting Pot of Skills – a Turning Point for Creative Teams?

32

Marketing and PR

4.3 Content and Storytelling in the Age of Data Signals 4.4 The Evolution of Content Formats – From Text to Video to AR/VR to AI... 4.5 Have we Reached the Death of the User Generated Content? 5 How to Measure and Evaluate Content Marketing 5.1 Key Issues in Measuring the Effects of Content Marketing 5.2 Tools, KPIs and Frameworks to Measure Content Marketing in Practice Addressing the Challenges Faced around Content Marketing 5.3 The Rejecter’s Manifesto – Content Marketing as a Marketing Mirage 5.4 Content Marketing and Ethics – Challenges, Threats and Balancing Acts 5.5 Conclusion


This book

<< Reveals the formula for success in video marketing and the psychology behind it, made accessible through clearly explained practical tips and frameworks

<< Features interviews with high

profile practitioners showing how they have effectively incorporated video marketing within their own organizations

<< Contains

a wealth of fascinating examples and case studies that showcase the best in video marketing around the world, making it extremely international in scope

Video Marketing Strategy Harness the Power of Online Video to Drive Brand Growth Edition 1

Date: Price:

03/03/2018 £19.99

ISBN Paperback: e-book:

9780749481599 9780749481582

Pages: Format (mm): Subject:

240 234x156 Digital Marketing

Description

Author Information

Video is the single most effective tool that marketers have to raise brand awareness, increase sales, drive website traffic and deliver ROI on marketing budgets. Driven by consumer demand and with the backing of the largest social media platforms, our world is becoming ‘video first’. Video Marketing Strategy allows marketers to harness the power of video and create effective video campaigns. This in-depth look at the world’s most powerful medium helps brands to radically magnify their voice by tapping into a level of emotional engagement that can’t be achieved any other way. The book explores both theory (why are humans so affected by video on mobile devices?) and practice (what’s the key to making videos that deliver results?). It looks at how multiple videos form wider campaigns and covers content hubs, activation strategies and testing. It is filled with invaluable advice, tips and strategies for incorporating video into a wider content marketing plan.

Jon Mowat is an award winning content creator and video strategy expert. Since 2005 he has been Managing Director at Hurricane Media, the UK’s foremost video marketing agency, and previously spent 15 years at the BBC as producer and director on documentaries screened internationally on BBC 1, BBC2, Channel 4 and Discovery. He has won numerous industry awards, including three from the Royal Television Society. He has been published in a range of marketing publications including Adweek, Brandwatch, CIM, Smart Insights and Social Media Today.

Written by an award-winning video marketer with decades of experience, Video Marketing Strategy gives readers the magic formula to create engaging, effective content. Truly global in scope, it features case studies from around the world, and shows how marketers from all sectors and industries have used video campaigns successfully. Featuring insights from prominent industry practitioners Video Marketing Strategy is jam-packed with guidance on how to make videos that cut through the market place and deliver measurable results.

Table of Contents 1 1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4 2 2.1 2.2 3 3.1 3.2 3.3 3.4 3.5 3.6 3.7 3.8 3.9

An Introduction to Video Marketing, Its Impact and Opportunity What Is Video Marketing? Why Video Marketing Works Video Types – Outlines and Benefits How To Stand Out in the Content Soup How To Make Great Video Content The Magic Formula for Video Marketing Applying the Magic Formula Video Marketing – The Nuts and Bolts Developing Video Marketing Ideas Making Your Video Marketing Ideas A Reality Outsourcing For Success Fail – What Not To Do Linking Videos To Sales New Technologies – Virtual Reality, 360 and Interactive So The Video Is Out There... Now What? Vloggers and Your Brand But Is It Working? Measuring ROI

4 Moving Beyond Single Films To Content Hubs 4.1 Amplify Results With A Rich Content Hub 4.2 Social Video Platforms 4.3 Short Form Video – Vines and More 4.4 Live Video – Periscope, Tenpole Marketing, Facebook Live and More

Marketing and PR

33


Understanding Social Media

This book

<< Covers topics such as how to

develop a strategy and programme, budget for activities, set KPIs, determine ROI, create a dashboard and build a team

How to Create a Plan for Your Business that Works Edition 1 Date: Price:

<< Addresses the relationship between

search and social, analytics, customer experience and risk assessment and management in social media

03/04/2015 £19.99

<< Helps readers gauge their own

social media score with crib notes and practical exercises

ISBN Paperback: e-book:

9780749473563 9780749473570

Pages: Format (mm): Subject:

304 234x156 Digital Marketing

Author Information

Description

Damian Ryan is founder and chairman of The Global Academy of Digital Marketing, a collaborative movement comprised of digital marketers seeking knowledge, case studies, contacts and credible data to help them prosper. He is also a partner with Mediaventura, the UK’s leading corporate finance firm for the TIME (Technology, Internet, Media and Entertainment) sector. He is also the author of Understanding Digital Marketing and The Best Digital Marketing Campaigns in the World.

Understanding Social Media is the essential guide to social media for students and professionals alike. Drawing on the experience, advice and tips from dozens of digital marketers and social media superstars, it is an extensive crowd-sourced guide to social media platforms. Illustrated throughout with case studies from both successful and failed campaigns, Understanding Social Media democratizes knowledge of social media and promotes best practice, answering questions such as ‘How do you create a compelling social media campaign?’, ‘How do you build and engage with an audience?’ and ‘Where is the line between online PR and social media drawn?’ It is the most comprehensive and practical reference guide to social media available.

Table of Contents 1

Getting started – how to create a compelling social media programme 2 Rules governing the relationship between search and social 3 How to budget for social media activities 4 Setting KPIs and measuring success 5 Understanding social media ROI – what matters and what doesn’t 6 Why social media is central to customer experience 7 How to build a social media team – how to pick the right suppliers 8 Understanding the relationship between online PR and social media 9 The future for social media and the vastly changing landscape 10 Risk assessment and risk management in social media

34

Marketing and PR


This book

<< Covers both outward-facing social

media as well as enterprise social networks, ensuring that business communications can be conducted in a safe and compliant manner

<< Balances the benefits of social

media use with the underlying risks it presents, showing how good governance can help to navigate these challenges successfully

<< Includes diagrams and practical tips that can be incorporated into a risk strategy to add value immediately

Social Media Risk and Governance Managing Enterprise Risk Edition 1

Date: Price:

03/10/2015 ÂŁ29.99

ISBN Paperback: e-book:

9780749474577 9780749474584

Pages: Format (mm): Subject:

232 234x156 Digital Marketing

Description

Author Information

Few topics are as pressing to policy makers, business leaders and the risk management community as the secure and compliant management of social media. Social Media Risk and Governance is a practical guide to the components and considerations which make up a good social media governance strategy, spanning both external communications channels such as Facebook, Twitter and LinkedIn, as well as enterprise social networks within an organization.

Phil Mennie is PwCâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s global social media risk and governance leader, helping clients harness the power of social media. His expertise stems from experience using web technology to better manage financial and operational data. He has led engagements across a broad range of industries, including banking and finance, where he steered the development of a secure web-based payment system and a large scale customer-facing web application to capture trade data. Phil speaks at a range of social media and data conferences across the UK and Europe.

Written by social media risk and governance expert Phil Mennie, Social Media Risk and Governance addresses the concepts which professionals in information security, marketing, compliance and risk management need to take into account in their daily practice, guiding us through policy evaluation, planning on social media, information security and fraud risks, how to respond to a crisis or to archive data and more. Featuring examples from companies such as BP, MasterCard, Netflix, PwC, Silk Road, UBS and Yelp, the book is designed to promote cross-functional working between professional users of social media, acknowledging the impact of these technologies across the business and the interaction of the various stakeholders when planning new activities to effectively harness the power of social media safely and successfully for their organization.

Table of Contents 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

Introduction Risk Strategy Data privacy and control Governance Policy, training and awareness Crisis Management Security Regulatory response The future and its opportunities

Marketing and PR

35


Event Planning and Management

This book

<< Takes readers through the entire

process of planning and managing a successful event

A Practical Handbook for PR and Events Professionals Edition 1

<< Provides the underpinning theories of general events management, along with useful tips and strategies, that can be applied to all forms of events management (including corporate, volunteer, etc.)

Series: Date: Price:

PR In Practice 03/09/2015 £24.99

ISBN Paperback: e-book:

9780749471392 9780749471408

Pages: Format (mm): Subject:

328 234x156 Event Management

<< Includes access to supporting

online resources such as templates and discussion questions

Author Information

Description

Ruth Dowson has over 30 years’ experience in strategic development, management and delivery of events, conferences, seminars and exhibitions, in both the public and private sectors. She is a senior lecturer and course leader in events management at the UK Centre for Events Management at Leeds Beckett University.

The events industry is an exciting, innovative, diverse and highly challenging environment in which to work. Event Planning and Management offers a structured, practical approach to all types of events, from the initial planning, to final evaluating stages. It introduces the key models and theories but focuses on the practical side of building and working with a team, choosing a location, creating a programme, dealing with stakeholders and sponsors, promoting the event, essential financial and procurement considerations and finally evaluating the event.

David Bassett is an experienced event organizer and educator in events management, leisure, sport and tourism. As Senior Lecturer at the UK Centre for Events Management, he educates and trains aspiring events managers, as well as industry practitioners, to deliver successful events in the UK and overseas.

Each stage of the process is fully supported with online resources including templates and discussion questions to make up a complete event planner’s toolkit. Balancing coverage of the key theory and models with essential practical guidance, tools and case studies from organizations such as London 2012 and the Prince’s Trust, Event Planning and Management is an ideal handbook for students and practitioners alike. About the PR in Practice series: Published in collaboration with the Chartered Institute of Public Relations (CIPR), the PR in Practice series comprises accessible, practical introductions to day-to-day issues of public relations practice and management. The series’ action-oriented approach keeps knowledge and skills up to date.

Table of Contents 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

36

Marketing and PR

Introduction to events Event Planning Location, Location, Location Content is King Site Planning and Logistics Building the Event Team Promoting the Event Finance Evaluation Future proofing your events


This book

<< Understand the balance between

achieving growth through the development of key accounts and serving key accounts, without letting costs become prohibitive

<< Implement best practice in

key account management in a confident and successful manner through a highly practical, step-bystep approach

<< Benefit from rich learning features, including mini-cases, narratives, examples, diagrams, and visually represented models

Malcolm McDonald on Key Account Management Edition 1

Date: Price:

03/08/2017 ÂŁ19.99

ISBN Paperback: e-book:

9780749480776 9780749480790

Pages: Format (mm): Subject:

192 234x156 Key Account Management

Description

Author Information

Malcolm McDonald on Key Account Management explores the challenges of winning, retaining and developing key accounts. Key accounts are customers who help their suppliers grow, and consequently, they wield significant power. Although they are the key to market share and revenue growth, the costs of serving key accounts can erode profitability unless they are thoroughly understood and managed.

Professor Malcolm McDonald is Emeritus Professor at Cranfield and Honorary Professor at Warwick Business School. He has been consultant to major companies globally, within the areas of strategic marketing and marketing planning, and is Chairman of six companies, working with the operating boards of some of the worldâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s leading multinationals.

Malcolm McDonald on Key Account Management takes a step-by-step approach to presenting best practice in key account management. Whether your business is starting up or well-established, there is always more to discover about improving the way value is created between you and your most important customers. Malcolm McDonald and Beth Rogers have spent over twenty years researching, teaching and consulting on key account management, and have condensed their knowledge into this book, focusing on making it clear, concise and easy to use.

Table of Contents 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

Beth Rogers is recognised internationally for her contribution to sales education, and was one of the original Cranfield research team on key account management. Formerly a business development manager in IT, she pioneered sales teaching at Portsmouth Business School, and chaired the project board which developed National Occupational Standards for UK sales.

Growing Your Business Identifying Key Accounts How Buying Decisions are Made Key Account Plans that Create Value Account-Based Marketing People and Resources for Key Account Management Going Global Implementation and Risk The future of Key Account Management

Marketing and PR

37


Key Account Management

This book

<< Focuses on practical

implementation rather than the theory of account management

Tools and Techniques for Achieving Profitable Key Supplier Status Edition 6

effectiveness with practical tools including new and updated online resources

<< Brings the elements of key account

Date: Price:

03/02/2015 £34.99

ISBN Paperback: e-book:

9780749469405 9780749469412

Pages: Format (mm): Subject:

<< Helps boost account management

management together to help practitioners form and implement their own strategy

416 240x170 Key Account Management

Author Information

Description

Peter Cheverton is Director of Insight Marketing & People, now established as the leading international training and consultancy firm in KAM implementation, working in more than thirty countries including Australia, Austria, Belgium, Brazil, Canada, China, Denmark, France, Germany, Holland, Hong Kong, India, Italy, Korea, Malaysia, Mexico, Poland, Singapore, South Africa, Sweden, Switzerland, Taiwan, the United Kingdom and the United States, with a client list that includes some of the world’s major blue chip companies. He is also the author of Understanding the Professional Buyer and Global Account Management (both published by Kogan Page).

An organization’s key accounts are its lifeblood. Key account management focuses on the long-term investment of resources in customers that can offer an exceptional return on resources. But which are the key accounts? Are they the ones growing the fastest? The ones that are most financially secure? Or are they the ones that shout the loudest? Key Account Management puts forward a straightforward and effective planning methodology.

38

Marketing and PR

This fully updated 6th edition of Key Account Management takes a long-term, team-selling strategic view of the whole process, from defining the customer, to managing the relationship and achieving key supplier status. With coverage of latest best practice including IT’s role in account management, plus new case studies, online supporting resources and a new section comparing how different industries/markets approach key account management, it stands alone as the premier book on managing key customers. Key Account Management is also supported by a number of online resources, including helpful templates, guides for students and lecturers, and self tests to ensure that best practice is being followed.

Table of Contents 1 Definitions and purpose 1.1 Why Key Account Management? 1.2 The spectrum of KAM ambition 1.3 What is Key Account Management? 2 Analysis: opportunity and value 2.1 Knowing the market, knowing your value 2.2 Knowing the people, knowing your value 3 Relationship management 3.1 From ‘bow-ties’ to ‘diamonds’ 3.2 Decision mapping and contact strategies 3.3 The good, the bad, the sad and the ugly 4 Achieving key supplier status 4.1 The purchasing revolution 4.2 Supply chain management: seeking value 4.3 Purchasing organization: rationalization and centralization 4.4 Supplier positioning: managing suppliers 5 Achieving strategic supplier status 5.1 Being of strategic value 5.2 How do they plan to grow? 5.3 How do they aim to win? 5.4 What drives them? 6 The value proposition 6.1 The customer’s total business experience 6.2 The customer’s activity cycle 6.3 Measuring the value – securing the reward 6.4 Making the proposal

7 Planning and joint planning 7.1 The key account plan 7.2 Joint planning 8 Targeting 8.1 Customer classification 8.2 Customer distinction 8.3 Global Account Management 9 Making it happen 9.1 Leadership and organization 9.2 Skills, attitudes and behaviours 9.3 The role of information technology 9.4 Measuring customer profitability 9.5 The implementation plan


This book

<< Features case studies from diverse

sectors, including professional services (Ernst & Young), financial services (FM), manufacturing (Rolls-Royce), services (EMCOR, FM Global), pharmaceuticals (Pfizer), & engineering (AMEY)

Implementing Key Account Management Designing Customer-Centric Processes for Mutual Growth

<< Combines ground-breaking

Edition 1

<< Offers an integrative Key Account

Date: Price:

03/08/2018 £34.99

ISBN Paperback: e-book:

9780749482756 9780749482763

research with experience from recognized thought-leaders of Cranfield School of Management Management framework that senior executives can use to design or further develop strategic customer management programmes

Pages: Format (mm): Subject:

256 240x170 Key Account Management

Description

Author Information

Implementing Key Account Management is a highly practical handbook that guides readers through the realities of rolling out a functional key account management programme. The book offers an integrated framework for key account management that businesses can use to design or further develop strategic customer management programmes, enabling them to overcome the obstacles organizations face when rolling out their strategies.

Mark Davies currently acts as a Visiting Fellow with Cranfield School of Management. He facilitates the Cranfield KAM Best Practice Research Club, a quarterly meeting that brings together leading academics with business leaders.

Bringing together the experiences of leading experts within this field, Implementing Key Account Management draws on two decades of research and best practice from Cranfield University School of Management, one of the foremost centres for researcher and thought leadership in KAM. Between them, the authors have designed and delivered programmes globally for clients such as Rolls-Royce, Unilever, Vodafone, The Economist, and many more. Rigorously researched, well-grounded and practical, this book is, quite simply, the definitive, go-to resource for implementing key account management programmes.

Table of Contents 1 1.1 1.2 1.3 2 2.1 2.2 3 3.1 3.2 3.3 3.4 3.5 4 4.1

Introduction to Implementing Key Account Management Re-engaging Strategic Customers Adopting Key Account Management Building Customer Understanding and Value Planning Measuring KAM Performance and Developing Customer Relations Developing Winning Offerings Creating Compelling Value Propositions for Customers Co-Creating Value with Strategic Customers Designing Customer-Centric Approaches and Processes The Role of Key Account Managers and Key Account Teams Determining KAM Structures, Policies & Processes Measuring and Incentivising KAM KAM and Procurement International Key Account Management Assessing Your KAM Program – A Framework The KAM Implementation Framework

Rodrigo Guesalaga is a senior lecturer at the School of Management at Cranfield University. He is a member of the editorial review board at Journal of Business and Industrial Marketing and Journal of Business Market Management, and is a counsellor of the Circle of Marketing at Icare (in Chile). Sue Holt is Director of the Cranfield School of Management’s flagship Open Programme on Key Account Management. She has pursued a wide ranging management career including working for the Prime Minister at 10 Downing Street and for the Speaker in the House of Commons. Javier Marcos has 20 years’ experience in academia, consulting and multinational corporations. He has designed and delivered programmes globally for clients such as Astra Zeneca, Barclays, SAP, Cap Gemini, GeodisWilson, GKN Aerospace, Pfizer, Rolls-Royce, and Unilever.

Marketing and PR

39


A Practitioner’s Guide to AccountBased Marketing

This book

<< Includes case studies from

practising professionals who are working in account-based marketing, including pioneering companies such as BT, Cisco, Cognizant, Fujitsu, Hewlett-Packard and more

Accelerating Growth in Strategic Accounts Edition 1 Date: Price: ISBN Paperback: e-book: Pages: Format (mm): Subject:

<< Explores the development of

account-based marketing as a business practice, including the lessons learned by the pioneers of the approach, and the pitfalls that those implementing it should avoid

03/03/2017 £29.99

<< Gives a step-by-step process for

those wishing to set up an accountbased marketing programme, and use it strategically to accelerate growth in strategic accounts

9780749479893 9780749479909 240 234x156 Key Account Management

Author Information

Description

Bev Burgess is an accomplished marketer and businesswoman. Her background includes senior roles at British Gas, Epson and Fujitsu. As managing director of The Information Technology Services Marketing Association (ITSMA) in Europe, Bev personally supported companies including Accenture, BT, HewlettPackard, IBM, Microsoft, Orange and Xerox. Today, as Senior Vice President, Bev leads ITSMA’s Global Account Based Marketing Council, and delivers consulting and training on designing, developing and implementing ABM programmes. Bev is a Chartered Marketer and a Fellow of the Chartered Institute of Marketing, and has served as an international trustee.

Account-based marketing (ABM) is a strategic approach to business marketing in which an organization considers and communicates with individual prospects or customer accounts as markets of one. It is typically employed in enterprise level sales organizations, basically treating large companies as markets in themselves, joining forces across sales, marketing, R&D, etc. ABM focuses explicitly on individual client accounts and their needs. More importantly, it is a collaborative approach that engages sales, marketing, delivery, and key executives toward achieving the client’s business goals. A Practitioner’s Guide to Account-Based Marketing includes case studies from practising professionals working in account-based marketing. It explores the development of accountbased marketing as a business practice, including the lessons to learn and the pitfalls to avoid. It gives a step-by-step process for those wishing to set up an account-based marketing program, and use it tactically to accelerate growth in strategic accounts. An emphasis on practicality, an accessible and pragmatic tool for those who want a holistic guidebook to dip in and out of as they develop careers in ABM.

Table of Contents 1 Setting up an ABM program 1.1 The essential of account-based marketing 1.2 SAP North America case study 1.3 Building the right foundations for ABM 1.4 Fujitsu case study 1.5 Investing in the right tools and technologies 1.6 CSC case study 1.7 Deciding which accounts to focus on 1.8 Fujitsu case study 1.9 The ABM adoption model 2 ABM step-by-step 2.1 Knowing what is driving the account 2.2 KPMG case study 2.3 Playing to the client’s needs 2.4 BT case study 2.5 Mapping and profiling stakeholders 2.6 Juniper Networks case study 2.7 Developing targeted value propositions 2.8 Planning integrated sales and marketing campaigns

40

Marketing and PR

2.9 Cognizant case study 2.10 Executing integrated campaigns 2.11 Evaluating results and updating plans 2.12 Microsoft case study 3 Developing your career as an account-based marketer 3.1 The competencies you need to do ABM 3.2 Managing your ABM career


This book

<< Identifies the rules for marketing

luxury products and implementing a luxury strategy

<< Provides the depth insight required to master luxury marketing strategies

<< Includes coverage of human

resources and financial management in the luxury space

The Luxury Strategy Break the Rules of Marketing to Build Luxury Brands Edition 2

Date: Price:

03/09/2012 £34.99

ISBN Paperback: e-book:

9780749464912 9780749464929

Pages: Format (mm): Subject:

408 234x156 Luxury Marketing

Description

Author Information

The Luxury Strategy provides the first rigorous blueprint for the effective management of luxury brands and companies at the highest level. It rationalizes those business models that have achieved profitability and unveils the original methods that were used to transform small family businesses such as Ferrari, Louis Vuitton, Cartier, Chanel, Armani, Gucci, and Ralph Lauren into profitable global brands.

Jean-Noël Kapferer is a worldwide thought leader and expert on brand management. A Professor of marketing strategy at HEC Graduate School of Management in France and is also a corporate branding consultant. His other popular titles include Kapferer on Luxury and The New Strategic Brand Management.

By defining the differences between premium and luxury brands and products, analysing the nature of true luxury brands and turning established marketing ‘rules’ upside down, The Luxury Strategy has established itself as the definitive work on the essence of a luxury brand strategy. This fully revised second edition of The Luxury Strategy explores the diversity of meanings of ‘luxury’ across different markets. It also includes a new section on marketing and selling luxury goods online and the impact of social networks and digital developments, cementing its position as the authority on luxury strategy.

Vincent Bastien is one of the most experienced senior managers in the luxury business. Formerly MD of Louis Vuitton Malletier and CEO of Yves Saint Laurent Parfums, he has held senior posts at some of the world’s most prestigious luxury brands. He is now Affiliate Professor at HEC Paris, teaching Strategy in Luxury.

Table of Contents 1 1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4 2 2.1 2.2 2.3 2.4 2.5 2.6 2.7 2.8 3 3.1 3.2 3.3 3.4

Back to luxury fundamentals In the beginning there was luxury The end of a confusion: premium is not luxury Anti-laws of marketing Facets of luxury today Luxury brands need specific management Customer attitudes vis-à-vis luxury Developing brand equity Luxury brand stretching Qualifying a product or service as luxury Pricing luxury Distribution and the internet dilemma Communicating luxury Financial and HR management of a luxury company Strategic perspectives Luxury business models Entering luxury and leaving it Learning from luxury Luxury and sustainable development: convergences and divergences

Marketing and PR

41


The Management of Luxury

This book

<< Explains how to streamline

marketing and management processes across a luxury business

An International Guide Edition 2

<< Contributes unique strategies from more than fifty luxury thought leaders across Europe, Asia, Australia, and the Americas

Date: Price:

03/06/2018 £29.99

ISBN Paperback: e-book:

9780749481827 9780749481810

Pages: Format (mm): Subject:

456 234x156 Luxury Marketing

<< New to this edition: how to

manage the changing Asian markets, the digitalization of sales, communication and product, new strategies for the evolving market and business of luxury

Author Information

Description

The Management of Luxury is a collection of twenty-six articles written by more than fifty contributors from around the world, edited by Benjamin Berghaus, Günter Müller-Stewens and Sven Reinecke.

The Management of Luxury, second edition, presents a unique snapshot of best practice insights on the increasing challenges faced in luxury business, with contributions shared by more than fifty global leaders on luxury management. The highly renowned editors draw these together into one essential handbook, ranging from luxury brand strategy, luxury consumer behaviour and market positioning, through to management succession, heritage, counterfeiting and competing effectively as a luxury SME.

Benjamin Berghaus is Head of the Competence Center for Luxury Management at the Institute of Marketing of University of St.Gallen (HSG), Switzerland. Günter Müller-Stewens is Professor of Management and Organization at the University of St.Gallen (HSG), Switzerland, and Director of its Institute of Management. Sven Reinecke is Associate Professor of Business Administration, specialized in Marketing, and Director of the Institute of Marketing at the University of St.Gallen (HSG), Switzerland.

42

Marketing and PR

Fully updated in its second edition, The Management of Luxury explores the newly evolving direction of Asian market trends and how to integrate digitalization into sales and product strategies. Both are crucial for competitive advantage in the luxury market, featured alongside iconic case studies such as Burberry, Louis Vuitton, and Leica. The book’s value is not only in streamlining management processes and return on investment; but equally for those who marvel at an industry unlike any other, striving to both trust in the conventional and innovate new paths towards the extraordinary. Highly influential, applicable and enlightening, it is a vital addition to every luxury business manager’s collection.

Table of Contents 1 The Luxury Market 1.1 Classifying Luxury and Prodigality [Michael Jäckel] 1.2 Exploring Luxury Consumer Behaviour [Prokopis Theodoridis, Sofia Vassou] 1.3 Identity-Driven Luxury Brand Management [Klaus Heine] 2 Luxury Brand Strategy 2.1 Public Luxury Representatives [Michael Breazeale, Christopher R Long, Daniela Ott] 2.2 Curating the Creative Genius in Luxury Firms [Charles Aaron Lawry, Sabrina Helm] 2.3 Arts Meet Luxury Brands [Carsten Baumgarth, Nicole Lohrisch, Olga Louisa Kastner] 2.4 Luxury as a Societal Mentor [George Panigyrakis, Eirini Koronaki] 2.5 Preserving Luxury Exclusivity Through Arts [Claude Chailan, Ivan Valek] 2.6 Brand Charismatic Legitimacy and Marketing of Adoration [Delphine Dion, Eric Arnould] 2.7 Digital Media in Monobrand Stores [Marcus Schögel, Timo Tischer] 3 Luxury Business Strategy 3.1 The Chinese Market – Entry Modes [Rui Wang, Kaibin He, Yue Wen]

3.2 Managing Brand Extensions in the Luxury Industry [Klaus-Peter Wiedmann, Christiane Klarmann, Nadine Hennigs, Stefan Behrens, Alexander Stigelski] 3.3 Managing Luxury Brands in the Digital Environment [Elisa Arrigo] 3.4 Competing as a Luxury SME [France Riguelle, Didier Van Caillie] 3.5 Insisting on Luxury to Survive [Michael Reinhold, Emil Annen] 3.6 Managing Price Fluctuations of Raw Materials through Innovation [Anne-Flore Maman] 3.7 The Counterfeit Timer© [Anne-Flore Maman, Camille Depigny] 3.8 Acting on Luxury Counterfeiting [Ludovica Cesareo, Alberto Pastore] 3.9 The Impact of Luxury Brands on Employees [Benjamin Berghaus, Sven Reinecke] 4 Luxury Responsibility 4.1 Heritage of Luxury and Responsibility [Duane Windsor] 4.2 Luxury Organizations and Responsibility – A Toolbox [Farah Montesa, René Rohrbeck] 4.3 Luxury Organizations and Social Responsibility – A Case Study [David S. Waller, Anurag G. Hingorani]


This book

<< Addresses the need to demonstrate growth in the face of the many unique challenges to the luxury sector

Kapferer on Luxury How Luxury Brands Can Grow Yet Remain Rare

<< Offers expert strategies that help sustain luxury growth at higher volumes without risking dilution

Edition 1

<< Includes recent and authoritative

international research into the basis of the luxury dream and a fresh approach to the specific obstacles to perceived exclusivity posed by the Internet

Date: Price:

03/03/2015 £29.99

ISBN Paperback: e-book:

9780749474362 9780749474379

Pages: Format (mm): Subject:

240 234x156 Luxury Marketing

Description

Author Information

Kapferer on Luxury addresses the No 1 challenge of all major luxury brands today: How can these brands pursue their growth yet remain luxury? How do you reconcile growth and rarity?

Jean-Noël Kapferer is one of world’s foremost thought leaders on luxury and its brands. An active researcher, HEC Paris graduate and PhDholder from Northwestern University’s Kellogg Business School (USA), Kapferer is co-author of The Luxury Strategy and The New Strategic Brand Management and has written many seminal articles. He is a sought after speaker, leading seminars on luxury all around the world at institutions such as HEC Paris, Tsing Hua University Beijing, Seoul Luxury Business Institute and LBI Shanghai. He is also advisor to the president of Inseec Business School (Paris).

Kapferer on Luxury offers a selection of the most recent and insightful articles and original essays on the luxury growth challenge from Jean-Noël Kapferer, a world-renowned luxury analyst and co-author of the reference book The Luxury Strategy. Each chapter addresses a specific issue relating to the luxury growth challenge such as sustaining the ‘luxury dream’, adapting the internet to luxury demands, re-widening the gap with premium brands’ competition, facing the demand of the Chinese clients, the importance of non-delocalization, rising sustainable quality and experiential standards, developing real luxury services and managing luxury brands within groups without diluting their equity and more. As such, Kapferer on Luxury is the perfect and timely resource for luxury executives, communication managers, luxury observers and advanced students willing to deepen their understanding of this major luxury challenge.

Table of Contents 1 Introduction: Growth issues for luxury 2 How luxury is changing 2.1 Sustaining the luxury dream: challenges and insights 2.2 Abundant rarity: the key to luxury growth 2.3 The artification of luxury: from artisans to artists 3 Specific issues and challenges 3.1 Luxury after the crisis: pro logo or no logo? 3.2 Why luxury should not delocalize: a critique of a growing tendency 3.3 Internet and luxury: under-adopted or illadapted? 3.4 Does luxury have a minimum price?: an exploratory study into consumers’ psychology of luxury prices 3.5 All that glitters is not green: the challenge of sustainable luxury 4 The business side of luxury brands’ growth 4.1 Not all luxuries act alike: the distinct business models of luxury brands

4.2 The LVMH–Bulgari agreement: what changes in the luxury market lead family companies to sell up? 4.3 Developing luxury brands within luxury groups: synergies without dilution?

Marketing and PR

43


Rethinking Prestige Branding

This book

<< Hones premium marketing skills by

helping readers understand how the prestige marketing model seeks to attract the media, analysts and consumers

Secrets of the Ueber-Brands Edition 1 Date: Price:

<< Provides insight into both the

practical marketing of prestige brands and how consumers respond to them psychologically and emotionally

03/05/2015 £19.99

<< Shows how to upgrade brands

ISBN Paperback: e-book:

9780749470036 9780749470043

Pages: Format (mm): Subject:

272 234x156 Luxury Marketing

facing the ‘squeeze in the middle’, a polarization to high-end/lifestyle or commoditized retailer brands

Author Information

Description

Wolfgang Schaefer is Chief Strategic Officer at SelectNY, one of the world’s leading premium brand building networks. Wolf has been building global brand strategies for over 20 years in Europe, the US and Asia Pacific for companies as diverse as PepsiCo, P&G, Unilever, Coty and Nestle. His main expertise lies in prestige brands such as Davidoff, Chopard, Swarovski, Lancaster amongst many others. Holding an MA from the University of the Arts Berlin,

What makes someone covet a Kelly bag? Why are Cirque Du Soleil or Grey Goose so successful despite breaking all the conventions of their categories? What does Gucci’s approach to marketing have in common with Nespresso’s? And why do some people pay a relative fortune for Renova toilet paper or Aesop detergent even though they hardly ever ‘advertise’ and seem to have none of the ‘functional performance advantages’ conventional marketers would seek to demonstrate? Prestige brand experts JP Kuehlwein and Wolfgang Schaefer have dedicated themselves to studying what drives the success of prestige brands. Rethinking Prestige Branding collects their insights.

JP Kuehlwein is Executive Vice President at Frédéric Fekkai, a New York-based prestige salon operator and hair care brand and an Outside Director of Smith & Norbu, a luxury optical frame maker in Hong Kong. He draws on over twenty years of hands-on experience in managing brands at Procter & Gamble across markets in Europe, North America and Asia. JP holds degrees in international management and business analysis from the universities of Reutlingen (Germany), Reims (France) and Lancaster (UK).

44

Marketing and PR

Uncovering the secrets of why and how some brands are created more equal than others, Rethinking Prestige Branding includes over 100 case studies from Apple and Abercrombie & Fitch to Tate Modern and Tesla. Rather than re-telling brand success stories or re-hashing long-standing marketing principles, it takes readers on a colourful journey behind the scenes of today’s marketing pros. This book will fascinate the marketing professional just as much as those who are simply curious as to how premium brands tick.

Table of Contents 1 Rethinking prestige branding 1.1 The times they are a-changing 1.2 From marker to myth – a brief history of branding 1.3 A new kind of prestige – or what we mean by Ueber-Brands™ 2 The seven secrets of Ueber-Brands 2.1 Principle 1: Mission incomparable – the first rule is to make your own 2.2 Principle 2: Longing versus belonging – the challenge is both 2.3 Principle 3: Un-selling – the superiority of seduction 2.4 Principle 4: From myth to meaning – the best way up is to go deep 2.5 Principle 5: Behold! – the product as manifestation 2.6 Principle 6: Living the dream – the bubble shall never burst 2.7 Principle 7: Growth without end – the ultimate balancing act


This book

<< Explains how to use market

research tools and methods to obtain the most reliable results, taking examples from companies including Adidas, Marks & Spencer, Grohe and General Motors

Market Research in Practice An Introduction to Gaining Greater Market Insight

<< Helps readers negotiate the

Edition 3

<< Shows anyone who commissions

Date: Price:

03/03/2016 £29.99

ISBN Paperback: e-book:

9780749475857 9780749475864

Pages: Format (mm): Subject:

400 240x170 Market Research

intricate bends of conducting effective market research market research how to manage a project

Description

Author Information

Market research has never been more important. As organizations become increasingly sophisticated, the need to profile customers, deliver customer satisfaction, target certain audiences, develop their brands, optimize prices and more has grown. Lively and accessible, Market Research in Practice is a practical introduction to market research tools, approaches and issues. Providing a clear, step-by-step guide to the whole process – from planning and executing a project through to analysing and presenting the findings – it explains how to use tools and methods effectively to obtain reliable results.

Paul Hague is MD of B2B International. With 35 years of experience running market research agencies, his clients include some of the largest corporations in Europe and the United States.

This fully updated third edition of Market Research in Practice has been revised to reflect the most recent trends in the industry. Ten new chapters cover topical issues such as ethics in market research and qualitative and quantitative research, plus key concepts such as international research, how to design and scope a survey, how to create a questionnaire, how to choose a sample and how to carry out interviews are covered in detail. Tips, and advice from the authors’ own extensive experiences are included throughout to ground the concepts in business reality. Accompanied by a range of online tools, templates, surveys and guides, this is an invaluable guide for students of research methods, researchers, marketers and users of market research.

Table of Contents 1 2 3 3.1 3.2 3.3

Introduction Market research design Uses of market research Uses of market research Using market research to segment markets Using market research to improve brand position 3.4 Using market research to improve customer satisfaction and loyalty 3.5 Using market research to achieve optimum pricing 3.6 Using market research to enter a new market 3.7 Using market research to test advertising effectiveness 3.8 Using market research to launch new product 4 Qualitative research 4.1 Qualitative Research 4.2 Desk Research 4.3 Focus Groups 4.4 Depth Interviews 4.5 Observation & ethnography 5 Quantitative research 5.1 Quantitative research 5.2 Sampling

5.3 Questionnaire design 5.4 Face-to-face interviewing 5.5 Telephone interviewing 5.6 Self-completion questionnaires 5.7 E-surveys 5.8 Data & statistical analysis 6 Reporting 6.1 Reporting 6.2 International Market Research 6.3 Trends in the Market Research Industry 6.4 Ethics in market research

Matthew Harrison holds a degree in international management with French from the University of Bath. He is CEO of B2B International and previously set up and ran the company’s offices in Beijing and New York. Julia Cupman is a global director of B2B International, where she has led market research projects for over 70 large companies across a variety of industry sectors. Oliver Truman is a director of B2B International and has a responsibility for technical development. He is a graduate in linguistics from Manchester University and began life as a market research interviewer at B2B international eight years ago.

Marketing and PR

45


Questionnaire Design

This book

<< Provides a toolkit to structure,

compose and design questionnaires for business application

How to Plan, Structure and Write Survey Material for Effective Market Research Edition 4

mobile devices and the new ways to measure and collect data

<< Examines the various software

options available and how to select for different research purposes

Date: Price:

Market Research in Practice 03/04/2018 ÂŁ29.99

ISBN Paperback: e-book:

9780749481971 9780749481988

Pages: Format (mm): Subject:

312 234x156 Market Research

Series:

<< Addresses the rising challenges of

Author Information

Description

Ian Brace has worked in market research for more than 40 years. He is a fellow of the Market Research Society (MRS), running training courses on Questionnaire Design and a member of the MRS Market Research Standards Board. He has previously been director of research methods at TNS UK, a visiting professor in market research at Bristol Business School and has worked for MAS Survey Research, NOP, Esso Petroleum, BJM Research and NFO WorldGroup. Ian Brace has earned industry awards from AMSO (Research Effectiveness Awards), the Academy of Marketing and ISBA.

Market research methods in business are changing. Questionnaire Design, fourth edition, delivers a complete handbook for the mounting challenge of acquiring more data in less time, generating an entire rethink on how data is collected. The growth in mobile devices is limiting the readability of traditional measurement tools, new consumer channels are altering access, whilst time spent answering questions is decreasing exponentially. This book provides practical guidelines to plan, structure and compose questionnaires across all industries and purposes, ensuring valuable data insights are captured with accuracy and efficiency. Fully revised, the fourth edition of Questionnaire Design includes a new chapter on how to navigate the multiple software options available, simplifying the selection process for different business functions. New guidance is available on how to engage and retain respondents earlier on at planning stage, using new design approaches and measurement tools on mobile to prolong respondent time. Updates also cover advances in data privacy, maximizing international reach and managing the transition from face-to-face surveys towards soft launches online. Whether applying to business positioning, consumer insights, employee feedback or product analysis, the ability to gauge a market snapshot on a global scale is escalating the demand for online survey and questionnaire data rapidly. This book is an essential addition to every professionalâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s shelf.

Table of Contents 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

46

Marketing and PR

Objectives in Writing A Questionnaire The Data Collection Media Planning the Questionnaire Types of Questions Data Types Rating Scales Behavioural Questions Attitude and Image Measurement Writing the Questionnaire The Look of the Questionnaire Questionnaire Design Software Engaging the Respondent Online Piloting the Questionnaire Ethical Issues Social Desirability Bias International Surveys


This book

<< Clearly explains all the key methods of user research, including face-toface user testing, card sorting, diary studies, ethnography, stakeholder workshops, surveys, A/B testing and many more

User Research A Practical Guide to Designing Better Products and Services Edition 1

<< Enables readers to improve existing products and services, adapt to customers’ changing expectations, influence stakeholders’ decisions with evidence, and save money by getting things right the first time through user research methodologies

<< Allows readers to identify and

engage the most appropriate users for their research, carry out the research effectively, and interpret the resulting data to glean evidence-backed business insights

Date: Price:

03/03/2018 £29.99

ISBN Paperback: e-book:

9780749481049 9780749481056

Pages: Format (mm): Subject:

224 234x156 Market Research

Description

Author Information

Many businesses are based on creating desirable experiences, products and services for users. However in spite of this, companies often fail to consider the end user – the customer – in their planning and development processes. As a result, organizations find themselves spending huge sums of money creating products and services that, quite simply, don’t work. User experience research, also known as UX research, focuses on understanding user behaviours, needs and motivations through a range of observational techniques, task analysis and other methodologies.

Dr Stephanie Marsh is one of the UK’s leading UX research professionals, and is currently a Senior User Researcher in the UK Government Digital Services. She was previously the Head of Digital Strategy for the UK Ministry of Defence and a user research consultant for Bunnyfoot (one of the UK’s foremost user research consultancy provider, with clients including BBC, Arsenal, easyJet, Boden and Oxfam).

User Research is a practical guide that shows readers how to use the vast array of user research methods available. Covering all the key research methods including face-to-face user testing, card sorting, surveys, A/B testing and many more, the book gives expert insight into the nuances, advantages and disadvantages of each, while also providing guidance on how to interpret, analyze and share the data once it has been obtained. Ultimately, User Research is about putting natural powers of observation and conversation to use in a specific way. The book isn’t bogged down with small, specific, technical detail – rather, it explores the fundamentals of user research, which remain true regardless of the context in which they are applied. As such, the tools and frameworks given here can be used in any sector or industry, to improve any part of the customer journey and experience; whether that means improving software, websites, customer services, products, packaging or more.

Table of Contents 1

The Fundamentals – What Good Research Looks Like 1.1 Getting the Right Participants 1.2 Ethical Considerations 1.3 Asking the Right Kind of Questions 1.4 Understanding the Importance of Observation – What People Say and What People Do are Two Different Things 1.5 Behaviour vs. Opinion 2 What Research You Need to Do Depends on the Situation You Find Yourself In 2.1 Identify Research Situations 2.2 Identify the Method(s) to Use 2.3 How to Analyze and Share the Result 2.4 Overview of Individual Research Methods 2.5 When and Where to Conduct this Kind of Research 2.6 The Time Required to Prepare and Run the Research 2.7 How to Prepare for the Research 2.8 How to Do the Research and Gather the Data

3 3.1 3.2 3.3

What to Do with All That Data Overview of the Analysis and Sharing Methods When and Where to Use these Methods How to Use Them Effectively

Marketing and PR

47


Neuro Design

This book

Neuromarketing Insights to Boost Engagement and Profitability Edition 1

<< Enables those involved with the

design and development of online content to increase the credibility and persuasiveness of their work and turn website visitors into customers

<< Introduces readers to new, cuttingDate: Price:

03/02/2017 £19.99

ISBN Paperback: e-book:

9780749478889 9780749478896

Pages: Format (mm): Subject:

264 234x156 Market Research

edge ideas from the academic literature as well as commercial research in relation to neuro design and neuroaesthetics

<< Explains high-level, complex neuroresearch in plain English

Author Information

Description

Darren Bridger works as a consultant to designers and marketers, advising on using and analysing data that tap into consumers’ nonconscious thinking and motivations. He was one of the original pioneers of the Consumer Neuroscience industry, helping to pioneer two of the first companies in the field then joining the world’s largest agency, Neurofocus (now part of the Nielsen company), as its second employee outside of the US. He currently works as head of insights at NeuroStrata.

Today, businesses of all sizes generate a great deal of creative graphic media and content, including websites, presentations, videos and social media posts. Most big companies, including Procter & Gamble, Coca-Cola, Tesco and Google, now use neuroscience research and theories to optimize their digital content. Neuro Design opens up this new world of neuromarketing design theories and recommendations, and describes insights from the growing field of neuroaesthetics that will enable readers to enhance customer engagement with their website and boost profitability. Online resources include web links to inspiring reading, and further website resources.

Table of Contents 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

48

Marketing and PR

What is Neuro Design? Neuroaesthetics Processing Fluency How First Impressions Work Multisensory and Emotional Design Visual Saliency Maps Visual Persuasion and Behavioural Economics Designing for Screens Viral Designs Designing Presentation Slides Conducting Neuro Design Research Conclusion


This book

<< Features more underpinning theory to reflect the current state of play for marketing communications experts, including mobile, marketing automation, locationbased marketing, social media campaigns and audits, content marketing, split testing, new listening tools and analytics

<< Addresses the latest integrated

offline and online with social media approach, with a particular emphasis on analytics, engagement and integration

<< Helps readers understand

difficult concepts with jargon-free explanations and extensive realworld examples and case studies from companies such as Campbell’s Soup, Spotify, PayPal, Liberty Insurance, Kraft and Nike

Marketing Communications Offline and Online Integration, Engagement and Analytics Edition 6

Date: Price:

03/02/2016 £39.99

ISBN Paperback: e-book:

9780749473402 9780749473419

Pages: Format (mm): Subject:

600 246x189 Marketing Communications

Description

Author Information

Marketing Communications provides a comprehensive overview of every aspect of marketing communications, from social media, advertising, PR and sponsorship to direct selling and merchandizing. It presents modern marketing communications theories and tools in an accessible way so readers can fully understand the landscape and achieve better results. With a plethora of examples and case studies, as well as online support material for lecturers and students, this essential textbook will guide students and practitioners through everything they need to know about the changing face of marketing.

PR Smith is a marketing consultant, bestselling business author and inspirational speaker. Paul has helped hundreds of businesses, from innovative start-ups to established blue-chip companies, boost their results with better marketing.

This fully updated 6th edition of Marketing Communications features more of the underpinning theory whilst building on its impressive reputation as a leading practical textbook on the subject. Case studies and anecdotes from companies such as Campbell’s Soup, Spotify, Paypal, Kraft and Nike focus on recent digital developments to bring the latest marketing tools to life. With a particular emphasis on analytics, engagement and integration, it addresses the integrated offline and online with social media approach to reflect the current state of play for marketing communications experts. This edition is also supported by a wealth of online resources, including lecture slides for every chapter and self-tests for students.

Ze Zook is an integrated marketing author, lecturer, producer and consultant specializing in helping the creative industries fulfil both their missions and business goals. He has worked with the ballet, film and music industries and with sponsors such as Sainsbury’s and The Prince’s Trust. Ze is a visiting academic at Regent’s University London and he consults on digital marketing for private-sector disruptive start-ups.

Hear What the Experts Think: Angela Byrne, Senior Lecturer at MMU – https://youtu.be/04Kqku3TUqA Alison Lawson, Senior Lecturer in Marketing at Derby University – https://youtu.be/ UPd56wfWC0g

Table of Contents 1 Communications background and theories 1.1 New marketing communications 1.2 Branding 1.3 Customer relationship management 1.4 Buyer behaviour 1.5 Communications theory 1.6 Marketing communications research 1.7 Media buying and planning 1.8 Marketing communications agencies 1.9 International marketing communications 1.10 The marketing communications plan 1.11 The changing communications environment 2 Communication tools 2.1 Selling, social selling, sales management and key account management 2.2 Advertising

2.3 Publicity and public relations 2.4 Sponsorship 2.5 Sales promotions, gaming and content marketing 2.6 Direct mail (including e-mail) 2.7 Exhibitions, conferences and events 2.8 Merchandising and point of sale 2.9 Packaging 2.10 Owned media – websites and social media

Marketing and PR

49


Experiential Marketing

This book

<< Cuts through jargon with

practical steps to plan, inspire, activate and evaluate tangible results

A Practical Guide to Interactive Brand Experiences Edition 2

cutting edge marketing strategy for competitive advantage

<< Clarifies how to integrate

Date: Price:

03/12/2017 £19.99

ISBN Paperback: e-book:

9780749480967 9780749480974

Pages: Format (mm): Subject:

<< Puts the reader at the forefront of

immersive brand experiences with targeted outreach, creative content strategy and a live social media domino effect

272 234x156 Marketing Communications

Author Information

Description

Shirra Smilansky is CEO and Executive Creative Director of Electrify Worldwide Ltd, an international brand engagement agency working with clients such as L’Oreal Luxe, Carling, Selfridges, Harvey Nichols, Lancome and Yves Saint Laurent. She is also the Cofounder of an MA degree ‘Experiential Meets Digital’ and former Visiting Professor at London Metropolitan University. With over 15 years in the industry, Shirra is an impactful thought-leader, entrepreneur and innovator in experiential marketing, co-founding her first company BlazinStar Experiential back in 2003.

The immersive brand experience is revolutionizing brand engagement. Experiential Marketing, 2nd edition, cuts through the jargon with clear practical guidelines on how to magnify marketing strategies to a powerful new level. This book emphasizes that experiential marketing is not just about creating a live event. A unique, immersive experience allows businesses to generate a surge of brand engagement, amplified immediately by a niche target of consumers through live content sharing and social media streams. This comprehensive 2nd edition of Experiential Marketing pinpoints exactly where this innovative strategy fits in with the current marketing and events climate, including a stepby-step outline to plan, integrate and evaluate its game-changing results. The completely refreshed new edition analyzes the latest industry advances and case studies, including four new chapters on the digital experience and merged realities, plus the experience economy and creative explosion of the ‘Pop-Up’ phenomenon. Accompanied with a digital toolkit of additional resources, this book is essential reading for marketing, business, media and events professionals alike, alongside strategic decision makers seeking competitive advantage in a vibrant new era of marketing strategy.

Table of Contents 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20

50

Marketing and PR

Why experiential marketing? Digital experiences & merged realities The experience economy is here Customer experience The pop-up phenomenon Outsourcing vs in-house BETTER IDEA Situation and background Experiential objectives Target audience Message – key communication Experiential strategy Selected locations and brand ambassadors Systems and mechanisms for measurement Action Gauging effectiveness Evaluation Interviews Conclusion


This book

<< Written by global industry thoughtleader Rebecca Lieb, who has conducted and published more content marketing research than anyone else

<< Shares the results of deep

quantitative research and hundreds of hours of interviews with senior marketers at the world’s most respected brands

<< Reveals the value content can

not only bring to owned media initiatives, such as company websites or blogs, but also the essential role content plays in all other marketing initiatives, from social media to advertising to offline channels

Content – The Atomic Particle of Marketing The Definitive Guide to Content Marketing Strategy Edition 1

Date: Price:

03/06/2017 £19.99

ISBN Paperback: e-book:

9780749479756 9780749479763

Pages: Format (mm): Subject:

240 234x156 Marketing Communications, Digital Marketing

Description

Author Information

Content, in all its forms, is the single most critical element of any marketing campaign. Finding a successful equilibrium between content marketing and content strategy is difficult, but essential. Content – The Atomic Particle of Marketing goes beyond superficial descriptions of how to produce engaging social media content to offer the results of many years of deep quantitative research, and hours of interviews with senior marketers at some of the world’s leading brands.

Rebecca Lieb is a strategic advisor, research analyst, keynote speaker, author and columnist. She works with many of the world’s leading brands on digital marketing innovation. Clients range from start-ups to non-profits to Fortune 100 brands and regulated industries, including Facebook, Nestlé, Adobe, Fidelity, IBM, Save the Children, Pinterest, Cisco and The Federal Reserve Bank of New York. Previously, she was Altimeter Group’s digital advertising and media analyst, and prior to that she was Vice President at Econsultancy. Rebecca was VP and Editor-In-Chief of The ClickZ Network for over seven years.

Written by a recognised industry thought-leader, Content – The Atomic Particle of Marketing explores how content functions in the broader framework of all marketing, as well as organizational concerns and IT decision making. It demonstrates the value content brings not only to “owned” media initiatives, such as a company website or blog, but also the essential role content plays in all other marketing initiatives, from social media to advertising to offline channels. It will enable readers to make the organizational, staffing, tools and process decisions necessary to get content up and running across divisions and organizational silos. Deeply researched and insightful, Content – The Atomic Particle of Marketing is, quite simply, the definitive research-based guide to content marketing.

Table of Contents 1 2 3

Content – The New Marketing Equation Content Marketing vs Content Strategy The Converged Media Imperative – The Role Content Plays in Paid, Owned and Earned Media 4 Native Advertising 5 Organizing for Content – Models to Incorporate Content Strategy & Content Marketing in the Enterprise 6 A Culture of Content 7 Global Content Strategy 8 Real-Time Marketing – The Agility to Leverage ‘Now’ 9 The Content Marketing Software Landscape 10 Content Marketing Performance 11 Connected Experiences – From Websites to Wearables to Wherever

Marketing and PR

51


Valuable Content Marketing

This book

<< Shows how to create valuable,

targeted and discoverable content, thereby turning prospects into buyers and buyers into long-term loyal customers

How to Make Quality Content Your Key to Success Edition 2

<< Explains exactly what type of

content is needed to promote a business

Date: Price:

03/07/2015 £19.99

ISBN Paperback: e-book:

9780749473273 9780749473280

Pages: Format (mm): Subject:

<< Teaches how to produce valuable

content in a clear and compelling way

328 234x156 Marketing Communications

Author Information

Description

Sonja Jefferson shows you what to write. A content marketing consultant and trainer with a background in professional sales, she founded Valuable Content, which helps business owners get their message across in the right way. She reaches the heart of the message, producing and sharing the right type of information to help a business grow.

From websites, white papers and blogs to tweets, newsletters and video, content is king in the digital world, now more than ever before. Get it right and you have a huge opportunity to connect with clients and customers in ways they appreciate and trust – they’ll be knocking at your door wanting to do business with you. Valuable Content Marketing shows you how to create and share the type of information that clients, customers and search engines really want – on your website, using social media and through more traditional methods. Whether you’re starting a business or aiming to grow, this book shows you how to get better results from your marketing efforts.

Sharon Tanton shows you how to write. Creative Director at Valuable Content, she is a copywriter with a background in crafting stories. Working in radio, television, magazine features and internal communications, she helps companies convey their message in a way that audiences appreciate.

Marketing with valuable content really works – this book shows you how to grow your business by raising awareness of your brand, turning prospects into buyers and buyers into long-term fans. This fully revised second edition of Valuable Content Marketing is a clear, practical guide that helps you make sense of marketing in the digital world and learn to enjoy the journey. It includes new ideas and examples, step-by-step action lists, quick tips and goal-driven chapter summaries to make understanding the key concepts easier than ever. Perfect for smallbusiness owners and sales, marketing and branding professionals as well as practitioners in publicity or corporate communications, it provides inspiration from companies of all sizes that have got valuable content marketing right, from small companies like software development from Desynit to household names like HSBC.

Table of Contents 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11

52

Marketing and PR

12

Introduction; Why valuable content? Buying has changed. Has your marketing caught up? What is valuable content and why does it win you business? Guiding principles for your valuable content ; What valuable content? Blogging Social media Email newsletters Search engine optimization Deeper written content, e-books, white papers, SlideShares and published books Video, audio, infographics and more Widen your reach: PR, guest blogging, events and paid Advertising; How to supercharge your business with valuable content Pulling together a valuable content strategy

13 14 15 16

Making your website valuable How to write valuable content How to sell with valuable content Winning the challenge of constant content generation 17 Troubleshooting Q&A: answers to the big content questions 18 Conclusion and your new manifesto for marketing people love


This book

<< Aids decision making and

implementation in the digital marketing and sustainable development arenas

Customer-Centric Marketing Supporting Sustainability in the Digital Age

<< Helps marketers attract and retain

customers by illustrating how new technologies can be harnessed to promote growth and customer satisfaction

<< Strengthens the competitive

advantage of organizations by suggesting solutions to problems facing practitioners

Edition 1

Date: Price:

03/02/2015 ÂŁ19.99

ISBN Paperback: e-book:

9780749472092 9780749472108

Pages: Format (mm): Subject:

256 234x156 Marketing Fundamentals

Description

Author Information

Two of the major parallel challenges facing businesses today are how to adapt to the changes of fast-paced, fragmenting markets and how to grow a business whilst engaging in recognisably sustainable practices. It is not enough to just be sustainable, it is about communicating it and getting the customer involved in the message. Customer-Centric Marketing shows readers how sustainable development practices and digital marketing techniques work naturally together to add value, leading to improved customer satisfaction, better professional relationships and increased effectiveness.

Neil Richardson is a Senior Marketing Lecturer at Leeds Beckett University and a Chartered Institute of Marketing Course Leader. He has over 20 years of experience in sales management, marketing and customer service in the B2B sector.

Ideal for senior marketing professionals and students on digital marketing or marketing strategy modules who wish to utilise the benefits of sustainable development and forms of digital marketing, this accessible and straight to-the-point book uses case studies to show how the marketing theories and tools work in actual business scenarios. Customer-Centric Marketing covers contemporary issues such as the increasing use of mobile, QR codes and social network sites for consumers interested in ethical, environmental and sustainable marketing.

Neil Kelley is a Senior Examiner for the Chartered Institute of Marketing (CAM Marketing and Consumer Behaviour) and Senior Lecturer for Marketing at Leeds Beckett University. He was previously Senior Territory Manager for Electronic Arts, contributing to the marketing and promotion of products such as The Sims and a variety of EA Sports titles.

Table of Contents

Jon James is a Senior Lecturer in Marketing at Leeds Beckett (formerly Leeds Metropolitan) University. Jon has provided strategic business & marketing consultancy to organisations in both the public and private sectors. His research interests include global & international marketing, marketing management and SME development.

1 1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4

Changing landscapes Developments in society Why do companies fail? Orientations Marketing and sustainability: Separating facts from fiction 2 Knowing your own company 2.1 Digital marketing and research 2.2 Systems and customer-centricity 3 Building relationships 3.1 How stakeholders make buying decisions 3.2 Users and/or customers? 3.3 The sustainable customer 3.4 Acquiring, retaining and satisfying customers 3.5 Communities and networks 4 Marketing planning 4.1 Goal setting: Mission (or vision) statement, corporate objectives and gap analysis 4.2 Situation review: The internal (micro) and external (macro) environments 4.3 Marketing objectives, strategy formulation and tactical implementation 4.4 Resource allocation: Monitoring, evaluation and control

4.5 Barriers to adopting sustainable marketing planning: And how to overcome them 5 The marketing mix 5.1 Communications 5.2 Convenience for customers 5.3 Customer benefits 5.4 Cost or sacrifice 5.5 Services and sustainability 6 What does the future hold? 6.1 What does the future hold?

Marketing and PR

53


Marketing Analytics

This book

<< Simplifies intimidating data,

segmentation and predictive analytics tools for everyday use in business, using real world marketing problems to apply to a range of practical scenarios

A Practical Guide to Improving Consumer Insights Using Data Techniques Edition 2

<< Provides accessibility and

insightful application of techniques regardless of experience level

Date: Price:

03/04/2018 £29.99

ISBN Paperback: e-book:

9780749482169 9780749482176

Pages: Format (mm): Subject:

248 234x156 Marketing Science

<< New to this edition: Three new

chapters on panel data regression, insights and how to collect, separate and analyze data using big data analytics; added tools such as tobit analysis – a customer lifetime value framework

Author Information

Description

Mike Grigsby is vice president of customer insights and advanced analytics at Brierley and Partners in Texas, US. With more than 25 years of experience, he is the former vice president of strategic business analysis and advanced analytics at Targetbase, director of marketing science for Millward Brown and has held leadership positions at Hewlett-Packard and Gap. Mike Grigsby is also well-known in academia, having written articles for academic and trade journals. He is a teaching professor for both graduate and undergraduate levels and regularly speaks at trade conventions and seminars.

Who is most likely to buy and what is the best way to target them? How can businesses improve strategy without identifying the key influencing factors? The second edition of Marketing Analytics enables marketers and business analysts to leverage predictive techniques to measure and improve performance. By exploring real-world marketing challenges, it provides clear, jargon-free explanations on how to apply different analytical models for each purpose. From targeted list creation and data segmentation, to testing campaign effectiveness, pricing structures and forecasting demand, this book offers a welcome handbook on how statistics, consumer analytics and modelling can be put to optimal use. The fully revised second edition of Marketing Analytics includes three new chapters on big data analytics, insights and panel regression, including how to collect, separate and analyze big data. It also overhauls with advancing tools and techniques in predictive analytics, translating models such as tobit analysis for customer lifetime value into everyday use. Whether an experienced practitioner or having no prior knowledge, methodologies are simplified to ensure the more complex aspects of data and analytics are fully accessible for any level of application. Complete with downloadable data sets and test bank resources, this book supplies a concrete foundation to optimize marketing analytics for day-to-day business advantage.

Table of Contents 1 2

Introduction to Marketing Analytics Overview – How Can Marketing Analytics Help You? 2.1 A Brief Statistics Review 2.2 Brief Principles of Consumer Behaviour and Marketing Strategy 2.3 What is an Insight? 3 Dependent Variable Techniques 3.1 What Drives Demand? Modelling Dependent Variable Techniques 3.2 Who is Most Likely to Buy and How Do I Target Them? 3.3 When are My Customers Most Likely to Buy? 3.4 How to Incorporate Cross-Sectional Time Series 3.5 Systems of Equations 4 Inter-Relationship Techniques 4.1 What Does My Customer Market Look Like? 4.2 Segmentation – Tools and Techniques 5 More Important Topics for Everyday Marketing

54

Marketing and PR

5.1 Statistics Testing – How Do I Know What Works? 5.2 Implementing Big Data and Big Data Analytics 6 Conclusion 6.1 The Finale – What Should You Take Away From This?


This book

<< Introduces a marketing metrics

model developed by experts at Cranfield School of Management that allows all participants to monitor and measure the effectiveness of any marketing strategy

<< Details key steps in the framework

Marketing Value Metrics A New Metrics Model to Measure Marketing Effectiveness Edition 2

and modelling processes

<< Creates a solid basis of

understanding how to go about designing the right metrics for the organizational goals

Date: Price:

03/10/2014 £24.99

ISBN Paperback: e-book:

9780749468972 9780749468989

Pages: Format (mm): Subject:

328 240x170 Marketing Science

Description

Author Information

This second edition of Marketing Accountability, now called Marketing Value Metrics, introduces and guides readers through a metrics model developed at the renowned Cranfield School of Management that not only shows how marketing systematically contributes to shareholder value, but also provides a metrics-based framework for developing and implementing marketing strategies that are measurable and accountable. Malcolm McDonald, Stan Maklan and Peter Mouncey introduce strategic marketing planning and then describe in detail the key steps in the modelling process as well as the procedures for applying it in practice.

Professor Malcolm McDonald is Emeritus Professor of Marketing at Cranfield School of Management, having formerly been the Marketing Director of Canada Dry.

Updated throughout, this new edition includes the latest digital and social media metrics and advice on measuring the effectiveness of multichannel strategies. Marketing Value Metrics will enable marketing executives to measure more effectively the impact of marketing activity against organizational goals and will empower marketing teams and their managers to justify and defend their plans and strategies to their CEOs and CFOs.

Peter Mouncey has over 40 years’ experience in the field of marketing, and is a Visiting Fellow of Cranfield School of Management. He is also the Editor-in-Chief of the Market Research Society’s International Journal of Market Research. Stan Maklan is Reader in Strategic Marketing at Cranfield University. In addition he is an experienced marketer and consultant.

Table of Contents 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13

Introduction Strategic marketing planning – a brief overview A three-level marketing accountability framework A process of Marketing Due Diligence The Marketing Value Metrics model and process Segmentation – the basic building block for markets How to become the first choice for the customers you want Turning strategy into action, and measuring outcomes Delivering accountability – finalizing the metrics strategy Why data quality can make or break accountability Assessing the effectiveness of customer strategies – Stan Maklan and Hugh Wilson Social media: metrics and measurement – Robert Stratton Assessing the value of market assets – David Haigh and Stan Maklan

Marketing and PR

55


Geodemographics for Marketers

This book

<< Demonstrates how to implement

and improve the use of geodemographics across industries and sectors

Using Location Analysis for Research and Marketing

<< Features case studies from Edition 1

the automotive industry, the telecommunications industry, retail, the Scottish Referendum, the 2011 UK Census, Callcreditâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s international CAMEO classifications and more to bring the field to life Incorporates the newly introduced generation of geographical classifications and discusses the key census changes proposed for 2021

Series: Date: Price:

Marketing Science 03/01/2016 ÂŁ29.99

ISBN Paperback: e-book:

9780749473822 9780749473839

Pages: Format (mm): Subject:

232 234x156 Marketing Science

<< Supported by a range of online resources, including figures, practical sessions and learning feedback

Author Information

Description

Dr Barry Leventhal is a leading UK authority on geodemographics. He chairs the Census and Geodemographics Group (CGG), an advisory board of The Market Research Society (MRS), and is a leading voice in the UK information industry.

Geodemographics, the process of analyzing survey data to profile economic and demographic characteristics of populations, is a successful data-driven analysis tool for marketers. Geodemographic classifications are widely embedded in customer databases and market research datasets. Written by a leading UK authority on geodemographics, Geodemographics for Marketers provides marketers with the know-how to leverage it as an effective research tool to identify location-based segments for highly targeted marketing. International in scope and impartial in its approach, this book demonstrates how to implement geodemographics techniques for practical application in retail, financial services and telecommunications as well as the public sector. Geodemographics for Marketers includes numerous case studies, from the automotive, retail and telecommunications sectors to the public sector, that illustrate core concepts and how they can be applied to gain positive results. It is also supported by a range of online resources, including figures, practical sessions and learning feedback. The book also incorporates the newly introduced generation of classifications, as well as a discussion of the key decisions of the proposed 2021 census.

Table of Contents 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

56

Marketing and PR

Introduction An overview of geodemographics Big data and geodemographics Key data sources Geodemographic classification systems Other types of geodemographic discriminators The mechanics of using geodemographics Applications in various industry sectors Choosing a geodemographic classification The international perspective Creating your own information products Looking to the future


This book

<< Provides an impartial overview

of the various solution vendors and software providers available, enabling readers to select the most appropriate predictive analytic tools for their needs

Predictive Analytics for Marketers Using Data Mining for Business Advantage

<< Features international case

studies gleaned from the author’s more than 25 years of industry experience, and contains supplementary articles from recognised thought-leaders in the field

<< Gives a holistic, balanced overview of predictive analytics, the universal branch of advanced analytics used to make predictions about unknown future events

Edition 1

Date: Price:

03/02/2018 £19.99

ISBN Paperback: e-book:

9780749479930 9780749479947

Pages: Format (mm): Subject:

240 234x156 Marketing Science

Description

Author Information

Predictive Analytics has revolutionized marketing practice. It involves using many techniques from data mining, statistics, modelling, machine learning and artificial intelligence, to analyze current data and make predictions about unknown future events. In business terms, this enables companies to forecast consumer behaviour and much more. Predictive Analytics for Marketers will guide marketing professionals on how to apply predictive analytical tools to streamline business practices. Including comprehensive coverage of an array of predictive analytic tools and techniques, this book enables readers to harness patterns from past data, to make accurate and useful predictions that can be converted to business success. Truly global in its approach, the insights these techniques offer can be used to manage resources more effectively across all industries and sectors.

Dr Barry Leventhal is a leading UK authority on geodemographics and marketing analytics expert. He chairs the Census and Geodemographics Group (CGG), which is an advisory board of The Market Research Society (MRS) and is a leading voice in the UK information industry.

Written in clear, non-technical language, Predictive Analytics for Marketers contains case studies from the author’s more than 25 years of experience and articles from guest contributors, demonstrating how predictive analytics has been used to successfully achieve a range of business purposes.

Table of Contents 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13

How can Predictive Analytics Help Your Business? A Key Approach – The Data Mining Process The Data for Predictive Analytics The Toolkit of Analytical Modelling Techniques From Customers to Citizens – Applications in Different Sectors From People to Products – Using Predictive Analytics for Pricing and Markdown Management Segmenting Your Customers Predicting the Future Behaviour of Your Customers How Long Will Each Customer Stay with You? Using Network Analysis to Identify Your Key influencers Testing and Evaluating the Benefits of Predictive Analytics Visualising the Behaviour of Your Customer Base Final Tips and Conclusions

Marketing and PR

57


Artificial Intelligence Marketing and Predicting Consumer Choice

This book

<< Serves to integrate widely disparate approaches to predicting consumer choice via artificial intelligence marketing, showing the strengths, weaknesses and best applications of each method and point of view

<< Covers methods and techniques

An Overview of Tools and Techniques Edition 1

including Discrete Choice Modelling, Conjoint Analysis and Machine Learning Models, placing all of these in the wider context of predictive analytics and artificial intelligence marketing

Date: Price:

03/04/2017 £19.99

ISBN Paperback: e-book: Pages: Format (mm): Subject:

9780749479558 9780749479565 256 234x156 Market Science

<< Explores the human side of

advanced analytics – using data to predict what people will choose

Author Information

Description

Dr. Steven Struhl PhD, MBA, MA has more than 25 years’ experience in consulting and research, specializing in practical solutions based on statistical models of decision-making and behavior. In addition to text analytics and data mining, his work addresses how buying decisions are made, optimizing service delivery and product configurations and finding the meaningful differences among products and services. Steven also has taught graduate courses on statistical methods and data analysis. He speaks at conferences and has given numerous seminars on pricing, choice modelling, market segmentation and presenting data.

The ability to predict consumer choice is a fundamental aspect to success for any business. In the context of artificial intelligence marketing, there are a wide array of predictive analytic techniques available to achieve this purpose, each with their own unique advantages and disadvantages. Artificial Intelligence Marketing and Predicting Consumer Choice serves to integrate these widely disparate approaches, and show the strengths, weaknesses, and best applications of each. It provides a bridge between the person who must apply or learn these problem-solving methods and the community of experts who do the actual analysis. It is also a practical and accessible guide to the many remarkable advances that have been recently made in this fascinating field.

58

Marketing and PR

Table of Contents 1

Who should read this book and why? Getting the project going 2 Conjoint, discrete choice, and other trade-offs: let’s do an experiment 3 Creating the best, newest thing: discrete choice modelling 4 Conjoint analysis and its uses 5 Finishing experiments and on to the nonexperimental world 6 Machine learning and classifications that grow on trees 7 Remarkable predictive models with Bayes Nets 8 Artificial intelligence, ensembles and neural nets


This book

<< Provides real-world guidance on

the application of text analytics for marketing professionals

<< Bridges the gap between marketers

and data analysis experts by cutting through jargon

<< Helps marketers to frame the right questions and apply the results successfully

Practical Text Analytics Interpreting Text and Unstructured Data for Business Intelligence Edition 1

Series: Date: Price:

Marketing Science 03/07/2015 ÂŁ29.99

ISBN Paperback: e-book:

9780749474010 9780749474027

Pages: Format (mm): Subject:

272 234x156 Marketing Science

Description

Author Information

In an age where customer opinion and feedback can have an immediate, major effect upon the success of a business or organization, marketers must have the ability to analyze unstructured data in everything from social media and internet reviews to customer surveys and phone logs. Practical Text Analytics is an essential daily reference resource, providing real-world guidance on the effective application of text analytics. The book presents the analysis process so that it is immediately understood by the marketing professionals who must use it, so they can apply proven concepts and methods correctly and with confidence.

Steven Struhl PhD, MBA, MA has more than 25 yearsâ&#x20AC;&#x2122; experience in consulting and research, specializing in practical solutions based on statistical models of decision-making and behaviour. In addition to text analytics and data mining, his work addresses how buying decisions are made, optimizing service delivery and product configurations and finding the meaningful differences among products and services. Steven also has taught graduate courses on statistical methods and data analysis. He speaks at conferences and has given numerous seminars on pricing, choice modelling, market segmentation and presenting data.

By decoding industry terminology and demonstrating practical application of data models once reserved for experts, Practical Text Analytics shows marketers how to frame the right questions, identify key themes and find hidden meaning from unstructured data. Readers will learn to develop powerful new marketing strategies to elevate customer experience, solidify brand value and elevate reputation.

Table of Contents 1

Who should read this book? And what do you want to do today? 2 Getting ready: capturing, sorting, sifting, stemming and matching 3 In pictures: word clouds, wordles and beyond 4 Putting text together: clustering documents using words 5 In the mood for sentiment (and counting) 6 Predictive models 1: having words with regressions 7 Predictive models 2: classifications that grow on trees 8 Predictive models 3: all in the family with Bayes Nets 9 Looking forward and back

Marketing and PR

59


Malcolm McDonald on Marketing Planning

This book

<< Written by the internationally acknowledged authority on marketing planning, Malcolm McDonald.

Understanding Marketing Plans and Strategy

<< Explains the key concepts and

Edition 2

<< A compact guide for busy

principles of marketing planning in an accessible, engaging fashion.

Date: Price:

03/11/2016 £19.99

ISBN Paperback: e-book:

9780749478216 9780749478223

Pages: Format (mm): Subject:

192 234x156 Marketing Strategy

professionals, containing all essential info in a user-friendly, pedagogically rich format featuring helpful margin notes and key points.

Author Information

Description

Professor Malcolm McDonald enjoys a global reputation as a leading authority on marketing. He was until recently Professor of Marketing and Deputy Director at Cranfield University School of Management, and is now an Emeritus Professor at the University as well as being an Honorary Professor at Warwick Business School and Academic Advisor at the Oxford College of Marketing. He has been consultant to many major companies from the United Kingdom, Europe, USA, Far East, South-East Asia, Australasia and Africa, in the areas of strategic marketing and marketing planning, market segmentation, key account management, international marketing and marketing accountability. Malcolm is also Chairman of numerous companies and works with the operating boards of some of the world’s leading multinationals on all continents. He has written more than 40 books including the best-selling Marketing Plans: How to prepare them, how to use them.

A primer for marketing professionals and students, the second edition of Malcolm McDonald on Marketing Planning provides a clear guide to marketing planning. Focussing on the practical application of marketing planning this book will guide readers through the production of a marketing plan that has real world application. Key content includes defining markets and segments, setting marketing objectives and strategies, advertising and sales promotion strategies, and price and sales strategies.

60

Marketing and PR

With an emphasis on practicality this fully revised second edition has been thoroughly overhauled to contain new content on the essentials of marketing planning and the strategic marketing process.

Table of Contents 1 2 3 4

Let’s get real Getting rid of that big managerial nonsense Understand the real meaning of customer value A very practical way to begin planning a profitable future 5 Market Segmentation – crucial to understanding your market and how it works 6 What do our customers want? 7 How to set marketing objectives 8 How to set marketing strategies 9 A step-by-step strategic planning system 10 How to deal with adversity


This book

<< Provides a step-by-step guide

to formulating a workable and successful marketing plan

<< Includes up-to-date information on email shots, web usage and e-marketing and social media

How to Write a Marketing Plan Edition 5

<< Features include chapter

summaries, in-depth guidance on mobile commerce in marketing as well as tips on presenting a marketing plan effectively

Series: Date: Price:

Creating Success 03/09/2016 ÂŁ9.99

ISBN Paperback: e-book:

9780749475710 9780749475727

Extent: Dimensions: Subject:

192 216x138 Marketing Strategy

Description

Author Information

How to Write a Marketing Plan provides a step-by-step guide to creating a successful marketing plan: from carrying out a marketing audit, setting objectives and devising budgets to writing, presenting and implementing the plan. With brand new content on producing miniplans and seizing new opportunities quickly, it also contains the most current information on email marketing, web usage, mobile commerce and social media. Including helpful chapter summaries and a detailed sample marketing plan, How to Write a Marketing Plan is essential reading for anyone who wants to boost their product or business.

John Westwood has held a wide variety of senior sales and marketing positions and is currently an independent marketing consultant. He is the author of The Marketing Plan, 30 Minutes to Write a Marketing Plan, The Marketing Plan Workbook and Marketing Your Business, all published by Kogan Page.

The creating success series of books... With over one million copies sold, the hugely popular Creating Success series covers a wide variety of topics and is written by an expert team of internationally best-selling authors and business experts. This indispensable business skills collection is packed with new features, practical content and inspiring guidance for readers across all stages of their careers.

Table of Contents 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

Introduction Situation analysis â&#x20AC;&#x201C; the marketing audit Objectives Strategies and action plans The distribution plan The advertising and promotions plan Costs and budgets Writing the plan Presenting the plan, follow-up and revision Mini-plans and quick plans

Marketing and PR

61


Design Management

This book

<< Provides a complete overview

of the development, key issues and future directions of design management, giving students the holistic knowledge they need to practice design management across a wide range of industries.

The Essential Handbook Edition 1

Date: Price:

03/11/2017 ÂŁ29.99

ISBN Paperback: e-book:

9780749478414 9780749478421

Pages: Format (mm): Subject:

240 240x170 Product Design

<< Gives students the skills to get

design management recognised at board level, enabling them to effect revolutionary new initiatives and changes in their companies.

<< Builds awareness of the changing

nuances of design management practice at varying levels, including macro, organizational and individual-project level, allowing students to develop their studies and careers in accordance with their skills and interests.

<< Links theory to practice with

in-depth case studies and thoughtprovoking contributions from actively practicing professionals.

Author Information

Description

Dr David Hands is a senior lecturer in Design Management at Lancaster University. He is also Course Leader for MA Design Management at the Imagination Lancaster Research Centre. He has written and published extensively on all aspects and themes embracing strategic design management theory and practice.

Design Management is the essential handbook to all things design. As a discipline, design management is continually in motion; changing, responding and adapting to the dynamics of social and business transformation. As a business function, it combines project management, design, strategy and supply chain techniques to enable the creation of more effectively designed products, services, communications and brands. As such, it is relevant to a very broad range of industries and sectors, and Design Management recognises this by structuring content around four key universal perspectives: values, horizons, visions, and futures. These perspectives give an overview of the development, key issues and future direction of design management. Meticulously researched, Design Management goes beyond individual project-level implementation and also explores design strategy at both organisational and macro levels. By showcasing its impact all the way up to industrial and national application, students will gain a deep understanding of the nuances, scope and scalability of design. Filled with vibrant case studies and guest perspectives from a spectrum of industry leaders and policy makers, Design Management is an invaluable real-world commentary on designâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s role as a key asset in organisational activity. Accompanied by a valuable toolkit of downloadable resources, the bookâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s engaging and accessible style provides students and practitioners with everything needed to foster a climate of creative engagement.

Table of Contents 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

62

Marketing and PR

Design values: design and the organisation Design management in action: case studies Design horizons: fluid strategies for success Design strategies in action: case studies Design vision: a national asset Design as an instrument for growth and innovation: Mexico case study Design futures: design as an enabler for change Looking ahead and discussions on the future of design management Conclusions


This book

<< Describes how to create and

manage the ongoing development of a campaign in a structured way

<< Covers all aspects of planning, from

research and analysis, to objectives, strategy and tactics, timescales, resources, evaluation and review

<< Features case studies such as

WRAP’s Love Food, Hate Waste campaign; McArthur River Mining; AkzoNobel’s Corporate Revolution; the UK Department of Culture, Media & Sport’s First World War Centenary Commemorations; and Lanson’s campaign for unbiased. co.uk

Planning and Managing Public Relations Campaigns A Strategic Approach Edition 4

Series: Date: Price:

PR In Practice 03/12/2015 £24.99

ISBN Paperback: e-book:

9780749468736 9780749468743

Pages: Format (mm): Subject:

224 234x156 Public Relations

Description

Author Information

Getting a public relations campaign or programme off the ground can seem overwhelming. Planning and Managing Public Relations Campaigns provides a blueprint for all practitioners. Practical and easy to read, the book presents a 12-point plan for ensuring success of campaigns of all sizes, covering many vital areas including the role of public relations in organizations, the importance of context, research and analysis, setting objectives, strategy and tactics, timescales and resources, evaluation and review.

Dr Anne Gregory is a professor of corporate communication and a leading international academic. She is based in the School of Business and Law at the University of Huddersfield. Anne previously spent many years in public relations practice, gaining experience at senior levels both in-house and in consultancy. She remains a consultant and is an advisor at board level to a number of large organizations. Anne is also series editor for the PR in Practice series (published by Kogan Page).

Supported by online resources, including best practice case studies, Planning and Managing Public Relations Campaigns is widely regarded as one of the best ‘how-to’ guides for students and practitioners. This fully updated fourth edition features new developments in public relations, including social media, along with new case studies including WRAP’s Love Food, Hate Waste campaign; The Sleep Pod Hotel Media Tour; McArthur River Mining; AkzoNobel’s Corporate Revolution; the UK Department of Culture, Media & Sport’s First World War Centenary Commemorations; and Lanson’s campaign for unbiased.co.uk. About the PR in Practice series: Published in collaboration with the Chartered Institute of Public Relations (CIPR), the PR in Practice series consists of accessible, practical introductions to day-to-day public relations practice and management issues. The series’ action-oriented approach keeps practitioners’ knowledge and skills up to date.

Table of Contents 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

Planning and Managing the context Public relations in context Starting the planning process Research and analysis Communication theory and setting aims and objectives Knowing the Publics and Messages Strategy and tactics Timescales and resources Knowing what has been achieved: Evaluation and review

Marketing and PR

63


Myths of PR

This book

All Publicity is Good Publicity and Other Popular Misconceptions

<< Frames a critical look at the world

Edition 1 Series: Date: Price:

of PR by exploring a number of myths that endure, and offers frank discussions of what they reveal about the industry

<< Explores a wealth of fascinating

PR myths, and provides genuine insights into where these have stemmed from and what lessons they offer PR practitioners and students

Business Myths 03/04/2017 £14.99

<< Written in an engaging, anecdotal

ISBN Paperback: e-book:

9780749479596 9780749479602

Pages: Format (mm): Subject:

240 234x156 Public Relations

style while still being underpinned by research and clear, evidencebased conclusions

Author Information

Description

Rich Leigh has a rich and varied PR background, including as account director at a range of agencies such as 10 Yetis and Frank PR. He is now founder and director of Rich Leigh and Company, and specialises in getting interesting, inspirational and talented people the attention they deserve. Rich also runs the blogger outreach service www.bloggabase. com, which has 12,000 opted-in bloggers, and has received sign-ups from brands including Disney, Ralph Lauren and Tesco.

Myths of PR: All Publicity is Good Publicity uses popular myths about the theory and practice of PR as a vehicle for helping students and practitioners to distinguish between fads and triedand-tested PR practice. Its purpose is to shatter widespread misconceptions about PR, and grant readers insights into why these myths have endured in spite of clearly demonstrable evidence to the contrary. By exploring topics that all readers will relate to, Myths of PR will shed new light on essential PR methodology. Covering such engaging subjects as “Good products don’t need PR”, “PR is glamorous” and “PR can make you go viral”, it will be an engaging, anecdotal read that offers authentic insights into the reality of PR practice.

Table of Contents 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17

64

Marketing and PR

Introduction PR is all spin PR can’t be measured All publicity is good publicity Press releases are dead The press ignore good news You have to pay to succeed on social media PR is glamorous Calling the media is a no-no You can make something go viral You have to be an extrovert to succeed in PR PR is a silver bullet Good products market themselves The more you pay, the better the PR job done The relationship doesn’t matter PR results are instant Conclusion


This book

<< Demonstrates that an individual’s sense of morality has an impact on decision making and ethical business behaviour, and helps managers account for this in business practice

<< Helps practitioners understand and

react to ethical consequences in the face of fast-moving technological advances

<< Explores the concept of personal

ethics spilling into the professional realm in relation to topical issues such as sexual harassment and social media

Ethics in Public Relations A Guide to Best Practice

Edition

3

Series: Date: Price:

PR In Practice 03/04/2016 £24.99

ISBN Paperback: e-book:

9780749477264 9780749477271

Pages: Format (mm): Subject:

192 234x156 Public Relations

Description

Author Information

Ethical practice in any professional discipline is guided by age-old philosophical perspectives, but its modern parameters are continually evolving. Ongoing developments in technology, social media and social contexts mean that public relations and its practices are constantly changing, and so do the ethical questions faced by practitioners in the field.

Patricia J Parsons APR, FCPRS spent 26 years as a faculty member and former chairman in the Department of Communication Studies at Mount Saint Vincent University in Halifax, Canada retiring recently as a full Professor. Her research, writing and teaching focused on public relations ethics and strategy, and healthcare communication. She is the author of a dozen books and numerous papers for the professional and lay press. She is accredited in public relations and is a member of the Canadian Public Relations Society’s College of Fellows. Prof. Parsons lives in Toronto and can be reached via email at ethicsinpr@gmail.com or via Twitter @ethicsinpr.

Ethical questions and dilemmas are inherent to public relations, and ensuring that practitioners operate ethically is fundamental to the professionalism and credibility of the field. Engaging and accessible, Ethics in Public Relations offers a lively exploration of the key ethical concerns present in the public relations world today by way of practical tips and guidance to support those in PR and corporate communications. Written by a leading academic in the field, this fully updated third edition of Ethics in Public Relations includes an entirely new chapter on the uses of ethics in social media, covering topical issues such as blogger engagement and the relationship between employee social media activity and organizational reputation.

Table of Contents 1 What Lies Beneath 1.1 Before we begin: New profession... or one of the oldest? 1.2 Lies, truth and honesty: their role in PR practice 1.3 Truth, trust and the virtue of being ‘good’. 1.4 Whose rights are right? 1.5 The trouble with rules 1.6 Utilitarianism: Right acts and wrong reasons 2 Ethics and the Practitioner 2.1 Your moral development: Cultivating respect and humility 2.2 Codes of ethics: The good, the bad and the (almost) ugly 2.3 Conflicts of Interest: Sex and other relationship issues 2.4 (Very) personal ethical decisions: Whistleblowing and moonlighting 3 Strategies and Dilemmas 3.1 Public Relations ethics and traditional media 3.2 Public Relations ethics and social media 3.3 Persuasion propaganda and advocacy: The ethics of influence 3.4 Supporting ‘good causes’: bad ethics or bad taste? 3.5 Deceptive authorship: Ghost-writing and plagiarism

4 Organizations, Ethics and PR 4.1 Making decisions: The true reality of everyday ethics 4.2 PR and the corporate ethics programme 4.3 The future of ethical PR: education and leadership 4.4 Appendix 1: For your bookshelf 4.5 Appendix 2: Chartered Institute of PR Code of Conduct 4.6 Appendix 3: Guidelines for the ethics audit

Marketing and PR

65


Media Interview Techniques

This book

<< Offers expert guidance on how to

successfully navigate interviews across the range of available media, including radio, TV, video, online and social channels

A Complete Guide to Media Training Edition 1 Date: Price:

<< Presents the author’s tried-and-

tested methodology to help interviewees prepare for their media interview and convey their key messages effectively

03/11/2015 £19.99

ISBN Paperback: e-book:

9780749474720 9780749474737

Pages: Format (mm): Subject:

224 234x156 Public Relations

<< Details techniques which apply

across the spectrum of global corporate, governmental, public sector and public-facing organizations in situations requiring a confident and polished response

Author Information

Description

Robert Taylor is one of the UK’s most experienced media trainers: his trainees include more than 1,000 executives from the Foreign and Commonwealth Office, the Department for International Development and the British Council, including ambassadors. Other clients have included the executive management teams of the Olympic Delivery Authority for London 2012, senior executives at Accenture, BT, British Airways, FedEx, SAP, Orange, Oracle, SITA and a huge range of public sector bodies and charities. He has been the leading media trainer of the Chartered Institute of Public Relations since 2008.

Any individual preparing for an interview with the media, however practised or well-rehearsed they are, worries about failing to convey the essential points, or encountering that awkward question in the glare of public scrutiny. As media channels multiply by the day, offering ever more opportunities for exposure, so they also present a growing probability of finding oneself in front of the camera, webcam, or microphone in a make-or-break encounter where every word, gesture or expression counts. Never has media training been more relevant, or more in demand. Media Interview Techniques is the authoritative guide to giving successful media interviews, combining the author’s own unique models and techniques with a survey of published research and influential opinion to help the reader prepare for that occasion when called upon to represent an organization publicly. Supported throughout with insightful anecdotes and transcripts of good and bad interviews given by George W. Bush, HRH Prince Philip and other notable figures, this book presents the author’s methodology which has been proven across the spectrum of industry sectors both nationally and internationally. This book is written for those who speak on behalf of commercial companies, public services, charities or NGOs, or as a subject expert. No PR executive, press officer or communications professional can afford to be without a copy for briefing clients prior to an interview. The book is also supported by online resources, including web links for each chapter to relevant media interviews and highprofile news stories.

Table of Contents 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

66

Marketing and PR

Why do a media interview? Preparing for your interview How to create a resonant message Keeping your cool Voice and body language The perfect tone of voice Keeping control of the interview Winning over sceptical and hostile audience Crisis media interviews Capitalizing on your interview


This book

<< Keeps readers informed on current debates in the industry

<< Reflects on and examines the

fundamental PR theories and their application to modern practice

<< Identifies and inspires best practice

Chartered Public Relations Lessons from Expert Practitioners Edition 1

in the industry

Date: Price:

03/02/2015 £29.99

ISBN Paperback: e-book:

9780749473723 9780749473730

Pages: Format (mm): Subject:

336 234x156 Public Relations

Description

Author Information

Published as part of the 2015 tenth anniversary celebrations of the Chartered Institute of Public Relations (CIPR)’s Royal Charter, Chartered Public Relations is an anthology of modern-day public relations best practice from Chartered Public Relations practitioners. It makes a valuable contribution to the advancement of public relations thinking worldwide by addressing the most current discussions on topics such as qualification of results in public relations, internal communications, freedom of information, global communication and more.

Stephen Waddington is President of the CIPR, a Chartered PR Practitioner and European Digital and Social Media Director of Ketchum Public Relations. He has earned a reputation as a public relations moderniser through senior roles he has held during the last twenty years. He is also author of Brand Anarchy, #BrandVandals, Share This and Share This Too.

Chartered Public Relations discusses in detail, among other things, the shift to the open organisation, the application of best practice in different markets and the impact of the globalisation of markets in public relations. Featuring contributions from public relations experts from a plethora of industries and companies including Specsavers, Thomson Reuters, Pielle Consulting and the University of Cambridge, it will inspire a new wave of professionals to take up the challenge of achieving Chartered PR Practitioner status.

Table of Contents 1

The shift to the open organization – the application of public relations within every area of a modern organization

1.1 Putting citizens at the heart of public relations: Public relations and public value – Paul Mylrea Chart.PR, FCIPR 1.2 Plus ça change, plus c’est la même chose for public relations? – Alan Smith Chart.PR, MCIPR 1.3 Death or rebirth? A digital future for PR – Matt Appleby Chart. PR, FCIPR 1.4 Freedom of Information: Is it changing the way we do PR? – Susan Fox Chart. PR, FCIPR 1.5 The future practitioner – Catherine Arrow Chart. PR, FCIPR, FPRINZ 1.6 Communications shared services in the public sector: An idea whose time has come or a passing phase? – Sally Sykes Chart.PR, FCIPR

2

Developing areas of practice – an exploration of the opportunity in developing areas of public relations

2.1 Passport to the win-win zone? The role of psychology in public relations practice and education – Ben Verinder Chart.PR, MCIPR 2.2 An analysis of the role of quantification in public relations evaluation – Paul Noble Chart.PR, FCIPR 2.3 Internal communications: Poor relation or powerhouse? – Linda Rolf Chart.PR, MCIPR 2.4 Communicable viruses: The adaptation of the public relations profession to the changing anatomy of the web – Matt McKay Chart.PR, FCIPR

2.5 Communications micro-strategies – Martin Turner Chart.PR, MCIPR 2.6 Is public relations evolving into reputation management? – Julie McCabe Chart.PR, MCIPR

3

The application of best practice in markets – an analysis of the application of public relations in different markets

3.1 Engineering the future? Using influence to benefit society – Anne Moir Chart.PR, MCIPR 3.2 Defining the defence communicator – Clare L Parker Chart.PR, MCIPR 3.3 The evolution of UK public relations consultancies from 1984 to 2009 – Jane Howard Chart.PR, FCIPR

4 International – the impact of the globalization of markets on public relations 4.1 What does it take to be a global communications professional? – David Crundwell Chart.PR, FCIPR 4.2 Globalization and national economic development: A role for public relations and communication management – Peter L Walker Chart.PR, FCIPR

5

Reflections – an examination of the fundamental theories of public relations and their application to modern practice

5.1 Is excellence in public relations beyond our reach? – Richard Flynn Chart.PR, MCIPR 5.2 The roadmap to excellence in public relations – Hilary Berg Chart.PR, MCIPR 5.3 A critical review: The four models of public relations and the excellence theory in an era of digital communication – Stephen Waddington Chart.PR, MCIPR

Marketing and PR

67


Evaluating Public Relations

This book

<< Arms PR professionals with the

means to clearly and objectively measure and prove the value of their work

A Guide to Planning, Research and Measurement

<< Helps improve effectiveness Edition 3

for businesses and institutions, especially with regard to using online tools

Series: Date: Price:

PR In Practice 03/06/2014 £29.99

ISBN Paperback: e-book:

9780749468897 9780749468903

Pages: Format (mm): Subject:

208 234x156 Public Relations

<< Provides plenty of examples of

what works from around the world

Author Information

Description

Tom Watson is Professor of Public Relations at Bournemouth University, with a focus on applied research and professional practice. He was formerly Associate Professor and Head of the School of Communication at Charles Sturt University in Australia and was chairman of the UK’s Public Relations Consultants Association from 2000-2002. Paul Noble FCIPR is an independent PR and communications trainer, consultant and facilitator. A CIPR Approved Trainer and e-learning specialist, he provides management support to growing PR consultancies, and is chief examiner of the CIPR’s Advanced Certificate. Paul has 30 years’ experience in senior consultancy, in-house and academic environments.

Operating under tight budget constraints and with an ever-increasing range of tools and technologies to choose from, PR professionals have never been under so much pressure to justify their decisions. Evaluating Public Relations advises PR practitioners at all levels on how to demonstrate clearly and objectively the impact that their work has to their clients and managers. The authors draw on both their practical and academic experience to discuss a diverse range of evaluation methods and strategies.

68

Marketing and PR

This fully updated edition of Evaluating Public Relations includes coverage and advice on the industry standards on PR measurement. Covering both theory and practice and containing case studies on Philips, Pepsi, St John Ambulance, Medicare and Westminster City Council, it is an essential handbook for both students and experienced practitioners.

Table of Contents 1

Principles of public relations theory and practice 2 Evaluation and communication psychology 3 The history and culture of PR measurement and evaluation 4 Gathering and interpreting information 5 Evaluation structures and processes 6 Developing a media evaluation system 7 Evaluation in practice – case studies 8 Objectives and objective setting 9 Relationship management and crisis communication measurement 10 Evaluating social media 11 Linking PR activity to business


This book

<< Helps practitioners identify and use the best channels – online/digital, face-to-face, media (both editorial and advertising), direct, etc – for communications

<< Addresses the psychology of

communications so readers can better understand audiences

<< Covers every aspect of

communication skills, from briefing, listening and questioning to writing, selling and recommending

The PR Professional’s Handbook Powerful, Practical Communications Edition 1

Series: Date: Price:

PR In Practice 03/04/2014 £24.99

ISBN Paperback: e-book:

9780749468422 9780749468439

Pages: Format (mm): Subject:

376 234x156 Public Relations

Description

Author Information

At a time when rapid changes in communications technology, such as social media, are having a major impact on the way businesses choose to communicate, more and more people are having to understand the principles of modern PR and how they can use it to underpin effective business management. The PR Professional’s Handbook offers practical advice and solutions for anyone involved in the public relations function.

Caroline Black is a highly experienced corporate, consumer, business-to-business and crisis management communications professional. She has worked with large private-sector organizations, government departments, educational establishments and charities. Her clients include Sainsbury’s, Pedigree Petfoods, the Foreign and Commonwealth Office, Brasenose College, Roehampton University, Cancer Research UK and Sightsavers. She is a Licentiate of the CIPD and an approved trainer for the CIPR. She acts as a conference chair, and lectures and speaks regularly on communication issues. She runs her own independent PR consultancy.

The PR Professional’s Handbook guides practitioners in preparing and evaluating campaigns. In addition to providing a full breakdown on the individual skills required in briefing, writing and presenting projects of different shapes and sizes, the book covers the role and importance of public relations and communications in organizations, addressing, in full, key theories for PR, skills and disciplines, channels and creativity. About the PR in Practice series: Published in collaboration with the Chartered Institute of Public Relations (CIPR), the PR in Practice series comprises accessible, practical introductions to day-to-day issues of public relations practice and management. The series’ action-oriented approach keeps knowledge and skills up to date.

Table of Contents 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

Introduction The role and importance of public relations in organizations Key theories for public relations practitioners The professional public relations practitioner Planning and evaluating public relations Public relations, marketing and related disciplines Understanding audiences Using the right communications channels and tactics Creativity in public relations Visual communications Public relations essentials for issues, incidents and crises Essential skills for the PR practitioner

Marketing and PR

69


Crisis, Issues and Reputation Management Edition 1

This book

<< Summarises key methodologies

behind reputation management

<< Shows how issues and crises can be handled successfully and effectively with minimum damage and disruption

<< Includes practical models, toolkits

and checklists readers can start using immediately

Series: Date: Price:

PR In Practice 03/04/2014 ÂŁ24.99

ISBN Paperback: e-book:

9780749469924 9780749469931

Pages: Format (mm): Subject:

280 234x156 Public Relations

Author Information

Description

Andrew Griffin is a corporate reputation specialist. He advises some of the worldâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s leading companies and most trusted brands on crisis management, issues management and corporate citizenship. Andrew is managing director of Regester Larkin, the international reputation risk management consultancy which is credited with pioneering best practice systems across all sectors in this specialist discipline. He is a regular speaker, writer and commentator in this critical area of management and corporate communications.

Crisis, Issues and Reputation Management defines reputation, explores how to value it and provides practical guidelines for effective reputation management, including how to approach issues of Corporate Social Responsibility. Practical and accessible, it outlines a comprehensive approach to managing situations that may turn into crises and handling crises once they occur. Featuring a wide range of international case studies of brands who have had to respond to a variety of crises including Nestle, Unilever, General Electric, McDonaldâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s, Coca-cola, Cadbury, Tesco, Pan Am, RBS and more, Crisis, Issues and Reputation Management demonstrates how organizations have to understand and respond rapidly to shifting public values, rising expectations, demands for public consultation and increasingly intrusive news media. As such, it provides a new and broader perspective on the topic for new and seasoned practitioners alike.

Table of Contents 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

70

Marketing and PR

Reputation: what it is and why it matters The challenging climate in which reputations are managed What are the risks to reputation? Externally driven issues Internally driven issues Externally driven incidents Internally driven incidents Interrelated risks Managing reputation risk through the life cycle Predicting reputation risk Preventing reputation risk Preparing for acute reputation risk Resolving risks to reputation Responding to immediate reputation risk Recovering from reputation damage Where next for crisis, issues and reputation management?


This book

<< Includes current insights derived

from neuromarketing research into consumer behaviour

<< Provides practical tools that are

robust and easy to use to translate the theory into tangible results

Retail Marketing Strategy Delivering Shopper Delight Edition 1

<< Contains new models for retail

brand management based on firsthand experience at major global retailers and suppliers

Date: Price:

03/11/2015 ÂŁ29.99

ISBN Paperback: e-book:

9780749476915 9780749476922

Pages: Format (mm): Subject:

296 234x156 Retail Studies

Description

Author Information

Basing shopper marketing strategy on customer insights is what differentiates market leading retail brands from weaker competitors. Many retail organizations lack business development and strategic departments that collect experiences, set benchmarks and create models and manuals. Retail Marketing Strategy makes the information available to drive new ways of thinking and make retail practice more agile for everyone.

Constant Berkhout is a passionate practitioner of retail marketing and shopper insights. As Founder and Owner of Rijnbrug Advies, a consultancy based in the Netherlands, and based on more than twenty yearsâ&#x20AC;&#x2122; experience at major companies including Ahold, De Boer Winkelbedrijven, Kraft Foods, Gillette/P&G and PepsiCo, he develops new ways to grow retail categories and connect with the shopper for a diverse range of food, non-food and supplier clients.

Taking in five key capabilities required for retail excellence, namely in-store execution; organizational development; fact-driven decision making; multi-channel operations, and understanding customers, Retail Marketing Strategy answers some of the most difficult questions in retail including how to innovate to develop new ways to interact with customers across multiple channels, and how to replicate online success stories from other sectors. Practical steps are put forward for collating and interpreting the data generated in shopper activity, helping to make sense of trends and build effective strategy. Guidance is based throughout on neuromarketing research, providing a clear framework for building in experiential elements such as scent or music into the retail environment to really engage with consumers on an emotional level. If you are a marketing, branding or supply chain professional working in retail seeking straightforward and research-driven techniques for building lasting customer loyalty, or you are responsible for driving retail strategy in your organization, let Retail Marketing Strategy be your guide.

Table of Contents 1 1.1 2 2.1 2.2 2.3

Shopper happiness Delivering shopper happiness Shoppers are people The myth of impulse purchasing Tapping into irrational shopper behaviour Understanding the shopper brain through neuro research 3 Channel choices 3.1 Channel preference: the future of the hypermarket channel 3.2 What the shopper wants from online shopping channels 4 Fact-driven decision making 4.1 Getting your assortment right 4.2 Really making loyalty card programmes work 4.3 Making big data digestible 5 In-store execution 5.1 The unstoppable growth of private labels and opportunities for A-brands 5.2 The unexplainable effect of music

5.3 Can scents work wonders? 5.4 Self-scanning is more than savings 6 Organizational development 6.1 The birth of category management 6.2 True customer understanding 6.3 Shopper marketing: new phase of trade marketing 7 Embracing the shopper 7.1 Retailers in action to increase shopper happiness

Marketing and PR

71


Category Management in Purchasing

This book

<< Provides a clear definition and understanding of category management

<< Provides a step by step guide to the

A Strategic Approach to Maximize Business Profitability Edition 3

tools, techniques and application of category management, equipping the reader to deliver value and cost savings when sourcing and purchasing

<< Allows readers to analyse complex Date: Price:

03/10/2015 £49.99

ISBN Paperback: e-book:

9780749472306 9780749472313

Pages: Format (mm): Subject:

504 234x156 Retail Studies

sourcing situations quickly and clearly, and develop innovative and creative proposals for sourcing

Author Information

Description

Jonathan O’Brien is the CEO of the international purchasing consultancy and training provider, Positive Purchasing Ltd. With over 25 years’ experience working in purchasing, he has worked all over the world to help global organizations increase their purchasing capability through training, education and working directly with practitioners and executive teams to drive in the adoption of category management and other strategic purchasing methodologies. He is also author of Supplier Relationship Management and Negotiation for Purchasing Professionals.

Category Management in Purchasing is a comprehensive guide to strategic category management, providing a step-by-step guide to its implementation and use. This book provides the necessary tools, techniques and applications that will enable the reader to implement this cost saving purchasing method. The 3rd Edition of Category Management in Purchasing has been rigorously updated to reflect latest thinking in the field. Jonathan O’Brien shows how a strategic approach needs to work effectively together with other approaches, such as Supplier Relationship Management. He has added important sections on governance, included more supplier and supply chain tools, and introduced a pragmatic route for smaller businesses or those who need step-by-step advice. The book provides case studies of real companies, including: IKEA, The Body Shop, NHS, Heinz, Cardiff Council, and GlaxoSmithKline.

Table of Contents 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

72

Marketing and PR

Introducing category management The principles of category management Laying the groundwork for success Stage 1: Initiation Stage 2: Insight Stage 3: Innovation Stage 4: Implementation Stage 5: Improvement Making category management happen Guaranteeing success – now and for the future


This book

<< Provides a complete economic

framework for analyzing any channel partner (distributor, reseller or retailer) and a new series of multi-sector insights

<< Enables a defined go-to-market

strategy and forecasting for emerging channels and technology

<< Supports the allocation of scarce

resources for the highest returns, and channel negotiation from positions of market strength or weakness

Sales and Marketing Channels How to Build and Manage Distribution Strategy Edition 3

Date: Price:

03/04/2018 £29.99

ISBN Paperback: e-book:

9780749482145 9780749482152

Pages: Format (mm): Subject:

400 234x156 Sales

Description

Author Information

Unprecedented upheavals in routes to market are challenging businesses of all types. Products are becoming services, on-line and off-line channels are integrating and new distribution channels are dictating terms to producers. The third edition of Distribution Channels repositions itself as Sales and Marketing Channels, placing market access at the heart of business and marketing strategy. This global bestseller delivers a rational economic framework to analyze, plan and manage profitable channels to market. It addresses emerging business models and buying behaviours with practical steps, ensuring maximum leverage of channel partners at every stage of the go-to-market process.

Julian Dent is Chairman of VIA International, a specialist routes-to-market consultancy. He has more than 35 years of global experience in distribution, specializing in channel strategy and implementation at global, corporate and regional levels. His clients cover industry sectors from FMCG to hospitality, construction and healthcare, including Barclays bank, Cisco, Hyatt, Esso, IBM, Microsoft, Philips, Subway and Xerox. Dent is a Chartered Accountant and a Freeman of the City of London. He also works closely with the Global Technology Distribution Council to define accreditation for their industry-recognized awards.

Sales and Marketing Channels, a fully-revised third edition, takes a multi-sector approach with an entire new series of specialist sections. This efficient structure extracts tangible commercial value from partner relationships, integrating innovative case studies like AirBNB, the largest seller of rooms without ownership of any; Transferwise, the peer-to-peer Forex; plus the rise of online retailers like Amazon and ASOS versus the decline of traditional stores like Macy’s or BHS. Updates include the impact of cloud technology, advancing consumer channels, monetizing the distribution of intellectual property and the evolving ‘gig economy’ led by Uber and Deliveroo. Often referred to as the “Place” P in the marketing mix, this book and its host of downloadable resources are an essential toolkit for strategizing new and existing routes to market.

Table of Contents 1

The Business of Getting Products and Services to Market 1.1 Major Trends and Developments in Market Access 2 Distributors, Wholesalers and Intermediaries 2.1 Managing Distributors – Margins and Profitability 2.2 Managing Distributors – Productivity 2.3 Managing Distributors – Sustainability 2.4 Managing Distributors – Growth 2.5 Understanding the Distribution Landscape 2.6 How to Get the Best from Distribution Strategy 3 Managing Final Tier Sales and Marketing Channels 3.1 The Roles of the Final Tier Channel Players 3.2 How the Business Model Works for Final Tier Channel Players 3.3 Managing Final Tier Channel Players – Sales and Utilization

3.4 Managing Final Tier Channel Players – Gross Margin and Recoverability 3.5 Managing Final Tier Channel Players – Working Capital Management 3.6 Managing Final Tier Channel Players – Value Creation and Growth 4 Managing Distribution in Individual Industry Sectors 4.1 Insights from Managing Capital Goods Distribution 4.2 Insights from Managing Consumer Goods Distribution 4.3 Insights from Managing Services Distribution 4.4 Insights from Managing Hotels, Restaurants and Catering Distribution 4.5 Insights from Managing Intellectual Property Distribution 4.6 Insights from Managing Franchised Distribution

Marketing and PR

73


Business, Finance, Risk & Information Management Innovation and Best Practice in Accounting and Finance Business & Management Skills Compliance & Regulation Corporate Governance & CSR Information & Data Management International Business Leadership Management Science Management Thinking Professional Services Risk Management Strategy

www.koganpage.com www.koganpage.com

75 75


Featured Titles

NEW BOOK

Cyber Wars

Hacks that Shocked the Business World Charles Arthur May 2018 9780749482008 Page 31

NEW BOOK

Digital Darwinism

Survival of the Fittest in the Age of Business Disruption Tom Goodwin Apr 2018 9780749482282 Page 32

The Agile Leader

How to Create an Agile Business Through Moments of Choice Simon Hayward Jun 2018 9780749482732 Page 33

NEW BOOK

Cyber Risk Management

Practical Strategies to Protect Your Organization from Cyber Threats NEW BOOK

The Power of Company Culture How Any Business Can Build a Culture That Improves Productivity, Performance and Profits Chris Dyer Mar 2018 9780749481957 Page 41

76

Discover our full portfolio of books at www.koganpage.com

Richard Benham Apr 2018 9780749482596 Page 36


This book

<< Includes a highly accessible,

engaging introduction to what can sometimes be a difficult, technical subject

International Finance For Non-Financial Managers

<< Is a new, original textbook, rooted

Edition 1

<< Offering an up-to-date approach

Date: Price:

03/01/2018 £34.99

ISBN Paperback: e-book:

9780749480011 9780749480028

Extent: Dimensions: Subject:

288 234x156 Accounting & Finance

in Europe rather than adapted from a US text, but drawing on examples and practice from around the world to the subject, post global financial crisis

Description

Author Information

International Finance offers a clear and accessible introduction to the fundamental principles and practice of international finance in today’s world, from the international financial environment and exchange rates, to financing multinational companies and international investment. The theory and techniques are presented with the non-financial manager in mind, and the theoretical material is supplemented by case studies and a discussion of the appropriateness of the various techniques and principles to solve practical problems. This book draws from examples and practice around the world, helping students of international corporate finance, particularly non-specialist finance students, understand the complexities of modern Europe and comparative systems of finance globally.

Dora Hancock has over 30 years’ teaching experience at universities in the UK including Birmingham City University and Leeds Beckett University. In recent years her teaching has focused solely on finance, including international finance, corporate finance and investment finance on undergraduate, postgraduate and professional courses. She has taught both UK and international students. Dora is passionate about teaching and writing materials for both students and lecturers to use.

International Finance should be essential reading for anyone studying international finance or needing an up-to-date, engaging resource to help them navigate the complicated and everchanging global financial world. Key theories and terms are explained and defined, avoiding unnecessary jargon and acknowledging that many readers are coming to the subject with little or no prior knowledge of corporate finance at all.

Table of Contents 1 The International Financial Enviornment 1.1 The Rise of the Multinational and the International Monetary System 1.2 The Institutions and Participants that make up the Global Financial System 1.3 The history of exchange rates, the IMF and the World Bank 1.4 The Euro and the Global Financial Environment post the Global Financial Environment 2 Exchange Rates 2.1 Exchange Rate Regimes 2.2 Parity Conditions and Forecasting Exchange Rates 2.3 Currency Markets 2.4 Measuring and managing Exchange Risk 3 Financing the Multinational Company 3.1 Financing international trade 3.2 Long term sources of finance 3.3 International Cash Management

4 International Investment 4.1 Investing directly in foreign enterprises 4.2 International Investment Appraisal 4.3 Country Risk Analysis 4.4 Long–term financing 4.5 Capital Structure

Business, Finance, Risk, Information Management

77


The Handbook of International Trade and Finance

This book

<< Contains international case studies and examples of cross-border transactions from across the globe

<< Features a section on risk

The Complete Guide for International Sales, Finance, Shipping and Administration Edition 4

management and its potential impact on the physical flow of goods and the cost of insurance

<< Contains a comprehensive glossary to demystify all the key terms associated with international trade and finance to ensure that readers can use them confidently

Date: Price:

03/08/2016 ÂŁ39.99

ISBN Paperback: e-book:

9780749475987 9780749475994

Extent: Dimensions: Subject:

264 234x156 Accounting & Finance

Author Information

Description

Anders Grath has over 25 yearsâ&#x20AC;&#x2122; experience in international trade and finance within major European financial institutions, as head of both international departments and corporate units. He is the author of a series of similar titles on individual country markets.

International trade, and its financing, is now a key component of many undergraduate and postgraduate qualifications. For anyone involved in international sales, finance, shipping and administration, or for those studying for academic or professional qualifications in international trade, The Handbook of International Trade and Finance offers an extensive and topical explanation of the key finance areas. This essential reference resource provides the information necessary to help you to reduce risks and improve cash flow, identify the most competitive finance alternatives, structure the best payment terms, and minimize finance and transaction costs. This fully revised and updated 4th edition of The Handbook of International Trade and Finance also describes the negotiating process from the perspectives of both the buyer and the seller, providing valuable insight into the complete financing process, and covering key topics such as: trade risks and risk assessment; structured trade finance; methods and terms of payment; currency risk management and bonds, guarantees and standby letters of credit. The Handbook gives a complete and thorough assessment of all the issues involved in constructing, financing and completing a cross-border transaction and is an indispensable guide for anyone who deals with international trade. It also includes a section on risk management, which plays an increasingly important role in international trade from currency fluctuations to political risk and natural disasters. N.B. The book covers the principles of international trade and finance that are common across the globe and is relevant to anyone wanting to understand the subject, wherever they are located. Specific national issues (eg the UKâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s Brexit decision) do not affect the content. Online supporting resources for this book include a powerpoint summary of each chapter

Table of Contents 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

78

Business, Finance, Risk, Information Management

Trade risks and risk assessment Methods of payment Bonds, guarantees and standby letters of credit Currency risk management Export credit insurance Trade finance Structured trade finance Terms of payment The export quotation


This book

<< Develops analytical skills through the interpretation and analysis of financial statements, leveraging exercises and comprehension questions

<< Places accounting in a real-world

context, making it more accessible and immediate for students interested in its application to management decision making

<< Includes tips for teachers on

enthusing and engaging students and a breakdown of how each chapter relates to course structures

Accounting and Finance for Managers A Decision-making Approach Edition 2

Date: Price:

03/12/2017 £34.99

ISBN Paperback: e-book:

9780749481148 9780749481155

Extent: Dimensions: Subject:

488 240x170 Accounting & Finance

Description

Author Information

Accounting and Finance for Managers is specifically designed for MBA, EMBA and MA Business and Management students who require a grounding in the key concepts of accounting and finance. Including real financial statements and worked examples from wellknown businesses, as well as full exercises and questions at the end of each chapter, this accessible guide provides students with the financial tools and analytical skills for managerial advantage.

Matt Bamber is Assistant Professor in Accounting at the University of Toronto’s Rotman School of Management. He is a chartered accountant with several years’ experience of teaching on a range of programmes, including MBA, professional and Master’s courses.

Taking a uniquely practical approach which focuses on the financial aspects of business decisions, the book covers all the core topics including basic bookkeeping, financial analysis, business planning, cash flow and investment decisions. Now in its 2nd edition, Accounting and Finance for Managers includes updated examples and case studies from Tesco, Ryanair and Whitbread PLC, new content on corporate governance and ratio analysis, reflective activities and a new chapter on financing decisions. Online supporting resources for this book include bonus chapters containing guidance and teaching tips, additional questions and lecture slides for each chapter.

Simon Parry is a lecturer in Accounting and Finance at Newcastle University, with 15 years’ experience of teaching on professional, MBA and other postgraduate courses. He is also a chartered accountant with over 25 years’ experience.

Table of Contents 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11

Introduction to accounting Accounting concepts and systems Financial analysis Part I Financial analysis Part II Business planning Budgets and performance management Cash flow and working capital management Pricing decisions Investment decisions Financing decisions Operational decisions

Business, Finance, Risk, Information Management

79


Accounting for Non-Accountants

This book

Edition 11

<< Brings the reader up to date on

Date: Price:

<< Helps readers understand real-

world issues in presenting and interpreting financial information by leveraging real examples of company accounts

UK GAAP accounting standards, International Financial Reporting Standards (IFRS) and International Accounting Standards (IAS)

03/09/2017 ÂŁ19.99

<< Includes review questions

ISBN Paperback: e-book:

9780749480769 9780749480783

Extent: Dimensions: Subject:

392 234x156 Accounting & Finance

designed to support those following a number of accountancy qualifications (ACCA, AAT, CIMA)

Author Information

Description

David Horner has taught A Level courses in Accounting, Economics and Business for over 20 years. He currently teaches at Birkdale School in Sheffield. A senior examiner for a major examining board since 2002, he is also the author of a number of textbooks on accounting, economics and related areas â&#x20AC;&#x201C; including Business Accounting Basics, coauthored with Frank Wood.

Accounting for Non-Accountants provides the perfect introduction to the basics of accounting and finance. Designed for non-specialists with little or no background in accounting, it guides readers through the maze of financial terms and accounting concepts and techniques in a clear and easy-to-follow style. Now in its 11th edition, Accounting for Non-Accountants includes information on the UK GAAP accounting standards as well as an overview of current international standards, and updates including a new chapter on how competition, the financial markets and government economic policy can influence organizations. The book is structured clearly to provide indepth understanding in three key areas: annual accounts (including income statements, balance sheets, cash flow and reporting standards); management accounting (costing, marginal costing and budgetary controls); and financial management (including the cost of capital, working capital, investment appraisal and performance analysis). With updated online resources including additional review questions for each chapter and a multiple choice question section, Accounting for Non-Accountants is ideal for beginners and provides an excellent grounding for those taking accountancy qualifications.

Table of Contents 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19

80

Business, Finance, Risk, Information Management

Financial record keeping Income statements The balance sheet Further adjustments to the income statement Checking the double-entry system Accounting concepts Accounting for other business organisations An introduction to business costing Marginal costing and decision making Standard costing Budgeting Working capital management Capital investment appraisal An introduction to limited companies Published accounts of the limited company Accounting standards Statement of cash flows Accounting ratios The economic environment


This book

<< Full, concise and current coverage of all forensic accounting and finance topics

<< Truly global approach << Written by leading lecturers

and practitioners from the big accounting ‘5’

Forensic Accounting and Finance Principles and Practice Edition 1

Date: Price:

03/08/2017 £39.99

ISBN Paperback: e-book:

9780749479992 9780749480004

Extent: Dimensions: Subject:

362 234x156 Accounting & Finance

Description

Author Information

A complete guide to Forensic Accounting and Finance, thisbook is ideal for advanced level students and new or mid-level forensicaccounting professionals looking to boost their specialist knowledge as part oftheir CPD, for accountants who wish to build more knowledge in this skills areaor advanced undergraduates who feel ready to stretch themselves.

Bee-Lean Chew is an experienced member of the forensic accounting team at Wilder Coe LLP and a director of the Network of Independent Forensic Accountants, a provider of CPD training to solicitors and fellow business professionals, and an associate member of the Society of Share and Business Valuers. Bee trained with Wilder Coe LLP becoming partner in 2005. A Chartered Accountant, Bee has a Law degree from Kent University, a Masters Degree in Finance from the University of Strathclyde and is an ICAEW-accredited Forensic Accountant.

Demand for expertise in forensic accounting and finance isgrowing and this book offers a complete, accessible and affordable guide, combiningcoverage of principle theory with the real and practical needs of theprofessional. Written by a strong academic and practitioner author team (fromleading institutions and accountancy firms) and in association with the Networkfor Independent Forensic Accountants, this book covers all forensic accountingtopics from forensics as an extension of auditing and the basic principles offorensic accounting, to financial analysis and modelling, financial reporting,financial crime, electronic crime, civil crime, investigations, expertwitnessing and dispute resolution, fraud preventions and IT systems. This text shares current examples and casestudies, highlighting cultural differences for key topics with updated regionallegislation information available online for those looking for a truly globalapproach which is always up to date. Professional tips, clear learningoutcomes and end of section summaries support the easy digestion of eachchapter’s contents and encourage successful learning transfer to the work placeor programme of study: A must have for advanced level students andprofessionals who wish to gain a full and current understanding of all currentaspects of forensic accounting.

Table of Contents 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

Introduction The Forensic Accountant in Practice Expert Witnessing and Dispute Resolution Forensic Accountancy and Taxation Forensic Accountancy and Fraud Fraud Prevention Investment and Assets Valuation Financial Analysis and Modelling Auditing and Financial Reporting Financial Crime, Cyber Crime and the Law Civil Disputes and Litigation Forensic IT and Accounting

Business, Finance, Risk, Information Management

81


Understanding Islamic Financial Services

This book

<< Provides a brand new perspective

of the Islamic Financial System, not covered in any other book

<< Offers four cutting edge, in depth

Theory and Practice Edition 1

case studies clearly demonstrate how the system operates in different types of financial systems

<< Is written by Karim Ullah, a

Date: Price:

03/04/2017 ÂŁ39.99

ISBN Paperback: e-book:

9780749480516 9780749480523

Extent: Dimensions: Subject:

288 234x156 Accounting & Finance

key player in Islamic Finance in Pakistan, having played a major role in setting up the Centre for Excellence in Islamic Finance there

Author Information

Description

Karim Ullah is Assistant Professor and Islamic Financial Services Co-ordinator, Centre for Excellence in Islamic Finance at the Institute of Management Sciences. He has taught extensively in the areas of Islamic banking and finance, business finance and managerial finance, amongst others.

Understanding the Islamic Finance System offers a fresh perspective on the Islamic Financial System. The importance of this system cannot be underestimated. Experts expect that it is likely to sustain double digit growth globally over the next few years, and demand for professionals in the area has never been higher, both in the UK and around the world.

Wafi Al-Kalaghouli is Senior Lecturer in Operations and Project Management, Brunel University. He has extensive experience within multinational companies and Higher Education.

While other texts on the subject look at the basic concepts, principles, contracts and financial products used in Islamic banking and finance, Understanding the Islamic Finance System goes one step further and provides a new context, identifying four levels on which the Islamic Financial system operates: product level, institution level, market level and inter-market level. It considers Islamic Banking and Finance as a multi-level service system, an approach which will enable students and professionals of Islamic Finance to gain a more in-depth, holistic understanding of how the system functions. Understanding the Islamic Finance System covers contemporary developments in service science (e.g. service theories, service visualization tools and service co-creation concepts) and implications for the development and sustainability of the Islamic Financial System. Examples from practice enliven the text and allow the reader to relate the theories and principles discussed to current practice.

Table of Contents 1

History and Development of the Islamic Financial System 2 Islamic Law (Shariah), Economics, and Financial System 3 Core Elements of the Islamic Financial System 4 Multi-Level Islamic Financial System 5 Product Level Development of Islamic Financial System 6 Institution Level Development of Islamic Finance 7 Market Level Development of Islamic Financial System 8 Inter-Markets (ecosystem) Level Development of Islamic Financial System 9 Adaptability and Sustainability of Islamic Financial System

82

Business, Finance, Risk, Information Management


This book

<< Provides a thorough understanding of the key economic concepts and their applications in business

<< Explains the crucial importance of the financial system to individual business and the macroeconomy

<< Gives managers and executives

the economic understanding they need to make important business decisions

Economics for Business A Guide to Decision Making in a Complex Global Macroeconomy Edition 1

Date: Price:

03/11/2015 ÂŁ29.99

ISBN Paperback: e-book:

9780749470197 9780749470203

Extent: Dimensions: Subject:

360 240x170 Accounting & Finance

Description

Author Information

Economics for Business enables the reader to develop a clear understanding of the economic environment in which business takes place. This comprehensive book covers: the process of globalization and its implications for business; the role of the market and supply and demand; the impact of demand on branding and brand loyalty; and pricing strategies under various market structures.

Ivan K. Cohen is Associate Professor in Finance and Economics at Richmond University, the American International University based in London. With many years of teaching experience across a wide range of Economics and Finance modules, and having taught on both sides of the Atlantic, he is able to offer a unique global approach to the study of economics.

With specific business content integrated throughout and a global perspective on the current world of business, taking into account the financial crisis and its aftermath, Economics for Business is a useful introduction to economics for business students, a streamlined and comprehensive alternative to large undergraduate economics textbooks, and a valuable resource for managers and executives who need to understand the basics of economic concepts to grow their business. Online supporting resources for this book include bonus chapters on shareholders, trading blocs and skills groupings, a glossary, history of economics and an instructorâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s manual.

Table of Contents 1 Introduction to economics and business 1.1 Introduction: Whatâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s economics got to do with business? 1.2 Introduction to markets 1.3 Introduction to macroeconomy 1.4 Introduction to the financial system 2 Microeconomics: individual economic agents and institutions 2.1 Demand: in theory and in practice 2.2 About the firm 2.3 Supply: costs, output and distribution 2.4 Competition and markets 2.5 Business strategy: creating and sustaining a competitive advantage 3 Macroeconomics: the business background 3.1 The role of government 3.2 Money, interest rates and central banking: the role of monetory policy 3.3 Technological change and innovation 3.4 Forecasting 3.5 Employment 3.6 The International arena 3.7 Summary and overview

Business, Finance, Risk, Information Management

83


Financial Management for Technology Start Ups

This book

<< Unlike traditional accounting

manuals or those aimed more generally at small business operators, Finance for Technology Start Ups: A Handbook concentrates on what is important in financial terms for technologybased and innovation focussed entrepreneurial business

A Handbook for Growth Edition 1

<< Features the simple, yet effective

Date: Price:

03/08/2017 £19.99

ISBN Paperback: e-book:

9780749481346 9780749481353

Extent: Dimensions: Subject:

288 234x156 Accounting & Finance

‘Start-up Matrix’, meaning that Finance for Technology Start Ups: A Handbook offers a complete and must-have financial toolkit for managing technology based startups

<< Uses straight forward language

and extensive practical illustrations and case studies to demonstrate how technology and innovationbased startups can adopt and use a financial understanding that is effective and focussed on their needs

Author Information

Description

Al Bhimani is Founding Director of LSE Entrepreneurship and Professor of Management Accounting at the London School of Economics. He is widely published and an established speaker to scholars, accounting practitioners, managers and business entrepreneurs across the globe. He is presently carrying out research on the interface between business growth and digital technologies including the internet of things, blockchain, AI and 3-D printing. Al has a first degree from King’s College London and an MBA from Cornell University where he was a Fulbright Scholar. He also holds a PhD from LSE.

All start up businesses naturally require some technical expertise and an understanding of digitisation as well as awareness of competitive market forces. However, for technology-based start ups,the type of accounting understanding required is unique and must relate to the more innovative business models and ways of working that typically drive tecchnology-based businesses. Financial Management for Technology Start Ups explains using straight-forward language and extensive practical illustrations and case studies how technology-based startups can adopt and use a financial toolkit that is simple, effective and focussed on their needs. Currently every corner of the world is witnessing an explosion in technology-based startups that are altering and challenging existing business models and driving innovative ways of creating commercial value. Technological changes are complex and fast-paced which means that having financial know-how relevant to tech-based entrepreneurship is essential for success. Finance for Technology Start Ups equips innovative start ups and tech-based entrepreneurs with the specific finance and accounting knowledge needed for raising funds, managing cashflows, and identifying profit opportunities. Unlike traditional accounting manuals or those aimed more generally at small business operators, Finance for Technology Start Ups concentrates on what is key in financial terms for technology and innovation focussed entrepreneurial contexts. It offers ready to use accounting and financial know-how for effective communication with investors and to successfully implement commercial strategy and swiftly identify emerging profit pathways. Along with its simple, yet effective ‘Start-up Matrix’, Financial Management for Technology Start Ups offers a complete and must-have financial toolkit for managing tech-based start-ups.

Table of Contents 1 2 3 4 5 6 7

84

Business, Finance, Risk, Information Management

Why the Interest in Start-Ups Today? The Financial Inversion of Tech Start-Ups The Accounting Mechanics of Tech Businesses How Tech Start-Ups Can Attract Finance Critical Cost Management Tools for Tech StartUps Future Growth for Tech Start-Ups The Start-Up Matrix


<< Introduces what can sometimes

Investment and Portfolio Management

<< Takes an original approach: Unlike

A Practical Introduction

This book be a difficult, technical subject in a highly accessible, engaging way many other textbooks, Investment and Portfolio Analysis is rooted in Europe rather than adapted from a US text, but draws on examples and practice from around the world

<< Adopts a practical approach,

drawing on the authorsâ&#x20AC;&#x2122; many years of experience working in the financial sector to illustrate concepts with real-world examples and practice, making it the perfect choice for those preparing for a career in finance and investment

<< Offers a concise introduction,

supported with links to further reading and self-directional study

Edition 1

Date: Price:

03/11/2017 ÂŁ39.99

ISBN Paperback: e-book:

9780749480059 9780749480066

Extent: Dimensions: Subject:

288 234x156 Banking

Description

Author Information

For students of finance at both undergraduate and postgraduate level, or those preparing for professional examinations, Investment and Portfolio Management develops knowledge and understanding of the key financial products, investment strategies and risks in financial markets in the UK and internationally.

Ian Pagdin is Course Leader for Banking & Finance Masters and a variety of Finance and International Finance courses at Sheffield Hallam University. His background is finance, having worked in the finance industry for 22 years, including 19 years as an independent financial adviser.

With an emphasis on practice, Investment and Portfolio Management presents the theory and its relevance and application in the financial workplace. The authors draw on their experience working in the financial sector to illustrate concepts with case studies, examples and problems, including material relevant to candidates studying for professional examinations offered by the major professional bodies in the subject area (Charted Institute of Investment, CII & Chartered Institute of Securities and Investment, CISI). Each chapter is written in an easy-to-follow style, allowing readers to navigate their way through different topics without issue, avoiding complicated technical jargon, in favour of simpler terms and writing style. To meet the criteria for those studying for academic and professional courses, links are provided to more in-depth material and in-chapter features to encourage selfdirectional learning.

Michelle Hardy is a Senior Lecturer and Module Leader for several key Modules on a variety of Finance and International Finance courses at Sheffield Hallam University. Her background is corporate banking and international wealth management for 14 years and she is also a fellow of the ICAEW.

Online supporting resources for this book include lecture slides and figures from the book.

Table of Contents 1 Introduction 2 Financial Markets 2.1 Main Market Participants 2.2 Global Fund Management Industry 2.3 Investment Theory 3 Investment Classes 3.1 Equity 3.2 Debt 3.3 Mutual Funds 3.4 Derivatives 3.5 Alternative Investments 4 Risk 4.1 Types of Risk 4.2 Financial Regulation and Supervision 5 Portfolio Management 5.1 The Advisor and the Client 5.2 Issues Involved in the Management of Retail Fund Management Products 5.3 Taxation

Business, Finance, Risk, Information Management

85


Relationship Management in Banking

<< Supports the Chartered Banker

Institute’s (CBI) Relationship Management in Banking module requirements and helps to prepare for assessment

<< Written by banking sector experts

Principles and Practice Edition 1

Date: Price:

Chartered Banker Series 03/06/2018 £39.99

ISBN Paperback: e-book:

9780749482831 9780749482848

Extent: Dimensions: Subject:

304 234x156 Banking

Series:

with a cutting edge industry perspective, ideal to support students studying banking at undergraduate and postgraduate level

<< Aids work-based learning and

professional development with a highly practical and applied approach, bringing learning to life with activities to carry out in the workplace as well as case studies, further reading recommendations and definitions of key terms throughout

<< Offers thought leadership on

relationship management from expert authors with over 50 years of combined experience in the sector, endorsed by the Chartered Banker Instituteassessment material

Author Information

Description

Steve Goulding worked for a UK Bank for 35 years, the majority of which were spent in Commercial and Corporate, while 25 as Relationship Director. He is now an author, coach and mentor for a number of financial services personnel, and provides management consultancy services for a number of businesses.

Endorsed by the UK’s Chartered Banker Institute as required reading for the Chartered Banker programme, Relationship Management in Banking will support and develop the need to be able to manage key customer relationships. The text will consider the nature of commercial relationships and help the reader synthesise complex factors in order to develop a robust relationship management methodology. It will draw from bona fide case studies and examples that can demonstrate key relationship management concepts as well as bring learning to life and share examples of customers, good and bad, from a range of different sectors.

Richard Abley has operated within the banking industry since 1978, fulfilling a number of customer-facing and leadership roles in Business and Corporate Banking. Simultaneously, he has lectured to many hundreds of bankers seeking to obtain their professional qualifications, and has coauthored several books on banking.

86

Business, Finance, Risk, Information Management

Through case studies and providing online updates to regulations, Relationship Management in Banking will consider how to critically analyse approaches to relationship management used for a variety of banking customer types and examine the impact of legislation, regulation, governance and technology on banking relationship management and customer acquisition and retention.

Table of Contents 1 Introduction 2 Customer 2.1 Retail Banking and Wealth Management 2.2 Business Customers 2.3 Products and Services 2.4 Consumer Protection (Legislation and Regulation) 3 Relationship 3.1 Reputational Risk 3.2 Servicing Customers 3.3 The Role of the Relationship Manager 3.4 Tools and Techniques to Help the Relationship Manager 4 Management 4.1 The Use of Technology in Managing Customer Relationships 4.2 Portfolio Planning and Segmentation 4.3 Strategic Imperatives in Relationship Management 4.4 ’Putting it all Together’ (Live Case Study)


<< Supports the Chartered Banker

Institute’s (CBI) Retail and Digital Banking module requirements and helps to prepare for assessment

<< Written by banking sector experts with a cutting edge industry perspective, ideal to support students studying banking in professional training or at undergraduate and postgraduate level

<< Aids work-based learning and

professional development with a highly practical and applied approach, bringing learning to life with activities to carry out in the workplace as well as case studies, further reading recommendations and definitions of key terms throughout

<< Offers thought leadership on retail and digital banking from an expert author with over 39 years of experience in the sector, endorsed by the Chartered Banker Institute

Retail and Digital Banking Principles and Practice Edition 1

Date: Price:

Chartered Banker Series 03/08/2018 £39.99

ISBN Paperback: e-book:

9780749482718 9780749482725

Extent: Dimensions: Subject:

304 234x156 Banking

Series:

Description

Author Information

Written in support of the UK’s Charter Banker Institute’s (CBI) Retail and Digital Banking module, this Retail and Digital Banking looks at the changes that have occurred for retail branches, developments in onshore and offshore operations, call centres and the impact of technology and other critical factors in retail, and digital banking’s journey. This book considers the evolution of retail banking services and the major role that technology has played in providing high-quality and cost-effective services to consumers. This fascinating text then goes on to offer expert thought leadership on the future of retail banking and what this could mean for existing established banks and disruptive new entrants.

John Henderson has over 30 years’ experience in the banking sector, having held a number of roles for The Bank of Scotland, Sainsbury’s Bank and RBS and NatWest. He began his career working in retail branches but has also been a Regional Training Manager, headed up the Treasury Department and other operational risk services, managed quality for an operational call centre business and also led branch design and distribution. His current role is with the RBS Group, where he manages the offshoring portfolio. The author is a Fellow of the Chartered Institute of Bankers.

Retail and Digital Banking offers readers the opportunity to take a step back and consider the evolution of the sector in which they work and the tremendous level of change that has occurred over time for all operational activity. Retail and Digital Banking provides support for the module assessment and features practical case studies from the banking sector. This essential text brings the journey of modern banking to life and considers what the future holds. Online resources include a glossary, workplace activities, regulation updates and assessment preparation material.

Business, Finance, Risk, Information Management

87


Commercial Lending

<< Supports the Chartered Banker

Institute’s (CBI) Commercial Lending module requirements and helps to prepare for assessment

Principles and Practice Edition 1

<< Written by banking sector experts

with a cutting edge industry perspective, ideal to support students studying banking at undergraduate and postgraduate level

<< Aids work-based learning and

professional development with a highly practical and applied approach, bringing learning to life with activities to carry out in the workplace as well as case studies, further reading recommendations and definitions of key terms throughout

Date: Price:

Chartered Banker Series 03/09/2018 £39.99

ISBN Paperback: e-book:

9780749482770 9780749482787

<< Offers additional numeracy support

Extent: Dimensions: Subject:

304 234x156 Banking

<< Offers thought leadership on

Series:

to help readers with practical lending work, such as assessing balance sheets and understanding financial reports and documents commercial lending from an expert author with over 30 years of experience in the sector, endorsed by the Chartered Banker Institute

Author Information

Description

Adrian Cudby has a wide range of experience in banking and education. He worked for over 30 years in banking, for RBS, where he carried out an extensive range of roles including lending, relationship management, high risk management and roles in central strategy teams.

Endorsed by the Chartered Banker Institute as required reading for the Chartered Banker programme, Commercial Lending will support readers that wish to develop their ability to analyse the creditworthiness of a customer and their business in the context of current economic climate, future market and sector expectations.

The author now works predominantly in Higher Education and lectures on a wide range of subjects lending, law, risk management, management, marketing, international trade, leadership and ethics, and interpretation of financial statements and is an Associate of the Chartered Institute of Bankers.

88

Business, Finance, Risk, Information Management

Commercial Lending uses a series of practical exercises and case studies, and provides the tools needed for the reader to understand and appraise a customer’s business strategy. This will then enable the reader to provide appropriate funding solutions to meet the commercial needs of customers while reflecting the bank’s risk appetite. These tools include: how to assess the performance and creditworthiness of a business; how to critically evaluate the robustness of cash flow; how to undertake sensitivity analysis to quantify sustainable debt repayment capacity. Commercial Lending is a practical text that will present a critical analysis of financial and non-financial information to help readers identify key risks inherent in the customer’s lending proposition. Readers will go on to propose suitable funding solutions that mitigate risk and meet the needs of customer and bank.


This book

<< Addresses the needs of the non-

specialist compliance professional from a range of industries, backgrounds and experience

Anti-Money Laundering A Practical Guide to Reducing Organizational Risk

<< Outlines the different elements

of anti-money laundering (AML) practice to support compliance professionals at any stage of their career to put effective controls in place in their own organisations

<< Presents readers with the global oversight needed to align activity to a cohesive plan, sharing case studies and examples of good and bad practice from around the world << Includes the EU 4th Directive,

due to come into practice in July 2017; stays up-to-date with current regulations

Edition 1

Date: Price:

03/05/2018 £34.99

ISBN Paperback: e-book:

9780749481896 9780749481902

Extent: Dimensions: Subject:

200 234x156 Banking

Description

Author Information

It is estimated that between 2 and 5 per cent of global GDP (over $3 trillion) is laundered by criminals around the world every year. Once thought to be a problem which only affected banks and the financial services sector, high profile cases, such as the recent leak of the Panama Papers in 2016, have thrust the issue into the public arena, and governments around the world are being forced to put robust systems and controls in place. Anti-Money Laundering offers a cost-effective self-development tool for the busy compliance professional eager to progress their career and in need of an accessible, practical and jargon-free introduction to anti-money laundering (AML).

Rose Chapman is as Global Head of Compliance for a leading travel commerce platform and solutions provider. With over 20 years of experience working in compliance and ethics in global organizations, she is accustomed to the demands and challenges faced by business professionals and compliance teams working in fast-moving, culturally diverse and dynamic environments. She is a lecturer and training manual writer/ reviewer for the ICA in Post Graduate Diplomas and Certificates in Compliance, a member of the Institute of Money Laundering Prevention Officers Committee, UK, and a recognised speaker and expert voice on anti-money laundering.

Anti-Money Laundering offers a practical guide to navigate the maze of requirements needed to counter money laundering in an organization. This book separates the different elements of AML practice, featuring a range of case studies and scenarios highlighting issues and best practices around the world. The text demonstrates that it is by foresight and methodology that AML can be mitigated, and provides clarity on complex points to better enable readers to gain the expertise they need to achieve success in practice.

Table of Contents 1

Reaction – The Rise of AML and Anti-Terrorist Financing Activity 2 Over-Reaction – When What We Know Does Not Inform Us Well 3 Entering Global Markets – Why Transparency is King 4 Suspicious Activity Reporting 5 Weak or Strong Regulators – Which are Best? 6 Evidencing Activities 7 Applying the Brakes at Key Moments – Placement, Layering and Integration 8 Cross-Border Financial Intelligence Unit Activity

Business, Finance, Risk, Information Management

89


Culture, Conduct and Ethics in Banking

This book

<< Supports the Chartered Banker

Institute’s (CBI) Culture, Conduct and Ethics in Banking module requirements and helps to prepare for assessment

Principles and Practice

<< Written by banking sector experts Edition 1

Date: Price:

Chartered Banker Series 03/09/2018 £39.99

ISBN Paperback: e-book:

9780749482909 9780749482916

Extent: Dimensions: Subject:

304 234x156 Banking

Series:

with a cutting edge industry perspective, ideal to support students studying banking on professional training courses or at undergraduate and postgraduate level

<< Aids work-based learning and

professional development with a highly practical and applied approach, bringing learning to life with activities to carry out in the workplace as well as case studies, further reading recommendations and definitions of key terms throughout

<< Offers thought leadership on

culture, conduct and ethics from an expert author with over 39 years of experience in the sector, endorsed by the Chartered Banker Institute

Author Information

Description

Fred Bell is an experienced career banker with extensive risk management leadership experience, particularly in operational risk management, change management and business continuity. With a career spanning over 39 years in Royal Bank of Scotland, Fred’s experience also includes project management and delivery, including the establishment of new businesses and business due diligence exercises. His senior leadership roles have included Head of Operational Risk in the RBS Wealth Division, Head of Risk at Tesco Personal Finance and Head of the RBS Bank of China Risk Programme. Fred also established and ran RBS’s first dedicated Business Continuity function.

Endorsed by the Chartered Banker Institute as required reading for the Chartered Banker programme, Culture, Conduct and Ethics in Banking will support the need to ensure banking professionals gain a critical appreciation of the interrelationship between conduct, culture and ethics in banking.

90

Business, Finance, Risk, Information Management

This text will consider the social utility of banking and finance and how formal and informal influences shape banking organizations. Culture, Conduct and Ethics in Banking will take a practical and applied approach and will aim to develop the capability of readers to: recognize and contribute toward balanced outcomes for consumers and organizations; understand the impact of reputational deficit; and understand the personal impact of an individual in the workplace. Through case studies and continuous updates to regulations, Culture, Conduct and Ethics in Banking will: analyse the evolution of the bank’s role in society; examine the impact of legislation, regulation and governance on banking operations; offer a range of ethical theories and their applicability to banking and finance; and help the reader to critically analyse how to achieve balanced and ethically-sound outcomes.


This book

<< Brings together 50 of the most

valuable business models into one reliable resource, including AIDA, Branding Pentagram, Disruptive Innovation Model, Gap Analysis, Porter’s Five Forces, SWOT and many more

<< Provides a clear explanation of

every model’s history, along with relevant theory, real-world case studies, and visual graphics

<< Helps readers add structure and

clarity to business problems, and gives them templates they can apply to overcome their own professional challenges

The Business Models Handbook Templates, Theory and Case Studies Edition 1

Date: Price:

03/03/2018 £19.99

ISBN Paperback: e-book:

9780749481872 9780749481889

Extent: Dimensions: Subject:

232 234x156 Business & Management Skills

Description

Author Information

Business frameworks are extraordinarily valuable professional tools. They add structure and clarity to business problems, and can help practitioners overcome the everyday challenges they face. The Business Models Handbook brings together the most helpful and widely used templates and frameworks into a single, invaluable resource. Each chapter focuses on an individual business framework, giving an overview of its purpose and details of how it will help an organisation grow and be profitable. Each model is supported by a real world case study, and enhanced by a handy visual graphic that the reader can use as a template for their own day-to-day work.

Paul Hague is the Managing Director of B2B International Ltd. His books share 30 years of practical experience in running a market research agency. Paul Hague is a Visiting Fellow at Manchester Metropolitan University and a guest lecturer at Manchester Business School. His books have been translated into Italian, Indonesian, Bulgarian, Polish, Portuguese and Chinese.

Meticulously prepared and researched, The Business Models Handbook covers 50 of the best known and most widely used frameworks, including the Ansoff matrix, Price-Quality-Strategy model, Stage-Gate model, Service Profit chain and many more. Authored by Paul Hague, a leading global market researcher with a background working on over 3,000 different research projects, this is a truly invaluable resource for any student or professional.

Table of Contents 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26

4Ps AIDA Ansoff Matrix Benchmarking Blue Ocean Strategy Boston Consulting Group Matrix Branding Pentagram Customer Journey Maps Customer Lifetime Value Customer Value Proposition Diffusion of Innovation Directional Policy Matrix – Segment Attractiveness Disruptive Innovation Model Edward de Bono’s 6 Hats EFQM Excellence Model Gap Analysis Greiner’s Growth Model Kano Maslow’s Hierarchy McKinsey 7-S PESTLE Porter Competition Strategies Porter’s Five Forces Price Elasticity Price-Quality-Strategy Model Product Lifecycle

27 28 29 30 31 32 33

Serv/Qual Service Profit Chain SOSTAC MOSAIC Stage-Gate Model SWOT Value Chain Value Equivalence Line

Business, Finance, Risk, Information Management

91


The Business Skills Handbook

This book

<< Helps students refine key study and workplace skills, from how to study and work in teams to developing critical reading and project management skills

Everything you need to succeed in your studies and at work Edition 1

Imprint: Date: Price:

CIPD 28/11/2009 £38.99

ISBN Paperback: e-book:

9781843982180 9781843983392

Extent: Dimensions: Subject:

<< Takes an experiential learning

approach to get students assessing and improving their own skills

<< Online resources: instructor’s

manual, lecture slides and figures and tables from the book

536 246x189 Business & Management Skills

Author Information

Description

Roy Horn is an academic and researcher in the School of Business and Management at Buckinghamshire New University, UK.

How do you develop leadership skills or give a successful presentation? What difference can effective thinking and critical reading make to your performance? How can you get and stay organised to meet deadlines? The first book of its kind to cover all the business skills that students need at university and at work, The Business Skills Handbook covers all the practical, cognitive, technical and development skills that students need to succeed, from organising life and work to developing good writing and teamwork skills. Mapped to the learning outcomes of the CIPD Developing Skills for Business Leadership module, and with a focus on experiential learning to get students assessing and developing their skills, The Business Skills Handbook is designed to help students manage themselves more effectively, make justifiable decisions and problem solve more effectively, lead and influence others, interpret financial information, manage financial resources, demonstrate IT proficiency and demonstrate competence in postgraduate study skills. Online supporting resources include an instructor’s manual, lecture slides and figures and tables from the book.

Table of Contents 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18

92

Business, Finance, Risk, Information Management

Organising Life and Work How to Study Learning and Skills What are the Key Skills of University Life and the Workplace? Working in Teams Effective Reading Skills Developing Good Writing Skills Presentation Communication Business Calculations Critical Reading and Writing Skills Analysis and Evaluation Skills Examinations and Assignments Thinking and Memory Skills Word Processor Skills Being Effective with Spreadsheets Project Management Skills Social Skills Leadership, Coaching and Mentoring Skills Careers and ‘Futuring’ Skills


This book

<< Is written by Professor Sir Cary

Cooper (President of the CIPD and Professor of Organizational Psychology and Health at Manchester Business School) and Stefan Stern (prominent management journalist and director of the High Pay Centre)

Myths of Management What People Get Wrong About Being the Boss Edition 1

<< Explores over 40 of the most

pervasive myths that all managers and aspiring managers should be able to recognize and relate to, from the entertaining to the downright damaging

<< Draws on extensive and compelling research in management, organizational psychology and organizational behaviour

Series: Date: Price:

Business Myths 03/10/2017 £14.99

ISBN Paperback: e-book:

9780749480233 9780749480240

Extent: Dimensions: Subject:

240 234x156 Business & Management Skills

Description

Author Information

Is it really true that working longer hours makes you more successful? Do you really need to hide your emotions in order to gain respect as a manager? Does higher pay really always lead to higher performance?

Cary L. Cooper CBE is President of the CIPD and Distinguished Professor of Organizational Psychology and Health at Lancaster and Manchester Universities. He is Founding Editor of the Journal of Organizational Behavior and Editor-in-Chief of Stress & Health. Cary is Chair of the Academy of Social Sciences and of the Chronic Disease and Wellbeing Council of the WEF.

The world of management is blighted by fads, fiction and falsehoods. Cary Cooper and Stefan Stern take you on an entertaining journey through the most famous myths surrounding the much-written about topic of management. They debunk false assumptions, inject truth into over-simplifications and tackle damaging habits head-on. Fascinating insights from psychology, leadership theory and organizational behaviour provide you with a compelling and practical guide to avoid falling into the trap of cliché, misinformation and prejudice. This engaging read offers you authentic insights into the reality of work, drawn from extensive research and real-world business examples, to give you the essential knowledge you need to become a better manager. Whether cheesy, naïve or even destructive, management myths could be holding you back and stifling your team’s potential. This book is the guide you need to becoming an enlightened manager.

Stefan Stern writes for the FT, where he was the Management Columnist between 2006 and 2010, the Guardian and the International Business Times. He is Visiting Professor in Management Practice at Cass Business School and is Director of the High Pay Centre.

Table of Contents 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17

There Is One Right Way to Lead and Manage A Manager Should Never Show Vulnerability or Doubt Long Hours Will Lead to Success It’s Tough at the Top It’s Lonely at the Top You Need to Be the Smartest Person in the Room Hierarchy Is Over You Should Never Make U Turns You Should Only Hire People who Will ‘Fit In’ Leadership Is More Important Than Management You Have to Pay Top Dollar to Get the Right Person Annual Appraisals Help You Manage Performance Information Must Be Controlled and Limited Women Don’t Want Top Jobs Leaders are Born, Not Made Your First 100 Days in a New Job are Make or Break You Have to Know Everything That Is Going On at All Times

18 Heroic Leaders Can Change Entire Organisations On Their Own 19 The Best Strategy Always Wins 20 Flexible Working Is Not Possible in Senior Roles 21 Pay Must Be Kept Confidential

Business, Finance, Risk, Information Management

93


Contract Management

This book

<< Provides a practical handbook for

procurement and supply chain managers who need to review their own skills and practices

Core Business Competence Edition 1

<< Provides tools to help organisations

move towards best practice

<< Equips the reader with Date: Price:

03/07/2017 ÂŁ29.99

ISBN Paperback: e-book:

9780749480646 9780749480653

Extent: Dimensions: Subject:

accompanying PowerPoint slides that illustrate the tools and skills

288 234x156 Business & Management Skills

Author Information

Description

Peter Sammons is a commercial/procurement specialist with 35 years in field. He is now a consultant who provides commercial support and develops/delivers training seminars

Contract management is a key management skill, yet it is underplayed in most organizations, which usually default to project management skills as a proxy for contract management skills. Whilst project management skills are equally essential, they are not the same thing. Contract Management looks at the wider contract management picture from an industrialcommercial perspective, and helps to set-out typical structures and processes that assist the contract management task. The author uses diagramatic representations wherever possible to depict complex ideas. Contract Management includes â&#x20AC;&#x153;learning pointsâ&#x20AC;? in each chapter, looking at handling problems, procedural changes and enhancing commercial performance.

Table of Contents 1 2 3 3.1 3.2 3.3 3.4 3.5 3.6 3.7

94

Business, Finance, Risk, Information Management

Introduction Contract Management as a Value-Driver What is the Task? Role and Importance of Effective Contract Management Contract Administration Commercial Strategy Contract Design Mobilisation When Things Go Wrong Managing for Success


This book

<< Examines the importance of CPD

and the methods that can be used to create and implement a CPD plan

Continuing Professional Development

<< New to this edition: increased

coverage of the critical debate about issues in CPD, an outline of how to organise and encourage CPD and guidance on how senior members of the profession can benefit from CPD

<< Online resources: instructor’s manual and lecture slides

Edition 2

Imprint: Date: Price:

CIPD 22/01/2007 £35.99

ISBN Paperback: e-book:

9781843981664 9780749482503

Extent: Dimensions: Subject:

176 234x156 Business & Management Skills

Description

Author Information

To maximise enjoyment of work and life requires a continual response to the changing world in which we live. Are you living to work or working to live? What would you like to be doing? We need to look within at our latent skills and abilities and explore ways of building on our current talents and developing new aspects of ourselves. Continuing Professional Development explores the importance of continuing professional development (CPD) and the different methods that can be used to analyse development needs and create and implement a CPD plan. It provides practical guidance and a theoretical overview of CPD, including examples and case studies.

David Megginson is a professor of HRD at Sheffield Hallam University, UK. He is on both the membership and education committees of the CIPD and the CPD Working Group. Vivien Whitaker is a lecturer, researcher and consultant at Sheffield Hallam University, UK.

This fully updated 2nd edition of Continuing Professional Development includes increased coverage of the critical debate about issues in CPD, outlines how to organise and encourage CPD and provides guidance on how senior members of the profession can use and benefit from CPD. Activities and self-diagnostic tools, critical debates about issues and coverage of how to organise and encourage CPD all bring the topic to life for CIPD students undertaking the Professional Development Scheme as well as general readers seeking to encourage CPD in the workplace. Online supporting resources include an instructor’s manual and lecture slides.

Table of Contents 1

Exploring Continuing Professional Development 1.1 Clarifying Continuing Professional Development 1.2 Understanding Continuing Professional Development 2 Engaging in Continuing Professional Development 2.1 Identifying Development Needs 2.2 Prioritising Needs and Selecting Appropriate Activities 2.3 Undertaking Development Activities 2.4 Recording and Evaluating Development 2.5 Organisational Contribution to CPD 3 Consolidating Your CPD Achievements 3.1 Celebrating Success 3.2 Networking Your Future 3.3 Empowering Career Creativity

Business, Finance, Risk, Information Management

95


Researching and Writing Dissertations

This book

<< Includes often overlooked guidance on how to craft compelling introductions and conclusions

<< New to this edition: now includes

A Complete Guide for Business and Management Students Edition 2

<< Online resources: lecturer’s guide

Imprint: Date: Price:

CIPD 01/02/2012 £31.99

ISBN Paperback: e-book:

9781843983026 9781843983231

Extent: Dimensions: Subject:

coverage of the latest development in technologies that can be used for research such as Twitter and Facebook and PowerPoint slides as well as templates and checklists from the book for students

288 234x156 Business & Management Skills

Author Information

Description

Roy Horn is an academic and researcher in the School of Business and Management at Buckinghamshire New University, UK.

From finding a topic to writing and reviewing your work, Researching and Writing Dissertations is an essential tool for anyone working on a dissertation or business report. This new edition is now suitable for students studying the CIPD units Investigating a Business Issue and Using Information in HR but is equally relevant for all non-CIPD students too. Covering everything from strategies for finding and developing a dissertation topic and how to develop a research proposal through to what methodology to use and how to analyse your data, this is the only book you need to write clear, effective and compelling dissertations and reports. In addition to practical guidance on the researching and writing up of projects, this book includes essential guidance on effective time management and how to ensure that projects are completed and submitted on time as well as invaluable insights through real-life student and supervisor comments. Fully supported by online resources including an instructor’s manual and lecturer slides as well as templates, checklists and quizzes for students, Researching and Writing Dissertations is a book that anyone working on dissertations, research projects or business reports can’t afford to be without.

Table of Contents 1 2

Preface and Introduction Strategies for Finding and Developing a Dissertation Topic 3 The Key Skills Tested in the Dissertation 4 The Research Proposal 5 How Can I Manage My Time and Complete on Time? 6 Theory and Literature 7 Methodology 8 Data, and How to Analyse It 9 Data Analysis and Representation 10 The Craft of Writing, and Introductions and Conclusions 11 Reviewing and Evaluating Your Dissertation

96

Business, Finance, Risk, Information Management


This book

Business Research

<< Provides a clear, step-by-step

Enjoy Creating, Developing and Writing Your Business Project

<< Makes students comfortable

Edition 1

<< Provides a clear, step-by-step

Date: Price:

03/11/2013 £24.99

ISBN Paperback: e-book:

9780749468958 9780749468965

narrative that links the student’s research to their aims of getting into their preferred organizations and confident in selecting research methods to learn about organizations narrative that links the students’ research methods to their aim of getting into their preferred organizations.

Extent: Dimensions: Subject:

232 234x156 Business & Management Skills

Description

Author Information

Knowledge of business research is necessary for any business student, as all postgraduate business programmes and business-related disciplines require it. Business Research is a groundbreaking book for student researchers who need to conceive, conduct and complete a new research project for the first time. It concentrates on the business organization and gives invaluable practical advice on going out into the field and conducting interviews, researching problems and learning about organizations. Through its conversational, accessible style and its adoption of a student’s perspective, this book will make the process of learning about research enjoyable and the resulting research project outstanding.

Wilson Ng leads and delivers business research methods modules for undergraduate and postgraduate students at the University of Roehampton. He is a Visiting Professor at two European universities: UNICA (Università degli studi di Cagliari) in Italy and BEM (Bordeaux Management School) in France. Prior to his academic career, Wilson was a senior investment banker with NM Rothschild in London and Singapore.

Business Research is essential reading for students who are studying for one or more modules in research methods for a postgraduate qualification in business and management; students who have a methodological component to one of their modules (eg a module in organizational behaviour); and students who have to conduct an investigation in a business and management field, for a dissertation or project report, and need guidance and assistance on how to approach, conduct and report every aspect of their project.

Table of Contents 1 Introduction 2 Planning your project 2.1 The nature of business research 2.2 Methodology and methods 3 ‘Doing’ your project 3.1 The project proposal 3.2 Collecting quantitative data 3.3 Collecting qualitative data through interviews 3.4 Collecting data as an ethnographer 3.5 Case study research 3.6 Collecting data: less common methods 3.7 Ensuring data saturation 4 Reporting your findings 4.1 Analysing quantitative data 4.2 Analysing qualitative data 5 Writing your report 5.1 Discussing project findings 5.2 Conclusion to your report 5.3 Reference lists 5.4 Writing your abstract 5.5 Conclusion

Business, Finance, Risk, Information Management

97


Business Research Methods

This book

<< Helps students apply research

methods to their own projects

A Practical Approach

<< Presents complex principles in a user-friendly way

Edition 1

<< Online resources: instructor’s

Imprint: Date: Price:

CIPD 24/11/2009 £44.99

ISBN Paperback: e-book:

9781843982289 9781843983620

Extent: Dimensions: Subject:

manual with additional activities and supporting handouts, lecture slides, figures and tables from the text and web links, templates, quizzes, activities, examples of practice and sample questionnaire results for students

640 264x195 Business & Management Skills

Author Information

Description

Sheila Cameron is a senior lecturer at the Open University Business School (OUBS), UK.

Organisations need research, and managers have to be able to commission, judge and use others’ research as well as conduct research themselves to inform business decisions. Business Research Methods helps you understand the challenges of carrying out worthwhile research into significant issues and develop a wide range of research-related professional skills. Guiding you through the process of selecting, carrying out and reporting on a successful research project, it breaks down the research process, from exploring the literature and crafting a research proposal to practical research management and addressing the transferable skills of project management and communication.

Deborah Price is a lecturer in Management at the Open University Business School (OUBS), UK.

Business Research Methods places research firmly in the real world, exploring why research is done and how to ensure that projects are meaningful for organisations. Examples and case studies, including examples of students’ projects, give learners with little or no work experience a meaningful context in which to relate their own projects. Online supporting resources for lecturers include an instructor’s manual with additional activities and supporting handouts, lecture slides and figures and tables from the text. Resources for students include web links, templates, quizzes, activities, examples of practice and sample questionnaire results for students.

Table of Contents 1 From First Ideas to Possible Topics 1.1 Practical Business Research – An Overview 1.2 The Complexities of Business Research 1.3 The Investigative Process 1.4 Stakeholders, Power and Ethics 1.5 Considering Possible Topics 2 Towards a Research Proposal 2.1 Exploring the Literature 2.2 Writing A Literature Review 2.3 Research Questions and Purposes 2.4 Data, Evidence and Sampling 2.5 Choosing a Research Method 2.6 Crafting a Research Proposal 3 Data Collection 3.1 Producing a Research Project from Secondary Data 3.2 Case Study Research 3.3 Action-Oriented Research and Action Research 3.4 Questionnaires 3.5 Interviews 3.6 Focus Groups and Workshops

98

Business, Finance, Risk, Information Management

4 Data Analysis 4.1 Grounded Theory 4.2 Content Analysis 4.3 Representing Quantitative Data 4.4 Inferential Statistical Analysis 4.5 Drawing Valid Conclusions 5 Essential Research Skills 5.1 Managing the Project 5.2 Managing Client Relationships 5.3 Learning and Reflection 5.4 Writing about Research


This book

Practical Statistics

<< Enables readers and students

A Handbook for Business Projects

<< Supports readers at all levels of

Edition 1

to translate statistical data into comprehensive information knowledge and experience through a two-level approach with ‘The essentials’ and ‘Tell me more’ sections

<< Encourages active distance and

independent learners through case studies and simple explanations

Date: Price:

03/11/2013 £19.99

ISBN Paperback: e-book:

9780749468460 9780749468477

Extent: Dimensions: Subject:

184 240x170 Business & Management Skills

Description

Author Information

Practical Statistics is an introduction and reference guide for those studying business and management at postgraduate level, MBA students and professionals. It gives the reader a solid understanding of statistics without being too simple or mind-numbingly complex. It turns statistics, often perceived as being difficult and pointless, into something approachable and sensible.

John Buglear is Head of the Division of Management at Nottingham Business School. He teaches quantitative methods and basic accounting on undergraduate and postgraduate programmes. He has lectured in statistics, operational research and research methods on postgraduate international programmes: Azerbaijan (in collaboration with BP Exploration); the Czech Republic (in collaboration with PricewaterhouseCoopers) and Uzbekistan.

John Buglear emphasizes the importance of working back from results rather than working out results. He starts the book with basic concepts that get increasingly more complex, from simple diagrams to multivariate methods, as well as using simple metaphors to aid understanding. The book has a two-level approach, with sections headed ‘The essentials’ and ‘Tell me more’ to support learning at all levels. A rare book on business statistics that students and professionals can really understand, Practical Statistics supports active learning with use of applications and case studies, invaluable online learning materials and fully worked solutions to questions in the review section.

Table of Contents 1 2

Introduction What you need to know before you start analysing data 3 Analysing univariate data 4 Analysing bivariate data 5 Analysing multivariate data with dependency 6 Analysing multivariate data for interdependency

Business, Finance, Risk, Information Management

99


Corporate Governance Ethics and CSR

This book

<< Demonstrates the realities of

balancing social responsibility with modern business practice

<< Takes a practical approach to a complex topic

Edition 1

<< Includes private and public sector

examples

Date: Price:

03/01/2013 ÂŁ34.99

ISBN Paperback: e-book:

9780749463854 9780749463861

Extent: Dimensions: Subject:

296 234x156 Corporate Governance & Corporate Social Responsibility

Author Information

Description

John Taylor is a Senior Lecturer in accounting and auditing at Leeds Metropolitan University. He has substantial experience of working as an accountant in the audit profession and was formerly financial director of a company in the clothing industry.

The rise of CSR (corporate social responsibility) is creating a paradigm shift in contemporary corporate culture and organizational behaviour with shareholder and stakeholder activism on the rise as international banking crises and global corporate scandals dominate the headlines.

Justine Simpson is a Principal Lecturer in Accountancy Financial Services at Leeds Met. She teaches professional accounting qualifications (CIMA, CIPFA, ACCA) and management accountancy, project management, forensic accounting and financial management modules on BA Accounting Finance degree and MSc Accounting.

Through accountability and transparency, fiduciary capitalism is being challenged to tie sustainability and corporate conscience to the bottom line. With the emergence of impact investing, social responsibility and ethics in corporate governance is becoming essential to long-term success in the new global marketplace. Corporations need to demonstrate that ethical, environmentally conscious business practices and profit are no longer mutually exclusive. Justine Simpson and John R. Taylorâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s Corporate Governance Ethics and CSR gives the reader a comprehensive guide to todayâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s requirements for governance and reporting that organizations must adopt to successfully strike a balance between financial gain and socially responsible, green business practices that enhance the greater good. Employing current examples (Walmart, Goldman Sachs, Citigroup) and case studies in both the public and private sectors, Simpson and Taylor have compiled a thorough and fascinating roadmap, including historical context, for anyone seeking to understand the complex workings of the international corporate economy that affects us all. This book is perfect for students of, and those wishing to participate in, this revolutionary wave sweeping our planet.

Table of Contents 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13

100

Business, Finance, Risk, Information Management

Introduction The need for trust Corporate culture Ethical behaviour Principles of corporate governance The role of the senior executives/board Assessing performance and remuneration of directors and senior executives The audit function Corporate governance and other stakeholders Corporate Social Responsibility and its reporting Corporate Social Responsibility, its measurement, theories and models Small companies, charities and other not-forprofit organizations Emerging issues


<< Provides guidance on ethics

Business Ethics in Practice

<< Includes examples from small and

Edition 1

This book relating to consumers, the supply chain, competition and the environment as well as workplace ethics medium-sized businesses as well as multi-national corporations including Barcelona FC, BP, Nestle, Tesco, Nike, Body Shop, Google and John Lewis

<< Online resources: PowerPoint

slides for every chapter, lecturer’s guides including advice on inchapter questions and student guide with practical tools for reflective learning

Imprint: Date: Price:

CIPD 01/03/2012 £44.99

ISBN Paperback: e-book:

9781843982722 9780749482541

Extent: 320 Dimensions: 246x189 Subject: Corporate Governance & Corporate Social Responsibility

Description

Author Information

Business Ethics in Practice is essential reading for all undergraduate, postgraduate and MBA students looking to ensure they act responsibly and make the right decisions when faced with ethical dilemmas. Covering the impact of character and culture on managing ethics, leadership, governance and social responsibility, this book goes beyond ethical theory to show ethical considerations and challenges in practice.

Simon Robinson is Professor of Applied & Professional Ethics at Leeds Metropolitan University, UK

With examples from both small businesses and large multinational corporates such as Google, BP and Nestle, Business Ethics in Practice shows how ethics must be considered by everyone in every sector, in a business of any size. With coverage of ethics in relation to staff, consumers, the supply chain, competitors and the environment, this book will ensure that students can think ethically and make effective ethical decisions. Supported by online resources including PowerPoint slides and a guide for lecturers as well as practical tips for students, this book will help anyone studying business ethics in both their professional and personal development.

Paul Dowson is a Senior Lecturer at the School of Applied Global Ethics at Leeds Metropolitan University, UK

Table of Contents 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14

‘Are We Still the Good Guys?’ – Introducing Ethics in Business Normative Ethical Theory Ethical Decision Making Whose Responsibility? The Ethical Environment Leadership and Governance Character, Culture, and Code: Managing Ethics The Workplace of the 21st Century Business, Management and Professions Consumers Supply Chain and Competition Social Responsibility Business and Government Global Ethics Environmental Sustainability

Business, Finance, Risk, Information Management

101


Responsible Business

This book

<< Highlights the added value to

organizations of incorporating triple P (People, Planet and Profits) considerations into investment decisions

Evaluating Investment Decisions to Benefit People, the Planet and Profits

<< Features case studies from private Edition 1

Date: Price:

03/06/2018 ÂŁ29.99

ISBN Paperback: e-book:

9780749480608 9780749480615

Extent: Dimensions: Subject:

and public sector, not-for-profit and social enterprise organizations who have benefited from this approach including the Ellen MacArthur Foundation

<< Includes access to a ready-made business simulator tool for evaluating investment decisions

288 234x156 Corporate Governance & Corporate Social Responsibility

Author Information

Description

Annemieke Roobeek is Professor of Strategy and Transformation Management at Nyenrode Business Universiteit (Netherlands). She was previously Professor of Technology and Economics at Nyenrode and Professor of Complex Issues in strategy and policy at the University of Amsterdam.

Until recently, profit has been the driving force for most business decisions. However, business leaders must now look more widely at their actions to assess the impact of these on people both inside and outside the organization as well as the environment. Responsible Business provides a seven step framework that eliminates internal bias and can be used to make decisions that increase profits, benefit staff and protect the environment as a whole. This means that personal values, ethics and morals can be aligned with business goals and overall company strategy.

Jacques de Swart is Professor of Applied Mathematics at Nyenrode Business University and partner within PwC, where he is responsible for the Data Analytics Group.

Responsible Business will enable business leaders to answer questions including what values should be attached to financial and non-financial aspects of business decisions? How can these values be translated into concrete manageable actions? and which decisions best suit the strategic goals of the organization? Readers will have access to the business simulator tool which removes the complexity, ambiguity and stress of business decisions to allow leaders to manage the competing priorities in their organization and confidently make the best investment decisions for their business. With diverse case studies from organizations who have benefited from this approach, this book is essential reading for everyone needing to evaluate their investment decisions.

Myrthe van der Plas has a background in communication, financial risk management and econometrics. She teaches courses in statistics and strategic decision making at Nyenrode Business University and New Business School Amsterdam.

Table of Contents 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13

102

Business, Finance, Risk, Information Management

Preface The Strategic Importance of the Business Simulator The Strategic Decision-Making Process Shared Value as a Framework for Shaping the Strategy Innovation as a Catalyst for Responsible Growth Sustainability, Business Models and Decision Making Action Research as a Generator of Financial and Non-Financial Key Outputs Working Towards a Circular Economy Using the Business Simulator Reducing Greenhouse Gas Emissions and Becoming More Energy Efficient Quantifying the Contribution of Sport Creating a Healthy and Productive Working Environment Putting Roof Renovation in a Strategic Context

14 Choosing between Various Waste Collection Systems 15 Attracting Investment at a Social Enterprise 16 Providing Policy Makers with an Objective Decision-Making Process


This book

<< Gives the reader the knowledge and confidence to make sound ethical decisions in all business activities

Global Business Ethics Responsible Decision Making in an International Context

<< Provides easily implementable

practical guidance in the form of decision-making trees and a model organizational ethics code

<< Features detailed analysis of

international ethical issues such as the conflict between Sharia law and Western principles

Edition 1

Date: Price:

03/11/2015 £34.99

ISBN Paperback: e-book:

9780749473952 9780749473969

Extent: Dimensions: Subject:

248 240x170 Corporate Governance & Corporate Social Responsibility

Description

Author Information

Corporate social responsibility, sustainability and acting ethically are all accepted business aims, but their meaning and implementation in a global context is far less clear-cut. Global Business Ethics cuts through the confusion to provide a coherent basis for ethical decisionmaking within the complications of the international business landscape.

Ronald D Francis is Professor Emeritus in Ethics and Governance at Victoria University, Melbourne. His experiences in ethics extends over decades, and includes a period as Chairman of a national ethics committee, and as a member of a psychologists’ registration board, as well as ten years on a research ethics committee. As a consultant, he has worked with corporations and universities to develop ethics codes and deliver practical business ethics training.

Underpinned by theory and including worked-through examples of ethical dilemmas and their solutions, this textbook will guide the reader beyond theory to real-world business decisions. Practical tools such as decision trees and suggested principles to apply in dilemma situations give readers the skills and confidence to tackle the ethical challenges they face. Global Business Ethics offers a unique working code of ethics provided as a model with guidance to readers for adaptation and implementation. Case studies include: Walmart, Hershey’s, Citibank, Ford, Nike, Johnson & Johnson, Harley-Davidson, The Body Shop and Procter and Gamble. A chapter on the legal aspects of ethics provides guidance on the complex relationship between law and ethics in international business. The final part takes an in-depth look at the practical application of ethics in business life. Covering all the major theories of ethics, including an examination of the role of quantification of ethics, Global Business Ethics demonstrates how their principles can be applied to inform better business decisions. Online supporting resources for this book include instructor’s manual, lecture slides and appendices.

Guy Murfey is a psychologist and lawyer, recently retired as the National Practice manager of the Australian Tax Office’s (ATO) Legal Services Branch, where he was responsible for the day to day running of litigation, ensuring that the highest ethical standards of practice were adhered to.

Table of Contents 1 1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4 1.5 2 2.1 2.2 3 3.1 3.2 3.3 3.4

The Necessity, Justification and Research into Cross-cultural Byusiness Ethics Background to ethics Justification for ethics Cross-cultural issues in business ethics Organizational factors in business ethics Individual factors in business ethics Theoretical Issues in Busines Ethics Theoretical approaches Legal aspects of ethics Solving Problems Ethical gradualism, culture, quantification and codes Investigating ethical breaches International standards and first principles Ethical codes: ready reference guide (glossary of international codes related to ethics)

Business, Finance, Risk, 103 Information Management


IT Governance

This book

An International Guide to Data Security and ISO27001/ISO27002 Edition 6

organizations to implement a robust IT governance system

<< Is fully aligned with the latest regulations and standards, including ISO 27001:2013

Date: Price:

03/09/2015 £49.99

ISBN Paperback: e-book:

9780749474058 9780749474065

Extent: Dimensions: Subject:

<< Provides best practice advice for

<< Empowers readers to better protect their businesses against external cyber threats and provides a clear risk management framework

360 234x156 Information & Data Management

Author Information

Description

Alan Calder is founder-director of IT Governance Ltd, which provides IT governance, compliance, risk management and information security books, trading tools, consultancy and training. Alan consults with companies internationally on matters relating to information security.

Faced with constant and fast-evolving threats to information security and with a growing exposure to cyber risk, managers at all levels and in organizations of all sizes need a robust IT governance system. Now in its sixth edition, the bestselling IT Governance, 6th edition, provides guidance for companies looking to protect and enhance their information security management systems and protect themselves against cyber threats. IT Governance has been fully updated to take account of current cyber security and advanced persistent threats and reflects the latest regulatory and technical developments, including the 2013 updates to ISO 27001/ISO 27002. Changes for this edition include:

Steve Watkins is a director at IT Governance, Chair of the ISO/IEC 27001 User Group – the UK Chapter of the ISMS International User Group – and contracted Technical Assessor for UKAS, assessing certification bodies offering ISMS/ISO 27001 and ITSMS/ISO 20000-1 accredited certification. He sits on the UK national standards body’s technical committees RM/1, IST/33 and sub-committee IST/33/1 , and is Chair of IST/33/1 Panel 2, which is responsible for the UK’s contributions to standards including ISO 27006, 27007, 27008 and 27021.

Full updates throughout in line with the revised ISO 27001 standard and accompanying ISO 27002 code of practice for information security controls Full coverage of changes to data-related regulations in different jurisdictions and advice on compliance Guidance on the options for continual improvement models and control frameworks made possible by the new standard New developments in cyber risk and mitigation practices The latest technological developments that affect IT governance and security Guidance on the new information security risk assessment process and treatment requirements Including coverage of key international markets, IT Governance is the definitive guide to implementing an effective information security management and governance system.

Table of Contents 1 2 3 4 5 6

104

Business, Finance, Risk, Information Management

7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14

Why is information security necessary? The UK Combined Code, the FRC Risk Guidance and Sarbanes–Oxley ISO27001 Organizing information security Information security policy and scope The risk assessment and Statement of Applicability Mobile devices Human resources security Asset management Media handling Access control User access management System and application access control Cryptography

15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27

Physical and environmental security Equipment security Operations security Controls against malicious software (malware) Communications management Exchanges of information System acquisition, development and maintenance Development and support processes Supplier relationships Monitoring and information security incident management Business and information security continuity management Compliance The ISO27001 audit


This book

<< Evaluates existing frameworks

and examines the inter-cultural competencies required by managers

<< New to this edition: updated case

Cross-Cultural Management in Work Organisations

examples to provide a topical and engaging insight into the subject

<< Online resources: instructor’s

manual, lecture slides and seminar activities for tutors and web links and self-assessment exercises for students

Edition 3

Imprint: Date: Price:

CIPD 17/02/2015 £46.99

ISBN Paperback: e-book:

9781843983675 9781843984030

Extent: Dimensions: Subject:

320 246x189 International Business

Description

Author Information

Formerly rooted firmly in the domain of anthropology, the topic of culture has shifted over the last thirty-five years to become an important component of business and management as organisations have become global. As companies outsource some of their work to other countries, or as employees migrate to new locations, culture can impact upon things such as attitudes to authority, differences in communication styles and ethics, which will affect working relationships. Cross-cultural Management in Work Organisations explores the models and meanings of culture and how these play out in the work environment.

Ray French is a principal lecturer at Portsmouth Business School, UK, where he is the subject leader for Organisation Studies and Human Resources.

The essential introduction to cross-cultural social relations in the workplace, Cross-cultural Management in Work Organisations provides an evaluation of existing frameworks for understanding cross-cultural differences, examines the inter-cultural competencies such as cultural awareness needed by managers and evaluates how both cultural and noncultural factors influence social processes at work. This fully updated 3rd edition includes new examples to provide topical and engaging insight into the subject. It is suitable for all postgraduate students studying cross-cultural management or cross-cultural awareness. Online supporting resources include an instructor’s manual, lecture slides and seminar activities for tutors and web links and self-assessment exercises for students.

Table of Contents 1 1.1 2 2.1 2.2 2.3 3

Setting the Scene Introduction Culture – Uses and Limitations The Meaning(s) of Culture Models of Culture – Traditional Approaches Models of Culture – Developments and Debates Cross-Cultural Social Relations in the Workplace 3.1 Culture and Organisation Structure 3.2 Intercultural Communication and Negotiation 3.3 Leadership and Multicultural Teams 3.4 Motivation and Exchange in a Cross-Cultural Context 4 Managing Across or Within Cultures 4.1 Intercultural Competencies, Training and Ethics 4.2 Culture and Human Resource Management 5 Looking to the Future 5.1 Conclusions

Business, Finance, Risk, 105 Information Management


Emerging Markets

This book

Strategies for Competing in the Global Value Chain

<< Demonstrates how companies

Edition 1

<< Offers lessons for US, Japanese

Date: Price:

can build their competitiveness by understanding the global value chain in which they operate

and European multinational companies as well as emerging market multinationals in how to understand the new business environment

03/11/2015 £34.99

<< Explains how to position your

ISBN Paperback: e-book:

9780749474492 9780749474508

Extent: Dimensions: Subject:

272 240x170 International Business

company to succeed in both emerging markets and in traditional markets, and to take advantage of the benefits of both

Author Information

Description

Professor Robert E. Grosse is Dean of the School of Business Administration at American University of Sharjah, and was 2012-2014 President of the Academy of International Business. He has taught international finance in the MBA programmes at Thunderbird, the University of Miami, the University of Michigan, the Instituto de Empresa (Madrid, Spain), and in many universities in Latin America, and he lectures on executive education programmes around the world. He was founding Director of Standard Bank Group’s (South Africa) executive education programme, the Global Leadership Centre, offering leadership development training to 11,000 managers and executives. He is a leading author on international business topics, and his latest book, Can Latin American Firms Compete? was published by Oxford University Press in 2007.

The traditional dominance of international markets by companies from the US, Western Europe and Japan can no longer be taken for granted. Emerging market economies, from the powerhouse Chinese economy (set to pass the US in national income by 2020) to dynamic players such as Mexico, South Africa and Indonesia, are rapidly changing the competitive landscape. Companies who can successfully enter these emerging markets may reap rewards and benefits from cost reductions and market opportunities. By understanding their positioning in the global continuum of companies and customers – the global value chain – businesses can build their strategies for better competition, more effective resource allocation and cost reduction, and heightened awareness of risks and benefits.

106

Business, Finance, Risk, Information Management

Packed with in-depth case studies of multinationals from both sides of emerging markets, including Accenture, Walmart, Google, Nike, Novartis, PetroChina, Embraer, Tata Group and FEMSA, Emerging Markets is essential reading for anyone wanting to understand the new competitive landscape and how to maximise their business opportunities there. Online supporting resources for this book include lecture slides of each chapter.

Table of Contents 1 2 3 4 5 6

Introduction Why emerging markets are the place to be The time horizon What is the challenge from emerging markets? Competing in emerging markets Competitive strategies of firms in China: MNEs, SOEs and private firms 7 Emerging market MNEs competing in industrial countries and globally 8 Innovation is key 9 Large, small, family-owned and state-owned companies from emerging markets 10 Conclusions


This book

<< Provides a unique cross-disciplinary approach to international management studies, relating to a general theme of international management and cultural diversity

<< Includes a wealth of online

resources for lecturers, including PowerPoint slides and teaching notes to accompany each chapter

<< Explains and identifies the major

management styles that continue to characterise people across regions, nations, communities and organisations, within groups and as individuals

International Management Explorations Across Cultures Edition 1

Date: Price:

03/08/2012 ÂŁ39.99

ISBN Paperback: e-book:

9780749465285 9780749465292

Extent: Dimensions: Subject:

408 240x170 International Business

Description

Author Information

Winner of the Management and Leadership Textbook category at the CMI Management Book of the Year Awards 2013/14, International Management explores management opportunities in encounters across the world between national, organizational, political, professional and social cultures. It is soundly based theoretically and supported with real-life international examples from contemporary events and situations, exploring contemporary and historical material to provide insights for todayâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s managers who find themselves dealing with diversity and difference.

Elizabeth Christopher holds a PhD from the University of New South Wales. She is both an academic and consultant for crosscultural leadership and management teaching and training. She is Senior Associate of an international leadership training consultancy in the USA, Christopher, Smith and Associates; an Honorary Associate of Macquarie University, Sydney; and a consultant to Open Universities Australia for online teaching and learning. She presents papers at international conferences, is a reviewer for international journals and has published widely in her field.

From a historical perspective and a uniquely cross-disciplinary approach, Elizabeth Christopher identifies the major leadership styles that continue to characterise people across regions, nations, communities and organisations, within groups and as individuals. International Management is a practical and comprehensive textbook for successful negotiation in a world rich not only in cultural diversity but also in convergence. It also covers the ethical, moral and environmental ramifications of business today and the corporate leaders who are learning to manage their businesses across nations and continents, not only profitably but in ways that contribute to societies overall through economic, environmental and social action. International Management is an indispensable guide for students and practitioners to key issues of cross-cultural management, suitable to accompany online or private studies, or a teaching unit within professional and university graduate studies of international management. Online supporting resources for this book include lecture slides and notes for academics.

Table of Contents 1 2 2.1 2.2 2.3 3 3.1 3.2

Introduction: The historical background to international leadership Exploring cultural differences Industry: cultural differences in industry leadership and the effects of mass media reports Patterns of employment: the roles of women and minorities in international business Management of public and private sector involvement Exploring international operations and activities International networks and alliances, structures and controls, strategies for sustainable business Negotiations and decisions: leadership and motivation

4 Exploring technology, learning, language and culture 4.1 Technology, the internet and dealing with change 4.2 Learning: action learning and learning organizations 4.3 Language and culture: translations, interpretations and world EngIishes 5 Exploring management ethics 5.1 The ethics of international business 5.2 Looking to the future

Business, Finance, Risk, 107 Information Management


Essential Leadership

This book

<< Contains all the essential and

emerging theories and models of leadership to give students and practitioners a solid and rigorous academic underpinning to their leadership development.

Develop Your Leadership Qualities Through Theory and Practice Edition 1

<< Combines this theory with practical

Date: Price:

03/02/2017 ÂŁ39.99

ISBN Paperback: e-book:

9780749477400 9780749477417

Extent: Dimensions: Subject:

344 234x156 Leadership

guidance based on research in the field and case studies, allowing students and practitioners to unite academic background with real-life situations in order to strengthen themselves as leaders.

<< Through self-assessment tools

and reflective exercises, students and practitioners are given the means to discover their personal leadership style, their strengths and weaknesses, as well as how they can adapt and improve to become better leaders.

Author Information

Description

Esther Cameron is one of the founding Directors of innovative, niche change consultancy Integral Change Consulting Ltd, where she specializes in complex organizational change projects that support moves towards high performance through strengthened leadership. Previously a lecturer for the University of Bristol, she has been experimenting with approaches to leadership and change for 25 years.

Essential Leadership is a practical, accessible and solution-focused book that helps managers and students develop their leadership skills and qualities through theory, practical application, case study examples and self-assessment. This book provides you with the essential and emergent leadership models and theories as well as real world case studies and practical, interactive activities. Supported by exercises for individuals and groups, diagnostic tools, thought-provoking examples and practical activities, this books offers an important guide for both future and current leaders, helping you to fully realize your leadership potential. The best-selling authors of Making Sense of Change Management, Cameron and Green, present an innovative model based on five essential leadership qualities that can be refined and adapted, according to the business scenario, and will support you in becoming the best leader you can be in all situations. Essential Leadership is about leading from the inside out: discovering the key qualities of leadership within yourself, mastering them through practice and experimentation, and achieving more.

Mike Green is Director of Transitional Space Ltd, and is a Visiting Fellow at Henley Business School where he tutors and coaches in Leadership and Change. Mike also delivers bespoke and accredited learning programmes in Change Management to senior managers and change agents across the globe.

108

Business, Finance, Risk, Information Management

Table of Contents 1 2 3 4 5 6

Introduction to leading in a new era Leadership frameworks and research Learning how to lead in practice You and your leadership Developing and using the five qualities Leadership and organizations


This book

<< Explores over 40 of the most

pervasive myths that all leaders and aspiring leaders should be able to recognize and relate to, from the entertaining to the potentially career damaging

Myths of Leadership Banish the Misconceptions and Become a Great Leader

<< Contains real life examples from a

Edition 1

<< Is written by best-selling author Jo

Series: Date: Price:

Business Myths 03/10/2017 £14.99

ISBN Paperback: e-book:

9780749480745 9780749480752

Extent: Dimensions: Subject:

240 234x156 Leadership

diverse range of global companies and industries Owen (The Mindset of Success and The Leadership Skills Handbook)

Description

Author Information

The best leaders are born, not made

Jo Owen has worked for over 100 of the best, and one or two of the worst, organizations on our planet. He is a founder of Teach First, the top graduate recruiter in the UK, and has also founded six other national charities. He is in demand as a speaker and is the author of several best-selling books, including The Mindset of Success, The Leadership Skills Handbook (winner of the 2013 CMI Book of the Year award for new managers) and Management Stripped Bare, all published by Kogan Page.

The best leaders are always in control The best leaders are those with the highest IQs ....but are they really? The thinking surrounding what makes the greatest leaders is increasingly muddled by stereotypes, snake oil promises and pseudo-science. Jo Owen confronts the myths of leadership head on, using the most credible research from major international business case studies and leadership theory, to uncover the truth. Entertaining but evidence-based, Jo Owen wades through the waffle to bring you the best practical tips you need to become a better leader.

Table of Contents 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26

We Know Exactly What Leadership Means Leadership Only Happens at the Top Leaders Should Be Charismatic Leaders Are Good Role Models Leadership is a Rare Ability Leaders Are Born Not Bred Leaders Have High IQs Popular People Become Leaders We Can Learn From Great Leaders It’s Tough at the Top It’s Lonely at the Top Good Leaders Can Lead Any Kind of Business Leaders Succeed Purely On Merit Leaders Deserve Exceptional Rewards Power Comes From Your Rank Leaders Give Orders and Direction Leaders Are Infallible Leadership Comes With Experience You Have To Be a Good Manager Before You Can Be A Good Leader You Can Study Leadership Leaders Know What Is Going On Around Them at All Times Leaders Are Always in Control The Person Who Starts the Team/Project/ Company Should Be the One to Lead It The Best Team Player Makes the Best Leader The Leader is Indispensable Male and Female Leaders are Different

27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35

Leaders Have Big Personalities Leaders Must Be Humble Leaders Develop Talent and Succession You Will Be Remembered For What You Achieve Evil Leaders Are Always Bad Leaders Leaders Value Diversity Leaders Don’t Value Being Challenged Leaders Know When to Step Down Leadership is Always Earned

Business, Finance, Risk, 109 Information Management


Professional Services Leadership Handbook

This book

<< Analyses the current state and

future direction of the professional services industry, giving readers a roadmap for change

<< Identifies common pain points

How to Lead a Professional Services Firm in a New Age of Competitive Disruption Edition 1

that professionals face and gives focused advice to deal with them

<< Includes pricing models, checklists and other practical tools that readers can adapt to use in their practice

Date: Price:

03/08/2017 £29.99

ISBN Paperback: e-book: Extent: Dimensions: Subject:

9780749477349 9780749477356 272 234x156 Leadership

Author Information

Description

Nigel Clark is a non-executive director of the Professional Services Marketing Group. He is also the editor and lead author of the Professional Services Marketing Handbook, published by Kogan Page.

Leaders of professional services firms – from law firms to accountancy, consulting and beyond – face an increasing challenge. Client expectations are changing and service models need to adapt. Regulators are liberalizing markets and at the same time mega multi-disciplinary firms are colonizing parallel sectors. Technology offers new ways of providing and accessing services, which may be less dependent on the people-centred business model professional services firms are built on. The Professional Services Leadership Handbook equips leaders who must find new and better ways to face the future, at the same time as delivering profit today.

Ben Kent is the founder-director of insightled consultancy Meridian West. Ben advises many of the world’s leading professional and financial services firms and provides strategic research, consultancy and training. Alastair Beddow is a director at Meridian West, working with professional and financial services firms of all sizes to develop engaging, differentiated and successful client strategies. Adrian Furner is Managing Director of Kommercialize, a practitioner-led advisory firm focused on commercial excellence.

Leaders of professional services firms need to evolve to meet the changing needs of their clients and yet still preserve their unique value proposition. Using examples from innovative professional services firms and parallel sectors such as financial services and advertising, The Professional Services Leadership Handbook explores new models and working practices that can unlock a new dimension of competitiveness for individual firms. It offers clear-sighted analysis of the common pain points that firms face and offers innovative solutions for dealing with them. This practical and solutions-focused guide for everyone involved in leadership decisions for a practice or function will equip readers to cut through the challenges facing them and focus their attention on the activities that will really make a difference.

Table of Contents 1 2 3 4 5 6

110

Business, Finance, Risk, Information Management

Introduction Business Clients People Self Conclusion


This book

<< This third edition includes brand

new content on attracting and retaining creative team members, how random input can improve lateral thinking and important case studies of lateral thinking in action at Uber and AirBnB

<< Contains several practical activities to boost creativity that leaders can try out immediately, including lateral thinking puzzles, new brainstorming techniques, self evaluation checklists, questioning exercises and action lists

<< Challenges conventional

approaches and describes new ways of thinking to help leaders (and their teams) boost their ability to be creative and generate more innovative ideas

The Leader’s Guide to Lateral Thinking Skills Unlock the Creativity and Innovation in You and Your Team Edition 3

Date: Price:

03/09/2017 £14.99

ISBN Paperback: e-book:

9780749481025 9780749481032

Extent: Dimensions: Subject:

208 234x156 Leadership

Description

Author Information

Lateral thinking can help you transform your ability to generate ideas, unlock the creative potential of your team and make your organization more innovative. With a lively, energetic and practical approach, The Leader’s Guide to Lateral Thinking Skills will teach you dynamic, up-to-date techniques to unleash the creative energies of your people and show you how to put the techniques to work immediately. Lateral thinking can turn your organization around and make you a better leader.

Paul Sloane is an experienced speaker, course leader and facilitator. A recognized authority on innovation and creative speaking, he speaks and gives workshops to leading corporations around the world. He is also the best-selling author of How to Be a Brilliant Thinker, The Innovative Leader and editor of A Guide to Open Innovation and Crowdsourcing, all published by Kogan Page.

In The Leader’s Guide to Lateral Thinking Skills, highly acclaimed author, trainer and presenter Paul Sloane demonstrates how the lateral leader develops the vision, culture and processes that transform a regular business into an innovation hothouse. This book is packed with real-life examples, practical methods and lateral thinking exercises that you can put to work today.

Table of Contents 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20

Introduction The need for innovation Characteristics of the lateral leader The innovation test Laying the foundations for change Making the vision real Challenging your assumptions Ask searching questions Take a different view Combine the unusual Adapt, adopt, improve Break the rules Analyse first Increase the yield Evaluate Implement Welcome failure Use the team Organizing for innovation Common mistakes: 12 great ways to crush creativity 21 Summary 22 The lateral leadership course

Business, Finance, Risk, Information Management

111


The Leadership Skills Handbook

This book

<< This new edition contains brand new content on financial skills, political skills and the art of strategy

50 Essential Skills You Need to be a Leader

<< Includes original research from Edition 4

over 1000 leaders across the world, at all levels and in a variety of sectors

Date: Price:

03/08/2017 ÂŁ14.99

ISBN Paperback: e-book:

9780749480332 9780749480349

Extent: Dimensions: Subject:

296 216x138 Leadership

<< Features practical advice on over

50 leadership skills plus tips, exercises and examples, arranged in an easy dip-in-and-out style

Author Information

Description

Jo Owen has worked for over 100 of the best organizations on our planet. His experience crosses most industries and continents â&#x20AC;&#x201C; and formed the basis for his bestselling book Management Stripped Bare (also published by Kogan Page). He is a founder of Teach First, the top graduate recruiter in the UK, and six other national charities. He is in demand as a speaker and is also the author of The Mindset of Success, published by Kogan Page.

Winner of the CMI Management Book of the Year Awards in the 2012/2013 New Manager category, The Leadership Skills Handbook from best-selling author Jo Owen reveals the essential skills you need to be an effective leader. It shows you what works in practice, not in theory, in crucial areas such as people skills, career skills, mindset skills, organization skills, personal values and behaviours. Each skill is presented in a concise, easy to follow format, with an accompanying framework to help you deploy it in your own life. The skills are about the real challenges real leaders have to master, and as you observe and record real-life examples of skills in action, you will be developing your own unique formula for success in the context that matters to you. Based on research from over a thousand leaders throughout the world at all levels in the public, private and voluntary sectors, it identifies the practical skills to make you even more successful, and offers guidance on all key topics. This completely revised fourth edition of The Leadership Skills Handbook includes brand new content on some of the most challenging skills that successful leaders need to master through three new sections on financial skills (including budgeting, costs, pricing and creating an investment case), political skills (including influencing, negotiating, networking and partnering) and the art of strategy (including strategic models, understanding the customer, marketing, pricing and advertising). This indispensable guidance will boost your confidence, technical abilities and give you the edge on your peers.

Table of Contents 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

112

Business, Finance, Risk, Information Management

Introduction Mindset Skills Career Skills People Skills Moment Of Truth Skills Daily Skills Organization Skills Financial Skills Political Skills The Art Of Strategy


This book

<< Equips IT and management

consultants with the skills to recognize ethical pitfalls and to make defensible choices that safeguard their professional reputations

<< Sets ethics within the consulting

lifecycle and focuses on the practical rather than philosophical aspects of ethical behaviour

<< Enables consultants to answer the questions: what should I continue to do? What should I start doing? What should I stop doing?

Practical Consultancy Ethics Professional Excellence for IT and Management Consultants Edition 1

Date: Price:

03/04/2017 £34.99

ISBN Paperback: e-book:

9780749478537 9780749478544

Extent: Dimensions: Subject:

288 234x156 Professional Services

Description

Author Information

Consultants – working for an organization but not as part of it – are particularly subject to commercial pressures from both their employers and their clients, never more so than when consulting on complex and costly IT engagements. A consultant’s reputation is crucial to their professional capital, and they have to be able to make defensible decisions that protect this reputation whilst delivering value for the client. This means acting ethically, responsibly and commercially. Practical Consultancy Ethics approaches the subject of ethics from the individual’s perspective: the management or IT consultant who will need to make ethical decisions within their engagement. With clear-sighted identification of the ethical dilemmas that may arise at each stage of a consultancy project – from defining the problem to fit the solution, through to prioritizing competing stakeholder needs, and having access to confidential client information – and guidance on ethical and risk-reducing actions that consultants can take, the emphasis throughout is on improved decision-making. Enhanced with case studies showcasing real-life ethical pitfalls and featuring consultancy ethical dilemmas to challenge the reader, this is a uniquely practical guide to applying best ethical practice in consulting engagements.

David Yardley is an IT consultant with a global provider of consulting and technology services and has over twenty years’ experience working in the IT industry within major organizations and consultancy organizations. His previous books include Successful IT Project Delivery, Careers in Computing and IT and Getting a Top Job in IT.

Table of Contents 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

Introduction Ethics and consulting Basic ethics Ethics in practice Ethics within the consulting lifecycle Working with stakeholders Effective business communication Building the foundations for change Managing organizational change Adopting and sharing ethical values Making ethical decisions Reducing ethical risks

Business, Finance, Risk, Information Management

113


Strategic Tendering for the Professional Services

This book

<< Gives readers best-practice

guidance to managing every stage of the proposals and bidding process

<< Draws on insights from proposals

Win More ,Lose Less Edition 1

experts and voices from client procurement teams, uncovering their expectations and success criteria

<< Leads readers through the process

Date: Price:

03/03/2017 £29.99

ISBN Paperback: e-book:

9780749478513 9780749478520

Extent: Dimensions: Subject:

256 234x156 Professional Services

with user-friendly charts and diagrams, concise summaries and key actions in every chapter

Author Information

Description

Matthew Fuller has 25 years’ experience of working in the professional services sector. He has led global business development and marketing teams at Allen & Overy (where he also spent time based in Germany), Herbert Smith and currently White & Case. He has run training programmes throughout the world advising partners on proposals best practice.

Competitive bidding for work is a long-established aspect of business within the professional services and consulting sector. For many markets, pitching has become a critical element of both attracting and retaining business. Combating clients’ demands and intense competition, firms that want to win and retain business need business development and marketing teams that are experts in creating compelling proposals. Strategic Tendering for the Professional Services offers a masterclass in improving your pitching skills and processes.

Tim Nightingale is a founding director of Nisus Consulting, providing market research and client insight services to the professional services sector. He is a Fellow of the Chartered Institute of Marketing, a full member of the Market Research Society and a member of the Professional Services Marketing Group (PSMG). Matthew and Tim both contributed chapters to Professional Services Marketing Handbook (Kogan Page, 2015).

Drawing on insights from current pitch and proposal professionals and client-side procurement teams, Strategic Tendering for the Professional Services provides end-to-end best practice guidance. From the crucial decision of which request-for-proposals (RFPs) to respond to, right through to the all-important face-to-face presentation and post-pitch followup, this practical handbook leads readers through all stages of the process on best practice and strategies for success. Packed with practical features to help readers put guidance into practice, Strategic Tendering for the Professional Services also supports business-wide improvement with a clear analysis of the processes and systems available to support pitch assembly and reporting. Whether a bid and proposal professional looking for extra tools, a business development or marketing manager providing support and expertise to partners, or a professional wanting to improve pitching skills, this book will be key to winning opportunities that will set the firm apart.

Table of Contents 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

114

Business, Finance, Risk, Information Management

Introduction – Why use the Proposals Book? To pitch or not to pitch? What does the client want? Planning to win The procurement predicament Smart pricing Writing to win Presenting to win Following up and post pitch feedback Tools and technology There has to be a better way Appendix: How to manage a billion dollar pitch


This book

<< Includes regulatory developments affecting risks to reputation, the business model and strategy, along with improvements in risk management documentation and statutory risk reporting for assurance and reporting purposes

Fundamentals of Risk Management Understanding, evaluating and implementing effective risk management

<< Explains successful risk

Edition 5

<< New to this edition: now

Date: Price:

03/07/2018 ÂŁ39.99

ISBN Paperback: e-book:

9780749483074 9780749483081

Extent: Dimensions: Subject:

488 240x170 Risk Management

management with examples including Colgate Palmolive, Tesco and United Utilities completely aligned with the recently updated ISO 31000 standard and COSO ERM Framework

Description

Author Information

This fifth edition of Fundamentals of Risk Management is a comprehensive introduction to commercial and business risk for students and risk professionals. Providing extensive coverage of the core frameworks of business continuity planning, enterprise risk management and project risk management, this is the definitive guide to dealing with the different types of risk an organization faces. With relevant international case examples including Ericsson, Network Rail and Unilever, the book provides a full analysis of changes in contemporary risk areas including supply chain, cyber risk, risk culture and appetite, improvements in risk management documentation and statutory risk reporting.

Paul Hopkin is Technical Director at the Institute of Risk Management, having held the same role at the Association of Insurance and Risk Managers (Airmic) for nine years. He was previously Director of Risk Management for The Rank Group and prior to that Head of Risk Management at the BBC. He is a Certified Fellow of the Institute of Risk Management.

Now revised to be completely aligned with the recently updated ISO 31000 and COSO ERM Framework, this comprehensive text reflects developments in regulations, reputation risk, loss control and the value of insurance as a risk management method. Also including a thorough overview of international risk management standards and frameworks, strategy and policy, Fundamentals of Risk Management is the definitive text for those beginning or considering a career in risk.

The Institute of Risk Management (IRM) is the worlds leading professional body for risk management. They drive excellence in managing risk to ensure organizations are ready for the opportunities and threats of the future.

Table of Contents 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

Introduction to Risk Management Approaches to Risk Management Risk Assessment Risk Response Risk Strategy Risk Culture Risk Governance Risk Assurance

Business, Finance, Risk, Information Management

115


Risk Management

This book

<< A jargon-free guide on the nature Edition 1

of risk and its relevance to the business model

<< Encourages the reader to feel

confident in adopting a proactive and appropriate treatment of risk

Series: Date: Price:

Strategic Success 03/05/2013 ÂŁ24.99

ISBN Paperback: e-book:

9780749468385 9780749468392

Extent: Dimensions: Subject:

288 216x138 Risk Management

<< Supported throughout by real-life examples, checklists and case studies for risk measurement and analysis

Author Information

Description

Paul Hopkin is Technical Director at the Association of Insurance and Risk Managers (AIRMIC) and a Fellow of the Institute of Risk Management. He was previously Director of Risk Management for The Rank Group Plc and prior to that Head of Risk Management at the BBC. He is regular speaker at conferences across the world on a range of risk management topics and author of the classic IRM textbook, Fundamentals of Risk Management, also published by Kogan Page.

Risk management is not just a topic for risk professionals. Managers and directors at all levels must be equipped with an understanding of risk and the tools and processes required to assess and manage it successfully. Risk Management offers a practical and structured approach while avoiding jargon, theory and many of the complex issues that preoccupy risk management practitioners but have little relevance for non-specialists. Supported by online templates and with real-life examples throughout, this is a straightforward and engaging guide to the practice and the benefits of good risk management. Coverage includes: the nature of risk; the relevance of risk management to the business model; essential elements of the risk management process; different approaches to risk assessment; strategy, tactics, operations and compliance requirements; how to build a risk-aware culture; and the importance of risk governance. Online supporting resources for this book include downloadable templates including risk agenda, risk response and risk communication.

Table of Contents 1 Introduction 2 Risk agenda 2.1 Relevance of the risk agenda 2.2 Drivers of risk management 2.3 Features of risk management 2.4 Planning the risk agenda 3 Risk assessment 3.1 Relevance of risk assessment 3.2 Analysing potential impact 3.3 Evaluating anticipated consequences 3.4 Utilizing risk assessments 4 Risk response 4.1 Relevance of risk response 4.2 Designing risk controls 4.3 Disaster recovery and business continuity 4.4 Efficiency and effectiveness of controls 5 Risk communication 5.1 Relevance of risk communication 5.2 Risk architecture and protocols 5.3 Risk action plan 5.4 Risk reporting 6 Risk governance 6.1 Relevance of risk governance 6.2 Providing risk assurance 6.3 governance of emerging risks 6.4 Risk and stakeholder expectations

116

Business, Finance, Risk, Information Management


This book

<< Covers recent developments

in cloud computing, hacking, blockchain, cryptography, social engineering, artificial intelligence and the Internet of Things

<< Includes case studies of real world cyber crimes, such as the attacks on Tesco Bank and Yahoo

<< Explores the human factors of

cyber security by identifying potential problematic behaviours and issues of trust

Cyber Risk Management Practical Strategies to Protect Your Organization from Cyber Threats Edition 1

Date: Price:

03/04/2018 ÂŁ39.99

ISBN Paperback: e-book:

9780749482596 9780749482602

Extent: Dimensions: Subject:

288 234x156 Risk Management

Description

Author Information

It is estimated that cyber crime costs trillions of dollars globally every year as businesses become increasingly reliant on technology. 87 per cent of FTSE 100 companies have identified cyber as a principal risk (Deloitte 2017), and it is clear that failure to focus on cyber risk can potentially lead to huge financial losses and disruption of operations, as well as reputational damage. Cyber Risk Management offers vital guidance on evaluating threats and effectively implementing and communicating a cyber security strategy. Crucially, human factors in cyber security are also considered, from employee vetting and managing insider threats to theories of behaviour, and staff training to guarding against manipulation.

Professor Richard Benham is a global cyber security adviser and Professor in Residence at the National Cyber Skills Centre. He founded the National MBA in Cyber Security at Coventry University, UK, and continues to lecture at the University of Gloucestershire, UK, Staffordshire University, UK and Coventry Business School, UK. Professor Benham acts as an adviser to several large organizations including government, and is a regular international speaker on the subject of cyber security.

Structured in two parts, the first section looks at technical developments in how businesses use technology, including cloud computing, blockchain, cryptography, artificial intelligence and the Internet of Things. Case studies of real world cyber crimes, such as the attacks on Tesco Bank and Yahoo, help to explore the origin of threats. The second section provides guidance on how to successfully manage an organizationâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s cyber security, covering risk assessments, financial impact analyses, crisis communications plans, international standards and legal responsibilities. Cyber Risk Management is the indispensable guide for those responsible for assessing cyber risks and creating information security strategies.

Table of Contents 1 Introduction 2 Developments in Cyber Security 2.1 Use of Information in Personal, Business and Government 2.2 Development of Threats to Information 2.3 Reliance upon Technology and Interconnectedness 2.4 Trusting Technology to Process Information 2.5 How to Trust People in Information Processing Technology 2.6 Artificial Intelligence 3 Managing Cyber Risk 3.1 Cyber Security Strategy 3.2 Marketing Cyber Security 3.3 Managing the Organisation Cyber Posture 3.4 Financial Aspects of Cyber Security 3.5 Cyber Behaviour and Managing Insider Threat 3.6 Corporate Reputation and Crisis Communications 3.7 Digital Security Risk and Audit Management 3.8 Network Defence Management 3.9 International Cyber and Digital Law

Business, Finance, Risk, Information Management

117


Rethinking Reputational Risk

This book

<< Explains the underlying behavioural and organizational risks that can leave organisations vulnerable to what can be catastrophic reputational damage

How to Manage the Risks that can Ruin Your Business, Your Reputation and You

<< Provides a framework and insights Edition 1

that will help risk managers and boards to focus on and deal with the fundamental behavioural risks that underlie reputational risks

Date: Price:

03/01/2017 £29.99

ISBN Paperback: e-book:

9780749477363 9780749477370

Extent: Dimensions: Subject:

240 234x156 Risk Management

<< Reveals how and why these risks

remain hidden for long periods before emerging unexpectedly, giving readers the incentive to troubleshoot for their organizations well before trouble emerges

Author Information

Description

Anthony Fitzsimmons is Chairman of Reputability LLP and an authority and leading thinker on reputational risk and the propensity of behavioural and organizational risks to cause reputational damage. With insights gained from the ringside view of the crisis lawyer, coupled with the extensive experience of his partners, the Reputability team helps organizations and their leaders to find, see and deal with these risks.

A company’s reputation is one of its most valuable assets, and reputational risk is high on the agenda at board level and amongst regulators. Rethinking Reputational Risk explains the hidden factors which can both cause crises and tip an otherwise survivable crisis into a reputational disaster, using case studies such as BP’s Deepwater Horizon oil spill, Volkswagen’s emissions rigging scandal, Tesco, AIG, EADS Airbus A380, and Mid-Staffordshire NHS Hospital Trust.

Derek Atkins BSc PhD MIMMM CEng FCIM FCII Chartered Insurer is a visiting Professor at the Cass Business School, teaching risk management, reputational risk, and insurance, and a partner in Reputability LLP. He is coauthor of a dozen books including ‘Roads to Ruin’, the seminal Cass Business School report for Airmic and the Chartered Insurance Institute text book Insurance Corporate Management.

118

Business, Finance, Risk, Information Management

Reputations are lost when the perception of an organization is damaged by its behaviour not meeting stakeholder expectations. Rethinking Reputational Risk lays bare the actions, inactions and local ‘states of normality’ that can lead to perception-changing consequences and gives readers the insight to recognize and respond to the risks to their reputations. Through case studies and analysis of failures, this hard-hitting guide also applies lessons drawn from behavioural economics to the behavioural risks that underlie reputation risk. An essential read for risk professionals, business leaders and board members who need to understand and deal with business-critical threats to their reputation, this book presents a new framework that will be invaluable for all involved in safeguarding an organization’s reputation.

Table of Contents 1 Rethinking 1.1 Introduction 1.2 Reputation basics 1.3 How reputations are lost 1.4 What is ‘reputational risk’? 1.5 The hole in classic risk management 1.6 Stakeholder basics 1.7 Failure to communicate and learn 1.8 Character, culture and ethos 1.9 Incentives 1.10 Complexity 1.11 Board composition, skills, knowledge, experience and behaviour 1.12 Strategy and change 1.13 Latency, incubation and complacency 1.14 The special role – and risk – of leaders 2 Case Studies 2.1 BP: Texas City 2.2 BP: Deepwater Horizon 2.3 Tesco 2.4 AIG 2.5 EADS Airbus A380 2.6 Banking: Barclays/Libor

2.7 Volkswagen 2.8 Mid-Staffordshire National Health Service Hospital Trust 3 Practicalities 3.1 The way forward 3.2 System basics: Getting to Go! 3.3 Setting up the reputational risk management system 3.4 Operating the reputational risk management system


This book

<< Covers all the main areas of risk

management in business, including cyber risk and political risk

The Risk Management Handbook

<< Includes chapters from leading

A Practical Guide to Managing the Multiple Dimensions of Risk

<< Highlights the key emerging issues

Edition 1

subject experts, outlining best practice and emerging developments

in risk management for business, drawing on cutting-edge thinking

Date: Price:

03/06/2016 £39.99

ISBN Paperback: e-book:

9780749478827 9780749478834

Extent: Dimensions: Subject:

336 234x156 Risk Management

Description

Author Information

Risk management is dynamic, with new risks continually being identified and risk management techniques adapting to new challenges. The Risk Management Handbook gives a clear snapshot of the current state of play in the risk management landscape, and a look ahead to the key emerging issues in the field. Drawing together leading voices from the major risk management application areas – from GRC to supply chain risk, operational risk to cyber risk – this edited collection showcases best practice in each discipline and provides a succinct and coherent picture of the field as a whole. Part One surveys these crucial application areas and provides a broad integrative framework for the differing contexts within which risk management is undertaken. Part Two explores emerging issues and techniques, from riskbased thinking to communicating uncertainty.

Dr David Hillson is The Risk Doctor. He is an international risk management consultant, and leads The Risk Doctor Partnership (www.riskdoctor.com). He is recognized globally as an expert practitioner in risk management, and he has made several innovative contributions to the field. He consults, writes and speaks widely on the topic and has received many awards. David Hillson is an active Fellow of the Institute of Risk Management (IRM) where he was named the inaugural “Risk Personality of the Year” in 2010-11, and he was elected a Fellow of the Royal Society of Arts (RSA) to contribute to its Risk Commission.

The Risk Management Handbook offers readers knowledge of current best practice and a cutting-edge insight into new developments within risk management. Whether you are a risk professional wanting to stay abreast of your field, a student seeking a broad and up-to-date introduction to risk, or a business leader wanting to get to grips with the risks that face your business, this book will provide expert guidance.

Table of Contents 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24

Introducing risk Multidimensional risk management Enterprise Risk Management Governance, Risk and Compliance Operational Risk Management Project, programme and portfolio risk management Political risk management Reputational risk Supply chain risk management Business Continuity Management Managing stakeholder risk Ethics in risk management Cyber risk management Emerging trends Country risk management Communicating uncertainty Risk-based decision making Risk leadership in complex organizations Resilience Organizational change management and risk Risk culture Social media risk Risk in development aid practice The future of risk management

Business, Finance, Risk, Information Management

119


People Risk Management

This book

<< Explains the concept of people risk and enables the reader to consider it within the context of their own organization, flagging up the human factors that may not have been considered

A Practical Approach to Managing the Human Factors That Could Harm Your Business Edition 1

<< Encourages managers and

practitioners to take a more focused approach to people management

Date: Price:

03/04/2015 £34.99

ISBN Paperback: e-book:

9780749471354 9780749471361

Extent: Dimensions: Subject:

312 240x170 Risk Management

<< Offers practical tools, solutions and insights into how to implement an effective people risk management framework within your organization

Author Information

Description

Dr Keith Blacker has worked in a variety of board and executive roles both in the UK and abroad and is the former CFO of a large UK-based health insurance business. He has over 30 years’ experience working within the financial services industry and has consulted to a range of national and international banks and insurance companies on risk management matters. He is a Fellow of the Institute of Chartered Accountants in England & Wales and a Fellow of the UK Institute of Internal Auditors.

People Risk Management provides unique depth to a topic that has garnered intense interest in recent years. Based on the latest thinking in corporate governance, behavioural economics, human resources and operational risk, people risk can be defined as the risk that people do not follow the organization’s procedures, practices and/or rules, thus deviating from expected behaviour in a way that could damage the business’s performance and reputation. From fraud to bad business decisions, illegal activity to lax corporate governance, people risk – often called conduct risk – presents a growing challenge in today’s complex, dispersed business organizations.

Dr Patrick McConnell has been a senior manager in, and a consultant to, large international corporations, financial institutions and governments on multiple continents for over 35 years. His expertise is in risk management and information technology. He is a Fellow of BCS, the Chartered Institute for IT. Both authors hold Doctorate degrees in Business Administration and have published and spoken widely in industry and academic forums.

120

Business, Finance, Risk, Information Management

Framed by corporate events and challenges and including case studies from the LIBOR rate scandal, the BP oil spill, Lehman Brothers, Royal Bank of Scotland and Enron, People Risk Management provides best-practice guidance to managing risks associated with the behaviour of both employees and those outside a company. It offers practical tools, real-world examples, solutions and insights into how to implement an effective people risk management framework within an organization.

Table of Contents 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11

People Risk in context Definition and models of People Risk The human dimension of People Risk Case studies in People Risk People Risk Management Framework People Risk in the boardroom The influence of organizational culture Roles and responsibilities Improving decision-making Personal responsibility Conclusion


This book

<< Explains why making small

innovations is not a business model gamechanger – businesses need to consider more radical transformations

<< Sets out the options facing

companies looking to reassess their business model

<< Provides practical insights of

organizations that have made a radical shift including: Daimler, SAP, Xerox, Atlas Copco, Infosys and Netflix

Radical Business Model Transformation Gaining the Competitive Edge in a Disruptive World Edition 1

Date: Price:

03/01/2017 £29.99

ISBN Paperback: e-book:

9780749480455 9780749480462

Extent: Dimensions: Subject:

280 234x156 Strategy

Description

Author Information

Many companies are relying on a business model that is fundamentally suited to a different era. Now, organizations are under pressure from new trends such as digitization and servitization. Trying to adapt to a new environment, they risk relying on improvements that only scratch the surface of developing a radically different value proposition. Based on rigorous research into companies that have successfully and radically redesigned their business models, Radical Business Model Transformation shows why they made the leap, what they had to do to achieve it and how it has transformed the potential for their organizations.

Dr Carsten Linz is an entrepreneurial leader and business transformation expert with 20 years’ experience. He has successfully started and developed several new businesses and is currently Business Development Officer at SAP SE.

This book is a step-by-step guide for leaders who want to seize the opportunity of new business models and gain a competitive advantage. It explains how to assess the status quo, identify the value of future business models and develop a transformation path. It also provides advice on how to involve both the leadership team and all other employees in order to implement successful business model transformation. Illustrative case studies of organizations that have crossed the line to a more transformative business range from exponential-growth companies like Netflix and global players like Xerox, SAP and Daimler to mid-sized hidden champions like Knorr-Bremse and LEGIC. Radical Business Model Transformation is essential reading for business leaders, transformation experts and MBA students interested in ensuring that their business model is future-proof and can withstand the new proliferation of innovations that are set to transform the business landscape.

Prof. Dr. Günter Müller-Stewens is Professor of Strategic Management and Director of the Institute of Management at the University of St. Gallen. His main research interest is corporate strategy. Prof. Dr. Alexander Zimmermann is an Assistant Professor of Organization and Strategic Management and the Project Manager for the Center for Organizational Excellence (CORE) at the University of St. Gallen.

Table of Contents 1 1.1 1.2 1.3 2 2.1 2.2 2.3 3 3.1 3.2 3.3

Why Business Models Need To Radically Shift Taking Consequences From Digitization And Servitization Assessing Your Current Business Model Moving From Small Tweaks To Radical Shifts How To Lead A Radical Shift Of Your Business Model Shifting The Level Of Inclusiveness Shifting The Level Of Customization Sequenzing Multiple Radical Shifts Learning From Successful Transformational Organizations Case Studies Of Companies Shifting Radically The Level Of Inclusiveness Case Studies Of Companies Shifting Radically The Level Of Customization Case Studies Of Companies That Sequence Multiple Radical Shifts

4 How To Move Forward 4.1 Mastering The Transformational Leadership Challenge 4.2 Navigating With The Business Model Transformation Manual

Business, Finance, Risk, Information Management

121


HR, L&D, Coaching & CIPD Innovation and Best Practice in Change Management Coaching Employee Engagement Employment Law & Relations Human Resource Management Learning & Development Organization Development Performance Management Project Management Recruitment Reward Management Talent Management

122

www.koganpage.com


Featured Titles

NEW BOOK

Strategic Workforce Planning Developing Optimized Talent Strategies for Future Growth Ross Sparkman Feb 2018 9780749482015 Page 53

NEW BOOK

Data-Driven HR

How to Use Analytics and Metrics to Drive Performance NEW BOOK

50 Top Tools for Employee Wellbeing

A Complete Toolkit for Developing Happy, Healthy, Productive and Engaged Employees Debbie Mitchell Mar 2018 9780749482183 Page 55

Bernard Marr Apr 2018 9780749482466 Page 54

NEW BOOK

Armstrongâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s Job Evaluation Handbook

A Guide to Achieving Fairness and Transparency in Pay and Reward

NEW EDITION

Leadership Team Coaching in Practice, 2nd Edition Case Studies on Developing High-Performing Teams

Michael Armstrong Apr 2018 9780749482428 Page 57

Peter Hawkins 9780749482381 Jun 2018 Page 60

Discover our full portfolio of books at www.koganpage.com

123


Making Sense of Change Management

This book

<< Provides critical knowledge for

line managers facing change and project managers who want to know how change works

A Complete Guide to the Models, Tools and Techniques of Organizational Change Edition 4

<< Introduces two new chapters on

Project-Led Change and CultureLed Change to guide managers through this novel and valuable territory

<< Stimulates readers to broaden their

Date: Price:

03/03/2015 ÂŁ34.99

ISBN Paperback: e-book:

9780749472580 9780749472597

Extent: Dimensions: Subject:

464 240x170 Change Management

understanding of different cultural approaches through case studies and examples

Author Information

Description

Esther Cameron is a founding director of Integral Change Consulting Ltd, where she specializes in complex organizational change projects. Previously a lecturer in Change Management for the University of Bristol, she has been collecting and experimenting with approaches to change across different levels of organizational systems around the world for over 25 years.

The definitive, bestselling text in the field of change management, Making Sense of Change Management provides a thorough overview of the subject for both students and professionals. Along with explaining the theory of change management, it comprehensively covers the models, tools, and techniques of successful change management so organizations can adapt to tough market conditions and succeed by changing their strategies, structures, boundaries, mindsets, leadership behaviours and of course their expectations of the people who work within them.

Mike Green is director of Transitional Space Ltd, a company dedicated to individual, team and organizational development across the public, private and not-for-profit sectors. He is a Visiting Fellow at Henley Business School, where he tutors and coaches in leadership and change. Mike also delivers bespoke and accredited learning programmes in change management to senior managers and change agents around the world.

This completely revised and updated 4th edition of Making Sense of Change Management includes more international examples and case studies, emerging new thinking and practice in the area of cultural change and a new chapter on the interrelationship with project management (PM) and change management. It also covers complexity models, agile approaches, and stakeholder management along with cultural sensitivity and what to do when cultures collide. Making Sense of Change Management remains essential reading for anyone who is currently part of, or leading, a change initiative. Online supporting resources include lecture slides, making this an ideal textbook for MBA or graduate students focusing on leading or managing change.

Table of Contents 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

124

Human Resources, Organizational Development and Coaching

Introduction The underpinning theory Individual change Team change Organizational change Leading change The change agent The applications Restructuring Mergers and acquisitions Culture and change Project- and Programme-led change Emerging inquiries Complex change Leading change in uncertain times


This book

Managing Change

<< Offers a critical perspective and

A critical perspective

challenges change management assumptions to facilitate a deeper understanding and appreciation of the subject

<< New to this edition: new chapters

on perspectives, power and politics, ethics, agents and agency, HRM and evaluation; a revised structure to reflect strategic, group and individual change; a revised final chapter on evaluating the practice and theory of change management; and an appendix of twenty popular change management techniques

<< Online resources: annotated web

links for students, an instructor’s manual complete with commentary on questions and cases in the book, lecture slides and additional case studies for tutors

Edition 2

Imprint: Date: Price:

CIPD 13/08/2010 £46.99

ISBN Paperback: e-book:

9781843982418 9781843984528

Extent: Dimensions: Subject:

392 246x189 Change Management

Description

Author Information

Managing Change: A critical perspective explores how and why change occurs in organisations and how the change process can be managed effectively. Complete with an appendix featuring twenty popular change management techniques, it is an ideal core textbook for change modules on HR and business degree programmes at both undergraduate and postgraduate level. It offers a critical perspective, challenging the main assumptions and ensuring that the complexity of the subject is understood and appreciated.

Mark Hughes is a senior lecturer in organisational behaviour at Brighton Business School, UK.

This fully updated 2nd edition of Managing Change: A critical perspective includes new chapters on perspectives, power and politics, ethics, agents and agency, HRM and evaluation. Its revised structure reflects strategic, group and individual change, and a revised final chapter evaluates the practice and theory of change management. Online supporting resources include annotated web links for students, an instructor’s manual complete with commentary on questions and cases in the book and lecture slides and additional case studies for tutors.

Table of Contents 1 Introduction 1.1 The Managing Change Conundrums 1.2 Organisational Change Classifications 1.3 History and Organisational Change 1.4 The Role of Paradigms and Perspectives 2 External and Internal Change Context 2.1 Why Organisations Change 2.2 Organisational Design and Change 2.3 Strategic Level Change 2.4 Group and Team Level Change 2.5 Individual Level Change 3 Managing Change 3.1 The Leadership of Change 3.2 Change Communications 3.3 Resistance to Change 3.4 Cultural Change 3.5 Organisational Learning 4 Developments in Managing Change 4.1 Power, Politics and Organisational Change 4.2 Ethics and Managing Change 4.3 Change Agents and Agency 4.4 HRM and Managing Change 4.5 Technological Change 5 Conclusions 5.1 Evaluating Managing Change 6 Appendix – The Organisational Change Field Guide

Human Resources, Organizational Development and Coaching

125


Organizational Change Explained

This book

<< Uses real-world examples to show how issues and challenges have been overcome in organizations

Case Studies on Transformational Change in Organizations Edition 1

<< Covers a wide range of

organizational perspectives with examples from GlaxoSmithKline, the NHS and other large and small companies

Date: Price:

03/02/2017 ÂŁ29.99

ISBN Paperback: e-book:

9780749475475 9780749475482

Extent: Dimensions: Subject:

272 234x156 Change Management

<< Includes reflective questions for critically assessing and learning from the case studies

Author Information

Description

Sarah Coleman is director of Business Evolution. Her clients include multinationals and established medium-sized enterprises across government and industry sectors including telecoms, professional and financial services, engineering and healthcare. Sarah is a Fellow of and Non-Executive Director for the Association for Project Management. She is Visiting Senior Fellow at Lincoln University and a Mentor at Judge Business School, Cambridge.

The best way to learn how to navigate change successfully is to look at practical examples of change management programmes. Organizational Change Explained shares stories and insights from experienced change practitioners so professionals can reflect on their own work, respond critically to what others have done, and take away new tools and techniques to apply to their own change management practice. The book includes a range of cases from different sectors and countries including GlaxoSmithKline and the NHS to offer insights no matter the scale of the change management programme.

Bob Thomas is a highly experienced interim programme, portfolio, PMO delivery manager with a consulting and delivery background in airports, retail, government (central and local), insurance, logistics, health, financial services, transportation and consulting.

Organized around central themes such as shaping and design, change leadership, and communication and engagement, Organizational Change Explained presents each case alongside an introduction, conclusion, list of key learning points, questions for reflection and sources of further reading. The book is invaluable to anyone tasked with leading or managing change within their teams, projects, departments or divisions, whether at local level or across geographic locations, countries and cultures.

Table of Contents 1 1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4 1.5

126

Human Resources, Organizational Development and Coaching

The Reality of Organisational Change Organisational development in the NHS Sparking change Changing the way we change Shaping and designing change Brain, behaviour and being the same or different 1.6 Working with resistance to change 1.7 Creating the resilient organisation 1.8 Leading change 1.9 Employee communication and engagement during change 1.10 Project Carpe Diem 1.11 Operational readiness for change 1.12 Managing change in Asia and the West 1.13 Developing change capacity and capability in organizations 1.14 Risk and organisational change 1.15 Embedding and sustaining change 1.16 Change innovation 2 The Future of Organisational Change 2.1 The future of change and management 2.2 Leading the agile organisation 2.3 The shift from complicated to complex 2.4 The future and manufacturing 2.5 The future and local government 2.6 The future of healthcare


This book

<< Offers practical science-based

advice on engaging and supporting employees during times of change

<< Includes examples of what

has actually worked in real organizations including Lloyds Banking Group, the Department for Business, Innovation and Skills, Orbit Housing Group and BAE Systems

<< Provides the evidence that some of what is already being done in organizations is really getting results, and so helps the HR practitioner to prove their worth

Neuroscience for Organizational Change An Evidence-based Practical Guide to Managing Change Edition 1

Date: Price:

03/02/2016 £29.99

ISBN Paperback: e-book:

9780749474881 9780749474898

Extent: Dimensions: Subject:

216 234x156 Change Management

Description

Author Information

Understanding how employees’ brains work has lasting impact in terms of meeting business objectives and becoming an employer of choice. Neuroscience for Organizational Change helps businesses understand why employees find organizational change difficult and what they need from work relationships to perform at their best. Providing practical examples of how to apply these insights, the book enables organizations to improve performance as well as support the mental and emotional well-being of employees.

Hilary Scarlett is a consultant, writer, speaker and director of Scarlett & Grey. Her work on the development of people-focused change management programmes, coaching and employee engagement has spanned Europe, the US and Asia. She is currently conducting research on applied neuroscience with four major organizations in the private and public sectors. Hilary also has been working with Professor Walsh of University College London to apply cognitive neuroscience to practical management tools.

Drawing on examples from big-name organizations such as Lloyds Banking Group, Department for Business, Innovation and Skills, Orbit Housing Group and BAE Systems, Neuroscience for Organizational Change looks at the need for social connection at work, the essential role that leaders and managers play, how best to manage emotions and reduce bias to avoid making flawed decisions, and why we need communication, involvement and storytelling to help us through change. It also sets out a new science-based planning tool, SPACES, to enhance motivation.

Table of Contents 1 The Challenge 1.1 Introduction to neuroscience 1.2 Brain facts 1.3 Why our brains don’t like organizational change 2 What can we do? 2.1 Performing at our best during change 2.2 Our social brains 2.3 Managing emotions during change 2.4 Decision-making and bias 2.5 Communication, involvement and the role of storytelling 2.6 Planning change with the brain in mind 2.7 Applying neuroscience in the organization

Human Resources, Organizational Development and Coaching

127


Managing and Leading People Through Organizational Change

This book

<< Will equip students and

practitioners with the practical skills to manage the emotional aspects of change, vital in todayâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s rapidly changing organizations.

<< Outlines the benefits of leading

and managing the human dynamics of change which include a more committed workforce and more sustainable operational performance.

The theory and practice of sustaining change through people Edition 1

<< Includes global case studies to

Date: Price:

03/02/2016 ÂŁ34.99

ISBN Paperback: e-book:

9780749474195 9780749474201

Extent: Dimensions: Subject:

376 234x156 Change Management

help apply the theory to practice, including Kodak, Nissan, Yahoo, Aegon Asset Management and BankCo.

Author Information

Description

Dr Julie Hodges is an academic, author and consultant. She is currently Director of MBA programmes at Durham University Business School and a lecturer and researcher into change in organizations. Julie has a PhD in the impact of change on levels of stress among middle managers in organizations. Before entering the academic world Julie worked as a management consultant for over 20 years in several profit and non-profit organizations, including the British Council, Vertex, PwC and RBS. Julie is a founding Director of the Leading Well â&#x20AC;&#x201C; a social enterprise for developing leaders in the public and third sectors.

Tremendous forces for change are radically reshaping the world of work. Disruptive innovations, radical thinking, new business models and resource scarcity are impacting every sector. Although the scale of expected change is not unprecedented, what is unique is the pervasive nature of the change and its accelerating pace which people in organizations have to cope with. Structures, systems, processes and strategies are relatively simple to understand and even fix. People, however, are more complex. Change can have a different impact on each of them, all of which can cause different attitudes and reactions. Managing and Leading People Through Organizational Change is written for leaders with the key responsibility of managing people through transitions. Managing and Leading People through Organizational Change provides a critical analysis of change and transformation in organizations from a theoretical and practical perspective. It addresses the individual, team and organizational issues of leading and managing people before, during and after change, using case studies and interviews with people from organizations in different sectors across the globe. This book demonstrates how theory can be applied in practice through practical examples and recommendations, focusing on the importance of understanding the impact of the nature of change on individuals and engaging them collaboratively throughout the transformation journey.

Table of Contents 1 1.1 2 2.1

Understanding Organizational Change The context and nature of change Individual Responses to Change The impact of organizational change on emotions 2.2 Individual sense-making processes 3 The Roles of Leaders and Managers 3.1 Leading people through change 3.2 Fostering commitment and ownership 3.3 Engaging people through dialogue 3.4 Understanding and carrying out culture change 4 Building Capabilities 4.1 The role of HR in transitioning people through change 4.2 Building capabilities for change 5 Ethics, Sustainability and Change 5.1 Sustaining change

128

Human Resources, Organizational Development and Coaching


This book

<< Helps readers to lead a successful

cultural change intervention within their organizations

<< Guides the reader towards

achieving sustained competitive advantage through organizational change

<< Provides a practical framework for

Leading Cultural Change The Theory and Practice of Successful Organizational Transformation Edition 1

the implementation and evaluation of cultural change

Date: Price:

03/05/2015 ÂŁ39.99

ISBN Paperback: e-book:

9780749473037 9780749473044

Extent: Dimensions: Subject:

240 234x156 Change Management

Description

Author Information

With coverage of the major theories and concepts alongside diagnostic tools and a practical framework for implementation, Leading Cultural Change will help the reader analyse and diagnose their current organizational culture, become aware of the key challenges and how to overcome them and learn how to adapt their leadership style, ensuring they are fit to lead a cultural change programme. Taking in core topics such as change context, language and dialogue as a key cultural process and the change team process, it uses a longitudinal case study of Cordia, a public sector organization transitioning into an LLP, to enhance learning and understanding.

Professor James McCalman, formerly MD of Sothebyâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s Institute of Art, is the Head of the Centre for Strategy and Leadership at the University of Portsmouth. He has previously enjoyed roles as MBA Director at the Universities of Glasgow and Strathclyde as well as at Ashridge Business School, before moving to senior leadership roles in the private and charitable sectors.

Leading Cultural Change is a unique text, rooted in behavioural sciences, which explores the topic as an organizational necessity to achieving sustained competitive advantage.

Table of Contents 1 2

Introduction Leading cultural change. Theoretical perspectives 2.1 Cultural change management 2.2 Organization development 2.3 Cultural change literature 2.4 A theory of culture 2.5 Cultural management as a form of control 2.6 Leadership as a cultural variable 2.7 Leadership and the management of meaning 2.8 Language as a cultural process 2.9 Ethnography as a tool for cultural change 3 Cultural and strategic tensions. When theory meets practice 3.1 The client and its problem 3.2 Change technologies 3.3 What did the people think? 3.4 Reflective learning 3.5 Closing thoughts

Dr David Potteris the founder of The Cultural Change Company, which specializes in enabling cultural change interventions. He is a qualified NLP Practitioner and holds both an MBA and a PhD specialising in strategy design and cultural change dynamics. He frequently teaches and presents to students on MBA and Executive courses on the topic of cultural change, including at Lancaster University Management School, Queen Margaret University, Glasgow Caledonian University and Glasgow University Business School.

Human Resources, Organizational Development and Coaching

129


The Effective Change Manager’s Handbook

This book

<< Is the official guide for the first

ever Change Management Body of Knowledge, created by Change Management Institute and APMG

Essential Guidance to the Change Management Body of Knowledge Edition 1

<< Provides a strong base level

knowledge for continuing professional development across the discipline

<< Enables change managers to

Date: Price:

03/11/2014 £39.99

ISBN Paperback: e-book:

9780749473075 9780749473082

Extent: Dimensions: Subject:

632 240x170 Change Management

effectively advise and coach senior colleagues and those sponsoring or leading change initiatives

Author Information

Description

APMG is a leading global Examination Institute and the Official Accreditor of the UK Government’s Cabinet Office and by the United Kingdom Accreditation Service (UKAS). They accredit professional training and consulting organizations and manage certification schemes for knowledge-based workers.

The Effective Change Manager’s Handbook is designed to help practitioners, employers and academics define and practice change management successfully and develop change management maturity within their organization. A single-volume learning resource covering the range of knowledge required, it includes chapters from established thought leaders on topics ranging from benefits management, stakeholder strategy, facilitation, change readiness, project management and education and learning support. Endorsed by the Change Management Institute and the official guide to the CMI Body of Knowledge, The Effective Change Manager’s Handbook covers the whole process from planning to implementation, offering practical tools, techniques and models to effectively support any change initiative.

Richard Smith (Editor) is a specialist in organizational development-related people development issues. He works with clients as diverse as Unilever, Nestle, Mars and Harvard Business School. He is the Chief Examiner for APMG Change Management products and lead author of the first global Change Management Body of Knowledge (CMBoK) for the Change Management Institute. He is also a Fellow of the CIPD.

The editors of The Effective Change Manager’s Handbook – Richard Smith, David King, Ranjit Sidhu and Dan Skelsey – are all experienced international consultants and trainers in change management. All four editors worked on behalf of the Change Management Institute to co-author the first global change management body of knowledge, The Effective Change Manager, and are members of the APMG International examination panel for change management.

Table of Contents 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13

130

Human Resources, Organizational Development and Coaching

A change management perspective – Richard Smith Defining change – Robert Cole, David King and Rod Sowden Managing benefits: Ensuring change delivers value – Stephen Jenner Stakeholder strategy – Patrick Mayfield Communication and engagement – Ranjit Sidhu Change impact – Caroline Perkins Change readiness, planning and measurement – Nicola Busby Project management: Change initiatives, projects and programmes – Ira Blake Education and learning support – Richard Smith Facilitation – Dan Skelsey Sustaining change – Helen Campbell Personal and professional management – Ray Wicks Organizational considerations – Tim Cole, Martin Lunn, Una McGarvie and Eric Rouhof


This book

<< Provides an evidence-based

approach offering a viable and unique organizational change alternative to rigid, linear ‘top down’ methods, and supported by both academic research and original case studies for practitioners to use

<< Provides practical guidance, backed

by the author’s own experiences of global change programmes (notably with BP), to frame pragmatic ways leaders can engage with a complex adaptive system to bring about successful organizational change

<< Moves away from looking at why so many change programmes fail and explores what we can learn from those that are successful

Leading Change How Successful Leaders Approach Change Management Edition 1

Date: Price:

03/12/2014 £24.99

ISBN Paperback: e-book:

9780749471682 9780749471699

Extent: Dimensions: Subject:

232 234x156 Change Management

Description

Author Information

It is often claimed that 70% of organizational change efforts fail, despite the popularity of linear change models. However these linear approaches to change are often based on the premise that change is predictable and straightforward, when actually change is complex, with the ‘human’ element often changing the functioning of the organizational system as a whole.

OD expert and executive coach, Paul Lawrence is Co-director of the Centre for Systemic Change, a change management company based in Sydney. Paul was previously a Global Programme Director for OD and Learning at BP.

Leading Change provides the practical framework that allows leaders to actively engage with a complex adaptive system to bring about successful organizational change. Supported by academic research, and grounded with a range of examples and cases, the book offers a genuine, viable alternative to existing approaches.

Table of Contents 1 Introduction 2 The emerging change model 3 Reflective dialogue in action 3.1 Dialogue and communication 3.2 Listening 3.3 Voicing 3.4 Reflection 4 Perspective, purpose and identity 4.1 The evolution of perspective 4.2 The evolution of purpose 4.3 The evolution of identity 5 Power and politics 5.1 Power and politics 6 Themes 6.1 Authenticity 6.2 Resistance to change 6.3 Systemic thinking 7 Application 7.1 Case study: The emerging change model in practice 7.2 Getting started 7.3 Leadership 7.4 Building capability 7.5 The role of coaching

Human Resources, Organizational Development and Coaching

131


Excellence in Coaching

This book

<< Covers all the fundamental areas in coaching to enable best practice

The Industry Guide Edition 3

<< Shows how to use a diverse range

of coaching models in the modern workplace to deal with issues such as stress and motivation

<< Allows managers and coaches Date: Price:

03/12/2015 £29.99

ISBN Paperback: e-book:

9780749474454 9780749474461

Extent: Dimensions: Subject:

360 234x156 Coaching

to effectively evaluate coaching programmes and measure their ROI

Author Information

Description

Jonathan Passmore is a professor of psychology with an international reputation, and the managing director of a consulting company. He speaks at conferences around the world and is the editor of Kogan Page’s prestigious Association for Coaching book series. He is also the coauthor of Top Business Psychology Models and Appreciative Inquiry for Change Management, also published by Kogan Page.

Published with the Association for Coaching, Excellence in Coaching presents cutting-edge thinking in the field of workplace coaching. This comprehensive industry guide enables coaches to achieve personal excellence in a rapidly evolving profession through a collection of best-practice material from some of the biggest names in the profession including Sir John Whitmore, Philippe Rosinski and Peter Hawkins. Part One covers the business of coaching, telling practitioners everything they need to know about setting up a coaching practice, defining the coaching requirements, building a business case and embedding best practice in workplace coaching. Part Two covers models and approaches including NLP, appreciative coaching, cognitive behavioural coaching and solution-focused coaching. Part Three considers issues around coaching including evaluating coaching programmes, ethics, and coaching supervision. This latest edition has been updated to reflect recent developments in the industry and includes a new chapter on team coaching. Excellence in Coaching is essential reading for practising coaches as well as for anyone studying coaching through the ILM, coaching training, a Master’s course, or more generally as part of a psychology or business degree.

Table of Contents 1 The Business of Coaching 1.1 What is coaching? 1.2 Coaching within organizations 1.3 Leveraging the coaching investment 1.4 Setting up and running your coaching practice 2 Coaching Models and Approaches 2.1 Behavioural coaching – the GROW model 2.2 Solution-focused coaching 2.3 Cognitive behavioural coaching 2.4 NLP coaching 2.5 Transpersonal coaching 2.6 Appreciative coaching: pathway to flourishing 2.7 Integrative coaching 3 Coaching Issues 3.1 Intercultural coaching 3.2 Coaching and stress 3.3 Coaching ethics: integrity in the moment of choice 3.4 Coaching supervision 3.5 Evaluating coaching programmes 3.6 Coach accreditation 3.7 Team coaching

132

Human Resources, Organizational Development and Coaching


This book

<< Provides over 50 easy-to-use

coaching templates, checklists, hints and tips on applying the tools with the best effect for clients

50 Top Tools for Coaching A Complete Toolkit for Developing and Empowering People

<< New to this edition: addresses

the rising hot topics in the field of coaching, including coaching women into leadership, coaching in the digital age and coaching for change in a VUCA (volatile, uncertain, complex and ambiguous) world

<< Online Resources: interactive

templates, reference tables and web links to help put the tools into practice

Edition 4

Date: Price:

03/03/2018 ÂŁ29.99

ISBN Paperback: e-book:

9780749482329 9780749482336

Extent: Dimensions: Subject:

272 234x156 Coaching

Description

Author Information

A complete resource for both in-house and external coaches, 50 Top Tools for Coaching presents the techniques required to face every coaching situation. Full of templates, checklists, hints and tips, it covers how to assess the needs of clients, select the right tool for the circumstance and deliver effective coaching with confidence. The book reflects on all key areas from the start of an assignment to its finish, including: setting up and managing the coaching relationship; understanding and resolving conflict; increasing client confidence; enhancing client performance; communicating and influencing; and developing a leadership style. It offers examples throughout on how the tools have helped coaches be more successful.

Ro Gorell is a change strategist and coach specializing in Lean Change/Agile, modelling these principles through her business Grow Talent, in collaboration with Change Optimised. Based in Australia, she is the author of Group Coaching and co-author of How to Create a Coaching Culture, both published by Kogan Page.

This fully revised 4th edition of 50 Top Tools for Coaching includes the latest on topical issues such as coaching women into leadership roles and coaching for change in a volatile, uncertain, complex, and ambiguous (VUCA) world. Brand new tools help coach and motivate in in a digital world, in times of change and with very little budget. Online supporting resources include additional tools, interactive templates, reference tables and web links to help put the tools into practice.

Gillian Jones is co-managing director of Emerge, an organizational and behavioural change consultancy. Based in the UK, she has recently launched The Empowering Womenâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s Programme in the Middle East. She is the coauthor of How to Create a Coaching Culture , published by Kogan Page.

Table of Contents 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11

Setting up the Coaching Relationship Foundation Tools Goal Setting Problem Resolution Values and Beliefs Confident Strategies Working Effectively with Others Personal Impact and Influence Enhancing Leadership Style Planning for the Future Ten Extra Tools from our Coaches

Human Resources, Organizational Development and Coaching

133


Leadership Team Coaching

This book

<< Includes tools and advice for

coaching different types of teams including virtual teams, international teams and executive boards

Developing Collective Transformational Leadership Edition 3

<< Explores the five disciplines of

successful team practice and how to use them to achieve optimum organizational performance

Date: Price:

03/07/2017 ÂŁ29.99

ISBN Paperback: e-book:

9780749478490 9780749478506

Extent: Dimensions: Subject:

360 234x156 Coaching

<< Matches key interventions with

individual team needs to provide a targeted approach to team coaching which is tailored to the needs of an organization

Author Information

Description

Peter Hawkins is Professor of Leadership at Henley Business School, founder and emeritus chairman of Bath Consultancy Group and chairman of Renewal Associates. He is also visiting professor in executive coaching at Oxford Brookes University and in leadership and change at the University of Bath. Over the last 30 years Peter has worked with many leading companies internationally, co-designing and facilitating major change projects and coaching boards and leadership teams. He is the author of several books including Leadership Team Coaching in Practice, also published by Kogan Page.

Organizations are most effective when the teams responsible for their success function to the best of their ability. When the relationships within the team work well and all members have a clear focus, the team is able to achieve goals more easily. Leadership Team Coaching is a roadmap for those who have the responsibility of developing a leadership team. It provides a thorough explanation of the key elements of team coaching and is filled with practical tools and techniques to facilitate optimum performance across virtual teams, international teams, executive boards and other teams. The fully updated 3rd edition of Leadership Team Coaching brings together the latest research in leadership teams and team coaching along with numerous examples to illustrate how to develop people from disparate groups into a high-performing team. With new international case studies throughout as well as a new chapter on systemic coaching, the book covers the five disciplines of team performance, how to select team members, how the relationship of the coach and the team develops through stages, how CEOs can foster effective teams with shared leadership, how to choose the best team coach and more to facilitate effective leadership teams.

Table of Contents

134

Human Resources, Organizational Development and Coaching

1 High Performing Teams 1.1 Why the world needs more high-performing leadership teams 1.2 The high-performing team and the transformational leadership team 1.3 The five disciplines of successful team practice 2 Team Coaching 2.1 What is team coaching? 2.2 The team coaching process 2.3 Coaching the five disciplines: systemic team coaching 2.4 New developments in systemic team coaching 3 Coaching Different Types of Teams 3.1 Many types of teams 3.2 Coaching the board 4 Creating Shared Leadership, Selecting, Developing and Coaching Your Own Team 4.1 Selecting the players for a high-performing team 4.2 Key steps for CEOs in creating a highperforming team with shared leadership 4.3 How to find, select and work with a good team coach

5

The Development, Supervision and Tools of a Systemic Coach 5.1 Developing as a team coach 5.2 Supervising team coaching 5.3 Team coaching methods, tools and techniques


This book

<< Includes new chapters on the

organizational value of coaching and mentoring with case studies from retail, oil and gas and professional services companies

Coaching and Mentoring Practical Techniques for Developing Learning and Performance

<< Provides a clear, accessible and

unbiased introduction to coaching and mentoring at individual, team and organizational levels

<< Shows how to align coaching and mentoring to an organizationâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s overall business strategy and measure its transformational impact

Edition 3

Date: Price:

03/12/2016 ÂŁ29.99

ISBN Paperback: e-book:

9780749477622 9780749477639

Pages: Format (mm): Subject:

288 234x156 Coaching

Description

Author Information

Over the last 15 years, Coaching and Mentoring has become the go-to guide for anyone looking to develop their coaching and mentoring skills at individual, team or organizational level. Clear and accessible, it uses practical tools and best practice to demonstrate how to relate theoretical models to specific situations to gain real benefits. It provides strategies that can be applied to any situation, including life coaching, business coaching and community mentoring.

Ed Parsloe has been the managing director of the Oxford Coaching and Mentoring Group since 2009 and is a member of the Chartered Institute of Personnel and Development (CIPD) L&D Advisory Board.

Now in its 3rd edition, Coaching and Mentoring has been fully updated to cover the latest thinking and developments in this area including extended coverage of coaching supervision. There is also now a brand new section on practical applications of coaching and mentoring for organizations which includes advice on how to align coaching and mentoring strategies to overall business goals and how to provide evidence for its transformational impact on employee performance. Full of practical advice, case studies and examples, this comprehensive guide will be of value to everyone involved in any aspect coaching and mentoring.

Melville Leedham is an associate lecturer at the University of Northampton. He runs his own coach-mentoring business specializing in improving the performance of individuals, teams and organizations and also trains, supervises and assesses other coaches.

Table of Contents 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

From marginal to mainstream Models of coaching and mentoring Community mentors and life-coaching Helping people learn how to learn Awareness of individual differences Feedback that builds confidence and success Observant listening Questioning An industry or maturing profession

Human Resources, Organizational Development and Coaching

135


Employee Engagement Edition 1

This book

<< Unique positive-psychology-based approach to driving employee engagement

<< Solidly grounded in engagement

theory, it also provides practical tools, techniques and diagnostics

<< Covers all the key areas from Series: Date: Price:

HR Fundamentals 03/11/2014 £19.99

ISBN Paperback: e-book:

9780749472016 9780749472023

Extent: Dimensions: Subject:

264 234x156 Employee Engagement

defining engagement right through to future thinking and developments

Author Information

Description

Emma Bridger is an award winning employee engagement specialist and Director of People Lab, an Employee Engagement Consultancy, working with clients worldwide. With over 18 years’ experience gained in a variety of roles, Emma began her career lecturing on graduate and post-graduate courses in psychology, her specialist area being behaviour change.

Achieving employee engagement is crucial to the success and continued high performance of any organization. But with budgets tighter than ever before, economic struggles and an increasingly stressful workplace for staff, it has become an increasingly difficult task.

Emma has designed and developed the CIPD range of short Employee Engagement courses as well as contributing to and being published within the UK Government Review – Engaging for Success. She now advises the Government taskforce on engagement as part of the “guru group”. Emma is also a regular conference speaker and case studies detailing her work have been published in industry journals.

136

Human Resources, Organizational Development and Coaching

Aimed at HR practitioners and managers, Employee Engagement offers a complete, practical resource for understanding, measuring and building engagement. Grounded in engagement theory and an understanding of psychology combined with practical tools, techniques and diagnostics, this book will help you assess and drive engagement in your organization. Case studies include British Gas, Capital One, Asda, Ministry of Justice, Mace and RSA.

Table of Contents 1 2 3

What is employee engagement? Does engagement matter? Developing your employee engagement strategy 4 How it works 5 E mployee engagement: How do you do it? 6 Employee engagement tools and techniques 7 Planning and action 8 Measuring engagement 9 T he future of employee engagement


<< Provides fifty ready-to-use tools

50 Top Tools for Employee Engagement

<< Includes guidance on when to use

A Complete Toolkit for Improving Motivation and Productivity

<< Guides readers in measuring

Edition 1

This book which can be put into practice immediately with individuals, teams or organizations

each tool, how long it will take and how to get the most out of it the impact of each tool to show which ones are making the most difference and where efforts are best focused

Date: Price:

03/06/2017 £29.99

ISBN Paperback: e-book:

9780749479879 9780749479886

Extent: Dimensions: Subject:

256 234x156 Employee Engagement

Description

Author Information

Engaged employees are more productive, motivated and resilient, yet gaining financial support to develop engagement is harder than ever as budgets are being squeezed and everyone is being asked to do more with less. 50 Top Tools for Employee Engagement shows that you don’t need expensive interventions or additional resource to achieve employee engagement. It contains practical tools which can be used to make an immediate difference to engagement, whether you’re working with individuals, teams or the organization as a whole.

Debbie Mitchell is an organizational development consultant specialising in employee engagement, talent management, change and HR support. She works with businesses across the globe including Sony, Nestle, Quintiles, AA, Visa, Kingston University, Roehampton University and ADB. Prior to this, Debbie held in-house HR and OD roles for British American Tobacco.

Each tool in 50 Top Tools for Employee Engagement includes guidance on when to use it, how long it will take and useful hints and tips to help get the most out of it. Most importantly, this book will give guidance on how to measure the impact of each tool to show what’s working and where efforts are best focused. Addressing all the key areas of engagement throughout the employee life cycle, from talent attraction and induction to career progression and development, this book is a complete resource to engaging your workforce.

Table of Contents 1 2 3 4

Engaging one to one Engaging the team Engaging the organization Engagement throughout the employee lifecycle

Human Resources, Organizational Development and Coaching

137


Employment Law

This book

The essentials

<< Takes the reader step-by-step

Edition 14

through everything they need to know using engaging case studies and examples which encourage deeper thinking and practical application

Imprint: Date: Price:

CIPD 31/01/2017 £41.99

ISBN Paperback: e-book:

9781843984382 9781843984580

Extent: Dimensions: Subject:

<< New to this edition:

includes the latest cases and legislation, such as the Trade Union Act 2016 and the Enterprise Act 2016; new content on the enforcement of tribunal awards, zero hours contracts and migrant workers, and an up-to-date analysis of anti-discrimination law, the national living wage and TUPE

400 246x189 Employment Law / Relations

<< Online resources: offers additional

material including lecturer’s guides, PowerPoint slides, further case studies and annotated web links

Author Information

Description

David Lewis is Professor of Employment Law in the Law School at Middlesex University, UK

Employment Law is the core textbook for the Advanced CIPD Employment Law module and is ideal for all HR professionals and business leaders who need a clear understanding of the area, as well as those studying the subject on postgraduate and undergraduate HRM or business degrees. It takes the reader step-by-step through everything that they need to know, including the formation of the Contract of Employment, discrimination, health and safety in the workplace, unfair dismissal and redundancy. Easy to read and navigate, and full of case studies and useful examples that encourage deeper thinking, this fully updated 14th edition provides a thorough theoretical grounding in employment law that can be applied in practice.

Malcolm Sargeant is Professor of Labour Law in the Business School at Middlesex University, UK

This new edition of Employment Law is completely up-to-date with the latest cases and legislation, including the Trade Union Act 2016 and the Enterprise Act 2016, offers new content on the enforcement of tribunal awards, zero hours contracts and migrant workers, and provides an up-to-date analysis of anti-discrimination law, the national living wage and the ‘Transfer of Undertakings (Protection of Employment) Regulations 2006’ (TUPE). Online resources such as PowerPoint slides, extra case studies, annotated web links and HR-inform updates will support your learning and enable you to apply the theory in practice.

Table of Contents 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14

138

Human Resources, Organizational Development and Coaching

The Sources and Institutions of Employment Law Formation of the Contract of Employment (1) – The Sources of Terms Formation of the Contract of Employment (2) – Implied Terms of Law Recruitment and Selection Pay Issues Discrimination against Employees (1) Discrimination (2): Lawful Discrimination, Vicarious Liability, Burden of Proof, Enforcement and Equality of Terms Parental Rights Health and Safety at Work The Regulation of Working Time Variation, Breach and Termination of the Contract of Employment at Common Law Unfair Dismissal (1) – Exclusions and the Meaning of Dismissal Unfair Dismissal (2) – Potentially Fair Reasons and the Concept of Reasonableness Redundancy

15 Unfair Dismissal and Redundancy Claims 16 Continuity of Employment and Transfers of Undertakings 17 Information and Consultation 18 Trade Unions and Collective Bargaining


This book

<< Consolidates learning through

chapter objectives, examples, tasks and activities that encourage the exploration of the issues

Introduction To Employment Law Fundamentals for HR and Business Students

<< New to this edition: addresses

the latest developments in employment law, full coverage of the CIPD module at level 5 and a useful introduction to the topic for students at level 7, a brand new section on social media with reference to recent case law and extended coverage of the formation and development of the law and the politics behind it

<< Online resources: includes

annotated web links, summaries of key points from each chapter, and podcasts, as well as updated and additional case studies and lecture slides

Edition 4

Imprint: Date: Price:

CIPD 15/03/2016 £38.99

ISBN Paperback: e-book:

9781843984078 9781843984399

Extent: Dimensions: Subject:

288 246x189 Employment Law / Relations

Description

Author Information

Introduction to Employment Law is the most accessible and concise employment law textbook on the market. A clear structure takes the reader through every aspect of employment legislation, including employment tribunals, the contract of employment, individual protections rights, discrimination and the protected characteristics, trade union legislation, and privacy and confidential information. It is essential reading for students studying employment law as part of HR and business degrees, as well as HR and business managers looking to further their knowledge of employment law for practical use.

Kathy Daniels is a Senior Teaching Fellow at Aston Business School, UK. She is also a tutor on the Foundation, Intermediate and Advanced Certificates in Employment Law for the Chartered Institute of Personnel and Development and is a fellow of the CIPD. She is a lay member of the Employment Tribunals, sitting in Birmingham. Prior to these appointments she was Head of HR at a large manufacturing organisation.

Written in a clear and engaging style, this new edition of Introduction to Employment Law is packed with interactive tools that consolidate your learning and will help you relate theory and law to real-life practice: chapter objectives, examples to work through, tasks and activities to encourage the exploration of the issues addressed in greater depth, and key learning points that pull out the most important areas for you to remember. Features of the 4th edition include the latest developments in employment law, full coverage of the CIPD module at level 5 and a useful introduction to the topic for students at level 7, a brand new section on social media with reference to recent case law and extended coverage of the formation and development of the law and the politics behind it. Extensive online resources are also available, and include annotated web links, summaries of key points from each chapter, and podcasts, as well as updated and additional case studies and lecture slides.

Table of Contents 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13

The Formation of Employment Law The Employment Tribunals and the Employment Appeal Tribunal Contract of Employment Atypical Contracts and the Variation of Contracts Individual Protection Rights Discrimination – Concepts and Definition Discrimination – The Protected Characteristics Termination of Employment Redundancy and Transfers of Undertaking Trade Union Legislation Privacy and Confidential Information Health and Safety Legislation Study Skills in Employment Law

Human Resources, Organizational Development and Coaching

139


Employment Law

This book

<< Aligns compliance to legal Edition 1

requirements with the strategic objectives of your organization, equipping you with the crucial skills and knowledge you need to use employment law effectively

Series: Date: Price:

HR Fundamentals 03/05/2014 ÂŁ24.99

ISBN Paperback: e-book:

9780749469740 9780749469757

Extent: Dimensions: Subject:

<< Provides a practical understanding

to the field and covers why employment law is so important to organizations, from protecting employees to protecting employers themselves, and how to keep up to date with the latest developments

<< Presents a step-by-step guide from the start to finish of managing the employment relationship, with chapters on how to go about it, plan, implement and measure the process

224 234x156 Employment Law / Relations

Author Information

Description

Liz Aylott has over 15 years of experience as an HR specialist and Lecturer in areas of Employee Relations and Employment Law. After a career in HR both in industry and the charitable sector, she joined the Hampshire Business School where she lectured on CIPD programmes at both undergraduate and postgraduate level. Currently based at BPP where as a member of the Business School faculty she lectures on HRM and business degrees, she also has extensive experience of resolving Employment Tribunal claims.

Employment Law is a practical guide to understanding and applying the law effectively at work in the UK. Tailored to the needs of practitioners it offers a complete overview of the fundamentals of employment law, examining its importance for an organization, its employees and the HR function. Using a combination of practical tools, assessments, scenarios and case studies from best practice it will build your legal knowledge of key areas including immigration, employing temporary staff, changing contracts, discrimination, equal pay, family rights, redundancy and much more. Employment Law is part of the HR Fundamentals series, offering practical advice to HR professionals starting out in their career, completing CPD training or studying for their professional qualifications with the CIPD. It is the ideal companion to Employee Relations, also by the same author.

Table of Contents 1 2 2.1 2.2 2.3 3 3.1 3.2 3.3 3.4 3.5

140

Human Resources, Organizational Development and Coaching

Introduction Fundamentals What is employment law? The importance of employment law Employment law and strategy In practice How it works How you do it Planning and action Measurement Conclusions and Government changes to employment law


This book

<< Provides critical reflections

on the increasing role of line managers in employment relations and the influence of employee representation

<< New to this edition: new

chapter on workplace mediation and coverage on the theory and practice of managing conflict

<< Online resources: lecturer guides, PowerPoint slides, sample essay questions, additional case studies and annotated web links for students

Managing Employment Relations Edition 6

Imprint: Date: Price:

CIPD 15/03/2016 ÂŁ45.99

ISBN Paperback: e-book:

9781843983781 9781843984351

Extent: Dimensions: Subject:

416 246x189 Employment Law / Relations

Description

Author Information

Managing Employment Relations is an indispensable guide for anyone studying the CIPD module Managing Employment Relations as well as anyone looking for a thorough understanding of the theory and practice of the relationship between employers and employees. Fully updated, this edition has new coverage of the changing labour market, regulatory reform and the global environment, ensuring that readers have access to the most up-to-date information in this area.

John Gennard was Professor of Human Resource Management at the University of Strathclyde, UK.

Covering the context, processes and legal aspects of employment relations, Managing Employment Relations gives a thorough grounding in all the underpinning theory of employment relations. It also provides practical guidance on employee engagement, involvement and representation as well as employment relations strategies, policies and change. In this sixth edition, there is a brand new chapter on workplace mediation and enhanced coverage of discipline, grievances and redundancies. Supported by a lecturer guide, sample essay questions and PowerPoint slides for instructors as well as annotated web links and annual updates for students, this book is essential reading for anyone teaching or studying employment relations.

Anthony Bennett is Visiting Fellow and lecturer at Sheffield Hallam University, UK and is also a freelance researcher, workplace mediator and trainer.

Graham Judge is Group Human Resources Director for Local World Ltd, UK.

Richard Saundry is Associate Professor (Reader) in Human Resource and Leadership Studies at Plymouth University, UK. He teaches employee relations and employment law at both undergraduate and post-graduate level.

Table of Contents 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

Introduction The Concepts and Processes of Employment Relations The Context of Employment Relations Employment Relations and the Law The Global Environment Employment Relations Strategies, Policies and Change Employee Engagement Managing Employment Relations Employee Representation Employee Involvement and Participation Managing Workplace Conflict Managing Workplace Discipline Managing Employee Grievances Managing Redundancy The Role of Mediation in Conflict Resolution Conclusion: Thoughts for the Future

Human Resources, Organizational Development and Coaching

141


Employment Relations

This book

<< Covers both the conceptual

debates and functional areas of employment relations

A Critical and International Approach Edition 1

global effects on the practice of employment relations

<< Online resources: lecturer guides,

Imprint: Date: Price:

CIPD 18/02/2011 £46.99

ISBN Paperback: e-book:

9781843982685 9781843983255

Extent: Dimensions: Subject:

<< Considers the local, national and

PowerPoint slides and additional cases as well as annotated web links and further reading for students

400 246x189 Employment Law / Relations

Author Information

Description

Pauline Dibben is Senior Lecturer in Employment Relations at the University of Sheffield, UK.

Drawing on the latest research, Employment Relations is a key text for anyone studying the CIPD module Managing Employment Relations as well as all those looking to expand their knowledge and understanding in this area. Covering both the conceptual debates and contextual factors relating to employment relations as well as key management interventions, this is invaluable reading for anyone looking to understand both the theory and practice of employment relations.

Gilton Klerck is Professor of Sociology at Rhodes University, South Africa. Geoffrey Wood is Professor in Human Resource Management at the University of Sheffield, UK.

With coverage of the main players in employment relations – Trade Unions, Employers and the State – and critical discussion of the local, national and global effects on employment relations, Employment Relations provides a thorough grounding in the international context of employment relations. With comprehensive consideration of key workplace issues including employee engagement, discrimination, conflict, downsizing and redundancies, this is ideal reading for students and practitioners alike. Packed with exercises, examples and case studies, this book allows readers to take a critical approach to this crucial topic.

Table of Contents 1 Introduction 2 Conceptual Debates and Contextual Factors 2.1 The Main Players in Employment Relations – Trade Unions, Employers, and the State 2.2 Theories of Employment Relations 2.3 Employment Relations and Human Resource Management 2.4 Local, National and Global Effects on the Practice of Employment Relations 2.5 Power and Authority 3 Management Interventions in Employment Relations 3.1 Voice 3.2 Employee Engagement 3.3 Pay and Reward 3.4 Discrimination, Difference and Diversity 3.5 Discipline and Grievance 3.6 Conflict and Dispute Resolution 3.7 Downsizing and Redundancy 3.8 Conclusion: The Relevance of Employment Relations and Comparative Employment Relations

142

Human Resources, Organizational Development and Coaching


<< Offers a complete overview of the

Employee Relations

<< Provides an up-to-date perspective

Edition 1

This book field of employee relations and how to align your approach to this with an overall HR and broader organizational strategy on employee relations and outlines how to plan and measure an employee relations strategy effectively

<< Offers practical guidance and

outlines the benefits of having an employee relations strategy that works for your organization

Series: Date: Price:

HR Fundamentals 03/03/2014 ÂŁ24.99

ISBN Paperback: e-book:

9780749469764 9780749469771

Extent: Dimensions: Subject:

216 234x156 Employment Law / Relations

Description

Author Information

Employee Relations is a guide to the fundamental principles of employee relations in the UK. Tailored to the needs of practitioners it offers a complete overview of the field strongly aligned to the organizational and HR strategy and objectives. Using a combination of practical tools, assessments, scenarios and case studies from best practice it will build your knowledge of the area from understanding the labour market and the employment relationship to trade unions and international governing bodies. The book covers key areas such as conflict and dispute resolution, dismissal and redundancy, rights, ethics and much more. Aligning effective employee relations with strategic objectives, this book will equip you with the skills you need to plan, implement and assess employee relations.

Liz Aylott has over 15 years of experience as an HR specialist and Lecturer in areas of Employee Relations and Employment Law. After a career in HR both in industry and the charitable sector, she joined the Hampshire Business School where she lectured on CIPD programmes at both undergraduate and postgraduate level. Currently based at BPP where as a member of the Business School faculty she lectures on HRM and business degrees, Liz also has an extensive experience of resolving Employment Tribunal claims.

Employee Relations is part of the brand new HR Fundamentals series, offering practical advice to HR professionals starting out in their career, completing CPD training or studying for their professional qualifications with the CIPD. It is the complimentary partner title to Employment Law, also by the same author.

Table of Contents 1 2 2.1 2.2 2.3 3 3.1 3.2 3.3

Introduction Fundamentals What is Employee Relations? The importance of Employee Relations Employee Relations and strategy In Practice Employee Relations in practice Planning and action Measurement

Human Resources, Organizational Development and Coaching

143


Wellbeing at Work

This book

How to Design, Implement and Evaluate an Effective Strategy Edition 1

<< Shows how to design and

implement a workplace wellbeing strategy to improve employee engagement, decrease staff turnover and avoid presenteeism

<< Highlights the potential problems and pitfalls of implementing a wellbeing strategy and explains how to avoid these

03/07/2018 £19.99

Date: Price: ISBN Paperback: e-book: Extent: Dimensions: Subject:

<< Includes information on what

to measure and how to analyse the data so you can monitor and evaluate a wellbeing strategy

9780749480684 9780749480691 224 234x156 Employment Law / Relations

Author Information

Description

Professor Cary L. Cooper CBE is the president of the Chartered Institute of Personnel and Development (CIPD) and the Distinguished Professor of Organizational Psychology and Health at Lancaster and Manchester Universities. In 2015 was voted the most influential HR thinker by HR Magazine.

Stress at work is rising year-on-year, long hours are becoming the norm and presenteeism is increasing across all industries. This is not only having a detrimental effect on employee health, happiness and productivity, but also impacting the organization’s bottom line. HR professionals are uniquely placed to manage this modern workplace crisis by implementing a wellbeing strategy in the workplace. Wellbeing at Work is an essential, practical guide to designing and implementing an effective strategy which will reduce employee anxiety, increase staff engagement and improve overall productivity.

Ian Hesketh is an honorary researcher at Lancaster University Management School and a visiting fellow at the Open University Business School. He is a member of the Society for Education and Training, a fellow of the Chartered Management Institute and regularly lectures at colleges and universities throughout the UK and overseas.

144

Human Resources, Organizational Development and Coaching

Written by leading experts in the field, Wellbeing at Work takes readers through the entire process from explaining why a wellbeing strategy is necessary and building momentum around it to communicating it to the workforce and monitoring, measuring and evaluating its impact. Full of advice, tools and insights, this is the only book you’ll need to create a happier, more productive and more profitable organization.

Table of Contents 1 2 3 4 5 6

Why Wellbeing, Why Now? Getting Started Promoting Workplace Wellbeing Problems and Pitfalls Monitoring and Evaluating Tools and Legislation


<< Provides tools to improve all areas

50 Top Tools for Employee Wellbeing

<< Includes guidance on when

A Complete Toolkit for Developing Happy, Healthy, Productive and Engaged Employees

This book of employee wellbeing including physical, mental and social wellbeing

and how to use each tool, what resources are required, how long each one will take to implement and how much each tool will cost

<< Guides readers in measuring

the impact of each tool to show which ones are making the most difference

Edition 1

Date: Price:

03/03/2018 £29.99

ISBN Paperback: e-book:

9780749482183 9780749482190

Extent: Dimensions: Subject:

256 234x156 Employment Law / Relations

Description

Author Information

In a world of political and economic uncertainty with rising stress and unhappiness, improving employee wellbeing has never been more important. However, with budgets being squeezed and resources limited, making a real difference to wellbeing in the workplace can seem impossible. 50 Top Tools for Employee Wellbeing shows that interventions don’t need to be expensive or time consuming. It contains practical tools for HR professionals and managers to immediately improve staff wellbeing, resulting in happier, more engaged and more productive employees.

Debbie Mitchell is an organizational development consultant specializing in employee engagement, coaching, talent management, change and HR support. Based in the UK, she works with international consumer electronics, FMCGs (fast-moving consumer goods), pharmaceuticals and businesses in the transportation, insurance, not for profit and education sectors. Prior to this, the author held in-house HR and OD roles for British American Tobacco and has experience of HR roles in retail, public sector and manufacturing. She is the author of 50 Top Tools for Employee Engagement, also published by Kogan Page.

Each tool in 50 Top Tools for Employee Wellbeing includes guidance on when to use it, how long it will take and how to get the most out of it. Most importantly, this book explains how to measure each tool’s impact. Addressing all the key areas, from career development and workplace culture through to physical, mental and financial wellbeing, this is a complete resource for improving the wellbeing of your workforce.

Table of Contents 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

Career Involvement and Recognition Manager Capability Physical Health Mental Health Environment and Safety Social and Community Financial

Human Resources, Organizational Development and Coaching

145


Armstrong’s Handbook of Human Resource Management Practice Edition 14

<< Updated to include the latest on

engagement, talent management and leadership development as well as new chapters on employee retention, absence management and managing flexibility

<< Aligns with the Chartered Institute of Personnel Development (CIPD) professional map and professional standards

On ine resources

Date: Price:

03/02/2017 £44.99

ISBN Paperback: e-book:

9780749474119 9780749474126

Extent: Dimensions: Subject:

This book

<< Includes comprehensive online

resources for both lecturers and students

776 246x189 Human Resources Management

Author Information

Description

Michael Armstrong is a former chief examiner of the Chartered Institute of Personnel and Development (CIPD), joint managing partner of E-reward and an independent management consultant. He is the author of several bestselling HR books, also published by Kogan Page.

Armstrong’s Handbook of Human Resource Management Practice is the bestselling, definitive text for all HRM students and professionals. Providing a complete resource for understanding and implementing HR in relation to the needs of the business as a whole, it contains in-depth coverage of all the key areas essential to the HR function such as employment law, employee relations, learning and development, performance and reward. Accessible and to the point as ever, this fully updated 14th edition includes emerging theory and practice, embracing the most current thinking on engagement, talent management and leadership development. With updated case studies and references to academic journals, professional magazines and recent research and surveys, it also includes coverage of new approaches to topics such as job evaluation and pay structures.

Stephen Taylor is a senior lecturer in Human Resource Management at the University of Exeter Business School and a chief examiner for the CIPD. Before his academic career he worked in a variety of management roles in the hotel industry and in the NHS.

Armstrong’s Handbook of Human Resource Management Practice is aligned with the Chartered Institute of Personnel and Development (CIPD) professional map and standards, with the sections meeting CIPD learning outcomes now even clearer than before. Comprehensive online support material for instructors, students and HR managers are included. Resources for students and professionals include multiple-choice-questions, flash cards, case studies, further reading and a glossary of HRM terms. The lecturers’ manual contains session notes, discussion questions, a literature review and a complete set of PowerPoint slides.

Table of Contents 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14

146

Human Resources, Organizational Development and Coaching

Fundamentals of human resource management Delivering HRM Human resource management processes People and organizations Factors influencing employee behaviour People resourcing Learning and development Performance management Rewarding people Employee relations Employee well-being International HRM HRM practices HR skills


This book

<< Balances theory with practice,

covering aspects of organisational culture, the role of the HR practitioner, HR planning

<< New to this edition: updates on

legislation along with coverage of the rise of social media and e-recruitment, employer branding, onboarding and socialization for attracting and retaining staff, new methods for delivering learning and development

<< Online resources: instructor’s manual and lecture slides

Introduction to Human Resource Management A Guide to HR in Practice Edition 3

Imprint: Date: Price:

CIPD 22/09/2014 £47.99

ISBN Paperback: e-book:

9781843983590 9781843983354

Extent: Dimensions: Subject:

672 246x189 Human Resources Management

Description

Author Information

Introduction to Human Resource Management is a comprehensive and accessible guide to the subject of HRM. Drawing on the authors’ experiences in both the public and private sectors, and underpinned by academic theory, this textbook follows the logical sequence of the employment cycle and shows how human resource management plays out in practice. It covers organisational culture, the role of the HR practitioner, HR planning, recruitment and selection, talent management, L&D, motivation and performance, health and safety, diversity and equality, employment law, change management and handling and managing information.

Charles Leatherbarrow, Chartered FCIPD, is a senior lecturer in HRM at the University of Wolverhampton, UK. Janet Fletcher, Chartered FCIPD, is a senior lecturer in HRM at the University of Wolverhampton, UK.

With a range of pedagogical features, including contemporary case studies and review questions, Introduction to Human Resource Management maps to the CIPD Certificate in HR Practice and is also ideal for foundation and undergraduate students encountering HRM for the first time. This fully updated 3rd edition has been revised and expanded to include the rise of social media and e-recruitment, the ideas of employer branding, onboarding and socialization for attracting and retaining staff, new methods for delivering learning and development events and updates on legislation. Online supporting resources include an instructor’s manual and lecture slides.

Table of Contents 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19

Organisations Aspects of Organisational Culture Human Resource Management (HRM) The Role of the HR Practitioner Human Resource Planning Recruitment Selection Induction and Retention Learning and Development – Key Concepts Learning and Development – The Practical Aspects Employee Motivation and Performance Employee Reward The Employment Relationship Health, Safety, Well-Being and Work-Life Balance Diversity and Equality Understanding Employment Law Ending the Employment Relationship Change Management Handling and Managing Information

Human Resources, Organizational Development 147 and Coaching


Human Resource Management at Work

This book

<< Promotes a critical awareness of HRM through case studies, examples and activities

<< New to this edition: coverage Edition 6

Imprint: Date: Price:

CIPD 15/03/2016 £47.99

ISBN Paperback: e-book:

9781843983712 9781843984368

Extent: Dimensions: Subject:

of knowledge intensive firms, employee engagement and talent management along with additional coverage of International and Comparative HRM with new case studies and a review of the latest literature

<< Online resources: instructor’s manual and lecture slides

576 246x189 Human Resources Management

Author Information

Description

Michael Marchington is emeritus professor of Human Resource Management at Manchester Business School, University of Manchester, UK. He is a Chartered Companion of the CIPD.

A leading textbook in its field, Human Resource Management at Work provides a clear introduction to the multiple meanings of HRM and the relationship between strategy and HRM. Covering international and comparative HRM as well as HRM and performance, it is filled with case studies and activities to bring the subject to life while summarising the major forces shaping HRM and looking at the principal theoretical frameworks.

Adrian Wilkinson is a professor and the director of the Centre for Work, Organisation and Wellbeing at Griffith University, Australia. He is a Chartered Fellow of the CIPD. Rory Donnelly is a reader in Human Resource Management and Organisational Behaviour at Birmingham Business School, UK. He is a Chartered Member of the CIPD. Anastasia Kynighou is a senior lecturer in Human Resource Management at Manchester Metropolitan University, UK. She is a Chartered Member of the CIPD.

Ideal for business and HR students taking a critical look at HRM theory and practice, this fully updated 6th edition of Human Resource Management at Work combines the latest research with real-world examples. Linking theory with practice, it encourages a critical awareness of HRM through case studies, real-world examples and activities. Now with a closer analysis of the forces shaping HRM at work and the growth of insecure work, it also features new case studies, an updated literature review and a stronger emphasis on International and Comparative HRM. Knowledge intensive firms, employee engagement and talent management are discussed in detail as well, as is the role of bodies such as ‘Engage for Success’ in promoting new methods of working. Online supporting resources include an instructor’s manual and lecture slides.

Table of Contents 1 HRM, Strategy and the Global Context 1.1 HRM, Strategy and Corporate Social Responsibility 1.2 Forces Shaping HRM at Work 1.3 High Commitment HRM: Policy and Practice 1.4 Aligning HRM with Organisational Goals and Market Context 1.5 International and Comparative HRM 2 Responsibilities for Delivering HRM 2.1 The Role of the HR Function in Changing Times 2.2 Line Managers, Leadership and HRM 3 HRM Practices and Processes 3.1 Resourcing and Talent Management 3.2 Performance Management 3.3 Learning and Knowledge Development 3.4 Managing Employment Relations 3.5 Employee Involvement and Participation: Creating Engagement and Voice in the Workplace 3.6 Reward Management 3.7 Examining the Links between HR Practices and Processes and Organisational Performance

148

Human Resources, Organizational Development and Coaching

4 HRM and Performance from a Business Perspective 4.1 Research Skills and Project Management


This book

<< Provides all the practical skills

and critical information needed by HR professionals to practice successfully

<< New to this edition: explores

the application of models within the practice of HR, including the Ulrich model, discusses employee engagement and well-being in the workplace, and provides further information on the practical elements of HR, including law, recruitment and selection, performance management and reward

<< Online resources: offers additional material helpful and relevant to both students and teachers, including lecturer’s guides, PowerPoint slides, annotated web links, and updates from the authors’ blog

Human Resource Practice Edition 7

Imprint: Date: Price:

CIPD 30/06/2016 £46.99

ISBN Paperback: e-book:

9781843984061 9781843984481

Extent: Dimensions: Subject:

328 246x189 Human Resources Management

Description

Author Information

Human Resource Practice provides a practical and accessible guide for students and anyone looking to gain a thorough understanding of HR, and is the definitive text for the CIPD’s Certificate in HR Practice. International case studies, examples and activities enable the reader to engage with the key areas of practical HR management, including the legal background to employment, learning and development, change in organisations and employee relations.

Malcolm Martin BSc, Chartered FCIPD has been involved in the design and delivery of CIPD programmes since 1993. His experience covers a range of sectors from care, education and manufacturing, to polymers, chemicals and steel, and he has held management positions in industrial relations, project management and human resources.

This fully updated 7th edition of Human Resource Practice explores the application of models within the practice of HR, including the Ulrich model, timely discussion on employee engagement and well-being in the workplace, and further information on the practical elements of HR, including law, recruitment and selection, performance management and reward. From two renowned experts in HR practice, this clear and in-depth text will provide you with all the skills and information that you need for a successful career in HR. Online resources offered are useful and relevant for both students and tutors, including lecturer’s guides, PowerPoint slides and annotated web links.

Table of Contents

Fiona Whiting MSc, LLb, Chartered FCIPD is a freelance HR consultant with many years’ experience working across the public, voluntary and private sectors. She has held a number of Board level HR Director posts within the NHS and is co-founder and Director of consultancy ThePeopleEffect.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

Introduction and Overview The Organisational Context The Legal Background to Employment Job Analysis Recruitment and Selection Performance Management Reward Employee Relations Learning and Development Information and Communication Technology in HR 11 Change in Organisations 12 Personal Effectiveness

Human Resources, Organizational Development 149 and Coaching


Human Resource Management for MBA and Business Masters Edition 3

<< Offers a solid foundation in

both the theory and practice of HRM through a wide variety of pedagogical features

<< New to this edition: a greater

international and contemporary focus, fresh case studies, coverage of the impact of new forms of employment and technology on HR and updated online resources

Imprint: Date: Price:

CIPD 31/01/2017 £44.99

ISBN Paperback: e-book:

9781843984429 9781843984597

Extent: Dimensions: Subject:

This book

<< Online resources: an instructor’s manual, videos, multiple-choice questions and additional case studies for tutors plus multiplechoice questions and additional case studies for students

222 246x189 Human Resources Management

Author Information

Description

Iain Henderson is a senior teaching fellow at Edinburgh Business School, Heriot-Watt University, UK.

Packed with practical information and offering a solid foundation in HRM theory, Human Resource Management for MBA and Business Masters covers all the topics MBA students need to know in a concise, accessible way. One of the only texts available for HR nonspecialist students doing a Masters or MBA, it looks at the changing world of the line manager and HR professional with regard to key topics such as HRM and strategy, employee resourcing, human resource development, employee relations and performance management. Annotated further reading for each chapter and questions for each case study help cement knowledge and understanding. Now aimed at a wider readership of management Masters students, this fully updated 3rd edition of Human Resource Management for MBA and Business Masters features a greater international and contemporary focus, fresh case studies, coverage of the impact of new forms of employment and technology on HR, and updated online supporting resources. With diagrams and models throughout, it covers topics such as CSR, organisational culture and change, performance management and talent management, the criticisms of HRM levelled by the Critical Management School and different HRM challenges as they relate to each chapter. Online supporting resources for tutors include an instructor’s manual, videos, multiple-choice questions and additional case studies; additional resources for students include multiplechoice questions and additional case studies.

Table of Contents 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

150

Human Resources, Organizational Development and Coaching

Human Resource Management Employee Resourcing Learning and Development Employee Relations Human Resource Management and the Design of Work Managing Performance Managing Rewards The Global Context of HRM – International and Comparative HRM Contemporary Issues and Future Trends


This book

<< Is the essential text for all

postgraduate and undergraduate students studying the broader business context within which HR operates

<< New to this edition: updated to

include an even broader range of global case studies with extended coverage from China and India and updates to policies and legislation

<< Online resources: provides

additional case studies and activities, alongside lecturer’s guides, PowerPoint slides and annotated web links

Human Resource Management in a Business Context Edition 3

Imprint: Date: Price:

CIPD 01/06/2016 £45.99

ISBN Paperback: e-book:

9781843984047 9781843984511

Extent: Dimensions: Subject:

592 246x189 Human Resources Management

Description

Author Information

Highly accessible and student-friendly, Human Resource Management in a Business Context is the core text for the CIPD advanced-level module, Human Resource Management in Context, and is also essential reading for other undergraduate and postgraduate HR and business degrees. In clear and easy to navigate chapters, which consider government policy, regulation, the world economy and demographic and social trends, this book provides the firm theoretical background that you can apply in practice.

John Kew is an educational consultant and has written flexible learning material for the CIPD’s Professional Development Scheme.

Human Resource Management in a Business Context is packed with international case studies, examples and activities that will actively engage you with the different areas of knowledge and allow you to work through the material step-by-step. This edition is fully updated to include an even broader range of global case studies with extended coverage from China and India and updates to policies and legislation. The online resources available have also been expanded on, and now provide additional case studies and activities, alongside lecturer’s guides, PowerPoint slides and annotated web links.

John Stredwick is Senior Lecturer at University of Bedfordshire and a well renowned author. He is Visiting Professor at Webster University (US) based in Regents Park.

Table of Contents 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11

Human Resource Management in Context The Managerial Context of Human Resources The Competitive Environment Government Policy Regulation The World Economy Demographic and Social Trends Technology Ethics, Social Responsibility and Sustainability Strategic Management HR Delivery, Strategy and Performance

Human Resources, Organizational Development and Coaching

151


Studying Human Resource Management

This book

<< Designed specifically to address the core units of the CIPD intermediate level qualification in HRM

<< New to this edition: includes new Edition 2

material on the HR function and the job of the HR manager

<< Online resources: videos,

Imprint: Date: Price:

CIPD 24/05/2016 ÂŁ46.99

ISBN Paperback: e-book:

9781843984153 9781843984405

Extent: Dimensions: Subject:

podcasts, lecturer slides with tutor notes, multiple choice questions, extra case studies, annotated web links and a glossary

224 246x189 Human Resources Management

Author Information

Description

Stephen Taylor, is a Senior Lecturer in Human Resource Management at the University of Exeter Business School, UK and also a Chief Examiner for the CIPD . He previously taught at Manchester Business School and Manchester Metropolitan University Business School.

Written by experts in the field with a wealth of academic and practical experience, Studying Human Resource Management is essential reading for all those studying the intermediate level CIPD qualification in HRM. With its discussion of studying HRM, managing and coordinating the HR function and business issues in the context of HR, this is also invaluable reading for all students on undergraduate HRM and Business and Management degrees.

Professor Carol Woodhams is an Associate Professor of Human Resource Management at the University of Exeter Business School, UK. She has held various positions within the CIPD including National Examiner for Designing and Delivering Training and Editor of the flexible learning materials at Intermediate and Advanced levels.

Studying Human Resource Management also has extensive coverage of developing professional practice and using information in HR and now includes additional material on the HR function as well as new coverage of the job of the HR manager. Supported by brand new online resources including videos, podcasts and interactive multiple choice questions as well as a lecturer guide, PowerPoint slides and additional case studies, this is a crucial book for all those teaching and studying human resources management.

Table of Contents 1

Studying HRM (Stephen Taylor and Carol Woodhams) 2 Managing and Co-Ordinating the HR Function (Krystal Wilkinson and Stephen Taylor) 3 Business Issues and the Contexts of Human Resources (Stephen Taylor and Krystal Wilkinson) 4 Developing Professional Practice (Ted Johns and Graham Perkins) 5 Using Information in Human Resources (Graham Perkins and Carol Woodhams) 6 Developing the Knowledge and Skill of the HR Professional (Carol Woodhams, Graham Perkins and Krystal Wilkinson)

152

Human Resources, Organizational Development and Coaching


This book

<< Designed specifically to address

the optional units of the CIPD intermediate qualification in HRM

<< New to this edition: three new chapters on Human Resource Development; Improving Organisational Performance and Organisational Design and Development

<< Online resources: videos,

podcasts, lecturer slides with tutor notes, multiple choice questions, glossary and annotated web links

Human Resource Management People and Organisations Edition 2

Imprint: Date: Price:

CIPD 23/05/2016 ÂŁ45.99

ISBN Paperback: e-book:

9781843984160 9781843984412

Extent: Dimensions: Subject:

256 246x189 Human Resources Management

Description

Author Information

Written by experts in the field, Human Resource Management: People and Organisations is essential reading for all those studying the intermediate level CIPD qualification in HRM. It contains essential coverage of key HR topics including resourcing and talent planning, reward management and contemporary developments in employment relations, making it equally valuable to all students on undergraduate HRM and Business and Management degrees.

Stephen Taylor, is a Senior Lecturer in Human Resource Management at the University of Exeter Business School, UK and also a Chief Examiner for the CIPD. He previously taught at Manchester Business School and Manchester Metropolitan University Business School.

This second edition of Human Resource Management: People and Organisations now includes three brand new chapters on Human Resource Development; improving organisational performance and organisational design and development as well as additional real-life case studies throughout, ensuring the most comprehensive and up-to-date coverage of people and organisations. Fully supported by online resources including new videos, podcasts and interactive multiple choice questions as well as a lecturer guide and PowerPoint slides for instructors, this is an authoritative, informative and engaging guide essential for all HR students

Professor Carol Woodhams is an Associate Professor of Human Resource Management at the University of Exeter Business School, UK. She has held various positions within the CIPD including National Examiner for Designing and Delivering Training and Editor of the flexible learning materials at Intermediate and Advanced levels.

Table of Contents 1 2

Human Resource Service Delivery (Gail Swift) Employment Law (Stephen Taylor and Krystal Wilkinson) 3 Resourcing and Talent Planning (Krystal Wilkinson and Stephen Taylor) 4 Employee Engagement (Ted Johns and Cecilia Ellis) 5 Contemporary Developments in Employee Relations (Cecilia Ellis) 6 Reward Management (Graham Perkins and Carol Woodhams) 7 Human Resource Development (Graham Perkins) 8 Organisational Design and Organisational Development (Claire Roberts) 9 Improving Organisational Performance (Stephen Taylor)

Human Resources, Organizational Development and Coaching

153


Human Resource Management in Context

This book

<< Helps students understand, analyze and critically evaluate key issues including the managerial and business environment, how HR strategies are shaped, globalization and demographic, social and technological trends

Insights, Strategy and Solutions Edition 4

<< New to this edition: enhanced

Date: Price:

13/02/2015 £46.99

ISBN Paperback: e-book:

9781843983583 9781843984023

Extent: Dimensions: Subject:

emphasis on the impact of the external environment on the HR profession, a discussion of the impact of technology and social media, increased coverage of ethics and CSR and links to the HR Profession Map

<< Online Resources: instructor’s

manual, lecture slides, annotated web links and answers to/guidance for the chapter activities for lecturers

432 246x189 Human Resources Management

Author Information

Description

David Farnham, Chartered Fellow of the CIPD, is an emeritus professor at the University of Portsmouth and visiting professor at the University of Greenwich, UK. He has been a visiting professor at the University of East London, a visiting senior research fellow at the University of South Wales and a visiting senior research fellow at the Catholic University Leuven. He is Chief Examiner for the CIPD and a member of the advisory board of the Personnel Policies Study Group of the European Group of Public Administration, Brussels.

HR functions within both internal and external contexts. The understanding of both contexts is crucial for comprehending how and why they drive HR strategies and practices in organizations, as well as the rules and structures within which they work. Built around five major themes which impact upon the HR function, and mapping to the CIPD Level 7 Advanced module of the same name, Human Resource Management in Context enables students to understand the complex and changing organizational context in which HR operates today by providing a comprehensive breakdown of the concepts, theories and issues from globalization and government policy to demographic, social and technological trends. This fully updated 4th edition of Human Resource Management in Context includes a range of pedagogical features, balancing theory with practical analysis to form an engaging insight into the strategic side of HR. It includes enhanced emphasis on the impact of the external environment on the HR profession, a discussion of the impact of technology and social media, increased coverage of ethics and CSR and links to the HR Profession Map. Online supporting resources for lecturers include an instructor’s manual, lecture slides, annotated web links and guidance for the chapter activities.

Table of Contents 1 1.1 1.2 1.3 2 2.1 2.2 3 3.1 3.2 3.3 3.4 3.5

154

Human Resources, Organizational Development and Coaching

Introducing Human Resource Management, Organisation and Management Human Resource Management and its External Contexts Contemporary Organisations and their Internal Contexts The Managerial and Business Contexts of Organisations Strategy Formulation and Implementation Developing Corporate Strategies Developing Human Resource Strategies The External Contexts of Human Resource Management Markets and the Competitive Context Globalisation and International Factors Demographic and Social Trends The Technological Context Government Policy and Legal Regulation


This book

<< Provides a complete explanation of how to develop and implement HR strategies that are integrated with business strategies and enable the organization to achieve its goals

<< Shows how to adopt a strategic

approach on a day-to-day basis to operate as part of the management team and demonstrate how their activities add value

<< Includes a toolkit for conducting

a strategic review, which features the use of checklists to analyse different aspects of HR strategy, and the basis of workshops and focus groups

Armstrong’s Handbook of Strategic Human Resource Management Edition 6

Date: Price:

03/03/2016 £34.99

ISBN Paperback: e-book:

9780749476823 9780749476830

Extent: Dimensions: Subject:

280 234x156 Human Resources Management

Description

Author Information

Strategic human resource management has been taken up by academics, consultants and practitioners alike. However, the integration of human resource strategy with overall business strategy is often easier in theory than in practice. Armstrong’s Handbook of Strategic Human Resource Management provides a bridge between theory and practice, serving as a guide both to formulating human resource strategies and to implementing them.

Michael Armstrong is a former chief examiner of the Chartered Institute of Personnel and Development (CIPD), managing partner of E-Reward and an independent management consultant. He has spent 25 years as an HR practitioner, including 12 as HR director. He has sold over 500,000 books on the subject of human resource management, and is the author of numerous bestselling HR books, also published by Kogan Page.

This completely revised sixth edition examines HRM and SHRM as well as organizational and functional strategies from a practical standpoint. It includes brand new chapters on developing and delivering HR strategy, implementing individual performance strategies, creating and executing a corporate social responsibility strategy as well as a new discussion of international HRM strategies. Full of case studies, checklists and practical examples, Armstrong’s Handbook of Strategic Human Resource Management is an indispensable resource for all those who are involved in putting complex strategy into practice to effect positive and productive change. Online supporting resources include lecture slides, an instructor’s manual and a student’s manual complete with a bibliography and glossary.

Table of Contents 1 Introduction 2 The framework of strategic HRM 2.1 Human resource management 2.2 Strategic management 2.3 Strategic human resource management 2.4 The strategic role of HR 3 HRM strategy in general 3.1 The nature of HR strategy 3.2 Developing HR strategy 3.3 Delivering HR strategy 4 HRM strategies related to organizational capability and organizational and individual performance 4.1 Organization development strategy 4.2 Human capital management strategy 4.3 Knowledge management strategy 4.4 Corporate social responsibility strategy 4.5 Organizational performance strategy 4.6 Individual performance management strategy 5 HRM strategies dealing with specific aspects of HRM 5.1 Employee engagement strategy 5.2 Resourcing strategy

5.3 Talent management strategy 5.4 Learning and development strategy 5.5 Reward strategy 5.6 Employee relations strategy 6 The international scene 6.1 Strategic international HRM 6.2 International HRM strategies

Human Resources, Organizational Development and Coaching

155


Strategic Internal Communication

This book

<< Now contains specific guidance

on how to use Dialogue Box to communicate organizational restructures more successfully and avoid misunderstandings among employees

How to Build Employee Engagement and Performance Edition 2

<< Helps improve employee

engagement and performance by ensuring business goals are effectively communicated to staff

03/06/2017 £34.99

Date: Price: ISBN Paperback: e-book: Pages: Format (mm): Subject:

<< Combines theory and practice

for confidently designing and implementing a strategic approach to internal communications

9780749478650 9780749478667 208 234x156 Human Resources Management

Author Information

Description

Dr David Cowan is former head of internal communications at ArcelorMittal, where he developed an award-winning global internal magazine and restructured the internal communications capability. He is currently a senior adviser to Weber Shandwick and has advised a variety of clients, including SABIC, Honeywell Aerospace, SAP, Vimpelcom, Saudi Aramco and University of Central Lancashire. He is a visiting professor at Boston College.

Previously restricted to cascading information and managing day-to-day conversations, internal communication is now essential to empowering employees to deliver business strategy. Strategic Internal Communication shows how to design and implement a strategic approach to internal communication which will lead to engaged and motivated staff, increased productivity and consequently improved business performance. The book makes use of Dialogue Box throughout, a tool to help companies explore what kinds of conversations they need to have with employees to address internal and cultural challenges. It helps transform organizations into open and transparent communities to ensure that entire workforces are committed to the overall business vision. This fully updated 2nd edition of Strategic Internal Communication includes new information on how to use Dialogue Box during times of transition and organizational change and gives advice on how to manage difficult conversations and avoid damaging miscommunication and misinterpretation. Supported by examples and case studies from the author’s own experience, Strategic Internal Communication is an indispensable guide to creating an integrated and collaborative culture which will take your organization to the next level of success.

Table of Contents 1

The new communications triangle: Internal communications, employee engagement and HR 2 Culture shock: Corporate culture does not exist 3 Zone 1: Intelligence – how organizations and people think 4 Zone 2: Emotion – how organizations and people feel 5 Zone 3: Interpretation – how organizations and people understand 6 Zone 4: Narrative – how organizations and people agree (or disagree!) 7 The end zone: Ensuring effective dialogue – how organizations and people talk 8 Using the dialogue box 9 Using the dialogue box to communicate change

156

Human Resources, Organizational Development and Coaching


This book

<< Provides the HR practitioner

with the tools for designing and delivering communications campaigns

Effective HR Communication A Framework for Communicating HR Programmes with Impact

<< Includes checklists for each stage

and tips from experts on ‘do’s’ and ‘don’ts’ along the way, with case studies from leading companies

<< Enables the HR practitioner to

demonstrate the value they are adding to the organization by effectively communicating the benefits of the projects and programmes they are implementing

Edition 1

Date: Price:

03/03/2016 £29.99

ISBN Paperback: e-book:

9780749476168 9780749476199

Extent: Dimensions: Subject:

232 234x156 Human Resources Management

Description

Author Information

In today’s competitive environment where we are doing everything we can to compete for talent, effective communication ensures we are showcasing our HR programmes in a way which will help us attract, retain and engage talent. Whether introducing new HR programmes or re-launching existing ones, communications help us deliver the key messages so that employees understand, appreciate and action them to meet our HR and business objectives. Effective HR Communication is a practical guide to develop and deliver effective communication campaigns, ensuring that teams have the knowledge, skills and tools to achieve the desired objectives.

Debra Corey is an experienced HR professional, with over 30 years of experience as a rewards practitioner. She is currently the group reward director at Reward Gateway, having held similar roles at global organizations such as PageGroup, Merlin Entertainments, Quintiles, Honeywell and Gap. Debra has developed and led a variety of award-winning communication campaigns, and currently teaches a communications course through WorldatWork.

Effective HR Communication introduces a six-step ‘IMPACT’ model to explain and demonstrate the critical steps to be followed when developing a communications campaign. This includes steps such as understanding the communication needs and requirements of employees, developing the most robust objectives, selecting and developing the appropriate medium, planning a campaign in an effective manner, leveraging the support of business partners, developing effective communications content, and measuring the success of the campaign. Using a combination of theory, examples, tips and tools from leading experts, this book provides practical information which can easily be used to create effective and impactful communications. Case studies from leading organizations such as BT, LV=, Merlin Entertainments and Reward Gateway are included to further illustrate how communication has been done effectively.

Table of Contents 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

Investigation Medium Planning Allies Content Testing Case Study: BT employee share plan project Case Study: LV= pensions project Case Study: LV= !nnovate project Merlin Entertainments Case Study: Reward Gateway Project Solar Conclusion

Human Resources, Organizational Development and Coaching

157


Internal Communications

This book

<< Offers a refreshingly practical

introduction to internal communications which covers all the core concepts and models, skills and processes

A Manual for Practitioners Edition 1

<< Helps readers both understand key

Series: Date: Price:

PR In Practice 03/08/2014 ÂŁ24.99

ISBN Paperback: e-book:

9780749469320 9780749469337

Extent: Dimensions: Subject:

theories and put them into practice with tools and advice throughout

<< Includes ready-to-use templates

for communications in a variety of situations, including crises, health and safety, branding, redundancy and bad news, mergers and acquisitions, customer service and new business strategies

272 234x156 Human Resources Management

Author Information

Description

Liam FitzPatrick is Joint Managing Partner of change communication consultancy Agenda Strategies. He has worked both in-house and for major consultancies running change campaigns, developing communications teams and advising on metrics and evaluation. A Fellow of the UK Chartered Institute of Public Relations, he has been involved in planning the education and training of PR practitioners. He is a also member of the Global Certification Council of the International Association of Business Communicators.

Get internal communications right in your organization and the benefits are clear: motivated staff, better financial performance, a strong external reputation and delighted customers are just a few of the reasons why getting your message over to staff effectively matters. Internal Communications explores what good practice in internal communications looks like, providing a no-nonsense, step-by-step approach to devising an internal communications strategy.

Klavs Valskov is Joint Managing Partner of change communication consultancy Agenda Strategies. From 2008-2013 Klavs was the award-winning Global Director of Communication in Maersk Line managing a team around the world working on public relations, crises, internal communications, social media and customer campaigns. Klavs is part of the Advisory Board at the Institute of Business Communication at Copenhagen Business School. He holds a double MA in Communication and Business Studies.

158

Human Resources, Organizational Development and Coaching

Written by experts with extensive experience as consultants and in-house leaders in the private, public and not-for-profit sectors, Internal Communications covers how to build an internal communications team and plan; devise messages and decide which channels to use; work with line managers and senior leaders; research and evaluate internal communications and support change within an organization. Supported by easy to follow models, example explanations of the core theory, and case studies, it provides students and internal communicators alike with the practical tools and advice they need to make a difference in an organization. The book is also supported by online resources, including slides for lecturers.

Table of Contents 1

What internal communication is and why it matters 2 Organizing internal communication 3 Planning 4 Audiences 5 Messaging 6 Channels 7 Why line managers matter and how to support them 8 Working with senior leaders 9 Change 10 Research and evaluation for internal communicators 11 Developing yourself and the team


This book

<< Shows how to use predictive

analysis with HR metrics, whether analysing the data themselves or employing external consultants

Predictive HR Analytics Mastering the HR Metric

<< Is accompanied by a companion

Edition 1

<< Helps develop skills in

Date: Price:

03/03/2016 £29.99

ISBN Paperback: e-book:

9780749473914 9780749473921

website with Excel files and SPSS data files for working through the case study examples presenting the data and linking it to organizational strategy, demonstrating the value of the HR function to the company’s bottom line

Extent: Dimensions: Subject:

472 234x156 Human Resources Management

Description

Author Information

Where other functions of an organization deal in profits, sales growth, forecasts and strategic planning, the HR function is responsible for employee well-being, engagement and motivation. Such concerns do not immediately conjure up images of analytical knowhow, despite the fact that in reality the management of such things often requires a lot of measurement and technical skill. Predictive HR Analytics provides a clear, accessible framework with which to understand and work with HR analytics at an advanced level, taking HR professionals through examples of particular predictive models so they can develop effective HR strategies based on evidence.

Martin R. Edwards is reader in HRM and Organisational Psychology at King’s College London. He has worked for a number of years as an HR consultant. Martin has run many HR analytic workshops with FTSE companies, conducted and advised on employee engagement surveys and taught statistics to undergraduate and postgraduate students.

Predictive HR Analytics will show step-by-step, using simple terms, how to carry out analysis (using the statistical package SPSS) and interpret the results, helping to communicate the potential of HR analytics and get the most out of the HR function, whether carrying out the analysis or briefing external consultants. The book will help deliver a credible and reliable service to businesses by providing metrics on which executives will be able to make sound business decisions. Online supporting resources include data sets for using alongside the book.

Table of Contents

Kirsten A. Edwards, MCIPD, works with Pearn Kandola LLP as a diversity specialist. Prior to this, she spent six years with Coutts where she held various roles including associate director for culture, engagement and diversity. She has over sixteen years’ experience across four continents in the financial, technology, professional services and public sectors. She is a guest lecturer at Kings College London.

1 2 3 4 5

Understanding HR analytics HR information systems and data Analysis strategies Case study 1: Diversity analytics Case study 2: Employee attitude surveys – engagement and workforce perceptions 6 Case study 3: Predicting employee turnover 7 Case study 4: Predicting employee performance 8 Case study 5: Recruitment and selection analytics 9 Case study 6: Monitoring the impact of interventions 10 Business applications: Scenario modelling and business cases 11 More advanced HR analytic techniques 12 Reflection on HR analytics: Usage, ethics and limitations

Human Resources, Organizational Development and Coaching

159


Data-driven Organization Design

This book

<< Shows how to use visualization of

data as an aid to design so that the practitioner can actually ‘see’ what is going on in their organization

Sustaining the Competitive Edge Through Organizational Analytics Edition 1

how to manage and present it so that meaningful conclusions can be drawn

<< Offers real-world insights into

Date: Price:

03/10/2015 £34.99

ISBN Paperback: e-book:

9780749474416 9780749474423

Extent: Dimensions: Subject:

<< Advises on what data to collect and

mistakes and successes from the author’s own experiences to show what really works when implementing a large design

368 234x156 Human Resources Management

Author Information

Description

Rupert Morrison is the CEO of Concentra, a leading analytics company and winner of the Technology Innovation Award 2011 in The Sunday Times Tech Track 100. He led the creation of OrgVue, a solution for HR analytics, organization design and workforce planning. Rupert’s aim is to revolutionize the way people see, plan and manage their organizations to gain competitive advantage. His approach combines his experiences of running a tech firm with supply chain optimization, capacity planning and organization design projects.

Data is changing the nature of competition. Making sense of it is tough; taking advantage of it is even tougher. There is a clear business opportunity for organizations to use data and analytics to transform business performance. Data-driven Organization Design provides a practical framework for HR and organization design practitioners to build a baseline of data, set objectives, carry out fixed and dynamic process design, map competencies, and right-size the organization so everyone performs to their potential and organizations have a hope of getting and sustaining a competitive edge. Data-driven Organization Design shows how to collect the right data on organizations, present it meaningfully and ask the right questions of it to help complex, fluid organizations constantly evolve and meet moving objectives. Through the use of case studies, practical tips, and sample exercises, it explains in detail how to use data and analytics to connect all the elements of the system so you can design an environment for people to perform, an organization which has the right people, in the right place, doing the right things, at the right time. Whether you are looking to implement a long-term transformation, large redesign, or a one-off small scale project, Data-driven Organization Design will guide you through making the most of organizational data and analytics to drive business performance.

Table of Contents 1 Introduction 1.1 Data Driven Organization Design 1.2 Challenges 1.3 Foundations and core concepts 2 Macro Design 2.1 Introduction 2.2 Strategy articulation and design criteria 2.3 Structural options and business case 3 Micro Design 3.1 Introduction 3.2 The data goldmine 3.3 Objectives management 3.4 Fixed process design 3.5 Dynamic process design 3.6 Competency management 3.7 Rightsizing 4 Making it Real 4.1 Introduction 4.2 Common traps 4.3 HOWWIP 4.4 Implementation

160

Human Resources, Organizational Development and Coaching

4.5 Workforce planning 4.6 Talent management, succession development and planning 4.7 Organizational getting things done 4.8 Sustaining the edge


This book

<< Shows how to take a data-

driven approach to recruitment, engagement, safety, wellbeing, training and performance management

<< Helps HR professionals analyze the vast amount of company data to gain tangible organizational insights and drive performance << Includes guidance on how

to ensure data collection is transparent and that employees understand what information is being collected and why

Data-Driven HR How to Use Analytics and Metrics to Drive Performance Edition 1 Date: Price:

03/04/2018 £29.99

ISBN Paperback: e-book:

9780749482466 9780749482473

Extent: Dimensions: Subject:

Description Traditionally seen as a purely people function unconcerned with numbers, HR is now uniquely placed to use company data to drive performance, both of the people in the organization and the organization as a whole. Data-driven HR is a practical guide which enables HR professionals to leverage the value of the vast amount of data available at their fingertips. Covering how to identify the most useful sources of data, collect information in a transparent way that is in line with data protection requirements and turn this data into tangible insights, this book marks a turning point for the HR profession. Covering all the key elements of HR including recruitment, employee engagement, performance management, wellbeing and training, Data-driven HR examines the ways data can contribute to organizational success by, among other things, optimizing processes, driving performance and improving HR decision making. Packed with case studies and reallife examples, this is essential reading for all HR professionals looking to make a measurable difference in their organizations.

256 234x156 Human Resources Management

Author Information Bernard Marr is a big data guru and bestselling author. A strategic performance consultant, he has advised many of the world’s best-known organizations including Accenture, Barclays, BP, DHL, Fujitsu, Gartner, HSBC, Mars, Microsoft, Oracle, The Home Office, NHS, Orange, Tetley, T-Mobile, Toyota, Royal Air Force, SAP and Shell on their business and data strategies. A frequent keynote speaker, he also writes on the topic of data and analytics for various publications including Forbes, the Huffington Post and LinkedIn Pulse.

Table of Contents 1 1.1 1.2 2 2.1

Introducing Data-Driven HR What is Data-Driven HR? The Evolution of Data-Driven HR Laying the Foundations for Data-Driven HR Making a Business Case for More Data-Driven HR 2.2 The Data Explosion – Identifying Key Sources of HR Data 2.3 Data-Driven HR Tools – Turning Data into Insights With HR Analytics 2.4 Potential Pitfalls – Data Protection, Security, Privacy and Transparency 3 Data-Driven HR in Practice 3.1 Recruitment 3.2 Employee Engagement 3.3 Employee Safety and Wellbeing 3.4 Training and Development 3.5 Performance Management 3.6 The Future of Data-Driven HR

Human Resources, Organizational Development and Coaching

161


The Psychology of Work

This book

<< Contains narratives from

experienced professionals from around the world offering insights into real-world working practices in organisations including BBC, Santander, IBM and Qantas

Insights into Successful Working Practices Edition 1

<< Is based on extensive research with

Date: Price:

03/03/2015 £24.99

ISBN Paperback: e-book:

9780749468347 9780749468354

Extent: Dimensions: Subject:

university students about their attitudes to future employment and how well prepared for the work place they feel

<< Integrates psychological theory

with personal narrative to bring the theory to life and to propose new ways of thinking about work

208 234x156 Human Resources Management

Author Information

Description

Chantal Gautier is a London-based academic, Chartered Psychologist and eclectic professional with consultancy skills, specializing in a wide range of academic and business activities. Her successful track record in Higher Education warranted the Teaching Fellow Award for Excellence in Teaching and Learning. Chantal continues to apply her academic knowledge and teaching skills in a range of settings. Her breadth of experience and specialist insight into leadership, team development, employee engagement, Change Management and customer services, has led to contributions in both public and private sectors, as well as internationally.

The Psychology of Work integrates psychological theory with personal narrative from global industry leaders, as well as those entering the workforce, to offer tangible insights into the real world of work. It is ideal for students, professionals and anyone with an interest in how successful organizations operate. It charts the development of the field of organizational psychology and provides the key theoretical frameworks. Crucially, it explores how these can be utilised to enhance organizational culture, and why this is so relevant and important in the modern workplace. Through the inclusion of interviews with students, The Psychology of Work reveals what the future workforce expect of the organizations that they are going in to and encourages students reading the book to reflect on what kind of leaders they would like to be. The book is also a valuable resource to support professionals and practitioners, highlighting current working practices and the need for change, offering practical guidance on how to bring the ‘humane’ back into organizational life.

Table of Contents 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

162

Human Resources, Organizational Development and Coaching

Introduction Recruitment and selection Employability Teams Barriers and intricacies Organizational culture Leadership Motivation and engagement


This book

<< Explores over 40 of the most

pervasive myths about the workplace – from the serious to the silly – and debunks them through compelling research

<< Overturns stereotype and misinformation to help you become a better manager in the modern workplace << Includes fascinating real life

examples from organizations and industries around the world

Myths of Work The Stereotypes and Assumptions Holding Your Organization Back Edition 1

Series: Date: Price:

Business Myths 03/10/2017 £14.99

ISBN Paperback: e-book:

9780749481285 9780749481292

Extent: Dimensions: Subject:

240 234x156 Human Resources Management

Description

Author Information

– Buying a table tennis table will make your staff happier

Adrian Furnham is Professor of Psychology at UCL and Adjunct Professor of Management at the Norwegian School of Management. He has written over 1000 scientific papers and 70 books and is among the most well-known psychologists in the world. Adrian is also a newspaper columnist at The Sunday Times. He has written regularly for The Financial Times, The Daily Telegraph and is a contributor to stations including the BBC, CNN, and ITV.

– Working 8 hours a day, 5 days a week, will result in the most productivity – Paying higher salaries will always result in higher motivation ...but will it really? There are a staggering number of myths, stereotypes and out-of-date rules that abound in the workplace. This can make it feel impossible to truly know how to get the most out of your career, your team and your organization. In Myths of Work, Adrian Furnham takes an entertaining and evidence-based look at the most pervasive myths about our working lives, from the serious to the ridiculous, to give you the insight you need to become a better manager in the modern workplace. Fascinating real life case studies from organizations around the world display the myths (and how to overcome them) in practice. Myths of Work takes the most up-to-date academic research in business and psychology and combines it with practical insights, a lively writing style and a handy dip-in-and-out structure to form your ultimate guide to becoming a better enlightened manager.

Ian MacRae is Director of High Potential, an organizational consultancy providing customised psychological tests and reports for improving performance, predicting potential and developing people.

Table of Contents 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18

Working from Home/Flexible Working Reduces Productivity Open Plan Offices are Always the Best Option Ping Pong Tables Will Increase Staff Happiness Pay Should Always Be Kept Confidential Employees Shouldn’t Be Allowed to Access Social Media at Work Creating a Google-Style Office Environment Will Make Your Staff More Innovative Music Whilst Working is Distracting Staff Should Work 8 Hour, Monday to Friday, Workdays The Best Way to Motivate Employees is to Pay Them More All Training is Beneficial Workplace Romances are Inappropriate Surveillance at Work Makes Sense High Achievers Always Make Great Managers Annual Appraisals are the Best Way to Measure Performance Someone With a Degree Will Perform Better at Work than Someone Without The Senior Leadership Team Should Have Separate Offices Consultants Always Deliver Benefits There Should Be a Limit to How Much Holiday Employees Can Take

19 ‘Fit’ is the Most Important Thing to Look for When Hiring 20 Employees Who Work the Longest Hours are Your Most Valuable People 21 HR is Just ‘Hiring and Firing’ 22 Millennials Need a Different Working Culture to Previous Generations 23 The Best People Development Programmes are the Most Expensive 24 HR is Just a Business Cost and Not a Revenue Generator

Human Resources, Organizational Development and Coaching

163


Research Methods in Human Resource Management

This book

<< Breaks down a typical HRM project

so students and others conducting research can understand research methods and develop the necessary skills

Investigating a Business Issue Edition 3

attention to methodology issues, more real-life examples, a discussion of ethics in line with current research and practice, ‘Review and Reflect’ sections at the end of each chapter to apply learning to personal experience and professional development, multiple-choice questions for students to track their learning and a glossary of terms

Imprint: Date: Price:

CIPD 24/04/2013 £46.99

ISBN Paperback: e-book:

9781843983088 9781843983545

Extent: Dimensions: Subject:

<< New to this edition: increased

<< Online resources: instructor’s manual, lecture slides and annotated web links

456 246x189 Human Resources Management

Author Information

Description

Dr. Valerie Anderson, Chartered MCIPD, is Principal Lecturer in HRM at Portsmouth University Business School, UK. She gained extensive HRM and HRD management and consultancy experience in a range of different public and private sector organisations before moving to a career in higher education. Valerie’s main teaching activities relate to research methods, leadership and management, and learning, training and development. Her research interests are focused on learning and development in work organisations. She was the lead researcher for two CIPD research projects: The Value of Learning (2007) and Coaching at the Sharp End (2009).

Fully mapped to the CIPD advanced-level module on Investigating a Business Issue from an HR Perspective, Research Methods in Human Resource Management is a key resource for anyone undertaking a research report. It covers the planning and execution of HRM research projects, from investigating and researching HR issues to designing and implementing research and then evaluating and reviewing the results. Filled with international examples to provide a global perspective, this fully updated 3rd edition of Research Methods in Human Resource Management balances theoretical frameworks and practical guidance. It includes increased attention to methodology issues, more real-life examples and a discussion of ethics in line with current research and practice. ‘Review and Reflect’ sections at the end of each chapter help apply learning to personal experience and professional development, and multiple-choice questions and a glossary of terms help students understand the key concepts. Online supporting resources include an instructor’s manual, lecture slides and annotated web links.

Table of Contents 1 1.1 2 2.1 2.2

Introduction Investigating and Researching HR Issues Plan and Design the Research First Stages Towards an HR Project Finding and Reviewing HR Literature and Information Sources 2.3 Ethics, Professionalism and HR Research 2.4 Planning the Research Process 3 Implement Your Research 3.1 Finding and Using Documents and Organisational Evidence 3.2 Collecting and Recording Qualitative Data 3.3 Analysing Qualitative Data 3.4 Collecting and Recording Quantitative Data 3.5 Analysing Quantitative Data 4 Evaluate and Review 4.1 Writing Up Your Project and Making Recommendations 4.2 Developing Effective Links Between Research and Practice

164

Human Resources, Organizational Development and Coaching


This book

<< Fully examines the functional

elements of International HRM including recruitment and selection, rewards and benefits, performance management, training and development, employment relations and job design

<< Includes global case studies from a range of organizations such as KPMG, McDonald’s, ColgatePalmolive, IKEA, Unilever, Tesco and Volkswagen

<< Online resources: lecture slides

for each chapter, self-test multiplechoice questions for students, discussion questions and further reading

International Human Resource Management A Case Study Approach Edition 1

On ine resources

Date: Price:

03/11/2017 £34.99

ISBN Paperback: e-book:

9780749480981 9780749480998

Extent: Dimensions: Subject:

288 234x156 International Human Resource Management

Description

Author Information

In the face of globalization, multinational companies have become the norm, rather than the exception. HR professionals now need to manage across borders, cultures and time zones, meaning that a complete understanding of the theory and practice of International Human Resource Management (HRM) is essential. International Human Resource Management is an introduction for all students studying International HRM at the Masters level. It covers everything from the cultural and institutional contexts, international employment law and the role of International Framework Agreements to recruitment and selection, training and development, performance management, reward and benefits, job design and other functional areas of International HRM.

Daniel Wintersberger is a teaching fellow at Birmingham Business School in the UK, specializing in International Human Resource Management. He currently teaches on the MBA (HRM), MSc in Human Resource Management and the BSc in Business Management. Previously, Daniel lectured at Cardiff University Business School and Swansea School of Management. He has conducted research for the International Transport Workers’ Federation (ITF) and worked with the British Airline Pilots’ Association (BALPA). His professional and research experience spans Central and Eastern Europe, China, India and Brazil.

With numerous global case studies from companies such as KPMG, McDonald’s, Unilever, IKEA and Volkswagen, International Human Resource Management goes beyond the theory to fully explore how International HRM works in practice. It is an indispensable textbook to prepare students for successful careers in human resources. Online supporting resources include lecture slides for every chapter, self-test exercises for students, discussion questions and further reading.

Table of Contents 1 1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4 1.5

The Context of International HRM Introduction and Background to IHRM The Cultural Context The Institutional Context HRM in the Multinational Enterprise International Employment Law and Labour Standards 2 The Functional Areas of International HRM 2.1 International Staffing, Recruitment, Selection and Employer Branding 2.2 International Reward / Compensation & Benefits 2.3 International Performance Management 2.4 International Training and Development 2.5 International Employment Relations 2.6 Work Organisation / Job Design 2.7 Change or Continuance in National Systems of HRM and Employment Relations? 2.8 Concluding case studies

Human Resources, Organizational Development and Coaching

165


International Human Resource Management

This book

<< Explores cross-cultural HRM,

comparative HRM and international HRM in detail

<< New to this edition: extended Edition 4

Imprint: Date: Price:

CIPD 15/01/2016 £45.99

ISBN Paperback: e-book:

9781843983750 9781843984139

Extent: Dimensions: Subject:

coverage of cross-cultural management, a broader scope of countries and key topics such as global talent management, global leadership, global knowledge management, and differing national contexts

<< Online resources: instructor’s manual, lecture slides and additional case studies

504 246x189 International Human Resource Management

Author Information

Description

Chris Brewster is a professor of International HRM at Henley Business School, UK.

International Human Resource Management is a critically engaging and student friendly textbook for International HRM modules at all levels. Providing wide international coverage and incorporating a global strategy perspective, it offers a particular focus on cross-cultural, comparative and strategic HRM issues, with a strong emphasis on culture and its impact on organisational behaviour and HRM.

Elizabeth Houldsworth is an associate professor of HRM at Henley Business School, UK. Paul Sparrow is the director of the Centre for Performance-Led HR and professor of International HRM at Lancaster University Management School, UK. Guy Vernon is an associate professor of Human Resource Management at Southampton University, UK.

This fully updated 4th edition of International Human Resource Management includes extended coverage of cross-cultural management, a broader scope of countries and key topics such as global talent management, global leadership, global knowledge management, and differing national contexts. Filled with geographically diverse examples and case studies, and covering topics from culture and reward systems to managing expatriate assignment and diversity in international forms of working, it is an ideal textbook for all students of international HRM as well as HRM specialists and practicing managers. Online supporting resources include an instructor’s manual, lecture slides and additional case studies.

Table of Contents 1 2

International HRM – An Introduction Cross-Cultural Human Resource Management 2.1 Differing National Contexts 2.2 The Impact of National Culture 2.3 Culture and Organisation Life 3 Comparative Human Resource Management 3.1 Employee Relations and Collective Communication 3.2 The Organisation of Work 3.3 Flexibility and Work Life Balance 3.4 Recruitment and Selection 3.5 Performance Management 3.6 Rewards 3.7 Training and Development 3.8 Global HRM Departments 4 International Human Resource Management 4.1 International HRM – Theory and Practice 4.2 Managing Expatriate Assignments 4.3 Managing Diversity in International Forms of Working 4.4 Integrating Global HRM Practices 4.5 Globalising HRM

166

Human Resources, Organizational Development and Coaching


This book

<< Includes contributions from experts on HR in specific countries and regions

<< Ideal for students studying

International Human Resource Management for the first time or those studying in their second language

<< Online resources: instructor’s

manual, lecture slides, case studies and a bonus chapter on new directions in International HRM as well as annotated web links and self-test questions for students

International Human Resource Management A Cross-cultural and Comparative Approach Edition 1

Imprint: Date: Price:

CIPD 26/04/2013 £46.99

ISBN Paperback: e-book:

9781843983002 9781843983538

Extent: Dimensions: Subject:

440 246x189 International Human Resource Management

Description

Author Information

International Human Resource Management is an essential book for all students and HR professionals looking to really understand international HRM. Covering the context of International HRM, HRM and National Culture, HRM in different regions and international HRM policies, this book provides thorough discussion and comprehensive consideration of all elements of international HRM.

Paul Iles is Professor of Leadership and HRM at Glasgow School for Business and Society, Glasgow Caledonian University, UK.

Full of contributions from experts in specific regions including North America, the Middle East and North Africa, India, Russia and China, this book will provide readers with a thorough understanding of HRM around the world. With crucial coverage of international HRM issues including cross-cultural leadership, business ethics, global talent supply and management as well as performance management of international staff, International Human Resource Management is essential reading for all those working or looking to work in HR around the world, particularly those looking to work in multinational companies. Fully supported by online resources including lecture slides, an instructor’s manual, additional case studies and a bonus chapter on issues and new directions in International Human Resource Management as well as annotated web links and self-test questions for students.

Dr. Crystal Ling Zhang is Senior Lecturer in Human Resource Management and Organisational Behaviour at Leeds Business School, Leeds Metropolitan University, UK.

Table of Contents 1 Introduction and Context 1.1 International HRM, National Differences and the Transfer of HRM (Paul Iles) 1.2 National Difference, Culture and IHRM (Crystal Zhang and Paul Iles) 1.3 Globalisation and IHRM Policies at the Enterprise Level (Paul Iles) 2 HRM and National Culture 2.1 Cross-Cultural Learning – Theories and Principles (Crystal Zhang and Paul Iles) 2.2 Cross-Cultural and Global Leadership, Leadership Development and IHRM (Crystal Zhang and Paul Iles) 2.3 Ethics, Culture and Corporate Social Responsibility (Paul Iles) 2.4 IHRM, Culture and Knowledge Flows in International Alliances, Joint Ventures, Mergers and Acquisitions (Paul Iles) 3 HRM in Different Regions 3.1 HRM in North America and Western Europe – The emergence of a ‘Western’ HRM model? (Paul Iles) 3.2 HRM in Russia and Central and Eastern Europe (Paul Iles)

3.3 HRM in the Middle East and North Africa (Paul Iles & Niki Kyriakidou) 3.4 HRM in Sub-Saharan Africa (Paul Iles) 3.5 HRM in Latin America (Paul Iles) 3.6 HRM in India (Crystal Zhang, Shakiya Nisa & Paul Iles) 3.7 HRM in China (Paul Iles & Xiaoxian Zhu) 4 International HRM Policies in IES 4.1 Employee Resourcing – Staffing, Recruitment and Selection in International Contexts (Paul Iles and Tingting Jiang) 4.2 Cross-Cultural Training and International HRD (Crystal Zhang & Paul Iles) 4.3 Global Talent Management (Paul Iles, Xiaoxian Zhu) 4.4 Managing the Performance of International Staff (Paul Iles) 4.5 Global Reward Management, Organisational Benefits and Employer Branding (Paul Iles and Tingting Jiang) 4.6 Employment Relations and Employee Voice in a Global Context (Paul Iles)

Human Resources, Organizational Development and Coaching

167


International Human Resource Development

This book

<< Substantiates the value of learning and development and shows you how to get the most out of investing in your workforce

Learning, Education and Training for Individuals and Organizations

<< Helps you identify learning needs

Edition 3

<< Demonstrates the relationship

Date: Price:

03/10/2012 £39.99

ISBN Paperback: e-book:

9780749461065 9780749461072

Extent: Dimensions: Subject:

and evaluate whether your training programmes have been effective between HRD and HRM and why this is important in increasing the performance of your organization as a whole

536 240x170 International Human Resource Management

Author Information

Description

John P Wilson is a researcher and consultant with 40 years’ experience in education and training, working with a range of international organizations. He currently teaches at the University of Oxford and the University of Sheffield. He is also Director of the EU Commission project Call Centre Training and Knowledge Transfer. He is the author of The Call Centre Training Handbook and Experiential Learning (both also published by Kogan Page).

International Human Resource Development provides thought-provoking questions and stimulating answers to key issues in human resource development today, putting HRD in its strategic organizational context and examining in depth the process of learning from different perspectives. This third edition provides a thorough exploration of international human resource development, and has been completely updated and revised with a variety of case studies and contributions from a range of HR development experts, making it the most topical book in this field. It also addresses the increasingly important area of knowledge management, incorporating learning and development.

Table of Contents 1 1.1 1.2 1.3 2 2.1 2.2 3 3.1 3.2 3.3 3.4

3.5

3.6

168

Human Resources, Organizational Development and Coaching

4 4.1

International human resource development and learning International human resource development – John P Wilson Strategic human resource development – Thomas N Garavan and Ronan Carbery What is learning? – John P Wilson Organizational learning Change management and organization development – John P Wilson Knowledge management – Eduardo Tomé National and international learning, education, training and human resource development National systems of education – John P Wilson UK vocational education and training – John P Wilson European vocational education and training – Martin Mulder National human resource development strategies: comparing Brazil, Russia, India and China – Alexandre Ardichvili, Elena K Zavyalova and Vera N Minina International development: policy learning as an approach to VET reform in transition and development countries – Sören Nielsen and Madlen Serban Capacity development and human resource development – Dalia Al-Zendi and John P Wilson The training cycle Identification of learning needs

4.2 The identification of learning needs – Richard Palmer, Allan Claudius Queiroz Barbosa, Leandro Pinheiro Cintra, Junia Marcal Rodrigues and Juliana Barbosa e Oliveira 5 IDesign 5.1 Designing learning events – David Simmonds 5.2 Working in multicultural and multilingual environments: HRD professionals as learning and change agents in the global workplace – Maria Cseh and Beatriz Coningham 6 IDelivery 6.1 Delivering training – John Kirkham and Jacqueline Pattison 6.2 Informal, non-formal and work-based methods of learning – Jacqueline Pattison, John Kirkham and Mariana Gabriela Hudrea 6.3 Coaching and mentoring – Stephanie T Sturges 7 Evaluation 7.1 Assessment and evaluation – Tanuja Agarwala 8 Managing HRD 8.1 Leadership and management development – Ronan Carbery and Thomas N Garavan 8.2 Managing human resource development functions and services – Barney Erasmus and Pieter Loedolff 8.3 HRD practice and research: investigating business issues through applied social science research – K Peter Kuchinke 8.4 HRD and consultancy – Kiran Trehan and Clare Rigg 8.5 Learning spaces that change people and organizations – Colin Beard and Ilfryn Price 8.6 HRD and business ethics – Alexandre Ardichvili and Douglas Jondle


This book

<< Explores the key concepts of

leadership, management and people development as it relates to the HR function

<< Fully aligns with the Chartered

Institute of Personnel and Development (CIPD) ‘Leading, Managing and Developing People’ and ‘Developing Skills for Business Leadership’ modules

<< Online resources: lecture slides,

an instructor’s manual, a student’s manual and a literature review

Armstrong’s Handbook of Management and Leadership for HR Developing Effective People Skills for Better Leadership and Management Edition 4

Date: Price:

03/11/2016 £34.99

ISBN Paperback: e-book:

9780749478155 9780749478162

Extent: Dimensions: Subject:

472 234x156 Leadership

Description

Author Information

To make an effective contribution, HR specialists have to be good at management, leadership and developing both themselves and others. They also need to be aware of the management and business considerations that affect their work. Armstrong’s Handbook of Management and Leadership for HR provides guidance on the processes of management and leadership with particular reference to what HR managers and aspiring managers need to know and do to make a difference.

Michael Armstrong is a former chief examiner of the Chartered Institute of Personnel and Development (CIPD), managing partner of E-Reward and an independent management consultant. He has spent 25 years as an HR practitioner, including 12 as HR director. He has sold over 500,000 books on the subject of human resource management and is the author of numerous bestselling HR books by Kogan Page.

Written by renowned human resources expert and bestselling author Michael Armstrong, Armstrong’s Handbook of Management and Leadership for HR covers in one volume the ‘Leading, Managing and Developing People’ and ‘Developing Skills for Business Leadership’ Chartered Institute of Personnel and Development (CIPD) modules. It includes numerous practical features such as case studies, practitioner interviews, exercises and clear learning objectives to aid learning. This is the essential book for HR students and professionals looking to broaden their skills and understanding relating to management and leadership. Online supporting resources include lecture slides, an instructor’s manual, a student’s manual and a literature review.

Table of Contents 1

Leading, managing and developing people fundamentals 1.1 Leadership 1.2 Management 1.3 Developing people 2 Human resource management and learning and development 2.1 The essence of human resource management 2.2 The practice of HRM 2.3 The practice of learning and development 2.4 The contribution of HRM and L&D in different types of organizations 2.5 The professional and ethical approach to HRM and L&D 3 People management processes 4 Motivation 4.1 Commitment 4.2 Employee engagement 4.3 Change management 4.4 Flexible working 4.5 Managing diversity and inclusion 5 Leadership, management and learning and development skills 5.1 Leadership skills 5.2 Management skills

5.3 People management skills 5.4 Learning and development skills 5.5 Managing interpersonal relationships at work 5.6 Managing oneself 5.7 Problem solving and decision making 5.8 Analytical, critical and consultancy skills 5.9 Information handling skills 5.10 Business and financial skills 5.11 Postgraduate study skills

Human Resources, Organizational Development 169 and Coaching


Leading, Managing and Developing People Edition 5

This book

<< Provides comprehensive coverage

of key issues including Leadership Development; Professionalism; Motivation at Work, Employee Engagement and Retention

<< New to this edition: insights

on cutting-edge issues and debates in the field including lean management as well as additional international case studies and increased theoretical links between topics

CIPD 15/04/2016 ÂŁ45.99

Imprint: Date: Price: ISBN Paperback: e-book:

9781843984122 9781843984375

Extent: Dimensions: Subject:

368 246x189 Leadership

<< Online resources: lecturer guide,

PowerPoint slides, example essay questions as well as annotated web links, a glossary and additional case studies for students

Author Information

Description

Gary Rees is Head of the Organisation Studies and Human Resource Management at Portsmouth Business School, UK

Leading, Managing and Developing People is critical reading for all those studying the CIPD Advanced module in Leading, Managing and Developing People as well as all HR and L&D practitioners. It provides extensive coverage of the aims, objectives and contribution of HRM such as the scope and nature of human resources, HRâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s role when organisations grow and how to ensure professionalism and ethical behaviour when managing people. This book also includes discussion of major contemporary themes in leading, managing and developing people including leadership development, flexibility, agile working and the psychological contract. This ensures that readers are fully prepared to lead, manage and develop staff in the new world of work.

Ray French was previously Principal Lecturer in Organisational Behaviour at Portsmouth Business School, UK

With rigorous academic underpinning and clear theoretical exploration, Leading, Managing and Developing People also includes practical advice on key activities including recruitment, job design, performance management, motivation and reward. Supported by online resources including lecturer guides, PowerPoint slides, international case studies, example essay questions and annotated web links, this is an indispensable guide for both students and practitioners.

Table of Contents 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

170

Human Resources, Organizational Development and Coaching

13

Introduction (Gary Rees and Ray French) The Scope and Nature of Human Resource Management and Human Resource Development (Gary Rees) HRM Contributions in Different Settings (Charlotte Rayner and Liza Howe-Walsh) Professionalism and Ethics in Managing People (Matthew Anderson and Charlotte Rayner) Leadership and Leader Development (Wenjin Dai & Alex Tymon) Managing Change (Gary Rees and David Hall) Flexibility and the Psychological Contract (Ray French) Organisational and Job Design (Ray French) Recruitment and Selection (Sally Rumbles and Ray French) Developing Employees (Alex Tymon and Margaret Mackay) Managing the Employment Relationship (Sally Rumbles and Peter Scott) Performance Management, Motivation and Reward (Gary Rees and Alex Tymon) Summary Themes and Future Trends (Ray French and Gary Rees)


<< Focuses on three core areas

Developing Skills for Business Leadership

<< New to this edition: new chapter

Edition 2

This book for successful professional development and practice: managing yourself and others, transferable managerial skills and postgraduate study skills on reflecting and coaching, updated references to the CIPD’s HR Profession Map, IT skills integrated into each chapter, more coverage of stress, health and wellbeing and enhanced international dimension throughout the text

<< Online resources: instructor’s

manual, lecture slides, additional case studies, and sample assignments, checklists and exam guides lecturers can use in their teaching

Imprint: Date: Price:

CIPD 17/02/2014 £46.99

ISBN Paperback: e-book:

9781843983163 9781843983651

Extent: Dimensions: Subject:

568 246x189 Leadership

Description

Author Information

Mapped to the CIPD postgraduate module of the same name, Developing Skills for Business Leadership focuses on three core areas for successful professional development and practice: managing yourself and others, transferable managerial skills and postgraduate study skills. Each skill is covered both conceptually and practically by a subject area expert to help all readers analyse and critically evaluate, manage more effectively, make sound and justifiable decisions and lead and influence others.

Gillian Watson is a principal lecturer in the Faculty of Business and Law at the University of Sunderland, UK, responsible for international development and partnerships. She has undertaken additional senior roles in the faculty such as HRM team leader and chair of the Applied Management, FdA and HND board.

Covering key concepts such as developing your professional identity, effective management of interpersonal relationships at work, people management and interpreting financial information, this fully updated 2nd edition of Developing Skills for Business Leadership is ideal for all postgraduate business students taking a module in professional development, career development or management skills. Integrating IT skills into each chapter, it includes a new chapter on reflecting and coaching, updated references to the CIPD’s HR Profession Map, additional coverage of stress, health and wellbeing and an enhanced international dimension throughout the text. Online supporting resources include an instructor’s manual and lecture slides as well as additional case studies, and sample assignments, checklists and exam guides lecturers can use in their teaching.

Stefanie Reissner is a lecturer at Newcastle University Business School, UK. She is currently degree programme director for a dual Masters in conjunction with Rijksuniversiteit Groningen in the Netherlands. She is a fellow of the Higher Education Academy and an associate academic member of CIPD.

Table of Contents 1

Skills for Continuing Professional Development and Practice (Dr. Stefanie C. Reissner and Gillian Watson) 2 Essential Skills for Postgraduate Study and Beyond (Dr. Stefanie C. Reissner) 3 Practical Aspects of Postgraduate Study Skills (Dr. Stefanie C. Reissner) 4 Concepts of Self and Self-Management Skills (Kevin Gallagher) 5 Developing Your Professional Identity (Dr. Stefanie C. Reissner) 6 Skills for Learning, Training and Development (Gillian Watson) 7 Coaching, Professional Development and Practice (Dr. Stefanie C. Reissner) 8 Effective Team-Building and Communication (Gillian Watson) 9 Negotiation and the Management of Interpersonal Relationships at Work (Dr. Lesley Mearns) 10 Constructive Performance Management (Dr. Lesley Mearns) 11 Leadership and Team Dynamics (Gillian Watson)

12 Leading Change and Development in Organisations (Dr. Stefanie C. Reissner) 13 Introduction to Quantitative Data Analysis (Dr. Andrew Simpson) 14 Interpreting Financial Information (Mike Ashwell) 15 Managing Financial Resources (Mike Ashwell) 16 Effective Decision-Making and Problem-Solving (Gillian Watson) 17 Applying Skills for Business Leadership (Dr. Stefanie C. Reissner and Gillian Watson) 18 Consolidating Leadership Skills: Project Management and Your Development (Kevin Gallagher and Gillian Watson)

Human Resources, Organizational Development and Coaching

171


Leadership and Management Development

This book

<< Features multiple perspectives

alongside analysis and critique to help paint a full picture of the subject

<< New to this edition: increased Edition 5

coverage of diversity, ecology, ethics and SMEs along with at least two case studies per chapter to support academic and critical context

Imprint: Date: Price:

CIPD 20/04/2010 ÂŁ44.99

ISBN Paperback: e-book:

9781843982449 9781843983262

Extent: Dimensions: Subject:

424 246x189 Leadership

<< Online resources: instructorâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s manual and lecture slides

Author Information

Description

Alan Mumford has published numerous articles and books and is a leading figure in the management development field.

How do you measure managers and leaders? How do you assess their development needs? Leadership and Management Development covers these and other key topics that form the requirements for the CIPD module of the same name. Retitled and revised to focus on leadership as well as management, the book includes multiple perspectives from those who have either experienced or provided leadership and management development alongside analysis and critique to help paint a full picture of the subject. Students will learn to analyse the concepts of leadership and management, identify leadership and management development needs and formulate and implement strategies and interventions.

Jeff Gold is a principal lecturer in Organisation Learning at Leeds Business School, Leeds Metropolitan University, UK. Richard Thorpe is a professor of Management Development and deputy director of the Keyworth Institute at Leeds University Business School, University of Leeds, UK.

This fully updated 5th edition of Leadership and Management Development features increased coverage of diversity, ecology, ethics and SMEs. At least two case studies per chapter support academic and critical context, and the book takes a more international perspective by considering global leaders and presenting international examples. It is ideal for students studying leadership and management development as part of a CIPD qualification or as part of a general business or HR degree. Online supporting resources include an instructorâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s manual and lecture slides.

Table of Contents 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13

172

Human Resources, Organizational Development and Coaching

Leaders and Managers, Leadership and Management Development Strategic Leadership and Management Development Measuring Leaders and Managers Assessing Development Needs Leaders, Managers and Learning Activities for the Development of Leaders and Managers Combining Work and Learning Evaluating Leadership and Management Development Leadership and Management Development and Social Capital The Future Supply of Leaders and Managers Diversity and Ecology Leadership and Management Development in Small and Medium-Sized Organisations Futures Learning for Leaders and Managers


This book

<< Explains the distinction between leadership and management

<< Includes different approaches to

developing leaders and managers and the role of the learning and development function in this

<< Provides guidance on how to

ensure the ownership and success of leadership and management development programmes

Developing Leadership and Management Skills Edition 1

Imprint: Date: Price:

CIPD 03/07/2017 ÂŁ16.99

ISBN e-book:

9781843984559

Extent: Format: Subject:

96 ePub Leadership

Description

Author Information

Developing Leadership and Management Skills is essential reading for anyone studying the Level 5 CIPD L&D module of the same name as well as all learning and development professionals looking to develop the skills of leaders and managers in their organisation. With a thorough grounding in scientific management, leadership theories and the similarities and differences between leaders and managers, reader will fully understand the distinction between the two roles. There is also comprehensive coverage of the role of L&D in developing leaders and managers including designing learning interventions, using e-learning and blending learning, talent development, succession planning and employee engagement.

Jeff Gold is a principal lecturer in Organisation Learning at Leeds Business School, Leeds Metropolitan University, UK. Lisa Anderson is Associate Head (Postgraduate Programmes) at the University of Liverpool Management School.

Developing Leadership and Management Skills also includes guidance on how L&D professionals can ensure ownership and success of leadership and management development programmes. This includes indicators of success, individualised interventions and how to demonstrate and communicate achievement of success ensuring that L&D professionals have all the tools they need to effectively develop leaders and managers in their organisation.

Table of Contents Introduction The Distinction Between Leadership and Management Activity 1.1 Scientific Management 1.2 Human Relations School 1.3 Leadership Theories 1.4 Practices of Managers and Leaders 1.5 Similarities and Differences 2 Different Approaches to Developing Leaders and Managers, and the Role of the Learning and Development Function 2.1 What is Leadership and Management Development? 2.2 Leadership and Management Competencies 2.3 The Learning and Development Role for LMD 2.4 Designing Learning Interventions 2.5 E-Learning and Blended Learning 2.6 Talent Management and Succession Planning 2.7 Employee Engagement; Evaluation 1

3 3.1 3.2 3.3 3.4 3.5 4

Ensuring Ownership and Success of Leadership and Management Development Programmes Introduction Indicators of Success Ensuring Value and Success from LMD Individulaised Interventions Demonstrating and Communicating Achievement of Success Indicators References

Human Resources, Organizational Development and Coaching

173


Learning and Development Practice in the Workplace Edition 3

<< Shows how to effectively design,

deliver, assess and evaluate learning and development activities in the workplace

<< New to this edition:

coverage of all new topics in the updated CIPD L&D qualification as well as increased discussion of social media and a broader international perspective on the topic

Imprint: Date: Price:

CIPD 15/05/2016 ÂŁ46.99

ISBN Paperback: e-book:

9781843984085 9781843984474

Extent: Dimensions: Subject:

This book

<< Online resources: lecturer guides,

PowerPoint slides, annotated web links (including podcasts) as well as additional activities and self-test questions for students

328 246x189 Learning and Development

Author Information

Description

Kathy Beevers, Chartered FCIPD, is a qualified trainer, coach and verifier based in the UK. She runs a training and qualifications consultancy called Lightbulb Learning Ltd.

Learning and Development Practice in the Workplace is the definitive textbook for anyone studying the updated CIPD Foundation level Learning and Development (L&D) qualifications and is also ideal introductory reading for those at intermediate level. Part One provides practical guidance for L&D practitioners and Part Two provides essential coverage of all the underlying theories and models giving readers access to everything they need to excel as an L&D professional.

Andrew Rea, Affiliate MCIPD, is trainer, coach and facilitator based in the UK with a background in management.

Learning and Development Practice in the Workplace covers all aspects of L&D practice in an organisation including how to identify L&D needs, how to design, deliver and evaluate learning and development activities as well as how to organise L&D events. There is also practical guidance on using technology to facilitate learning, how to enhance learner engagement and how to support collective and social learning. With a broader international perspective, extended coverage of social media and further critical exploration of learning models this new edition is an indispensable guide for students and practitioners alike.

Table of Contents 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

174

Human Resources, Organizational Development and Coaching

Becoming an Effective Learning and Development Practitioner Learning and Development and the Organisation Identifying Learning and Development Needs Designing Learning and Development Activities Delivering Learning and Development Activities Evaluating Learning and Development Activities Using Technology to Facilitate Learning Enhancing Learner Engagement Supporting Collective and Social Learning Supporting Individual Learning through Coaching and Mentoring Assessing Learning and Development Organising Learning and Development Events


This book

<< Is written and edited by experts

with a wealth of experience in teaching, writing and examining in the field of Learning and Development

<< Has an easy to navigate structure

that takes students step-by-step through developing the knowledge and skills required for professional practice, the context of learning and development and fully utilising data in order to build a business case for its value within an organisation

<< Online resources: multiple-choice questions for self-assessment, web links, extra case studies and a glossary of key terms, as well as lecturer slides, guides and text banks

Studying Learning and Development Context, Practice and Measurement Edition 1

Imprint: Date: Price:

CIPD 30/01/2017 £46.99

ISBN Paperback: e-book:

9781843984146 9781843984603

Extent: Dimensions: Subject:

248 246x189 Learning and Development

Description

Author Information

Studying Learning and Development is the essential textbook for anyone studying the field in order to further their professional development, and HR practitioners wishing to extend their understanding of its background and practical application. With a clear layout that is easy to navigate, it takes you step by step through developing the knowledge and skills required for professional practice, understanding the broader context of learning and development – including the influential factors on achieving strategic objectives and developing policies that suit your organisational needs – and fully utilising learning and development data in order to build a business case for its value within your organisation.

Jim Stewart is Professor of HRD at Liverpool Business School. He is also Chief Examiner of Learning and Development for the CIPD, as well as Visiting Panel Chair and External Moderator.

Written and edited by experts in the field with a wealth of experience in teaching, writing and examining, Studying Learning and Development is the first and only text to map the unit learning outcomes of the three core modules for the CIPD Intermediate level on the new Learning and Development qualification. Its broad coverage means that it is also ideal for any students studying Learning and Development as part of a wider HR or business degree and wanting to gain a deeper appreciation for the knowledge, skills and planning required for the success of its policies and activities in practice. The additional resources available online, including multiple choice questions for self-assessment, web links to further resources, extra case studies and a glossary of key terms, as well as lecturer slides, guides and text banks, will enhance learning of the text and ensure thorough grounding in the theory.

Patricia Rogers is part of the Postgraduate Taught Strategy and Development Group, responsible for the development of postgraduate taught strategies across Coventry University.

Coming soon: 13 brand new e-books for the optional modules.

Table of Contents 1

The Knowledge, Skills and Behaviours Required of Learning and Development Practitioners 2 Planning to Meet Personal Learning and Development Needs 3 Working Collaboratively as a Member of a Team or Working Group 4 Applying CPD Techniques to Devise, Implement and Review a Personal Development Plan 5 The Key Factors Influencing Achievement of Strategic Objectives in Varying Organisation; The Nature of Organising and Managing in a Variety of Contexts 6 Developing Learning and Development Policies and Activities to Respond to and Exploit the Limitations and Opportunities arising from Varying Contextual Factors 7 Using Learning and Development Data 8 Conducting a Research Project 9 Conclusions and Future Directions

Human Resources, Organizational Development and Coaching

175


Learning and Talent Development Edition 1

This book

<< Shows the nature and benefits

of a critical understanding of and approach to the professional practice of learning and talent development

<< Case studies help students focus on particular concepts and prepare for professional practice

<< Online resources: web links for Imprint: Date: Price:

CIPD 13/01/2011 ÂŁ46.99

ISBN Paperback: e-book:

9781843982500 9781843983422

Extent: Dimensions: Subject:

each chapter, lecture slides and an instructorâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s manual complete with lecture handouts and additional case studies per chapter

392 246x189 Learning and Development

Author Information

Description

Jim Stewart is Professor of HRD at Liverpool Business School. He is also Chief Examiner of Learning and Development for the CIPD, as well as Visiting Panel Chair and External Moderator.

Written for the CIPD postgraduate module of the same name, Learning and Talent Development combines a clear and concise structure and writing style with an academic and critical approach to the subject. It analyses and evaluates a range of learning and talent development theories and strategies so students can learn how to take the lead and confidently initiate, develop and implement these strategies, interventions and activities in the workplace.

Clare Rigg lectures at the Institute of Technology, Tralee, Ireland.

Covering key topics such as the national and organisational context of learning and talent development, concepts related to individual and organisational learning and the functions associated with managing learning and talent development in the context of professional practice, Learning and Talent Development equips individuals to meet the expectations placed upon those performing specialist roles in developing others and is therefore also ideal for undergraduate and postgraduate students of human resource management or business students taking a module in human resource development or learning and development. Online supporting resources include web links for each chapter, lecture slides and an instructorâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s manual complete with lecture handouts and additional case studies per chapter.

Table of Contents 1 2

176

Human Resources, Organizational Development and Coaching

Introduction The Nature, Purpose and Context of Learning and Talent Development 2.1 Organising and Managing Learning and Talent Development 2.2 International and National Contexts 2.3 Various and Varying Organisation Contexts 2.4 The Politics of Learning and Talent Development 3 The Process of Learning and Talent Development 3.1 Individual and Organisation Learning in Talent Development 3.2 Establishing Needs and Solutions to Talent Development 3.3 Learning and Talent Development Practical Strategies 4 The Management of Learning and Talent Development 4.1 Designing and Evaluating Talent Development 4.2 Accessing and Managing Resources 4.3 Ethics and Professionalism in Learning and Talent Development 4.4 Doing a Student Research Project 4.5 Conclusion


<< Provides the most up-to-date

Professional Practice in Learning and Development

<< Discusses the latest approaches

How to Design and Deliver Plans for the Workplace

<< Covers the knowledge and

Edition 1

This book thinking on the issues and opportunities facing the L&D profession, including social, blended and digital learning

to traditional and online blended delivery, based on cutting edge research and case studies understanding required for the Chartered Institute of Personnel and Development (CIPD)â&#x20AC;&#x2122;s intermediate level courses in learning and development

Date: Price:

03/11/2016 ÂŁ34.99

ISBN Paperback: e-book:

9780749477424 9780749477431

Extent: Dimensions: Subject:

424 234x156 Learning and Development

Description

Author Information

To Professional Practice in Learning and Development guides learning and development professionals and students in designing and delivering effective people development in the modern organization. It is a core text for those studying for learning and development qualifications such as the Chartered Institute of Personnel and Development Intermediate level, and a useful handbook for those in learning and development roles looking to develop their understanding of the latest developments facing the profession. With a particular focus on digital, blended and social learning it will help you deliver more for less. Starting with an introduction to learning and development, it shows how to make the business case for activities, use metrics to demonstrate the value add, and engage the right stakeholders.

Dr. Mark Loon is a faculty member at Bath Business School, Bath Spa University. He has published in various academic journals such as the Journal of Managerial Psychology, as well as practitioner reports and books. He is currently the Chair of the British Standards Instituteâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s Human Capital Standard Sub-Committee on developing International HRM Standards and the Deputy Vice Chair of the Programmes and Qualifications committee within the University Forum on Human Resource Development. Prior to academia, he was in management consulting, working for firms such as Cap Gemini, Ernst & Young and KPMG.

Drawing on the latest research, Professional Practice in Learning and Development highlights the new opportunities made available to the learning and development practitioner by technology, new media and the networked world in which we live. It looks at approaches to helping people learn and how to develop tailored solutions. Case studies and reflective questions develop skills in facilitating collaborative learning, working in teams, and communicating effectively with all stakeholders. This book also equips you to measure and communicate the value of the programmes and, drawing on insights from neuroscience, demonstrates some practical new tools for engaging learners to improve the effectiveness of their work. Online supporting resources include multiple-choice questions and answers for each chapter.

Table of Contents 1

Leading, managing and developing people fundamentals 1.1 Leadership 1.2 Management 1.3 Developing people 2 Human resource management and learning and development 2.1 The essence of human resource management 2.2 The practice of HRM 2.3 The practice of learning and development 2.4 The contribution of HRM and L&D in different types of organizations 2.5 The professional and ethical approach to HRM and L&D 3 People management processes 4 Motivation 4.1 Commitment 4.2 Employee engagement 4.3 Change management 4.4 Flexible working 4.5 Managing diversity and inclusion

5

Leadership, management and learning and development skills 5.1 Leadership skills 5.2 Management skills 5.3 People management skills 5.4 Learning and development skills 5.5 Managing interpersonal relationships at work 5.6 Managing oneself 5.7 Problem solving and decision making 5.8 Analytical, critical and consultancy skills 5.9 Information handling skills 5.10 Business and financial skills 5.11 Postgraduate study skills

Human Resources, Organizational Development and Coaching

177


Learning for Organizational Development

This book

<< Provides up-to-date thinking on

the issues and opportunities facing learning and development (L&D), including the role of L&D in talent attraction and retention

How to Design, Deliver and Evaluate Effective L&D Edition 1

<< Includes case studies and reflective

questions alongside the knowledge and understanding required for the Chartered Institute of Personnel and Development (CIPD)’s intermediate level courses in learning and development

03/03/2017 £34.99

Date: Price: ISBN Paperback: e-book: Extent: Dimensions: Subject:

<< Arms the professional with the

evidence for L&D’s transformational impact, showing how to link L&D to individual performance and organizational success

9780749477448 9780749477455 320 234x156 Learning and Development

Author Information

Description

Eileen Arney is director of Master’s programmes at The Open University Business School and previously led the development of its online MSc in HRM. She has held senior civil servant posts including assistant director of National Police Training and has designed and delivered leadership programmes for senior managers in the UK and overseas.

Learning for Organizational Development presents how to design, deliver and evaluate effective learning and development (L&D) programs. This definitive guide to L&D’s function in enhancing individual performance and organizational success is a core text for those studying for L&D qualifications such as the Chartered Institute of Personnel and Development (CIPD) Intermediate level as well as a useful handbook for L&D professionals looking to further their understanding of the latest developments. Complete with case studies and reflective questions to aid comprehension, Learning for Organizational Development considers the strategic business function of L&D for communicating the vital contribution that it makes to both individual performance and organizational success. It explores the role of L&D in talent development, showing how to support line managers in developing their people to drive retention and attraction. It also addresses the importance of developing the leadership capability within the organization, and provides practical guidance and examples of what works.

Table of Contents 1 2

Understanding organizational development Understanding the role of L&D in talent development 3 Developing leadership and management capability 4 Implementing coaching and mentoring 5 Using facilitation skills 6 Evaluating learning and development in a knowledge economy

178

Human Resources, Organizational Development and Coaching


This book

<< Identifies and demonstrates how

to align learning and development with the strategic objectives of an organization, equipping the reader with the skills they need to implement a successful L&D strategy.

<< Provides international case studies and various short scenarios to immediately show how to put learning into practice.

<< Helps you to critically evaluate the impact of your L&D programme and to reach a considered view on emerging developments in the field.

Learning and Development Edition 1

Series: Date: Price:

HR Fundamentals 03/07/2014 ÂŁ24.99

ISBN Paperback: e-book:

9780749469887 9780749469894

Extent: Dimensions: Subject:

240 234x156 Learning and Development

Description

Author Information

Learning and Development is a practical guide on designing and delivering training and L&D effectively in an organizational context. It demonstrates how to link learning to strategic business goals and explores both the benefits and complexities associated with learning and development. Tailored to the needs of HR and L&D practitioners, it offers a comprehensive overview of the field strongly aligned to organizational and HR strategies and objectives. Using a combination of practical tools, assessments, scenarios and case studies, this essential handbook will build your knowledge of the area â&#x20AC;&#x201C; from diagnosing L&D needs and types of intervention and development categories, to assessment and training evaluation.

Rebecca Page-Tickell is a Business Psychologist and HR Specialist. During her career she has worked in-house as an HR practitioner in L&D as well as working with HR professionals in a consultative capacity. She has worked across industry sectors and in organizations of varying sizes, from micro-organizations through to multinational corporations. Rebecca specializes in talent identification and management, performance management and engagement. She currently lectures CIPD accredited courses at the Hampshire Business School.

Learning and Development is part of the brand new HR Fundamentals series, offering practical advice to HR professionals starting out in their career, completing CPD training or studying for their professional qualifications with the CIPD.

Table of Contents 1 1.1 1.2 1.3

Fundamentals of learning and development Defining learning and development The importance of learning and development Learning and development, organization and human resource management (HRM) strategy 1.4 How learning and development works 2 In practice 2.1 How do you do it? 2.2 Planning and action 2.3 Measurement 2.4 Conclusion

Human Resources, Organizational Development and Coaching

179


Developing People and Organisations

This book

Edition 1

<< Explains concepts and theoretical

analytical and problem-solving skills as they understand key OD and HRD issues

Imprint: Date: Price:

CIPD 28/08/2012 £44.99

ISBN Paperback: e-book:

9781843983132 9781843983316

Extent: Dimensions: Subject:

<< Helps students develop effective

approaches clearly and provides activities to help cement understanding

<< Online resources: instructor’s

manual, additional case studies, multiple-choice questions and annotated web links

232 246x189 Learning and Development

Author Information

Description

Jim Stewart is Professor of HRD at Liverpool Business School. He is also Chief Examiner of Learning and Development for the CIPD, as well as Visiting Panel Chair and External Moderator.

Developing People and Organisations introduces and explores concepts relevant to the learning outcomes for the optional units in CIPD’s intermediate-level qualifications in human resource development (HRD) and organisational design and development. It provides a practical and accessible exposition of key theories informing the professional practice of HRD so students can explain and analyse the organisational context of HRD practice and describe, compare and critically evaluate a range of theories and approaches.

Patricia Rogers is part of the Postgraduate Taught Strategy and Development Group, responsible for the development of postgraduate taught strategies across Coventry University.

Written and edited by CIPD-accredited experts in the field and mapped to CIPD’s HR Profession Map, Developing People and Organisations covers key topics such as organisation design and development, developing coaching and mentoring in organisations, meeting OD needs and developments in HRD. It includes reflective activities, annotated further reading, a glossary and case studies to encourage the application of theory to a practical working environment. Online supporting resources include an instructor’s manual, additional case studies, multiple-choice questions and annotated web links.

Table of Contents 1

Organisation Design (Gary Connor, Ian McLean and Michael McFadden) 2 Organisation Development (Sophie Mills, Kristen Stevens, Krish Pinto, Amanda Lee) 3 Developing Coaching and Mentoring within Organisations (Terrence Wendell Brathwaite, Jill Ashley-Jones, Rosalind Maxwell-Harrison) 4 Meeting Organisational Development Needs ( Jim Stewart, Dalbir Sidhu) 5 Contemporary Developments in Human Resource Development ( Jim Stewart, Sharon McGuire) 6 Knowledge Management (Carol Woodhams, Graham Perkins) 7 Improving Organisational Performance (Patricia Rogers, Michelle McLardy, Raymond Rogers, Susan Barnes)

180

Human Resources, Organizational Development and Coaching


This book

<< Mixes theory, case application

and exercises to provide a comprehensive exploration of the topic

<< Includes a range of case studies

from different countries to illustrate how key ideas and theories are operating in practice around the globe, and are accompanied by questions or activities for students

<< Online resources: instructor’s

manual, lecture slides and web links

Designing, Delivering and Evaluating L&D Essentials for Practice Edition 1

Imprint: Date: Price:

CIPD 28/05/2014 £46.99

ISBN Paperback: e-book:

9781843983606 9781843983699

Extent: Dimensions: Subject:

224 246x189 Learning and Development

Description

Author Information

As the global economy has changed and thus organisations with it, more learning is delivered at and through work and individuals are encouraged to utilise the opportunities that advances in technology have brought to take charge of their own learning. Essential reading for the CIPD postgraduate unit Designing, Delivering and Evaluating Learning and Development Provision, Designing, Delivering and Evaluating L&D critically examines the contextual factors impacting upon these activities in organisations. With case studies from the public, private and voluntary sectors as well as examples of international practice, the book helps to identify some of the challenges L&D professionals face in a range of environments.

Peter Cureton is a former associate examiner for designing and delivering training with the CIPD and is currently lecturing on CIPD programmes at Liverpool John Moores University, UK.

Designing, Delivering and Evaluating L&D is suitable not just for students working towards a CIPD Level 7 qualification, but also for those studying more general business and management degrees, as well as anyone who may have studied the subject previously and wishes to engage in continuous professional development with regard to this key HR practice. Online supporting resources include an instructor’s manual, lecture slides and web links.

Jim Stewart is chief examiner for Learning and Development with the CIPD, chair of the University Forum for HRD and author of over twenty books on HRD including two for CIPD advanced and intermediate units.

Table of Contents 1

Designing, Delivering and Evaluating Learning and Development (Peter Cureton and Jim Stewart) 2 Individual and Collective Learning (Clair Doloriert, Jim Stewart and Sally Sambrook) 3 The External and Internal Context (Amanda Lee, Sophie Mills and Dalbir Sidhu) 4 Establishing Learning Needs (Tricia Harrison and Randhir Auluck) 5 Designing Learning Interventions (Crystal Zhang and Niki Kyriakidou) 6 Delivering and Facilitating Learning (Michelle McLardy and Nigel O’Sullivan) 7 Evaluating Learning and Development (Marian O’Sullivan and Michael McFadden) 8 Acting Professionally and Ethically (Peter Cureton and Maureen Royce) 9 Themes and the Future of DDE ( Jim Stewart and Peter Cureton)

Human Resources, Organizational Development and Coaching

181


Designing and Developing Digital and Blended Learning Solution

This book

<< Explains current and emerging

learning technologies and their uses in L&D

<< Shows how to structure a blended

learning solution to meet the needs of the organisation

<< Provides guidance on how to Edition 1

implement digital and blended learning technologies including the roles, tools and processes needed for success

Imprint: Date: Price:

CIPD 03/07/2017 ÂŁ16.99

ISBN e-book:

9781843984221

Extent: Fromat: Subject:

80 ePub Learning and Development

Author Information

Description

Dr Mark Loon is a faculty member at Bath Spa University, UK. He holds a PhD and a DBA as well as an MBA. His expertise is in organizational behaviour and his primary research area is in the use of technology in learning and teaching in higher education, learning in the workplace, higher-order thinking dispositions, and leadership development. His secondary research area is within the organizational context that includes organizational learning and change, dynamic capabilities, and business model innovation.

Designing and Developing Digital and Blended Learning Solutions is essential reading for anyone studying the Level 5 CIPD L&D module of the same name as well as all learning and development professionals looking to understand the growing role of technology in L&D. Covering both current and emerging learning technologies, this book will help readers assess which technologies are right for their needs. It also covers how to design blended learning solutions, how to develop digital learning content as well as how to evaluate the effectiveness of this digital content. Most importantly, Designing and Developing Digital and Blended Learning Solutions provides guidance on how to implement digital and blended learning solutions including identifying the appropriate platforms and the roles, tools and processes needed to support effective implementation. Full of practical examples and advice, this is an invaluable guide for students and practitioners alike.

Table of Contents Introduction Digital Technologies, and Learning and Development 1.1 Current Learning Technologies 1.2 Emerging Technologies and Use of Technologies for Learning and Development 1.3 Learning Technologies and Individual Modalities of Learning 1.4 Summary of Chapter 1 2 Designing Blended Learning Solutions 2.1 Blended Learning 2.2 Enhancing Learning; Structure a Blended Solution to Meet the Underlying Need 2.3 Matching Blended Learning Solutions with the Most Appropriate and Effective Media 2.4 Summary of Chapter 2 3 Designing and Developing Digital Learning Content 3.1 Digital Learning Content 3.2 Roles, Tools and Processes for the Design and Development of Digital Learning Content 3.3 Evaluating Digital Learning Content 3.4 Summary of Chapter 3 1

182

Human Resources, Organizational Development and Coaching

4 Implementing Digital and Blended Learning Solutions 4.1 Digital and Blended Learning Platforms 4.2 Roles, Tools and Processes in Delivering and Supporting Digital and Blended Learning Solutions 4.3 Summary of Chapter 4 5 Conclusion 6 References


This book

<< Is the core supporting text for

the CIPD Level 5 Unit 5PEL and essential reading for students and professionals studying L&D as part of wider undergraduate and postgraduate HR degrees, or other professional courses

<< Takes the reader through

everything they need to know about participant engagement in the learning process to enable them to reap the benefits of a successful L&D programme within their own organisation.

<< Offers a broad range of valuable

content and pedagogical feature such as tasks, which encourage active learning.

Enhancing Participant Engagement in the Learning Process Edition 1

Imprint: Date: Price:

CIPD 03/07/2017 £16.99

ISBN e-book:

9781843984238

Extent: Fromat: Subject:

72 ePub Learning and Development

Description

Author Information

Enhancing Participant Engagement in the Learning Process is an accessible guide for students studying Learning and Development (L&D), and is the supporting text for the CIPD Level 5 Unit 5PEL. It takes the reader through everything they need to know about participant engagement in the learning process: what we mean by ‘learning’ in L&D, the key stakeholders and their varying expectations and interests, motivation theory and learning engagement, how different contexts affect staff engagement in learning, and the psychology behind the learning process.

Dr Claire Valentin is Deputy Director of the Graduate School of Education and Sport and Senior Lecturer at Moray House School of Education,The University of Edinburgh.

Packed full of examples and engaging tasks, Enhancing Participant Engagement in the Learning Process will develop your ability to plan, manage and deliver learning that meets the needs of learners and stakeholders, underpinned by relevant psychological theories and research. Essential reading for anyone studying L&D with the CIPD, on an undergraduate or postgraduate course, or those with a broader business interest in participation in the learning process, this is a practical text that will ground you in the theory and enable you to reap the benefits of a successful L&D programme in your organisation.

Table of Contents 1

Key Concepts in Engagement in Learning and Development 2 Stakeholders in the Learning Process 3 Motivation Theory and Learning Engagement 4 Psychology and the Learning Process 5 Neuroscience and Learning 6 Facilitating Participant Engagement in Learning References

Human Resources, Organizational Development and Coaching

183


Developing and Using Consultancy Skills

This book

<< Explains the meaning of

consultancy and the common stages of the consulting process in an L&D context

<< Shows how to work with a client to Edition 1

agree a learning and development solution

<< Provides guidance on how

Imprint: Date: Price:

CIPD 03/07/2017 ÂŁ16.99

ISBN e-book:

9781843984269

Extent: Fromat: Subject:

to support a client whilst implementing an L&D solution

40 ePub Learning and Development

Author Information

Description

Peter Cureton is a former associate examiner for designing and delivering training with the CIPD.

Developing and Using Consultancy Skills supports students and practitioners in their understanding of the meaning of consultancy and the skills required in consulting in a learning and development context. It covers all the stages in the consulting process and provides guidance on engaging with the client, clarifying the nature of the issues, agreeing the research areas and analysing feedback. Developing and Using Consultancy Skills also includes essential coverage of common problems with client-consultation relationships and how to overcome these as well as discussion of ethics and consultant behaviour. Essential reading for anyone studying the intermediate CIPD L&D qualification, this guide will not only equip students for their studies, but also for their role as L&D professionals in the workplace.

Table of Contents 1 1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4 1.5 1.6 1.7 1.8 1.9

Learning Outcomes Introduction and Overview The Meaning of Consultancy Skills in Consulting Stages in the Consulting Process Engage with the Client Clarify the Nature of the Issue(s) Agree the Research area Feedback Results Common Problems with Client-Consultant Relationships 1.10 Ethics and Consultant Behaviour 1.11 Concluding Thoughts 1.12 Bibliography and Further Reading

184

Human Resources, Organizational Development and Coaching


<< Is the essential text for any

Facilitating Collective and Social Learning

<< Will develop a solid understanding

Edition 1

This book students studying Learning & Development (L&D) as part of undergraduate or postgraduate courses, and is the supporting text for the CIPD level 5 Unit 5CSL of how collective and social learning can support the reader’s organisation in achieving its L&D objectives

<< Explores the key current social

media and e-learning tools, technologies and their applications for L&D, and how social media and e-learning tools can be employed to meet organisational learning objectives

Imprint: Date: Price:

CIPD 03/07/2017 £16.99

ISBN e-book:

9781843984542

Extent: Fromat: Subject:

64 ePub Learning and Development

Description

Author Information

Enhancing Participant Engagement in the Learning Process is an accessible guide for students studying Learning and Development (L&D), and is the supporting text for the CIPD Level 5 Unit 5PEL. It takes the reader through everything they need to know about participant engagement in the learning process: what we mean by ‘learning’ in L&D, the key stakeholders and their varying expectations and interests, motivation theory and learning engagement, how different contexts affect staff engagement in learning, and the psychology behind the learning process.

Clair Doloriert is a lecturer in Organisational Learning at the University Of Wales Bangor.

Packed full of examples and engaging tasks, Enhancing Participant Engagement in the Learning Process will develop your ability to plan, manage and deliver learning that meets the needs of learners and stakeholders, underpinned by relevant psychological theories and research. Essential reading for anyone studying L&D with the CIPD, on an undergraduate or postgraduate course, or those with a broader business interest in participation in the learning process, this is a practical text that will ground you in the theory and enable you to reap the benefits of a successful L&D programme in your organisation.

William Boulton is the HE Business Management and Enterprise External Examiner at Sheffield Hallam University. Sally Anne Sambrook is Professor of Human Resource Development at Bangor Business School.

Table of Contents 1 Defining Collective and Social Learning 1.1 Introducing Collective and Social Learning 1.2 Comparing and Contrasting Collective and Social Learning 1.3 Other Terms and How They Fit With Collective and Social Learning 1.4 Individual Learning Within Collective and Social Learning 1.5 Conclusion 2 Theory and Practice of Collective and Social Learning 2.1 Collective and Social Learning Within the Workplace 2.2 Assess Different Models of Collective and Social Learning 2.3 Collective and Social Learning’s Role Within Organisational Learning 2.4 Conclusion 3 Technology for Collective and Social Learning 3.1 A Brief History of Collective and Social Learning 3.2 Identify the Key Current and Social Media and E-Learning Tools and Technologies and their application

3.3 Explore How Social Media and E-Learning Can Be Employed By Various Groups to Meet Organisational Learning Objectives 3.4 Conclusion 4 Implications for L&D and HRD 4.1 Challenges to Implementing Collective and Social Learning 4.2 Overcoming Barriers to Implementation of Collective and Social Learning 4.3 Conclusion 5 Concluding Collective & Social Learning

Human Resources, Organizational Development and Coaching

185


Organization Development

This book

<< Provides a complete guide to

implementing effective OD in your business and the tools to drive performance and growth

A Practitioner’s Guide for OD and HR

<< Includes theory overviews as Edition 2

well as tools, techniques and international case studies for both students and practitioners

Date: Price:

03/05/2015 £29.99

ISBN Paperback: e-book:

9780749470173 9780749470180

Extent: Dimensions: Subject:

448 234x156 Organizations

<< Is unique among OD books in its

practitioner focus and in providing a bridge between OD practice and HR context

Author Information

Description

Dr. Mee-Yan Cheung-Judge is the founder of Quality & Equality Ltd. She speaks, writes and delivers most of the OD training programmes in the UK and was voted one of the 25 most influential thinkers in HR by HR Magazine in 2008, 2012, 2013 and 2014.

Written by two of the leading experts in the field, Organization Development is a guide to the basic principles of effective organization development. A compendium of theories, practices, diagnostics techniques and figures, it provides practical advice for identifying an organization’s needs and determining the most appropriate course of action to maximize organizational capability. It provides an overview of the history and theory of OD and addresses the various phases, the role of the practitioner, aspects of power and politics, and the human resources context. The book also discusses organizational design, culture change, managing transformational change, and developing effective leadership.

Dr. Linda Holbeche is co-director of The Centre for Progressive Learning at London Metropolitan University, director of The Holbeche Partnership, a development consulting company, and adjunct professor at Imperial College London’s Business School. She is the author of The Agile Organization (also published by Kogan Page).

Bridging the gap between theory and practice, this fully updated new edition of Organization Development now includes coverage of complexity and chaos theory, new case studies describing OD practices and attitudes in countries outside of the US and UK, and new chapters on change and culture and on employee engagement and wellbeing. The authors also have added emphasis on the collaborations between OD and HR functions. It provides a wealth of helpful advice for OD practitioners, HR professionals and those with an interest in helping develop their organization.

Table of Contents 1 2

Introduction A practitioner’s guide for Organization Development 2.1 What is OD? Its brief history 2.2 Theories and practices of OD: a theory overview 2.3 Theories and practices of OD: the OD cycle and the entry and contracting phase 2.4 Theories and practices of OD: the diagnostic phase 2.5 Theories and practices of OD: the intervention phase 2.6 Theories and practices of OD: the evaluation phase 2.7 Living at the edge of chaos of change 2.8 Back room and front room change matters 2.9 Can behavioural change be made easy? 2.10 The Organization Development practitioner 2.11 Power and politics and Organization Development

186

Human Resources, Organizational Development and Coaching

3 3.1 3.2 3.3 3.4 3.5 3.6

HR in relation to OD: practice examples HR in relation to OD Organization Design Transformation and culture change Building organizational agility and resilience Building the context for employee engagement Developing effective leadership


This book

<< Is essential reading for

students studying Organisation Development (OD) as part of a wider HR degree or professional qualification, is the core textbook for the CIPD level 5 Unit 5UOD, and is ideal for professionals looking for a solid theoretical grounding they can apply in practice

<< Will provide the reader with

Understanding Organisation Development Edition 1

a thorough understanding of the concept, development and varying models of Organisation Development

Imprint: Date: Price:

CIPD 03/07/2017 £16.99

<< Is written in a clear and easy to

ISBN e-book:

9781843984306

Extent: Fromat: Subject:

72 ePub Organizations

navigate style

Description

Author Information

Understanding Organisation Development is essential reading for students studying Organisation Development (OD) as part of a wider HR degree or professional qualification, is the core textbook for the CIPD level 5 Unit 5UOD, and is ideal for professionals looking for a solid theoretical grounding that they can apply in practice. With a clear and accessible format, it will enable readers to understand and analyse the concept of Organisation Development (OD) and its relationship with learning and development (L&D), and develop their understanding of the evolution of OD in contemporary organisations and its role in contributing to major organisational change.

Dr Paul Tosey is an independent consultant. Formerly a Senior Lecturer in Management in the Surrey Business School, University of Surrey, his career experience includes internal and external consultancy and coaching. He has taught Organisation Development on MSc and MBA programmes and served as external examiner to several of the UK’s leading Masters programmes in this field. His research interests include organisational learning, human resource development and Clean Language, an innovative coaching practice that is based on metaphor, on which he has published widely. He is co-editor of the Handbook of Research Methods on HRD (Edward Elgar 2015).

Working step-by-step through the broad framework of OD, Understanding Organisation Development takes the reader through its concept and purposes, historical development, the relationship between OD and HRM, the different models of OD and the common processes involved. This essential text will give you a thorough understanding of the knowledge, skills and behaviours required to function effectively in an OD practitioner role.

Table of Contents 1 1.1 1.2 1.3 2 2.1

Understanding Organisation Development Purpose and Aim of Unit This Unit is Suitable for Persons Who Learning Outcomes Guided Learning Hours The Concept and Key Purposes of Organisation Development 2.2 The Concept of Organisation Development (OD) 2.3 The Historical Development of OD 2.4 The Relationship and Connections of OD to HRD and to HRM 3 Organisation Development Models, Tools and Techniques 3.1 Models of OD 3.2 OD Tools and Techniques 3.3 Critiques of OD & Change Management 4 The Organisation Development Practitioner – Roles, Styles, Processes and Skills 4.1 Roles and Styles 4.2 Processes 4.3 Skills and Qualities 4.4 Ethics and OD 4.5 Summary

Human Resources, Organizational Development and Coaching

187


Consultancy, Organizational Development and Change

This book

<< Shows how to plan a consulting

intervention, from diagnosing what change is needed and how ready the organization is for the change to how to identify risks, ensure ethical practice and demonstrate value

A Practical Guide to Delivering Value Edition 1

<< Provides global case studies and

perspectives from practising internal and external consultants from a variety of consultancies, from the ‘Big Four’ to boutique consultancies

Date: Price:

03/04/2017 £34.99

ISBN Paperback: e-book:

9780749478636 9780749478643

Pages: Format (mm): Subject:

320 234x156 Organizations

<< Helps build the necessary skills

to get work as a consultant, from putting the business case forward to establishing credibility

Author Information

Description

Dr Julie Hodges is currently director of MBA programmes at Durham University Business School and a lecturer and researcher of change in organizations. She is a senior fellow of the Foundation for Management of Education. Before entering academia Julie worked as a management consultant for over 20 years. She has worked with several profit and non-profit organizations, including the British Council, Vertex, PwC and RBS. Julie is a founding director of the Leading Well – a social enterprise for developing leaders in the public and third sectors.

Organizations are increasingly investing in consulting capabilities to understand what changes they need to make to keep up the pace with the competition and future-proof their business. Consultancy, Organizational Development and Change is a guide for internal and external consultants needing to develop the necessary skills to consult in different organizational settings where there is a great deal of complexity. It tackles the issues posing the greatest threat to the success of the change program, including how to adapt to rapidly shifting needs, how to deal with the emotional and ethical issues that arise and how to ensure that the managers take full ownership for the change so that ‘business as usual’ is established. Complete with case studies from the ‘Big Four’ consultancy groups as well as boutique firms, Consultancy, Organizational Development and Change shows how to identify and execute interventions in a variety of organizational settings to deliver value. It provides guidance on how to develop a value proposition, how to define, write and present the business case for the proposed interventions, how to establish credibility and how to report on the results.

Table of Contents 1 THE CONTEXT OF CONSULTING 1.1 The nature and value of consulting 1.2 Roles and responsibilities of consulting 2 THE CONSULTING CYCLE 2.1 Preparation and contracting 2.2 Diagnosing the need and readiness for change 2.3 Designing and delivering interventions 2.4 Transition 3 CONSULTING CAPABILITIES 3.1 Building capabilities for consulting 3.2 Becoming a consultant 3.3 The shadow side of consultancy 3.4 Conclusions and reflections

188

Human Resources, Organizational Development and Coaching


This book

<< Equips readers with the strategies and methods to ensure their organization can respond rapidly and retain competitive advantage in the face of change

<< Includes self-assessment tools,

guidelines, checklists and international case studies, including ING, the UK National Health Service, the Royal Bank of Scotland and Atkins

<< New to this edition: fresh

material on agile strategizing, people, environments and cultures, alongside new case studies to illustrate each of these themes

The Agile Organization How to Build an Engaged, Innovative and Resilient Business Edition 2

Date: Price:

03/06/2018 £29.99

ISBN Paperback: e-book:

9780749482657 9780749482664

Extent: Dimensions: Subject:

312 234x156 Organizations

Description

Author Information

In today’s volatile and ambiguous world, organizations need to have the capacity and flexibility to respond rapidly to changes in their environment, both internally and externally. The key to retaining competitive advantage is agility, a set of capabilities that help organizations adapt with the full co-operation of their employees. The Agile Organization is a practical blueprint to building both agility and resilience at individual, team and organizational levels. It draws on case studies such as ING, the UK National Health Service, the Royal Bank of Scotland (RBS) and Atkins, as well as on the lived experience of HR and organization development (OD) professionals, to show how it is possible to build a sustainably agile business while enhancing employee engagement and resilience.

Linda Holbeche is an international consultant, developer and author in the fields of HR, leadership, strategy and change. Based in the UK, the author was previously Director of Research and Policy for the CIPD, Director of Leadership and Consultancy at the Work Foundation and Director of Research and Strategy at Roffey Park. She is currently a Visiting Professor (HRM and OD) at Cass Business School, a member of several advisory boards and a Fellow of the Institute for Employment Studies and Roffey Park. She is the co-author of Organization Development (also published by Kogan Page).

This revised 2nd edition of The Agile Organization showcases new organizational models, ground-breaking themes and case studies which illustrate how organizations are addressing the challenge of developing organizational agility. Packed with helpful checklists, selfassessment tools and guidelines, and now with new material on agile strategizing, people, environments and cultures, this book remains a ‘go to guide’ for HR and OD specialists, senior leaders and managers who want to help bring about organizational transformation.

Table of Contents 1 2 3 4 5 6

Why Go Agile? Why are Agility and Resilience So Elusive? The Resiliently Agile Organization Agile Strategizing Agile Implementation HR’s Role in Building a High-Performance Work Climate 7 Agile Linkages 8 Agile People Processes 9 Nurturing Employee Engagement and Resilience 10 Change and Transformation 11 Building a Change-Able Culture 12 Agile Leadership

Human Resources, Organizational Development 189 and Coaching


People and Organisational Development

This book

<< Provides examples of emergent

theories of OD and HRM and details of how these can be applied in the workplace

A New Agenda for Organisational Effectiveness

<< Includes international case studies

Edition 1

<< Online resources: additional case

showing both successful and unsuccessful attempts at change

studies and practical tools

Imprint: Date: Price:

CIPD 01/01/2012 £47.99

ISBN Paperback: e-book:

9781843982692 9781843983279

Extent: Dimensions: Subject:

376 246x189 Organizations

Author Information

Description

Helen Francis is Director of the Edinburgh Institute of Leadership and People Management (EILPM) and Reader within Edinburgh Napier Business School, UK.

People and Organisational Development is ideal for both practitioners and students alike. Setting out a new agenda for organisational effectiveness, this book not only covers emergent theories of organisational development and human resources management, it also gives practical examples for how these theories can be applied. Covering everything from how HR can support strategic change and how technology can be an agent of transformation to performance management, diversity, talent management and emotion at work, this book firmly places HR at the heart of a modern approach to OD.

Linda Holbeche is Visiting Professor at both the University of Bedfordshire and Cass Business School and an Associate at Ashridge Business School, UK. Martin Reddington was formerly Global Programme Director, HR Transformation, at Cable & Wireless. Since leaving Cable & Wireless, he blends academic research with consultancy.

Crucially, People and Organisational Development doesn’t just examine successful change initiatives, it also covers the unsuccessful attempts at organisational change and what can be learnt from these. There is also invaluable discussion of the OD role of HRD in ethics, corporate social responsibility (CSR) and sustainability. Packed with international case studies and examples, this is essential reading for all those studying the CIPD Organisation Design and Organisation Development module and everyone wanting to make a difference to the development of their people and their organisation.

Table of Contents 1

190

Human Resources, Organizational Development and Coaching

Organisational Effectiveness – A New Agenda for Organisational Development (OD) and Human Resource Management (HRM) (Helen Francis, Linda Holbeche and Martin Reddington) 2 The Strategic Context for The New OE (Linda Holbeche) 3 The Historical and Theoretical Background to Organisation Development (Naomi Stanford) 4 Developing an Organisational Strategy from an HR Perspective (Mark Withers) 5 Organisational Culture and Cultural Integration (Valerie Garrow and Graeme Martin) 6 An ER Perspective on Organisational Effectiveness ( John Purcell) 7 Transforming HR to Support Strategic Change (Peter Reilly) 8 Technology as an Agent of Transformation (Martin Reddington) 9 Critical HRD and Organisational Effectiveness (Allan Ramdhony) 10 The Role of Line Managers in HRM, Learning and Innovation ( John Castledine and Douglas W. S. Renwick) 11 Strategic Workforce Capability – Planning for a New Era (Roger Cooper and Melanie Wood)

12 Performance Management and Reward (Roger Cooper and Adrian Furnham) 13 Inclusive Talent Management and Diversity (Eddie Blass and Gillian Maxwell) 14 Employer Branding and Organisational Effectiveness (Helen Francis and Martin Reddington) 15 The OD Role of HRD in Ethics, Corporate Social Responsibility and Sustainability (Carole Parkes) 16 Emotion at Work (Chiara Amati and Chris Donnegan) 17 The New OE – Future Prospects and Possibilities (Helen Francis, Linda Holbeche and Martin Reddington)


This book

<< Covers essential management

theory and key topics from people management to performance metrics, as well as emerging specialist topics in management

<< Enables readers to understand the

key issues involved in managing organizations and how to take a critical approach when planning, leading and executing the efforts of a workforce and its resources

<< Online Resources: summaries,

diagrams and case study scenarios to help readers easily understand theories and contextualize experiences in the workplace

Organizational Management Approaches and Solutions Edition 1

Date: Price:

03/03/2016 £34.99

ISBN Paperback: e-book:

9780749468361 9780749468378

Extent: Dimensions: Subject:

296 240x170 Organizations

Description

Author Information

Organizational Management is ideal for readers who need to understand modern organizations. This book enables students to understand the key issues of organizational behaviour and how to take a critical approach when planning, leading and engaging a workforce and its resources. The book provides fresh perspectives on known models and critical theories on leadership, teams, performance management, employee engagement and change. The authors also offer the reader innovative approaches to leading-edge issues such as trust, internet use, generational trends, the use of the arts in organizations and leadership from a systemic perspective.

Peter Stokes is Professor of Business Management and Organization at Chester Business School. He has been visiting lecturer and academic advisor in businesses, universities and business schools in a range of contexts and countries, including France, Holland, Spain, Ireland, Germany, Senegal, Vietnam, Morocco, Hong Kong, China, India, Dubai and Japan.

Organizational Management draws on examples from the authors’ international work across a range of business and industrial sectors, both public and private, and is supplemented by activities, revision questions, recommend reading and online resources to deepen learning. Rapid technological advances, constantly changing global environments and new kinds of workforce cultures mean that organizations are constantly being challenged. This book equips the reader with the ability to navigate this turbulent environment through both established and novel forms of organizational management. Online supporting resources for this book include summaries, diagrams and case study scenarios to help readers easily understand theories and contextualize experiences in the workplace

Management and organization: The 21stcentury global and international context 2 Historical and contemporary contexts: The representation and character of ‘modern’ organizations 3 Using critical management approaches in managing people and organizations 4 Leadership and management: The challenge of performance 5 Employee engagement through effective communications 6 Leadership and trust – how to build a trustworthy company: The importance of communication 7 Effective team-working in contemporary organizations 8 Managing internet user behaviour within organizations: Inter- and intra-generational trends

Simon M Smith Simon M Smith is Senior Lecturer in Leadership and Management at the University of Winchester. Caroline Rowland Caroline Rowland is Professor of Leadership and Management and Associate Dean of Chester Business School.

Table of Contents 1

Neil Moore Neil Moore is Senior Lecturer and Postgraduate Coordinator at Chester Business School.

9 Arts pedagogy in management development 10 Viewing leadership from a systemic perspective 11 Leading and managing people through change and resistance to change

Peter Scott Peter Scott is Senior Lecturer in Marketing and Management at Liverpool John Moores University.

Human Resources, Organizational Development and Coaching

191


Organization Design

This book

<< Provides complete coverage of

Organization Design, from design to delivery and addresses all the critical areas such as downsizing, outsourcing, job design, change management and re-structuring

A Guide to Building Effective Organizations Edition 2

<< Practical approach shows you how

to effectively deliver design in a way that is fit for purpose in line with the organization’s goals

03/03/2014 £19.99

Date: Price: ISBN Paperback: e-book:

9780749470593 9780749470609

Extent: Dimensions: Subject:

320 234x156 Organizations

<< Enables HR and internal project

staff to manage organization design independent of external consultants who are not embedded in the business, thereby saving costs and ensuring continuity

Author Information

Description

Patricia Cichocki leads Design to Change. She has over 25 years’ experience working in and advising international organizations and clients on organization design and change. She holds degrees from HEC Paris, Oxford University and University College London and is a member of the Organization Design Forum. Patricia was a founding director of the Change Leaders.

With the rate of change in organizations at an all-time high, the need for strong organization design has never been more pressing. Organization Design provides a complete road map to building successful organizations through good organization design. It presents a practical process; a robust, broad-based model and a set of tools and techniques that all link together. Part One and Two together provide you with the knowledge of how to establish and run an organization design programme. Part Three covers how to respond to three perennial challenges in designing organizations.

Christine Irwin retired in 2011 after a career that saw her become one of the UK’s leading practitioners in organization design and implementation. The first edition of Organization Design is just part of that legacy. She was an elected board member of the USbased Organization Design Forum from 2001 to 2010 and holds degrees from Manchester Business School and Leeds University.

This thoroughly revised edition includes an increased range of archetypes, a wide variety of international examples and coverage of additional ways to gain insight, such as through exploring metaphors and positive deviance. It is a practical toolkit to take organization designers from start to finish, outlining the basic theory, providing a step-by-step approach to implementation, and offering solutions to the recurring challenges that will inevitably be met along the way.

Table of Contents 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14

192

Human Resources, Organizational Development and Coaching

Introduction Understanding organization design Putting organization design in context Familiarize yourself with the Organization Design Compass and the OPTIMAL Way Some essential building blocks Designing your organization the OPTIMAL Way Outlining your brief Pulling together your programme Taking stock of the change required Identifying assessment criteria Mapping the design options Assessing the alternatives Laying out the way forward Dealing with recurring challenges How to maintain design integrity over time How to choose between design options when the environment is very uncertain How to assess the level of capability maturity of an organization over time


This book

<< Bridges the gap between OB and HRM and shows you how to put effective people management at the heart of your organization

Organizational Behaviour People, Process, Work and Human Resource Management

<< Examines the role of corporate

governance in shaping the scope of managerial choices in organizations and what this means in practice

<< Looks at the ethical dimensions of

OB that are increasingly important to understand in the context of ‘good employers’ and global employment standards

Edition 1

Date: Price:

03/01/2013 £39.99

ISBN Paperback: e-book:

9780749463601 9780749463618

Extent: Dimensions: Subject:

352 234x156 Organizations

Description

Author Information

There is a large body of shared knowledge between the study of Organizational Behaviour and Human Resource Management but despite the crossover, they are often treated as very distinct disciplines. Written by a team of experts across both fields, Organizational Behaviour bridges the gap between OB and HRM, with an emphasis on inter-cultural and cross-cultural perspectives of organizational development, talent management, and leadership. Through a critical analysis of existing literature and case studies, the contributors cover topics such as corporate governance, ethical business practices, employee morale and motivation, performance management, corporate politics and conflict resolution, workplace diversity, creativity, and change management – all within the framework of current global employment standards and best practices.

Raisa Arvinen-Muondo works in HR management in Luanda, Angola. She has undertaken doctoral research at the University of Bedfordshire, on the career development of Angolan professionals within Western multinational organizations, focusing on the impact of experiences associated with international living.

Table of Contents 1

Introduction – Stephen Perkins and Raisa Arvinen-Muondo 2 Individuals at work under an employment relationship 2.1 Managing diverse identities at work – Janice Johnson and Christina Schwabenland 2.2 Perception, making decisions and people management – Raisa Arvinen-Muondo 2.3 Motivation at work: engagement and facilitation – Nahid Rozalin 3 Employing human resources to work together for a purpose 3.1 Managing performance – Caroline Bolam and Sarah Jones 3.2 Leadership, communication and organizational effectiveness – Linda Holbeche 3.3 Talent management – Raisa Arvinen-Muondo and Qi Wei 4 Shifting contexts for organizational behaviour 4.1 Conflict, power and politics – Philip Davies and Rod Smith 4.2 Organizational culture – Eliot Lloyd 4.3 Managing organizational change – Faten Baddar Al-Husan and Konstantinos Kakavelakis 4.4 Creativity, innovation and the management of knowledge – Pauline Loewenberger 5 Summation and reflection 5.1 Coda: HRM and OB – accenting the social – Stephen Perkins and Raisa Arvinen-Muondo

Stephen J Perkins is Dean of London Metropolitan Business School and a Visiting Research Fellow at Cass Business School. In addition to having served in several universities, he has held senior management posts in industry at times of transformational change and consulted with private and stateowned organizations internationally.

Human Resources, Organizational Development and Coaching

193


Introduction to Organisational Behaviour

This book

<< Explores the organisational

behaviour in relation to individuals including personality, motivation, satisfaction and learning

<< Includes crucial coverage Edition 1

of organisational structures including design, culture, change management and technological innovations

Imprint: Date: Price:

CIPD 27/01/2011 ÂŁ46.99

ISBN Paperback: e-book:

9781843982470 9781843984115

Extent: Dimensions: Subject:

536 275x217 Organizations

<< Online resources: practitioner

interviews, video clips of key employability skills, additional case studies, activities, a test bank of multiple choice questions and PowerPoint slides for lecturers as well as web links for students

Author Information

Description

Michael Butler is a Senior Lecturer in Management in the Work and Organisational Psychology Group of Aston Business School, Aston University, UK.

Ideal for anyone studying an introductory module in organisational behaviour, Introduction to Organisational Behaviour is a rigorous critique of all essential organisational behaviour topics. A comprehensive book with extensive accompanying online resources makes this a must-have package for anyone wanting to understand the theory and practice of organisational behaviour. Practitioner case studies, supporting video interviews where solutions and approaches are discussed, review questions at the end of every chapter make this an essential resource.

Ed Rose teaches Employment Relations and Organisational Behaviour in the Faculty of Business and Law at Liverpool John Moores University, UK

Covering organisational behaviour in the context of individuals, groups and teams and managing organisations as well as the importance of organisational structures and emerging issues, Introduction to Organisational Behaviour gives understanding and guidance on the full spectrum of organisational behaviour issues. Supported by extensive online resources including video interviews, clips of key skills lecture slides, additional tutorial activities and a test bank of multiple choice questions make this a truly integrated print and electronic learning package.

Table of Contents 1

Introduction â&#x20AC;&#x201C; A New Model of Learning, Blending Employability Skills, International Focus and Multimedia Elements (Michael Butler and Ed Rose) 1.1 Approaches to Organisational Behaviour (Emma Jeanes) 2 Individuals 2.1 Personality (Steve Woods and Claire Hardy) 2.2 Perception and Managing Emotions ( Jenna Ward and Robert McMurray) 2.3 Motivation and Satisfaction (Tricia Harrison) 2.4 Learning Theories and Practices (Crystal Zhang and Niki Kyriakidou) 3 Groups and Teams 3.1 Work Groups and Teams ( Joanne Richardson and Michael A. West) 3.2 Conflict and Stress in Organisations (Alf Crossman) 3.3 Communication (Markus C. Hasel) 4 Managing Organisations 4.1 Leading and Influencing in Organisations (Yves R. F. Guillaume and Nils-Torge Telle) 4.2 Decision-Making (Michael Butler, Keith BezantNiblett and Karen Caine)

194

Human Resources, Organizational Development and Coaching

4.3 Equality and Diversity in Organisations (Maureen Royce) 4.4 Power in Organisations (Ed Rose) 5 Organisational Structure 5.1 Organisational Design, Structure and Work Organisation (Scott A. Hurrell and Cinzia Priola) 5.2 Organisational Culture and Change Management (Cinzia Priola and Scott A. Hurrell) 5.3 Technology in Work Organisations (Michel Ehrenhard, Tanya Bondarouk and Huub Ruel) 5.4 Human Resource Management and Organisational Behaviour (Rory Donnelly) 6 Emerging Issues 6.1 Ethics: Issues and Developments (Ed Rose) 6.2 Conclusion (Ed Rose and Michael Butler)


<< Provides advice on employee

Armstrong’s Handbook of Performance Management

<< New to this edition: case studies

An Evidence-Based Guide to Delivering High Performance

This book development and performance pay as well as methods of dealing with underperformers and handling challenging conversations from Microsoft, IBM and Expedia which show how the latest developments in performance management are being implemented

Edition 6

On ine resources

<< Online resources: instructor’s

manual, student’s manual, lecture slides for each chapter, a glossary of terms and a literature review

Date: Price:

03/12/2017 £34.99

ISBN Paperback: e-book:

9780749481209 9780749481216

Extent: Dimensions: Subject:

416 240x170 Performance Management

Description

Author Information

Armstrong’s Handbook of Performance Management addresses all areas of performance management, from performance pay and giving feedback to managing underperformers and having difficult conversations, so organizations can optimize staff performance. This fully updated and restructured 6th edition analyzes traditional as well as the latest developments in performance management including the current move away from ratings and annual reviews. Veteran HR expert Michael Armstrong examines where these new approaches should be embraced and where traditional methods of performance management may be preferable. Packed with examples, exercises, checklists and new case studies from organizations such as Microsoft, IBM and Expedia, this book remains the most authoritative and engaging textbook on performance management.

Michael Armstrong is managing partner of E-Reward in the UK and an independent management consultant. He is a former chief examiner of the Chartered Institute of Personnel and Development (CIPD) and former HR director of a publishing company. He has sold over 500,000 books on the subject of HRM and is the author of Armstrong’s Handbook of Human Resource Management Practice and several other bestselling HR books published by Kogan Page.

Armstrong’s Handbook of Performance Management is aligned to the CIPD standards for Performance Management and so is ideal for those working towards the intermediate and advanced level qualifications. Supporting online resources include an instructor’s manual, a student’s manual, lecture slides, a glossary of terms and a literature review.

Table of Contents 1

The ideal approach to performance management 1.1 Performance management as an ideal 1.2 Performance management systems 1.3 Setting objectives 1.4 Providing feedback 1.5 Coaching 1.6 Reviewing performance 1.7 Assessing performance 2 Applications of performance management 2.1 Managing organizational performance 2.2 Managing team performance 2.3 Managing under-performance 2.4 Performance management and employee engagement 2.5 Performance management and talent management 2.6 Performance management and learning 2.7 Performance management and reward 2.8 International performance management 3 The reality of performance management 3.1 The impact of performance management 3.2 Views on performance management 3.3 What’s wrong with performance management

4 Performance management reinvented 4.1 What’s happening to performance management 4.2 The approach to reinvention 4.3 The reinvention programme 4.4 A radical new approach

Human Resources, Organizational Development and Coaching

195


Performance Management

This book

<< Balances theory with practice to

give students a full understanding of the subject

theory and practice Edition 1

<< Maps to the CIPD advanced-level

unit on Performance Management

<< Online resources: instructor’s

Imprint: Date: Price:

CIPD 29/08/2013 £46.99

ISBN Paperback: e-book:

9781843983057 9781843983286

Extent: Dimensions: Subject:

manual, lecture slides, annotated web links for students

344 246x189 Performance Management

Author Information

Description

Sue Hutchinson is an associate professor in HRM at the University of the West of England, where she is also Associate Head of the HRM teaching and research group. She teaches on a range of HRM postgraduate modules including Performance Management, and is actively involved in research. Her main research interests focus on the link between people management and performance, the role of line managers in HRM and involvement and consultation. Previous work experiences include research and teaching at Bath University, policy advisor for the CIPD and industrial relations advisor in the paper industry.

How do you systematically decide and communicate strategic performance aims, objectives, priorities and targets? How do you plan effective policies and practices? Which techniques, rewards and sanctions should you use to improve performance? How do you critically evaluate the effectiveness of performance management? Performance Management combines theory and practice to help students master these key concepts and apply their learning. Mapping to the CIPD advanced-level unit by the same name, the book is a core text for any student taking a performance management module at undergraduate or postgraduate level. Featuring examples from a range of sectors and organisations across the globe, Performance Management is packed with pedagogical features such as learning outcomes, case studies, activities, reflection questions and further reading to fully engage students with the subject. Online supporting resources include an instructor’s manual, lecture slides and annotated web links for students.

Table of Contents 1 2 3 4

Setting the Scene – HRM and Performance Strategic Performance Management Motivation at Work The Role of Line Managers in Managing Performance 5 Defining and Measuring Individual Work Performance 6 Performance Appraisal and Feedback 7 Integrating Learning and Performance 8 Performance-Related Rewards 9 Managing Under-Performance 10 Absence Management 11 International Performance Management 12 Developing Performance Management

196

Human Resources, Organizational Development and Coaching


This book

<< Offers a complete overview of

the field and aligns performance management strongly with strategic, organizational and HR objectives, equipping the reader with the skills required to implement a successful performance management strategy.

<< Includes a combination of practical

tools, assessments, scenarios and case studies from best practice to build your knowledge of the key areas, including motivation, key competencies, types of assessment, performance reviews and dealing with underperformance.

<< Provides a practical approach by

demonstrating theory in practice, with insights on planning, implementing and assessing relations in an organization in regard to performance.

Performance Management Edition 1

Series: Date: Price:

HR Fundamentals 03/08/2014 £24.99

ISBN Paperback: e-book:

9780749469979 9780749469986

Extent: Dimensions: Subject:

216 234x156 Human Resources Management

Description

Author Information

In today’s competitive and challenging workplaces, it is more important than ever to get the best out of our people. Effective performance management is at the heart of organization success, delivering able, motivated worked, who are aligned to the organization’s values and goals. This book takes us on a journey from a broad, holistic exploration of performance management, into a deeper “how do we do this and add real value?” approach to managing the core activities of performance management, such as objective-setting and giving feedback. It takes a firmly practical stance, providing guidance and ideas both for human resource practitioners and line managers who want performance management to be valuable for the organization and its employees. Drawing on the author’s practical experience of working in HR, this book contains case studies, interviews and activities to support the reader in applying their learning in the workplace.

Linda Ashdown is a Human Resource Management specialist. She spent many years working in the Advertising Industry and was HR Director for Leo Burnett Advertising Ltd. She has also worked as a lecturer delivering a range of HRM/Management courses at degree and postgraduate level. She currently enjoys a portfolio career working part-time at the Chartered Institute of Personnel and Development (CIPD) in the Assessment Department, lecturing at Portsmouth University and providing HRM services through her own company Ashdown-Jones HR Ltd.

Performance Management is part of the brand new HR Fundamentals series, offering practical advice to HR professionals starting out in their career, completing CPD training or studying for their professional qualifications with the CIPD.

Table of Contents 1 2 3

What is performance management? Why is it important? How does it fit with organization and HRM strategy? 4 How does it work? 5 How do you do it? 6 Planning and action 7 Measurement 8 Conclusion

Human Resources, Organizational Development and Coaching

197


Armstrong on Reinventing Performance Management

This book

<< Provides insights into innovative

approaches organizations such as Deloitte, Expedia and Google are taking to build organizational performance

Building a Culture of Continuous Improvement

<< Shows how to build a culture of

Edition 1

<< Empowers line managers to own

Date: Price:

03/01/2017 £29.99

ISBN Paperback: e-book:

9780749478117 9780749478124

Extent: Dimensions: Subject:

managing performance throughout the year which delivers results and reduces bureaucracy the performance management process rather than HR, ensuring that the process is effectively cascaded across the business

272 234x156 Performance Management

Author Information

Description

Michael Armstrong is a companion and former chief examiner of the Chartered Institute of Personal Development (CIPD), a joint managing partner of E-reward and an independent management consultant. He is the author of several bestselling HR books including Armstrong’s Handbook of Human Resource Management Practice, Armstrong’s Handbook of Reward Management Practice, and Armstrong’s Handbook of Performance Management, all published by Kogan Page.

Armstrong on Reinventing Performance Management presents a holistic approach to performance management, drawing on Michael Armstrong’s vast research and experience. Most organizations have performance management processes in one form or another, but these are often based on formal annual reviews, forced rankings and directly linked to pay decisions. These traditional approaches are often at the expense of ongoing, continuous feedback and focus on looking back at what has or has not been achieved rather than looking forward. Direct links to pay decisions avert attention from people development, and managers often get lost in the bureaucracy of complex forms rather than fully engaging with their people. Armstrong on Reinventing Performance Management details how to build a culture of ongoing feedback and coaching and provides case studies of how this approach to building performance has been effective in organizations including Deloitte, Gap, Expedia and Google. Filled with practical advice, including how to deal with underperformers, it enables organizations to remove overly bureaucratic and ineffective systems based on top-down judgments and ratings, and demonstrates how to get line managers’ support for the process focusing on actionable feedback and growth.

Table of Contents 1 2 3 4

Performance management – the concept Performance management – the reality Effective performance management What’s happening to performance management? 5 Reinventing performance management: the issues 6 Improve objective setting 7 Replace the annual performance review 8 Abolish rating 9 Enhance personal development 10 Provide training 11 The reinvention programme 12 Conclusions

198

Human Resources, Organizational Development and Coaching


This book

<< Explains the science behind

motivation to unlock productivity and high performance, and reduce staff turnover

Motivation and Performance A Guide to Motivating a Diverse Workforce

<< Provides practical guidance on

how to measure motivation, highlight areas for improvement, demonstrate which employee motivation programs are working, and where costs can be reduced

<< Helps transform talent management and succession planning by explaining what motivates an employee to want to progress in an organization

Edition 1

Date: Price:

03/02/2017 £19.99

ISBN Paperback: e-book:

9780749478131 9780749478148

Extent: Dimensions: Subject:

288 234x156 Performance Management

Description

Author Information

Many organizations approach the issue of employee engagement and motivation by tapping into age, gender and other stereotypes. Motivation and Performance challenges these notions, bringing together evidence that group differences are often exaggerated and that getting to the heart of what really motivates individuals is what’s most important. This book is a practical guide to ensuring that organizations consider all motivators – job security as well as the need for personal growth – to improve employee satisfaction, boost organizational productivity and reduce staff turnover.

Adrian Furnham is professor of psychology at UCL, and adjunct professor of management at the Norwegian School of Management. He has written over 1000 scientific papers and 70 books and is among the most well-known psychologists in the world.

Underpinned by original research, Motivation and Performance features case studies from finance, retail the public and other sectors to show how the principles of motivating employees apply at all levels of the organization, not just at the leadership level, and how values and motivation can be changed and developed. Complete with a framework for conducting effective visits to front-line locations, it will help HR professionals ask the right questions, choose whether to implement external motivation-building programs and make a real impact on an employee’s desire to progress in the company.

Ian MacRae is Director of High Potential, an organizational consultancy providing customised psychological tests and reports for improving performance, predicting potential and developing people.

Table of Contents 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14

Introduction Generational differences A model of motivation The biology of motivation, stress and wellbeing Measuring motivation The power of conversations (communication and motivation) Intrinsic drivers Work engagement organizational health and culture Extrinsic motivation and rewards The underestimated importance of safety, security and stability Value gaps are more important than value differences Outsourcing motivation The dark side and derailment: when motivation turns toxic Final case studies

Human Resources, Organizational Development 199 and Coaching


Understanding Project Management

This book

<< Improves managers’ analytical

skills and ability to recognise and manage projects

Skills and Insights for Successful Project Delivery

<< Supports independent and distance

Edition 1

<< Fits into a range of business

learners with online resources, activities and exercises similar to those on MBA courses

Date: Price:

03/05/2015 £29.99

ISBN Paperback: e-book:

9780749470555 9780749470562

Extent: Dimensions: Subject:

328 240x170 Project Management

courses including MBAs and executive education schemes, allowing students to apply their practical experience in the workplace to their studies

Author Information

Description

Gary Straw has delivered project management modules on MBA and Master’s and management development schemes for business schools in the UK and Eastern Europe, including Aberystwyth School of Management and Business, The Management Centre at Bangor University and Kingston Business School. He has also delivered ILM and CMI project management courses. His professional experience and insights into project management have developed through working within a number of private- and public-sector organizations, delivering projects in a range of market sectors.

Understanding Project Management takes an applied approach to the study of project management, carefully balancing reflective practice and methodology necessary for successful deployment of tools and techniques in the real world. Including plenty of practical examples as well as contemporary real-world case studies, Understanding Project Management takes a unique approach to the study of project management with an emphasis on international aspects and dilemmas that are increasingly common in the contemporary world. With a host of features to encourage reflection and reinforce learning, it is the ideal complement for independent or classroom study on a range of business courses. Understanding Project Management helps managers understand project management, develop perspectives in application, and, through reflection, enables them to develop a project management capability, at an individual, organization or project level. The content throughout is guided by practice, making this an essential read for anyone wishing to make a success of the project management role. Online supporting resources include lecture slides and an instructor’s manual.

Table of Contents 1

An introduction to projects and project management 2 Projects at the conceptual phase 3 Planning within projects 4 After the planning: delivering projects 5 Managing to completion 6 Reviewing and learning in projects 7 Project: a way of thinking 8 Within and outside projects 9 A global stage 10 Managing and leading project enviornments 11 A spectrum of project management roles 12 Develop the capability 13 Projects in an ideal world 13.1 An introduction to projects and project management 13.2 Projects at the conceptual phase 13.3 Planning within projects 14 Projects in a real world 14.1 After the planning: delivering projects 14.2 Managing to completion 14.3 Reviewing and learning in projects

200

Human Resources, Organizational Development and Coaching

15 Projects in a challenging world 15.1 Projects: a way of thinking 15.2 Within and outside projects 15.3 A global stage 16 Developing a capability 16.1 Managing and leading in project environments 16.2 A spectrum of project management roles 16.3 Develop the capability


This book

<< Takes a practical focus which makes it ideal for both practitioners and those studying reward as part of a professional qualification

<< Includes real-world examples from BT, GlaxoSmithKline, and Friends Provident

<< Provides the latest thinking and

research including new content on reward systems and reward policies, and the factors that affect reward

Armstrong’s Handbook of Reward Management Practice Edition 5

Date: Price:

03/11/2015 £44.99

ISBN Paperback: e-book:

9780749473891 9780749473907

Extent: Dimensions: Subject:

392 240x170 Reward Management

Description

Author Information

Armstrong’s Handbook of Reward Management Practice is the definitive guide to understanding, developing and implementing effective reward. It is closely aligned to the CIPD’s standard in reward management and is supported by online resources for both lecturers and students. Updated to reflect the practical implications of the most recent research and discussion on reward management, this new fifth edition includes a new chapter on computerized reward management, completely updated chapters on job evaluation, pay structures, merit pay and executive pay, and new case studies.

Michael Armstrong is a former Chief Examiner of the Chartered Institute of Personnel and Development, joint managing partner of e-reward and an independent management consultant. He has sold over 500,000 books on the subject of HRM, including the best-selling Armstrong’s Handbook of Human Resource Management Practice, Armstrong’s Handbook of Performance Management and Armstrong’s Handbook of Strategic Human Resource Management, all published by Kogan Page.

As with all of Armstrong’s texts, Armstrong’s Handbook of Reward Management Practice truly bridges the gap between academic and practitioner and is, therefore ideally suited to anyone studying for a professional qualification in HR, of which Reward is often a core part, in particular the CIPD’s intermediate and advanced level qualifications. Online supporting resources include lecture slides, an instructor’s manual and a student’s manual complete with a glossary, bibliography and literature review.

Table of Contents 1 An overview of reward management 1.1 Fundamentals of reward management 1.2 Reward systems 1.3 Strategic reward 1.4 Reward policies 1.5 Factors affecting reward 1.6 Motivation and reward 1.7 Engagement and reward 1.8 Performance and reward 1.9 Financial rewards 1.10 Non-financial rewards 1.11 Total rewards 1.12 The ethical approach to reward management 2 Base pay management 2.1 Market pricing 2.2 Job evaluation 2.3 Grade and pay structures 2.4 Equal pay 3 Rewarding and recognizing performance 3.1 Merit pay 3.2 Bonus schemes 3.3 Team pay 3.4 Rewarding for business performance 3.5 Recognition

4 Rewarding special groups 4.1 Executive Reward 4.2 Rewarding sales and customer service staff 4.3 Rewarding knowledge workers 4.4 Rewarding manual workers 4.5 International reward 5 Employee benefits 5.1 Employee benefits provision 5.2 Flexible benefits 6 The practice of rweard management 6.1 Evidence – based reward management 6.2 Managing reward systems 6.3 Managing reward risk 6.4 Responsibility for reward

Human Resources, Organizational Development and Coaching

201


Reward Management

This book

<< New to this edition: new material

on reward management and gender; the Living Wage; Pay Progression systems; evaluating reward systems; job insecurity and non-standard forms of employment

Alternatives, Consequences and Contexts Edition 3

<< Includes extended and updated

Imprint: Date: Price:

CIPD 15/05/2016 ÂŁ45.99

ISBN Paperback: e-book:

9781843983774 9781843984443

Extent: Dimensions: Subject:

448 246x189 Reward Management

coverage of executive pay, pensions, evidence-based reward and Total Reward

<< Online resources: lecturer guides and PowerPoint slides

Author Information

Description

Stephen J. Perkins is Dean of the Faculty and Professor in Corporate Governance and Leadership at London Metropolitan University, UK.

Reward Management is a comprehensive guide to all elements of reward in the workplace. From the theoretical frameworks and legal context of reward to pay structures, pay setting, progression and variable pay schemes, this book provides all the essential information for both students of reward management and practitioners involved in reward management in organisations.

Geoff White is Professor of Human Resource Management at the University of Greenwich Business School, UK. Sarah Jones is Senior Lecturer in Human Resource Management at the University of Bedfordshire, UK.

Reward Management also includes discussion of benefits, pensions and non-financial reward as well as essential information about rewarding directors and executives and how to manage international reward management. This includes guidance on how to reward multi-local talent, how to manage multinational contexts for employee reward management and how to account for expatriates in reward management. This 3rd edition includes brand new coverage of reward management and gender, the Living Wage and non-standard forms of employment to ensure that readers are fully aware of the latest contemporary development in reward management. Accompanying online resources include lecturer guides and PowerPoint slides for instructors.

Table of Contents 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

202

Human Resources, Organizational Development and Coaching

Introducing the Reward Management System Conceptual and Theoretical Frameworks The Legal, Employment Relations and Market Context Base Pay Structures and Relationships Pay-Setting, Composition and Progression Variable Pay Schemes Benefits Pensions Non-Financial Reward Rewarding Directors and Executives International Reward Management Reward Management within HRM


This book

<< Michael Rose succinctly

rationalises the huge range of reward components the reward practitioner is faced with and explains how they fit together in an easily understandable and informative way

<< Summarizes the key issues that

need to be considered when developing a reward strategy that gets results, including basic pay, variable pay and benefits

<< Includes brief examples of best

practice, real-life case studies, short exercises and reflective questions to help you think through applying the principles effectively in your organization

Reward Management Edition 1

Series: Date: Price:

HR Fundamentals 03/04/2014 £24.99

ISBN Paperback: e-book:

9780749469801 9780749469818

Extent: Dimensions: Subject:

280 234x156 Reward Management

Description

Author Information

Reward Management is a practical guide to understanding and implementing really effective reward strategies in your organization. It offers a complete overview of the field and how to align your approach to reward management with the HR and broader organizational strategy. Tailored to the needs of practitioners, it uses a combination of practical tools, scenarios and case studies to cover key areas including pay grades and structure, job evaluation, pay reviews, bonus plans, non-cash reward, benefits, tax issues and much more. Aligning reward with the strategic objectives of the organization it will equip you with the skills you need to plan, implement and assess a reward strategy.

Michael Rose heads Rewards Consulting, a London-based management consultancy specializing in employee reward, recognition, engagement and motivation. He has worked in reward management for over 30 years and was previously the vice president of the CIPD. He is the author of ‘A Guide to Non-Cash Reward’ also published by Kogan Page.

Reward Management is part of the brand new HR Fundamentals series, offering practical advice to HR professionals starting out in their career, completing CPD training or studying for their professional qualifications with the CIPD.

Table of Contents 1 2 2.1 2.2

Introduction The fundamentals of reward management Reward and reward strategy Why reward is important and how it can make an impact 2.3 Relationship between motivation and reward 2.4 How reward fits together 2.5 How to get started with a reward strategy 2.6 Communications 2.7 Tax and National Insurance 3 Reward in practice 3.1 Grades and pay structures 3.2 Managing pay data and pay reviews 3.3 Bonus plans 3.4 Recognition and non-cash reward 3.5 Long-term plans 3.6 Benefits

Human Resources, Organizational Development 203 and Coaching


Resourcing and Talent Management Edition 6

This book

<< Takes a comprehensive look at

all areas of resourcing and talent management, from recruitment and retention to retirement and redundancy

<< New to this edition: more

international content and examples, content on technological developments including e-recruitment and resourcing through social media and increased coverage of ethics and CSR

24/02/2014 £46.99

Date: Price:

<< Online Resources: instructor’s

ISBN Paperback: e-book:

9781843983576 9781843983705

Extent: Dimensions: Subject:

456 246x189 Talent Management

manual, lecture slides, feedback on exercises in the book and web links for each chapter for students

Author Information

Description

Stephen Taylor, Chartered FCIPD, is a senior lecturer in Human Resource Management at the University of Exeter Business School in the UK. He is also a Chief Examiner for the CIPD. Before his academic career he worked in a variety of management roles in the hotel industry and the NHS. He is coauthor of Armstrong’s Handbook of Resource Management Practice published by Kogan Page.

Resourcing and Talent Management is the essential companion for the CIPD Level 7 Advanced Resourcing and Talent Management module. Mapped to the CIPD unit, this textbook offers broad and accessible coverage of topics such as employment markets, flexibility, fairness, diversity, human resource planning, recruitment, employer branding, retention and retirement. Dismissals and redundancy are also discussed in depth. This fully updated 6th edition of Resourcing and Talent Management includes more international content and examples, content on technological developments including e-recruitment and resourcing through social media and increased coverage of ethics and CSR. Its comprehensive scope makes it ideal for those studying any resourcing, talent management or recruitment and selection module. Online supporting resources for lecturers include an instructor’s manual, lecture slides and feedback on exercises in the book. Student resources include web links for each chapter.

Table of Contents 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20

204

Human Resources, Organizational Development and Coaching

Introduction Employment Markets and Regulation Flexibility Fairness and Diversity Human Resource Planning Job Analysis and Job Design Recruitment Advertising Alternative Recruitment Methods Employer Branding Selection – The Classic Trio Advanced Methods of Employee Selection The New Employee Succession Planning Measuring and Analysing Employee Turnover Improving Employee Retention Retirement Dismissals Redundancy Resourcing and Talent Management Strategies The Future of Work


This book

<< Shows how to attract the best

candidates and keep them by building cultures in which they feel valued

Inclusive Talent Management How Business can Thrive in an Age of Diversity

<< Provides evidence for how better

diversity and inclusion practices lead to increased creativity, openness to change, new ideas and understanding of new markets

<< Includes original research from

globally recognised organizations including Goldman Sachs, NHS, Telefonica, Unilever, KPMG, Royal Mail, Hitachi, Oxfam, Novartis and the Rio 2016 Olympic Games on how diversity and inclusion activities can improve talent attraction, management and retention

Edition 1

Date: Price:

03/07/2016 £29.99

ISBN Paperback: e-book:

9780749475871 9780749475888

Extent: Dimensions: Subject:

280 234x156 Talent Management

Description

Author Information

Organizations traditionally have had a clear distinction between their policies on diversity and inclusion and their talent management. The main driving force behind diversity and inclusion has been being seen to be a good employer, to be able to make claims in the annual report and to feel as though a positive contribution is being made to society. On the other hand, talent management activities have been driven by a real business need to ensure that the organization has the right people with the right skills in the right place to drive operational success. Inclusive Talent Management aligns talent management and diversity and inclusion, offering a fresh perspective on why the current distinction between them needs to disappear.

Stephen Frost works with clients worldwide to embed inclusion into their decision making. He teaches at various business schools and was formerly Head of Diversity and Inclusion for the London Organizing Committee of the Olympic Games and Paralympic Games.

Featuring case studies from internationally recognised brands such as Goldman Sachs, Unilever, KPMG, Hitachi, Oxfam and the NHS, Inclusive Talent Management shows that to achieve business objectives and gain the competitive advantage, it is imperative that organizations take an inclusive approach to talent management. It puts forward a compelling and innovative case, raising questions not only for the HR community but also to those in senior management positions, providing the practical steps, global examples and models for incorporating diversity and inclusion activities into talent management strategy.

Danny Kalman is a talent management consultant, executive coach and regular speaker on leadership development. He was Director of Global Talent at Panasonic Corporation from 2008-2013.

Table of Contents 1

Challenge – The Addiction to Likeness in an Age of Diversity = Sameness 2 The Fierce Urgency of Now 2.1 Homogenous Talent Management 2.2 History – How a Segregated Mindset Evolved 2.3 The Future – Diversity is Local, Inclusion is Global 2.4 The Case for Inclusive Talent Management 3 How to Meet the Challenge 3.1 ITM in Recruitment – Finding Diverse Talent 3.2 ITM in Development – Growing Diverse Talent 3.3 ITM in Retention – Keeping Diverse Talent 3.4 Leadership – How You Can Make a Difference 3.5 Resolution: Change the System (Unconscious Nudges) + Change Your Behaviour (Conscious Leadership) = Inclusion

Human Resources, Organizational Development 205 and Coaching


Logistics, Operations & Supply Chain Management Innovation and Best Practice in Logistics Operations Management Transport Procurement Supply Chain Management

www.koganpage.com

207


Featured Titles NEW BOOK

Warehousing and Transportation Logistics

Systems, Planning, Application and Cost Effectiveness Heinrich Martin Apr 2018 9780749482206 Page 77

NEW BOOK

Decarbonising Logistics

Distributing Goods in a Low Carbon World Alan McKinnon Jun 2018 9780749480479 Page 78

NEW BOOK

Container Logistics

The Role of the Container in the Supply Chain Dr Rolf Neise 9780749481247 May 2018 Page 85

NEW BOOK

Supply Chain Strategy and Financial Metrics

The Supply Chain Triangle Of Service, Cost And Cash NEW BOOK

Packaging Logistics

Strategies to Reduce Supply Chain Costs and the Environmental Impact of Packaging Henrik PĂĽlsson Jun 2018 9780749481704 Page 90

208

Discover our full portfolio of books at www.koganpage.com

Bram DeSmet 9780749482572 May 2018 Page 87


This book

<< Unique breadth and depth

of coverage of supply chain strategy AND logistics/ distribution including step-bystep strategic accounts of setting up and operating supply chains for maximum value and the tactical elements of logistics and distribution

<< Worked examples using current real-world data (flow charts, tables, maps, equations) from the authors’ first-hand industry experience bring the concepts to life for both students and professionals << Figures and flow charts show how the elements of supply chains are interdependent, and a dedicated chapter on supply chain integration brings them together

The definitive guide to supply chain philosophy, strategy AND the practicalities of logistics and distribution. The Handbook of Logistics and Distribution Management is a step-by-step guide to setting up and managing supply chains to add maximum value to the organisations they serve. Benefiting from the author team’s years of practical field-based experience of making supply chains work in some of the most challenging environments across the world from developed economies to third world countries and war zones, this is a book that will enthuse students and be an invaluable desk reference throughout the careers of practitioners. Packed with worked examples and current real-world data (flow charts, tables, maps and equations) The Handbook of Logistics and Distribution Management offers complete coverage on all the key aspects of distribution, logistics and supply chain planning and management with clear and straightforward explanations. This is not a compilation of work drawn from a disparate collection of research papers and miscellaneous projects but is a logical and complete holistic view of how the various elements within the supply chain all fit together. As well as focussing on the overarching supply chain issues key to successful business operations, the book covers the detailed, nitty gritty of how the various elements of distribution and logistics input into the supply chain as a whole. In recent years globalisation, increased competition and new technologies have all changed the landscape in which supply chains operate. This fully revised 6th edition of The Handbook of Logistics and Distribution Management provides solutions to the key challenges in the supply chain industry. It includes new material on international freight forwarding, intermodal shipping, environmental best practice, cool chain and outsourcing as well as redesigned chapters on logistics costs and trade-offs, inventory planning and forecasting and road freight transport. Combined with a new, detailed index of contents this is the ultimate study/reference companion. Also now includes online resources including PowerPoint lecture slides (featuring tables, images and formulae from the text), glossary of terms, weblinks, blog articles, video interviews and infographics. Part One: Concepts of logistics and distribution 1 Introduction to logistics and distribution 2 Integrated logistics and the supply chain 3 Customer service and logistics 4 Channels of distribution 5 Key issues and challenges for logistics and the supply chain Part Two: Planning for logistics 6 Planning framework for logistics 7 Logistics processes 8 Supply chain segmentation 9 Logistics costs and trade-off analysis 10 Logistics network planning 11 Logistics management and organization 12 Omnichannel fulfilment 13 Manufacturing logistics Part Three: Procurement, inventory and demand forecasting 14 Procurement and supply 15 Inventory: the basic concepts 16 Inventory and the supply chain 17 Inventory planning and demand forecasting Part Four: Warehousing and storage 18 Principles of warehousing 19 Storage and handling systems (palletized) 20 Storage and handling systems (non-palletized)

21 Order picking and packing 22 Receiving and dispatch 23 Warehouse design 24 Warehouse management and information Part Five: Freight transport 25 International logistics: modal choice 26 Maritime transport 27 Air transport 28 Rail and intermodal transport 29 Road freight transport: vehicle selection 30 Road freight transport: vehicle costing 31 Road freight transport: planning and resourcing 32 Road freight transport routeing and scheduling 33 International freight forwarding Part Six: Outsourcing logistics 34 Outsourcing: operations and services 35 Outsourcing: decision criteria 36 Outsourcing: the selection process 37 Outsourcing: management 38 Cost and performance monitoring 39 Benchmarking 40 Information and communication technology in the supply chain 41 Security and safety 42 Logistics and the environment 43 Humanitarian logistics

The Handbook of Logistics and Distribution Management Understanding the Supply Chain Edition 6

On ine resources

Date: Price:

03/01/2017 £44.99

ISBN Paperback: e-book:

9780749476779 9780749476786

Extent: Dimensions: Subject:

912 240x170 Logistics

Author Information Alan Rushton is a Director of Dialog Consultants, and was formerly the Director of Graduate Programmes at the Centre for Logistics and Supply Chain Management at Cranfield University. He is also a Chartered Fellow of the CILT (UK). Phil Croucher is an independent supply chain consultant and lecturer, has an MSc in Logistics and Distribution Management from Cranfield University and is a Chartered Fellow of the CILT (UK). Dr Peter Baker is an independent consultant and lecturer, a Visiting Fellow at Cranfield University and a Chartered Fellow of CILT (UK).

Logistics, Operations and Supply 209 Chain Management


Logistics, Supply Chain and Operations Management

This book

<< In-depth case studies deliver

insight and perspective on current and emerging issues, trends and significant new areas of research in the fields of logistics, supply chain and operations

Case Study Collection

Edition 1

<< Cases cover a variety of topics

including how to tackle technologyrelated issues, setting and reviewing budgets, managing economic performance and managing costs

Date: Price:

03/03/2016 £145

ISBN Paperback: e-book:

9780749475956 9780749477493

Extent: Dimensions: Subject:

384 234x156 Logistics

<< Shares first-hand experiences

and knowledge from subject matter experts in industry and academia regarding how to reach business objectives and overcome considerable obstacles

Author Information

Description

Professor David B. Grant is Professor of Logistics at Hull University Business School. He has over 175 publications and is on the editorial boards of numerous journals.

Logistics, Supply Chain and Operations Management Case Study Collection is a rich and varied compilation of relevant case studies from across logistics, supply chain management and operations. It contains real life scenarios from leading companies including Volvo, Vortex, Honda of America, Green Cargo and Swedish Transport Administration. It includes a foreword by Martin Christopher.

Table of Contents 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17

210

Logistics, Operations and Supply Chain Management

Foreword by Martin Christopher Introduction by David B. Grant Part 1 – Editor’s Introduction to the Operations Management Cases The Nuclear Effect of Computer Malware by Lucian Tipi Real World Effects of Cyber Attacks by Lucian Tipi Jewelry Design and Manufacture Operations by Brian Lawrence Sustainability in the Hotel Industry by Arvind Upadhyay, Francesco Pomponi and Céline Vadam The Closure of a Bank Department by Brian Lawrence Demand Covering and Service Level Estimation in Public Services Planning by Mike Simpson and Andrea Genovese Job Shop Layout at Jones Medical Laboratories by Mike Simpson and Andrea Genovese Monument Engineering Ltd by Mike Simpson and Andrea Genovese The Mortgage Advisor by Mike Simpson and Andrea Genovese SABE Tractors by Mike Simpson and Andrea Genovese Lawnmower Engines Ltd, Variable Costs, Breakeven Points and Profit by Mike Simpson and Andrea Genovese Make or Buy Decisions at Sports Co. Ltd by Mike Simpson and Andrea Genovese Using Operational Research to Calculate the Cost of Quality by Mike Simpson and Andrea Genovese The Use of Deseasonalisation Techniques in Demand Forecasting by Mike Simpson and Andrea Genovese

18 Part 2 – Editor’s Introduction to the Logistics and Supply Chain Management Cases 19 The Maintenance Stores Dilemma by Gwynne Richards 20 Communication in Business Practice by Xia Zhu 21 Collaborative Distribution Considering Economic and Environmental Performance by Vahid Mirzabeiki 22 Data Sharing Between Supply Chain Actors by Vahid Mirzabeiki 23 Supply Chain Design for e-Retailing Companies by Vahid Mirzabeiki 24 Delays Entering a Container Port by Brian Lawrence 25 Drivers and Barriers in Implementing Information Management Systems in European Micro Enterprises by Francesco Pomponi, Lorenzo Coccia, Arvind Upadhyay 26 Growth Strategies of Logistics Service Providers by Nigel Caldwell and Christian Konig 27 Managing Sustainability in the Fashion Supply Chain by Piyya Muhammad Rafi-Ul-Shan, Patsy Perry and David Grant 28 Supply Chain Dreams and Nightmares by Gerard Chick 29 Uncertainty, Disruption and Resilience by Brian Lawrence 30 Supply Chain Management and Return on Total Net Assets by Simon Templar 31 Managing Workers’ Interests Across Global Supply Chain Networks by Patsy Perry and Mohamed Abdel-Wahab 32 Honda of America’s Emphasis on Strategic Cost Management by Gerard Chick 33 The Transportation Problem by Mike Simpson and Andrea Genovese


This book

<< Assesses the principal challenges

faced by humanitarian logistics practitioners and offers suggestions for best practice when supporting natural disasters and complex emergencies

<< Includes online resources for lecturers and students

<< New to this edition: contains

new chapters on providing support for complex emergencies, waste management and reverse logistics, the application of value stream analysis and the potential of new technologies

Humanitarian Logistics Meeting the Challenge of Preparing For and Responding To Disasters Edition 3

On ine resources

Date: Price:

03/05/2018 £49.99

ISBN Paperback: e-book:

9780749481445 9780749481452

Extent: Dimensions: Subject:

320 234x156 Logistics

Description

Author Information

Effective logistics play a critical role in disaster preparation and response, but how can those working in this field deliver in environments which are often dangerous and unstable? Humanitarian Logistics provides thought-provoking guidance and discussion of the core issues facing practitioners involved in managing the logistics of disaster relief. With insights from academics and practitioners who have worked in these situations, this multi-contributed book offers suggestions for best practice and international perspectives on the nature of the humanitarian logistics challenge.

Professor Peter Tatham is a leading international researcher in the field of humanitarian logistics, and is the Deputy Head of the Department of International Business and Asian Studies at Griffith Business School, Queensland, Australia.

Now in its 3rd edition, Humanitarian Logistics is fully updated and contains new chapters on providing support for complex emergencies, waste management and reverse logistics, the application of value stream analysis and the potential of new technologies such as 3D printing, cash transfer programmes and drones. With a particular focus on pre-disaster preparation and inter-agency cooperation, this book is essential reading for anyone who needs to understand how to respond effectively during a disaster or crisis. Includes online resources for lecturers and students.

Martin Christopher is Emeritus Professor of Marketing and Logistics at Cranfield University, UK. His work in the field of logistics and supply chain management has gained international recognition. He is a regular contributor to conferences and workshops around the world.

Table of Contents 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

Introduction Risky Business – What Humanitarians Can Learn from Business Logisticians and Vice Versa Impacts of Funding Systems on Humanitarian Operations The Importance of Information Technology in Humanitarian Supply Chains – Opportunities and Challenges in the HELIOS project New Technologies Humanitarian Logistics and the Cluster Approach – Global Shifts and the US Perspective The Increasing Importance of Services in Humanitarian Logistics TBC The Journey to Humanitarian Supply Network Management – An African Perspective The Challenge of Waste Management and Reverse Logistics Skills for Humanitarian Logistics A Practitioner’s Perspective

13 Humanitarian Logistics in Support of Complex Emergencies 14 The Application of Value Stream Analysis to the Humanitarian Context 14.1 So Where Next? Developments in Humanitarian Logistics

Logistics, Operations and Supply Chain Management

211


Introduction to Global Logistics

This book

<< Offers a step-by-step guide to global logistics

Delivering the Goods Edition 2

<< Provides in-depth definitions,

descriptions and explorations of the strategic principles and practices in transportation modes and supply chain verticals, including: freight forwarding, contract logistics, shipping, road freight, air cargo and express

03/11/2016 ÂŁ39.99

Date: Price:

<< Examines important trends and

ISBN Paperback: e-book:

9780749478254 9780749478261

Extent: Dimensions: Subject:

384 234x156 Logistics

developments that are shaping the industry, including 3D printing, megacities, and post-harvest food losses

Author Information

Description

John Manners-Bell is the founder and CEO of Transport Intelligence, a leading supplier of market solutions to the global logistics industry. He is Honorary Visiting Professor at the London Metropolitan University, adviser to the World Economic Forum and a former Chairman of the Supply Chain Council of the World Economic Forum. Prior to establishing Transport Intelligence, he worked as an analyst in consultancies specializing in international trade, transport and logistics. John MannersBell is author of Logistics and Supply Chains in Emerging Markets and Supply Chain Risk.

Introduction to Global Logistics offers a step-by-step guide to global logistics. Covering the breadth of logistics, this highly accessible text covers everything you need to know and is illustrated by engaging case studies of market leaders. In this comprehensive book John Manners-Bell provides an in depth definition, description and exploration of the strategic principles and practices in transportation modes and supply chain verticals, including: freight forwarding, contract logistics, shipping, road freight, air cargo and express. The book also examines major sectors, including Automotive, Chemical, Pharmaceutical, Retail, Consumer, and High Tech. Introduction to Global Logistics offers a detailed examination of key topics, including: how the logistics industry has developed, how it is influenced by macro-economic factors and demand-side trends, what the risks are to the industry, and how it will develop over the coming years. It examines important trends and developments that are shaping the industry, including 3D printing, megacities, and post-harvest food losses.

Table of Contents 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20

212

Logistics, Operations and Supply Chain Management

Foreword Introduction Whatâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s shaping the global logistics market? An industry in transformation: towards consolidation Logistics market development by geography The emergence of logistics clusters International freight forwarding Contract logistics European road freight Express parcels Air cargo Container shipping The European rail and intermodal sectors Supply chain technologies Supply chain dynamics of vertical sectors Risks in global supply chains The e-commerce logistics phenomenon Supply chain innovation and disruption Ethical and sustainable supply chain strategies References


This book

<< Examines the most pressing

issues and current trends in green logistics

<< Analyses the environmental

consequences of logistics and how to deal with them

<< Examines ways of reducing these

externalities and achieving a more sustainable balance between economic, environmental and social objectives

Green Logistics Improving the Environmental Sustainability of Logistics Edition 3

Date: Price:

03/02/2015 £39.99

ISBN Paperback: e-book:

9780749471859 9780749471866

Extent: Dimensions: Subject:

448 234x156 Logistics

Description

Author Information

Leading the way in current thinking on environmental logistics, Green Logistics provides a unique insight on the environmental impacts of logistics and the actions that companies and governments can take to deal with them. It is written by leading researchers in the field and provides a comprehensive view of the subject for students, managers and policy-makers.

Alan McKinnon is Professor and Head of Logistics at Kühne Logistics University, Hamburg. He has been researching and teaching in freight transport and logistics for 35 years and has published extensively in journals and books.

Fully updated, the 3rd edition of Green Logistics has a more global perspective than previous editions. It introduces new contributors and international case studies that illustrate the impact of green logistics in practice. There is a new chapter on the links between green logistics and corporate social responsibility and a series of postscripts examining the effects of new developments, such as 3D printing, distribution by drone, the physical internet and the concept of peak freight. The 3rd edition of Green Logistics includes indispensable online supporting materials, including graphics, tables, chapter summaries, and guidelines for lecturers.

Table of Contents 1

Assessing the environmental effects of logistics 1.1 Environmental sustainability: A new priority for logistics managers – Alan McKinnon 1.2 Assessing the external impacts of freight transport – Maja Piecyk, Sharon Cullinane and Julia Edwards 1.3 Carbon auditing of companies, supply chains and products – Maja Piecyk 1.4 Evaluating and internalizing the environmental costs of logistics – Maja Piecyk, Alan McKinnon and Julian Allen 2 Strategic perspective 2.1 Green logistics, sustainable development and corporate social responsibility – Maja Piecyk and Maria Björklund 2.2 Restructuring road freight networks within supply chains – Irina Harris, Vasco SanchezRodrigues, Mohamed Naim and Christine Mumford 2.3 Transferring freight to ‘greener’ transport modes – Allan Woodburn and Anthony Whiteing 2.4 Development of greener vehicles, aircraft and ships – Alan McKinnon, Julian Allen and Allan Woodburn

2.5 Reducing the environmental impact of warehousing – Peter Baker and Clive Marchant 3 Operational perspective 3.1 Optimizing the routeing of vehicles – Richard Eglese and Daniel Black 3.2 Opportunities for improving vehicle utilization – Alan McKinnon 3.3 Increasing fuel efficiency in the road freight sector – Alan McKinnon 3.4 Alternative fuels and freight vehicles: Status, costs and benefits, and growth – Jacques Leonardi, Sharon Cullinane and Julia Edwards 4 Key issues 4.1 Sustainability strategies for city logistics – Julian Allen, Michael Browne and José HolguínVeras 4.2 E-business, e-logistics and the environment – Alan McKinnon, Yingli Wang, Andrew Potter and Julia Edwards 4.3 Reverse logistics for the management of waste – Tom Cherrett, Sarah Maynard, Fraser McLeod and Adrian Hickford 4.4 The food miles debate: Is shorter better? – Tara Garnett 5 Implications for public policy and the future of supply chains 5.1 The role of government in promoting green logistics – Alan McKinnon

Michael Browne is Professor of Logistics at the University of Westminster, London. He has worked on studies for Transport for London, the European Commission, the UK Department for Transport and commercial organizations. Maja Piecyk is Associate Professor in Logistics at Heriot-Watt University, Edinburgh. Much of her research has focused on the optimisation of supply networks and environmental impacts of logistics. Anthony Whiteing is a Senior Lecturer in the Institute for Transport Studies at the University of Leeds. An academic with 30 years’ experience, he has been involved in a wide range of UK and European research projects in the field of freight transport.

Logistics, Operations and Supply Chain Management

213


Logistics and Retail Management

This book

<< Brings together key thinking on

issues in the retail supply chain.

<< Includes brand new chapters on

Emerging Issues and New Challenges in the Retail Supply Chain Edition 4

international fashion and CSR in the textile trade.

<< Contributions from both academics and professionals.

Date: Price:

03/04/2014 £44.99

ISBN Paperback: e-book:

9780749468231 9780749468248

Extent: Dimensions: Subject:

280 234x156 Logistics

Author Information

Description

John Fernie is Professor of Retail Marketing at Heriot-Watt University. He is a Fellow of the Chartered Institute of Logistics and Transport and a member of the Chartered Institute of Marketing.

The fourth edition of Logistics and Retail Management has been substantially updated to take account of recent developments in retail logistics. Retailers have recognised the need to have more involvement in supply chains and noted that benefits can be achieved in both service levels and cost reduction. Notwithstanding the major strides made, numerous challenges remain, and new issues are constantly emerging.

Leigh Sparks is Professor of Retail Studies at the Institute for Retail Studies, University of Stirling. He is a member of the Chartered Institute of Logistics and Transport and Chair of the Academy of Marketing Research Committee.

This book brings together well-known academics and practitioners, who share their research, ideas and experience of current thinking on supply chain management in retail. Reflecting the changing needs of the global marketplace and responding to the challenges faced by retailers, this new book features a chapter on International Fashion Supply Chain Management and another on CSR and the textile supply chain.

Table of Contents 1

Retail logistics: changes and challenges – John Fernie and Leigh Sparks 2 Relationships in the supply chain – John Fernie 3 The internationalization of the retail supply chain – John Fernie 4 The international fashion supply chain and corporate social responsibility – Patsy Perry, John Fernie and Steve Wood 5 The footwear supply chain: the case of Schuh – John Fernie and Colin Temple 6 Supply chain strategy in the fashion and luxury industry – Alessandro Brun and Cecilia Castelli 7 Tesco’s supply chain management – Leigh Sparks 8 On-shelf availability in UK retailing – John Fernie and David B Grant 9 The development of e-tail logistics – John Fernie, Suzanne Fernie and Alan McKinnon 10 The greening of retail logistics – Alan McKinnon and Julia Edwards

214

Logistics, Operations and Supply Chain Management


This book

<< Examines the strategic role of

e-logistics in managing information and information flows within and between organisations in today’s dynamic global environment.

<< Provides a clear and accessible guide to key technological and business developments. << Features contributions from leading practitioners and academics in the field.

E-Logistics Managing Your Digital Supply Chains for Competitive Advantage Edition 1

Date: Price:

03/03/2016 £44.99

ISBN Paperback: e-book:

9780749472665 9780749472672

Extent: Dimensions: Subject:

536 234x156 Logistics

Description

Author Information

E-logistics serves as the nerve system for the whole supply chain and enables smooth information flow within and between organisations. This contributed book focusses on the strategic role of e-logistics in today’s dynamic global environment.

Dr Yingli Wang is a lecturer in logistics and operations management at Cardiff Business School. Her research on e-logistics dates back to early 2000’s and has attracted funding from various funding bodies such as Engineering and Physical Sciences Research Council, European Regional Development Funding, Welsh Government, Highways England, and Department for Transport. Before embarking on her academic career, she worked for about 8.5 years at Nestlé China in various senior managerial roles.

In E-Logistics international experts from both academia and industry examine how competitiveness and productivity in transport, logistics and supply chain management can be improved using e-logistics systems and technologies. A variety of successful e-logistics business approaches are discussed covering a range of commercial sectors and transport modes. Separate chapters consider e-logistics developments for air freight; rail freight; road freight; sea transport and port systems. Subsequent chapters address in depth support systems for B2C and B2B E commerce and e-fulfilment, warehouse management, RFID, electronic marketplaces, global supply network visibility, and service chain automation. Industry case-studies are used to support the discussion. The book also investigates emerging technologies in e-logistics and considers what the future might hold in this rapidly changing and developing field.

Table of Contents 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14

Introduction Supporting ICT infrastructure for future logistics: Intelligent Transport Systems (ITS) and smart grid ICT for air freight management ICT for rail freight ICT for road transport B2C e-commerce and fulfilment The effects of e-commerce on warehousing Advanced warehouse management system deployment and technology innovations to streamline e-logistics processes RFID in logistics The role of GS1 in logistics and e-procurement Regional electronic marketplaces to improve logistics Port-centric ICT system: Building value in supply chains Trade and transport electronic single windows Single window systems for global supply chain management: A case of South Korea

15 End-to-end global visibility management for integrated supply and demand chains 16 Automating a logistics service chain – A telco’s perspective 17 Electronic bills of lading: Sea carriage contracts 18 ICT in multimodal transport and technological trends: unleashing potential for the future

Dr Stephen Pettit is a member of the Transport and Shipping Research Group within the Logistics and Operations Management Section at Cardiff Business School. He has been involved in a wide range of transportrelated research projects, notably for the UK Department of Transport and the European Commission. His recent research has focused on international logistics, port operations and management, and the application of information and communication technology in the fields of transport, logistics and supply chain management.

Logistics, Operations and Supply Chain Management

215


Aviation Logistics

This book

The Dynamic Partnership of Air Freight and Supply Chain Edition 1

<< Explains how the rapidly evolving

global logistics industry works in close partnership with the aviation operators to achieve fast and efficient facilitation

<< Looks at air freight and how

carriers are responding to market demands with new and better methods and technologies

03/02/2016 £39.99

Date: Price:

<< Reviews changes in manufacturing and production methods

ISBN Paperback: e-book:

9780749472702 9780749472719

Extent: Dimensions: Subject:

208 234x156 Logistics

Author Information

Description

Michael Sales specializes in press relations and consultancy for the transport industry. He has handled a number of prestigious clients, including Airports of Paris, Air France Express, Athens International Airport, Cologne Bonn Airport, ECS, Basque regional industrial promotion, Düsseldorf Airport, Budapest Airport and many more. He is also a freelance journalist.

Aviation Logistics looks at the function of the air cargo business and its role in global supply chains and logistics. As global economies are constantly evolving, the supply chain business with its transport partners must be proactive for the future. Technology and its resulting efficiency and transparency are therefore a central part of this book. Aviation Logistics examines how carriers are coming up with new methods and technologies to improve ground handling and road transport, traceability systems and barcoding, security and screening, and safe delivery of perishable items (such as in the pharmaceutical and medical sectors). Endorsed by The International Air Cargo Association (TIACA), Aviation Logistics is supplemented with case studies and contributions from a team of experts including Oliver Evans and Stan Wraight, both industry experts. The book features online resources including a Freighter Directory.

Table of Contents 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

216

Logistics, Operations and Supply Chain Management

Air cargo – trying harder The world of air cargo, Oliver Evans, former TIACA Air cargo history Airport connections Cargo handling agents – the impact of IT Road feeder service Freight forwarder Cool logistics Express and mail Special air cargoes Cargo security and risk Environment Innovation and trends in air logistics Views on the future The law – organizations and regulations governing international aviation Glossary of common air freight terms


This book

<< Combines insights into both

fashion retailing and fashion logistics

<< Studies major forces driving change in the retail industry and how manufacturers can adapt their working practices accordingly

<< Considers fashion retailing and

logistics as part of a wider global supply chain and production system

Fashion Logistics Insights into the Fashion Retail Supply Chain Edition 1

Date: Price:

03/11/2015 ÂŁ44.99

ISBN Paperback: e-book:

9780749472986 9780749472979

Extent: Dimensions: Subject:

216 234x156 Logistics

Description

Author Information

Fashion Logistics examines the principles and practices behind responsible fashion retailing and cost-effective supply chain management in the fashion industry.

John Fernie is Emeritus Professor of Retail Marketing at Heriot-Watt University. He has written and contributed to numerous textbooks and papers on retail management, especially in the field of retail logistics. He is editor of the International Journal of Retail and Distribution Management.

Fashion Logistics assesses the early growth and changes in the industry as well as the drivers of change in todayâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s market. Important forces are driving tremendous changes in the retail industry, particularly in supply chain networks and operations. Manufacturers therefore need to re-think their supply chains so that they are resilient enough to withstand shocks, agile enough to respond quickly to sudden change, flexible enough to customise products, and efficient enough to protect margins. John Fernie and David Grant assess these forces and changes, and how manufacturers should adapt their working practices accordingly. Fashion Logistics integrates case studies of best practice that demonstrate successful fashion retail supply chains of leading companies such as Benetton, Burberry, Schuh and M&S. The book provides vital figures, tables and mini-cases in each chapter, a discussion question at the end of each mini-case, references and suggested readings.

David B. Grant is Professor of Logistics at Hull University Business School, UK and Distinguished Senior Fellow at Hanken School of Economics, Helsinki. He has over 175 publications in various refereed journals, books and conference proceedings, and is on the editorial board of many international journals.

Table of Contents 1 2

Introduction The changing nature of fashion retailing: implications for logistics 3 International fashion sourcing 4 Corporate and social responsibility 5 International logistics 6 In-store consumer service 7 Online consumer service 8 Luxury fashion and SCM 9 Sustainable fashion retailing and logistics

Logistics, Operations and Supply Chain Management

217


Defence Logistics

This book

Enabling and Sustaining Successful Military Operations Edition 1

<< Covers the entire supply chain in a

defence context through real-life case studies, examining issues such as circular logistics in defence and contracting

<< Provides vital insights from

Date: Price:

03/02/2018 ÂŁ44.99

ISBN Paperback: e-book:

9780749478032 9780749478049

Extent: Dimensions: Subject:

320 234x156 Logistics

international academics and professionals currently working in defence logistics areas such as distributive manufacturing and performance management

<< Includes coverage of recent

developments and technologies affecting defence logistics, such as 3D printing and issues such as obsolescence, counterfeiting and sustainability

Author Information

Description

Jeremy Smith manages modules on the Defence Acquisition Management and the Programme and Project Management MScs at Cranfield Defence and Security, UK. He developed and leads several logistics short courses and workshops pitched at strategic and practitioner levels. He served for 25 years in the British Army as a logistician and Ammunition Technical Officer.

The management of logistics and supply chain operations is of vital importance in the defence sector. Defence Logistics looks at established theories and their practical utility, providing insights into current thinking for postgraduate students and professionals through real-life case studies.

Stuart Young joined Cranfield University in 2008 after a career in the Royal Navy. Currently head of the Centre for Defence Acquisition, he has responsibility for a range of procurement and logistics education programmes. His research focuses on the defence customersupplier relationship.

Defence Logistics focuses on key areas of logistics and supply chain management in context, such as sustainability, inventory management, resilience, procurement, information systems and crisis response. This new edited collection includes contributions from international academics from a selection of universities, academies and defence schools, along with practitioners who are currently working in the field of defence logistics.

Table of Contents 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19

218

Logistics, Operations and Supply Chain Management

Introduction Defence Logistics Defined Defence Logistics â&#x20AC;&#x201C; A Historical Perspective Defence Logistics in Context Balancing Efficiency and Effectiveness in Defence Logistics Resilience in Defence Supply Chains Systems Agility in the Defence Supply Chain Achieving Dependability in Defence Systems Supportability Engineering and the Defence Support Chain Planning and Executing Defence Operational Logistics Procurement for Defence Logistics Support Managing Performance in Defence Logistics Optimizing the Defence Inventory Financing Defence Logistics Decision Support in Defence Logistics Defence Logistics and Crisis Response Defence Logistics Information Systems Sustainability in Defence Logistics Defence Logistics â&#x20AC;&#x201C; A Look to the Future


This book

<< Provides a comprehensive overview of maritime logistics

Maritime Logistics A Guide to Contemporary Shipping and Port Management

<< Examines latest logistical

developments within the port and shipping industry

Edition 2

<< Shares the vast range of experience of its editors and contributors, who are all international experts in the field

Date: Price:

03/04/2015 £44.99

ISBN Paperback: e-book:

9780749472689 9780749472696

Extent: Dimensions: Subject:

480 234x156 Logistics

Description

Author Information

Globalisation and the rapid increase in world trade in the past decade have contributed to greater demand for international transport and logistics and, consequently, the expansion of the maritime industry. The dramatic changes in the mode of world trade and cargo transportation make it more important than ever to have a clear understanding of the way in which freight is transported by sea and the role of ports in this exchange.

Dong-Wook Song is Professor of Transport and Logistics at the Transport Research Institute, Edinburgh Napier University. His work is well-recognised in the field and he has received a number of The Best Paper Awards from academic associations and communities. He sits on the editorial board of established journals in transport and logistics. Dong has worked as a consultant for a number of private and public organisations including the UN, OECD, ADB and World Bank. He has served as an elected council member at IAME since 2012.

At the cutting edge in its assessment of the industry, Maritime Logistics covers the whole scope of maritime logistics and examines latest logistical developments within the port and shipping industry. With a range of new international contributors, this new edition has been thoroughly revised and updated. There are new chapters on port centric logistics, hinterland logistics and global supply chains, maritime transport and logistics as a trade facilitator, and future trends and developments. Written by a team of international experts with over fifty years’ experience in the field, Maritime Logistics provides a truly global perspective. The book covers everything that students of logistics, as well as those working within the industry, need to know about maritime logistics, including shipping lines, containers, tankers, dry bulk, port-centric logistics, and much more.

Table of Contents 1 Introduction 1.1 Introduction to maritime logistics – Dong-Wook Song and Photis M Panayides 1.2 Maritime transport and logistics as a trade facilitator – Albert W Veenstra 1.3 International maritime trade and logistics – Funda Yercan and Turkay Yildiz 1.4 Defining maritime logistics and its value – EonSeong Lee, Hyung-Sik Nam and Dong-Wook Song 1.5 Hinterland logistics and global supply chains – Rickard Bergqvist 1.6 Human elements in maritime logistics – Cecilia Österman and Anna-Lisa Osvalder 2 Shipping logistics 2.1 Intermodal freight transport and logistics – Katsuhiko Hayashi and Toshinori Nemoto 2.2 Developing liner service networks in container shipping – César Ducruet and Theo Notteboom 2.3 Supply chain integration of shipping companies – Photis M Panayides, Robert Wiedmer, Panayiotis C Andreou and Christodoulos Louca 2.4 Logistics strategy in container shipping – Alfred J Baird

2.5 Tanker shipping logistics – Robert Desrosiers 2.6 Dry bulk shipping logistics – Claude Comtois and Romuald Lacoste 3 Port logistics 3.1 Dry ports in concept and practice – Violeta Roso and Andrea Rosa 3.2 Port-centric logistics in concept and practice – Nikolaos Valantasis-Kanellos and Dong-Wook Song 3.3 Container hub ports in concept and practice – Hyung-Sik Nam and Dong-Wook Song 3.4 Multinationalizing container ports: Business models and strategies – Francesco Parola 3.5 Public–private partnerships and port logistics performance – Jasmine Siu Lee Lam, Francesco Parola and Photis M Panayides 3.6 Port and logistics chains: Changes in organizational effectiveness – Cimen Karatas Cetin 3.7 Logistics performance of supply chain-oriented ports – Su Han Woo, Stephen Pettit and Anthony Beresford 4 Conclusion 4.1 Looking ahead – Photis M Panayides and DongWook Song

Photis M Panayides is Professor in Shipping Economics, Department of Commerce, Finance and Shipping at Cyprus University of Technology. He reviews for several major journals in the field and has pioneered the development of academic and professional programmes in shipping and logistics. He sits on the editorial board of established journals in the field.

Logistics, Operations and Supply Chain Management

219


Marine Insurance Edition 1

This book

<< Essential advice on addressing,

analysing and solving insurance problems

<< Gives guidance on advising clients and underwriters on points of principle and policy wordings

03/09/2018 ÂŁ44.99

Date: Price: ISBN Paperback: e-book:

9780749482633 9780749482640

Extent: Dimensions: Subject:

288 234x156 Logistics

<< Includes case studies of real-

life situations to enable better understanding of how to deal with the challenges faced in marine insurance

Author Information

Description

Sam Ignarski has held executive roles within the worldâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s leading mutual insurance management company, the Thomas Miller Group, and more recently has run insurance start-up operations in association with CTC, BMM and Mitsui Sumitomo at Lloydâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s. Mr Ignarski runs large international, internetbased publishing activities aimed at shipping, transport insurance and finance professionals. He has held a wide variety of consulting roles in the marine insurance and transport fields..

The The importance of marine insurance has increased more than ever before in this age of globalization. It is one of the most necessary and fundamental forms of insurance within the insurance industry. Marine insurance facilitates global trade and ensures economic property. About 50,000 blue water ships serve world trade. There are at any one time ashore or at sea some 1.3 million seafarers. The specialist international marine and transport insurance industry takes in some $30 billion in premium each year. Some 15,000 individuals work in the international insurance markets. Marine Insurance covers the loss or damage of ships, cargo, terminals, and any transport or cargo by which property is transferred, acquired, or held between the points of origin and final destination. Cover provided includes hull insurance, war risk insurance, loss of profit/ freight insurance, detention insurance, strike insurance or uninsured legal expenses (defence) cover. This essential guide will equip you with the knowledge to better understand the way marine insurance markets function and the terms of the standard covers available. Essential for both suppliers and specialist buyers of marine insurance, the author Sam Ignarzi looks at types of insurance covers; P&I insurance; cargo insurance; hull insurance; strikes, riots and political risks; war risks; reinsurance; claims handling, uncertainties, market trends and future directions. Each chapter includes real-life case studies to illustrate different issues that arise with marine insurance. There are also sample terms of agreement, showing best practice.

Table of Contents 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

220

Logistics, Operations and Supply Chain Management

Origins and Function of Insurance in International Trade The Modern Marine Insurance Market of Buyers, Brokers, Insurers, Reinsurers Types of Marine Insurance Covers P&I Insurance Case Studies Cargo Insurance Case Studies Hull Insurance Case Studies Strikes, Riots and Political Risks Case Studies War Risks Case Studies Reinsurance General Average and Salvage, Limitation of Claims, Claims Handling and Case Studies Present Uncertainties of Non-Disclosure, Market Trends, Consolidation and Distribution Future Directions, Electronic Bills of Lading and Electronic Distribution of Marine Insurance


This book

<< Provides the most comprehensive book available on the subject of port management and operations

<< Focuses on the big picture,

which differentiates it from other available texts which are regional (e.g. Europe, Asia) or focus on specific aspects (privatisation, competitiveness)

<< Includes research-based findings

as well as invaluable insights and international case studies

Port Management Cases in Port Geography, Operations and Policy Edition 1

Date: Price:

03/12/2017 ÂŁ49.99

ISBN Paperback: e-book:

9780749474324 9780749474331

Extent: Dimensions: Subject:

320 234x156 Logistics

Description

Author Information

Port Management looks at the numerous types of business interactions that occur at active ports. These include cooperating with other ports, coordinating deliveries with ships, overseeing port development, advertising and promoting the port, and enforcing security and environmental protection initiatives.

Professor Anthony Beresford is Programme Director for the MSc International Transport at Cardiff University and Director for the suite of Masters Programmes in Logistics and Operations Management. Anthony has travelled widely in an advisory capacity within the ports and transport fields in Europe, Asia and North America.

Port Management includes research, practical insights and case studies in all the areas covering ports, shipping or other maritime related subjects. It looks at quantitative methods and market analysis, maritime logistics, port planning and pricing, and commercial law. A high-quality text, Port Management covers all the main aspects of management, administration and policy, and fills existing gaps in the literature in this area. It provides fascinating insights into the geography, economics, politics and trade involved in port management.

Table of Contents 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13

Dr Stephen Pettit a researcher for the Transport and Shipping Research Group in Cardiff Business School. He has been involved in a range of transport related research including a groundbreaking project for the Department of Transport.

Ports Port Development Port Users and Service Providers Port Operations Port Policy Port Management and Administration Port Ownership Port Competition Ports and Part of Integrated/Multi-Modal Systems Port Labour Ports and the Environment Port Pricing and Economics Role of Organisations

Logistics, Operations and Supply Chain Management

221


Global Liner Shipping

This book

<< Provides the only practical, stepby-step guide to all aspects of fundamental liner trade

The Engine Room of World Trade Edition 1

<< Equips the reader with real-life case studies and leading questions at the end of each chapter

<< Provides tangible guidelines for Date: Price:

03/09/2017 £44.99

ISBN Paperback: e-book:

9780749481087 9780749481094

Extent: Dimensions: Subject:

288 234x156 Logistics

logistics managers to help them deal with current challenges and plan for the future

Author Information

Description

Lars Jensen is CEO and Partner of Sea Intelligence Consulting. Additionally, he is the co-founder of SeaIntel Maritime Analysis, founded in 2011, and CEO and founder of CyberKeel, focusing on cyber security in the maritime industry. He is CEO of the online-only container carrier Youship, as well as in charge of developing and implementing eCommerce strategy in Maersk Line. In 2016 Lars Jensen cofounded LinerGrid, providing advanced tools to optimize network design for container carriers, and joined the board of the New York Shipping Exchange. He teaches and coaches at the maritime MBA at Copenhagen Business School.

Liner shipping connects countries, markets, businesses and people, allowing them to buy and sell goods on a scale not previously possible. As the lifeblood of global economic vitality, ocean shipping contributes significantly to international stability and security. Global Liner Shipping fills a gap in the market for a comprehensive book covering all aspects of liner trade. The industry is going through a period of change, so logistics managers and students need to understand how to deal with the current disruptions. In Global Liner Shipping, Lars Jensen, one of the biggest names in the industry, covers topics such as network development, supply/demand analysis, collaboration, liner profit and loss, e-commerce, risk management and process management. Each chapter ends with a real-life case study and open-ended questions.

Table of Contents 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21

222

Logistics, Operations and Supply Chain Management

Historical Origins Key Differences Between Tramp Shipping and Liner Shipping Container Transportation Demand Primary Goods Manufactured Goods Semi-Manufactured Goods Container Vessel Types Equipment Flow Network Development Supply/Demand Analysis Collaboration Liner Companies Liner Profit and Loss eCommerce and IT Environmental Issues The Customer “Eco-System” Capacity Management Risk Management Container Vessel Markets Process Management Competitive Strategies in Liner Shipping


This book

<< Examines container logistics from

the shippers perspective, tackling issues that are central to the role of organising and overseeing the transportation of goods and commodities, a unique angle which is not covered in other maritime transport books

<< Provides insights into ways of

managing container logistics as an integrated part of a shippers global supply chain covering planning, procurement and execution and collaboration of logistics activities

<< Provides shared knowledge from a team of international contributors such as the CEO of Hamburg Port Authorities, the International Logistics Director of Michelin, the Senior Vice President of Global Customer Solutions, Kuehne + Nagel and the Global Procurement Director, Mondi

Container Logistics The Role of the Container in the Supply Chain Edition 1

Date: Price:

03/05/2018 £44.99

ISBN Paperback: e-book:

9780749481247 9780749481254

Extent: Dimensions: Subject:

288 234x156 Logistics

Description

Author Information

Whilst the maritime container business has been studied in depth, the impact on shippers and how shippers deal with the given challenges has not been fully examined. Container Logistics bridges this gap and looks at the maritime business from a customer’s perspective. The book examines the challenges, solutions and the latest developments in the container industry as well as the interaction between the different actors involved, such as freight forwarders, supply chain managers and shippers. Current hot topics from the supply chain and the maritime business perspective are included.

Dr Rolf Neise was the Global Head of Logistics Operations at BAT (British American Tobacco plc.) and was in charge of defining Logistics Excellence in the End-to-End Supply Chain. Prior to BAT, Dr Neise worked in several consultancies where he collected in-depth experience in reorganisation and optimisation projects in different industries (automotive, telecommunication, chemistry) and companies across the world. He currently works as a visiting professor at the International School of Management, New York, and as a senior consultant supporting multinational companies in optimising their supply chain management and logistics structures.

From the supply chain perspective, Container Logistics covers areas such as the purchase of transportation services from ocean carriers and transport management, to effective and efficient logistics execution. From the maritime business perspective, the book covers topics such as intermodal freight optimisation and hinterland transportation, and terminal and port optimisation. With the inclusion of clear examples of best practice and bona fide case studies, as well as invaluable contributions from an international team of experts, Container Logistics is an essential guide for supply chain managers and shippers, as well as academics and industry professionals working in the maritime business.

Table of Contents 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18

Global Container Trade – The Past and the Future The Maritime Container Logistics Chain – An Overview The Usage of Containers How Shipping Lines Elevate Customer Experiences The Role of Sea Freight Forwarders Empty Container Logistics / Repositioning Terminal & Port Optimisation Intermodal Freight & Hinterland Transportation Collaboration amongst Shipping Lines Global SCM and Resulting Shippers’ Requirements The Purchase of Transportation Services from Ocean Carriers Logistics Execution of Maritime Transport Organisation of MCLC at Shippers’ Side Digitalisation / Real Time Data Management Formation of a Shipper Council to Improve Data Quality and Share Best Practises How the Global Shippers Alliance Drive for Supply Chain Improvements Design Thinking – A New Innovative Approach Cooperation & Suppliers Management

Logistics, Operations and Supply Chain Management

223


Packaging Logistics

This book

<< Explores key characteristics of

industrial and consumer packaging in a variety of companies, using examples and case studies from practice

Strategies to Reduce Supply Chain Costs and the Environmental Impact of Packaging

<< Examines the different ways that Edition 1

packaging adds value to logistics and supply chain, such as costeffectiveness and packaging aesthetics

Date: Price:

03/06/2018 ÂŁ39.99

ISBN Paperback: e-book:

9780749481704 9780749481711

Extent: Dimensions: Subject:

288 234x156 Logistics

<< Provides concrete tools, methods

and guidelines that help reduce the cost of materials handling, and increase safe and efficient storage

Author Information

Description

Henrik PĂĽlsson is Associate Professor at Lund University, Sweden. He has conducted research and taught masterâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s students within packaging logistics since 2004. Lund University specialises in this topic and is world renowned for its research in this area.

Organizations now consider packaging as a critical issue. Effective and efficient packaging can improve the performance of companies and minimise their costs. Packaging Logistics examines all essential roles within an organization, from the purchasing of raw materials to the production and sale of finished products, as well as transport and distribution. It is important for practitioners and academics to understand the role of packaging along the supply chain and the different implications of an efficient product packaging system for successful management of operations. In Packaging Logistics, Henrik Palsson covers essential hot topics such as sustainability, innovation, returns, e-commerce, end-of-life and future trends and challenges. This practical book takes the reader through every stage of packaging and relates it to supply chain and logistics, illustrated by over 30 bona fide case studies.

Table of Contents 1 2

Defining Packaging Logistics Packaging Logistics Performance and Decision Support 3 Concepts and Strategies to Apply to Packaging Logistics 4 Sustainable Packaging Logistics 5 Information and Communication Technologies (ICT) and Packaging 6 Returnable Packaging Systems 7 Packaging Logistics and E-Commerce 8 End of Life Packaging 9 Packaging Logistics Innovations 10 Packaging Logistics in Developing Countries 11 Packaging Logistics in Supply Chain Practice

224

Logistics, Operations and Supply Chain Management


This book

Global Logistics

<< Examines important trends,

New Directions in Supply Chain Management

<< Assesses real-world developments

Edition 7

key challenges, and latest developments in logistics and supply chain management across the globe

<< Shares insights from authoritative figures in the industry

Date: Price:

03/09/2014 £44.99

ISBN Paperback: e-book:

9780749471330 9780749471347

Extent: Dimensions: Subject:

512 234x156 Logistics

Description

Author Information

The 7th edition of Global Logistics provides completely new chapters on supply chain trends and strategies, fulfilling customer needs, and supply chain vulnerability. Assessing realworld developments across the globe, there are also dedicated new chapters on China and Central and Eastern Europe. This multi-contributed edition serves as a forum for a range of acknowledged sector specialists to discuss key logistics issues and share their authoritative views. The new edition introduces new contributors, including leading thinkers from international universities and businesses (UK, USA, France, Germany, Sweden, Poland, Hong Kong).

Stephen Rinsler has extensive industrial experience covering the entire supply chain, including senior positions (SVP) in Unilever (UK and European procurement and supply chains), Exel (now DHL) Europe (Services Director with a brief that included procurement, risk, health and safety), Volt Europe (SVP Operations), and Procurement and Supply Chain Director for Storehouse (Bhs and Mothercare). He is currently Director of Bisham Consulting.

Global Logistics is an invaluable source of guidance and practical advice for students, managers and practitioners alike, who will find it an essential text they can refer to again and again. The book includes helpful online resources, including key learning outcomes for each chapter.

Table of Contents 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13

New directions in logistics – Martin Christopher Best practices in logistics and supply chain management: the case of Central and Eastern Europe – Krzysztof Rutkowski Trends and strategies in global logistics and supply chain management – Christian F Durach, Frank Straube and Andreas Wieland Incentives and the strategic management of suppliers – Glyn Watson, Chris Lonsdale and Joe Sanderson Time compression in the supply chain – Adrian Beesley Building more agile supply chains – Remko van Hoek Using marketing and logistics to fulfil customer needs – David B Grant People powering contemporary supply chains – John Gattorna Linking supply chain management to shareholder value – Heimo Losbichler and Farzad Mahmoodi Outsourcing: the result of global supply chains? – Stephen Rinsler Risk in the supply chain – Lars Stemmler Managing supply chain vulnerability – Alan Braithwaite Information systems and information technologies for supply chain management – Xinping Shi and Simon Chan

14 Improving management of supply chains by information technology – Heikki Holma and Jari Salo 15 Delivering sustainability through supply chain management – Kirstie McIntyre 16 Performance measurement and management in the supply chain – Alan Braithwaite 17 Optimizing the movement of freight by road – Alan McKinnon 18 Retail logistics – John Fernie 19 Internet traders can increase profitability by reshaping their supply chains – Robert Duncan 20 Time as a trade barrier – Hildegunn Kyvik Nordås Learning from humanitarian supply chains – Rolando Tomasini and Luk Van Wassenhove 21 Global sourcing and supply – Alan Braithwaite 22 International road and rail freight transport activity – Jacques Leonardi, Allan Woodburn, Julian Allen and Michael Browne 23 Developments in Western European strategies – Michael Browne, Julian Allen and Allan Woodburn 24 Recent development of e-tailing and its logistics in China – James J Wang 25 Logistics strategies for Central and Eastern Europe – Grzegorz M Augustyniak 26 North American logistics – Jean-Paul Rodrigue and Markus Hesse

Donald Waters has over thirty years’ experience of teaching and working in logistics and operations management. He is a visiting professor at various universities, including University of Calgary, Warsaw School of Economics, Czech Management Centre, University of Quebec at Montreal, University of Sheffield, Henley Management College and Edinburgh Business School. He is the author of several well-known logistics books.

Logistics, Operations and Supply Chain Management

225


Marketing and Logistics Led Organizations

This book

<< Examines marketing-led logistics and logistics-led marketing

<< Looks at how marketing and

Creating and Operating Customer Focussed Supply Networks Edition 1

logistics have to work together in order to optimise customer service

<< Shows how to deal with growing competition and digitalisation

Date: Price:

03/09/2017 £39.99

ISBN Paperback: e-book:

9780749478735 9780749478742

Extent: Dimensions: Subject:

288 234x156 Logistics

Author Information

Description

Barry Evans’ early career involved a variety of roles in Logistics/Distribution with Watney Mann, Rank Hovis McDougall and Royal Mail. This was followed by roles in Tesco plc, including Lean Process Manager in Tesco Supply Chain Development. Recently, he joined the Lean Enterprise Research Centre at Cardiff Business School as a Senior Research Associate.

Logistics and marketing stand out as two disciplines that are connected. Products need to leave from where they are manufactured and reach customers that make purchases.

Robert Mason also has a business background, in the main a variety of roles with M&S. He is now a senior lecturer in Logistics and Operations Management (LOM) at Cardiff Business School and has led many business research projects with Tesco as a partner.

Marketing and Logistics Led Organizations looks at marketing-led logistics and logisticsled marketing. The authors examine how to optimise profit and control costs through the coordination of these two functions. In the current business world, the idea of a single supply chain has been replaced by an integrated multi-channel approach. Marketing and Logistics Led Organizations takes an in-depth look at physical supply chains where manufacturing of a product occurs from groceries to pharmaceuticals, and from automotive to construction. The authors examine omnichannel, how this affects the customer experience and the need for a joined-up strategy which is operationalised across all channels. They also look at the challenges of digitalisation and the customer interface with the growth of the internet as well as the intensification of competition across all sectors.

Table of Contents 1 2 3

Setting the Scene, Definitions Value Purpose of the Organisation is to Deliver Value So Marketing and Logistics Need to Come Together 4 Doing It: Marketing Led Logistics & Logistics Led Marketing 5 Constant Review to Maintain a Relevant, Appropriate and Up-to-Date “Purpose”: CRM, CEM 6 How Can Organisations Move from Seeing Logistics / Marketing Harmony as a Tactical Goal to a Strategic Imperative 7 New Age Dilemmas, “Doc” Hall and the Need for “Compression Thinking” 8 Overall Story – Integrating Organisations around the Value Chain – Logistics / Marketing / Supply Chain

226

Logistics, Operations and Supply Chain Management


This book

<< Provides original research

conducted by the Kühne Logistics University, Hamburg with the support of Unilever and Kuehne and Nagel, Switzerland, who cosponsored the work

<< Presents vital insights into how

different companies have tackled decarbonisation, through cases studies from 13 countries, with a focus on transportation

<< Includes a new decarbonisation

framework within which external factors can be classified and systematically assessed by companies

Decarbonising Logistics Distributing Goods in a Low Carbon World Edition 1

Date: Price:

03/06/2018 £79.99

ISBN Paperback: e-book:

9780749480479 9780749480486

Extent: Dimensions: Subject:

288 234x156 Logistics

Description

Author Information

The transport sector cannot be allowed to continue increasing its level of carbon emissions at an accelerating rate, while other sectors are actively decarbonizing. Decarbonising Logistics is based on original research conducted by the Kühne Logistics University, Hamburg with the support of Unilever and Kuehne and Nagel, Switzerland, who co-sponsored the work. The research focuses on decarbonisation, mainly in the transport sector, across 13 countries. This book is essential for governments and companies that need to find ways of achieving dramatic carbon reductions in the transport sector.

Alan McKinnon is Professor of Logistics at Kühne Logistics University, Hamburg. He has researched and taught in freight transport and logistics for 35 years and has published extensively in journals and books. The author has undertaken studies for numerous public and private sector organizations and has been an adviser to several UK Government Departments and Parliamentary Committees, the European Commission, the International Transport Forum, International Energy Agency and OECD. He is a member of the European Commission’s High Level Group on Logistics and was Chairman of the World Economic Forum’s Logistics and Supply Chain Industry Council.

Decarbonising Logistics presents cutting-edge findings based on original research, and provides focused results and discussion about the external factors of technology, infrastructure, market, behaviour, energy and regulation, and the carbon reduction strategies for logistics operations. It includes case studies from the UK, Germany, Italy, US, Mexico, China, India, Indonesia and South Africa. This guide provides practitioners and students with cutting-edge, top original research by a leading authority supported by key organizations in the field.

Table of Contents 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

Introduction Analytical Framework – TIMBER Data Collection and Analysis Detailed Country-Level Analyses Germany, Austria and Switzerland (DACH region) United Kingdom United States China India Indonesia South Africa Mexico Netherlands France Italy Conclusions

Logistics, Operations and Supply Chain Management

227


Warehouse Management

This book

<< Provides essential advice on how to tackle the challenges faced by today’s warehouse managers

A Complete Guide to Improving Efficiency and Minimizing Costs in the Modern Warehouse Edition 3

guidance on how to operate an efficient and cost-effective warehouse

On ine resources

Date: Price:

03/11/2017 £44.99

ISBN Paperback: e-book:

9780749479770 9780749479787

Extent: Dimensions: Subject:

<< Equips the reader with practical

<< Delivers new case study initiatives directly relevant for application in the workplace

480 234x156 Operations Management

Author Information

Description

Gwynne Richards has over 30 years of experience in warehouse management and logistics. As well as running his own successful logistics consultancy he provides a number of courses on warehouse and transport management and logistics outsourcing for practitioners. He is a Module Tutor for the Storage and Warehousing Techniques fulltime Masters course at Warwick University, Singapore Institute of Management and Hong Kong Polytechnic University. He is also the coauthor of The Logistics and Supply Chain Toolkit with Susan Grinstead, also published by Kogan Page. He is a Fellow of the Chartered Institute of Logistics and Transport.

Offering comprehensive advice on all aspects of managing a warehouse, Warehouse Management is an ideal guide and detailed reference book for anyone looking to gain a real insight into warehouse operations. It examines everything from the latest technological advances, operations and people management to current environmental issues. This third edition of Warehouse Management includes definitive updates across the industry, such as the vast expansion of warehouse technology and robotics, warehouse design and the increasing challenges posed by e-commerce. Gwynne Richards tackles the core challenges for today’s managers, offering experienced advice on how to reduce lead times, increase productivity and improve customer service. Revamped with more practical case studies and an array of downloadable warehouse tools, Warehouse Management includes useful warehouse audit checklists and is firmly supported with insightful photographs, video links and projections.

Table of Contents 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18

228

Logistics, Operations and Supply Chain Management

Introduction The Role of the Warehouse Role of the Warehouse Manager Warehouse Processes: Receiving and Put-Away Warehouse Processes: Pick Preparation Picking Strategies and Equipment Order-Picking Methods Warehouse Processes from Replenishment to Dispatch and Beyond Warehouse Management Systems Warehouse Layout Storage and Handling Equipment Resourcing a Warehouse Warehouse Costs Performance Management Outsourcing Health and Safety The Warehouse and the Environment The Warehouse of the Future


This book

<< Shows how effective operations

can have a huge strategic impact throughout the organisation

<< Provides guidance on how to

respond to the most important challenges facing the practice of operations management from renowned textbook author, Nigel Slack

<< Offers direction on how to set the

agenda for developing operations capabilities

The Operations Advantage A Practical Guide to Making Operations Work Edition 1

Date: Price:

03/04/2017 ÂŁ29.99

ISBN Paperback: e-book:

9780749473549 9780749473556

Extent: Dimensions: Subject:

240 234x156 Operations Management

Description

Author Information

The study and practice of operations has shifted to reflect the new challenges and uncertainties of how to thrive in todayâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s ever-changing world. The Operations Advantage identifies the most significant challenges to the practice of operations management and gives guidance on how businesses can respond. Leaders need to link the strategic objectives of the business clearly and logically to its operationâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s performance objectives. The book presents a series of ten activities that will help them to do this and therefore make operations work better, such as designing and configuring internal processes and resourcing the operations appropriately.

Nigel Slack is the Professor of Operations Management and Strategy at Warwick Business School and head of its Operations Management Group. He acts as a consultant in many sectors, including Financial Services, Utilities, Retail, Professional Services, General Services, Aerospace, FMCG, and Engineering Manufacturing.

Based on the global teaching, training and consultancy conducted by the author, The Operations Advantage looks at the application of operations management across a range of sectors, including finance, healthcare, professional services, oil and gas industries Although these diverse sectors require operations practitioners to apply knowledge in different ways, they essentially deal with the same set of processes. The book is an indispensable and unique guide for anyone with an operational role in any organization, as well as operations management students and academics.

Table of Contents 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11

Exploit the power of operations Establish an operations capability culture Make operations a strategic asset Set your performance framework Set your resourcing levels Establish internal processes networks Establish external supply networks Learn from day-to-day control Setting performance priorities Position the improvement process Master the mechanics of improvement

Logistics, Operations and Supply 229 Chain Management


Inventory Management

This book

<< Provides a step-by-step approach on how to achieve the critical linkage between the business budget decisions and the detail level

Advanced Methods for Managing Inventory within Business Systems Edition 1

<< Examines how inventory

management should work and how to control and balance it

Date: Price:

03/07/2015 £34.99

ISBN Paperback: e-book:

9780749473686 9780749473693

Extent: Dimensions: Subject:

<< Focuses on KPIs that have been proven to significantly improve performance

280 234x156 Operations Management

Author Information

Description

Dr. Geoff Relph’s experience in inventory and business systems management includes operational, consulting and academic roles spanning 40 years. Since 2002 he has workd as an inventory expert in operational, consulting and training roles for companies both large and small and has led a wide range of projects that have improved supply and demand performance. He is an associate lecturer at the Warwick Manufacturing Group, University of Warwick, and delivers modules for the MSc Programme both in the UK and internationally.

Effective inventory management can increase revenue, reduce costs, and improve cash flows. Endorsed by Institute of Operations Management and CILT, Inventory Management shows managers how to take control of their inventory system and ensure operations run smoothly.

Catherine Milner is a chartered engineer and has nearly 20 years’ experience working in aerospace, petrochemicals and telecommunications. She has project managed many successful projects on electronic data exchange with customers, forecasting, MRP, supply chain management, and business process re-engineering. She is currently a visiting lecturer at the University of Warwick and Chairman of the Institute of Operations Management.

230

Logistics, Operations and Supply Chain Management

Looking beyond the complexity and theory of inventory management, Geoff Relph and Catherine Milner focus on the most important decisions managers need to make when managing inventory. They examine how inventory management should work, how to control it, and how to balance it, through their use of revolutionary k-curve methodology. They include case studies from various industries, looking at inventory management in diverse areas such as supermarkets and aerospace. The book also includes numerous figures and diagrams as well as valuable online material.

Table of Contents 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

Introduction Introduction to inventory management Business systems and business The complexity of inventory management within business systems Traditional thinking in inventory optimization k-curve methodology The practical application of k-curve Case study examples and what to do next


This book

<< Looks at common strands that can inform strategy from a practical operating perspective

<< Highlights the core fundamentals that business leaders should be guided by in order to achieve organizational success

<< Offers a framework for achieving super performance

Business Operations Models Becoming a Disruptive Competitor Edition 1

Date: Price:

03/05/2015 £29.99

ISBN Paperback: e-book:

9780749473310 9780749473327

Extent: Dimensions: Subject:

264 234x156 Operations Management

Description

Author Information

Most successful companies have operations management at their heart. It enables strategy and should be part of boardroom discussions. However, Cranfield research has shown that business strategy barely recognises the world of operations management.

Alan Braithwaite is Visiting Professor at Cranfield University and specializes in supply chain strategy and operational excellence in the retail, manufacturing and service sectors. He is Chairman at LCP Consulting, which collaborates with over 400 companies internationally.

Recognising that operations management needs to be more strategic, Business Operations Models is a revolutionary new title that looks at the interrelationship of operations management and strategy. In Business Operations Models, Martin Christopher and Alan Braithwaite identify the characteristics of market-leading businesses that have transformed their markets and delivered super performance for their stakeholders. It points to the theory gap between strategic thinking and operations and how many high-performing businesses arrive at their new operating models as much by chance as judgement. Unpacking those observations leads to some clearly defined features of winning competitors, including eliminating waste, leveraging technology, and utilising transformative business models. Business Operations Models offers a framework for achieving super performance and understanding when and how a company may be able to leverage its capabilities to outperform. The book provides detailed international case studies that illustrate how the principles work in practice, including Apple, Dell, Amazon, John Lewis, Southwest airlines, Aldi, Toyota and many others.

Martin Christopher has been at the forefront of the development of new thinking in logistics and supply chain management for over 30 years. He is Emeritus Professor of Marketing and Logistics at Cranfield University, where he helped build the Centre for Logistics and Supply Chain Management into a leading centre of excellence. His published work is widely cited by other scholars and he has been invited to participate in academic and industry events around the world.

Table of Contents 1

What we mean by business operations models – and why are they important? 2 The characteristics of super-performing businesses 3 The customer lens – understanding compelling value 4 The strategy operations gap 5 Unpacking the business operations model framework 6 The technology dimension to being a disruptor 7 Market-changing models – driving transformation 8 Competing through the basics 9 Optimization of the business operations model 10 Making it happen – becoming a disruptor 11 Guiding principles to building a competitive edge through business operations models

Logistics, Operations and Supply Chain Management

231


The Inventory Toolkit

This book

<< Guides operations management

professionals who are looking to improve the effectiveness of their inventory management and Material Resource Planning (MRP) functions

Business Systems Solutions Edition 2

On ine resources

<< Online resources: copies of

spreadsheets used as examples in the book with ready-to-use formulae

03/06/2018 ÂŁ34.99

Date: Price: ISBN Paperback: e-book: Extent: Dimensions: Subject:

<< New to this edition: more

detail on inventory control and warehousing, updated online resources and a new introduction

9780749482121 9780749482138 280 240x170 Operations Management

Author Information

Description

Geoff Relph has extensive experience in inventory and business systems management in the operational, consulting and academic sectors. He is an associate lecturer at the Warwick Manufacturing Group, University of Warwick, UK, and delivers modules for the MSc Programme in the UK and internationally.

Effective inventory management can increase revenue, reduce costs, and help to reach KPI targets. The Inventory Toolkit is an indispensable guide for operations management professionals who are looking to improve the effectiveness of the inventory management and Material Resource Planning (MRP) functions within their organizations. Looking beyond the complexity and theory of inventory management, Geoff Relph and Catherine Milner focus on the most important decisions managers need to make when managing inventory and achieving targets set in the boardroom.

Catherine Milner is a chartered engineer and project manager with experience working in aerospace, petrochemicals and telecommunications. She has managed many successful projects on electronic data exchange with customers, forecasting, MRP, supply chain management, and business process reengineering. She is a managing consultant, and a visiting lecturer at the University of Warwick.

The Inventory Toolkit examines how inventory management should work, how to control it, and how to balance it through the use of the revolutionary k-curve methodology. This comprehensive second instalment of Inventory Management includes case studies from diverse industries such as retail and aerospace, and contains worked examples and regular exercises which illustrate how the inventory tools can be used in an operational setting. Accompanying online resources include Excel workbooks with ready-to-use formulae, which encourage the reader to experiment with the data and gain a better understanding of the practical effects of each formula.

Table of Contents 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

232

Logistics, Operations and Supply Chain Management

Introduction Introduction to Inventory Management Business Systems and Business The Complexity of Inventory Management Within Business Systems Traditional Thinking in Inventory Optimization K-Curve Methodology The Practical Application of K-Curve Case Study Examples and What to do Next


This book

<< Shares wisdom from one of the

most respected academics in the field and a team of contributors who are both academics and industry experts

<< Covers purchasing concepts,

frameworks and best practice from esteemed business school HEC Paris

<< Covers strategic and tactical

standpoints, including strategic thinking and specific thought processes

Strategic Sourcing Management Structural and Operational Decision-making Edition 1

Date: Price:

03/12/2016 £49.99

ISBN Paperback: e-book:

9780749476991 9780749477004

Extent: Dimensions: Subject:

704 240x170 Procurement

Description

Author Information

Strategic Sourcing Management examines procurement and supply management in detail, covering the three dimensions of competitiveness, effectiveness and efficiency. Written by Olivier Bruel, Professor Emeritus HEC Paris, and a team of contributing experts from academia, consulting and industry, the book is organised into four parts: strategic decisions; operational management of procurement and related supply chain; management of human resources and dedicated information systems; management of performance and change.

Olivier Bruel is Professor Emeritus of the Operations Management and Information Technology Department at HEC Paris. He is Vice President Energy at SNCF and President of SNCF-ENERGIE.

This book has been written with a comprehensive global and coherent approach but the chapters are self-standing, enabling the reader to dip into different sections according to need. Strategic Sourcing Management considers both tactical and strategic perspectives that link with a corporate strategy and it includes dedicated chapters on how to set up a Strategic Sourcing function. The text is enriched with clear graphics and solid examples of best practice.

He is Founder / Honorary President of ACA (Association Cesa Achats et Supply Chain).

Strategic Sourcing Management is a robust text based on both research and experience, so an essential reference for practitioners and academics working in or studying procurement and supply management. It is suitable for anyone involved in procurement and supply management at a senior level but also for general management enabling them to understand the mechanisms of value creation through Strategic Sourcing.

Table of Contents 1 Strategic decisions and supplier policies 1.1 Procurement: its integration in a company’s general strategy 1.2 Procurement marketing: segmentation and strategies 1.3 Definition of requirements and upstream procurement practices 1.4 Supplier policy: sourcing, panel and SRM 1.5 Globalization and international procurement 1.6 Sustainable procurement: stakes and implementation 1.7 Outsourcing, “make-or-buy” decisions and simple subconctracting 2 Operational management of procurement 2.1 Quantitative forecasting and requirements planning 2.2 Economic optimization: tco minimization, service level for internal clients and shared cash management 2.3 Calls for tenders: major stages, selection process and post-procurement follow-up

2.4 Procurement of services CAPEX procurement 2.5 The financial stakes of procurement: mechanisms for protecting currency and energy and commodity purchases 2.6 Public procurement: French and European contexts 2.7 The practice of international operations 2.8 International procurement: legal considerations 3 Organization and management of resources Organization, structure and positioning of the procurement department 3.1 Procurement professions and human-resources management 3.2 Procurement information systems and dedicated web tools 4 Performance and change management 4.1 Procurement communication plan 4.2 Procurement performance: measurement indicators and reporting systems 4.3 Procurement performance: steering change management 4.4 The co-authors 4.5 Glossary

Logistics, Operations and Supply Chain Management

233


Strategic Sourcing and Category Management

This book

<< Examines how to drive efficient

sourcing within organizations through applying methods used by IKEA

Lessons Learned at IKEA Edition 1

<< Examines how category

management works in practice and how it was implemented in IKEA

<< Compares and contrasts

Date: Price:

03/08/2015 £39.99

ISBN Paperback: e-book:

9780749473976 9780749473983

Pages: Format (mm): Subject:

248 234x156 Procurement

experiences at IKEA with examples from other leading companies

Author Information

Description

Magnus Carlsson has twenty-five years’ experience as a strategic sourcing expert at IKEA. He developed and led the implementation of IKEA’s purchasing strategy, which included category based sourcing. He was responsible for the strategic sourcing of IKEA’s global textile, metal and veneer businesses, as well as component and raw material procurement. He is currently a lecturer, trainer and advisor in strategic sourcing and category management.

Strategic Sourcing and Category Management examines how category management works in practice, drawing insight from IKEA. With over twenty-five years’ experience of purchasing at IKEA, Magnus Carlsson shares the wisdom gained from devising and executing IKEA’s highly successful purchasing strategies. The text is supported by insightful interviews and case studies, which are compared and contrasted with examples from other leading companies. Strategic Sourcing and Category Management answers three critical questions: -When is category management a profitable method and why? -How do category teams create real results? -How can category management be organized and implemented effectively? In answering these three questions, Magnus Carlsson not only presents the guiding principles behind category based sourcing, he also demonstrates how category based sourcing can effectively be implemented in practice and provides guidance on how to realise the benefits of this approach. Cleverly connecting theory and practice, the book draws upon both existing and new tools, and applies them in a highly practical context. With application spanning far beyond IKEA, this book is an invaluable resource for procurement professionals in any industry. Strategic Sourcing and Category Management is the result of twenty five years’ experience of Strategic Sourcing within IKEA and collaboration with several companies and the Stockholm School of Economics.

Table of Contents 1 2 3 4 5

Lessons learned in Ikea How is it done? What shall the team achieve? Where is the business... and the money? Creating a situation where the results fall into place 6 The moment of truth 7 Leading the business and creating leverage 8 Other industries and different perspectives 9 Implementation of category-based sourcing 10 What makes the difference between success and failure?

234

Logistics, Operations and Supply Chain Management


This book

<< Explains the strategic value of

procurement and why procurement is critical to successful business

<< Explores the potential for

significant cost savings for senior management, Finance Directors, and CEO’s through maximising value from suppliers and thirdparty spend

<< Includes examples and real-life

case studies from the author’s work in procurement for leading organisations

Strategic Procurement Organizing Suppliers and Supply Chains for Competitive Advantage Edition 2

Date: Price:

03/11/2014 £19.99

ISBN Paperback: e-book:

9780749472283 9780749472290

Extent: Dimensions: Subject:

224 234x156 Procurement

Description

Author Information

With application to organisations in all industries across the world, Strategic Procurement details why procurement is critical to successful business performance. It explores the strategic value of procurement to business and the potential for significant cost savings through maximising value from suppliers and third-party spend.

Caroline Booth specializes in procurement transformation – helping organizations to recognize and exploit the real value of third party expenditure and suppliers’ expertise. She has enjoyed an international career in business and consultancy with Shell, Ernst & Young, Lloyds Banking Group and more recently, as Chief Procurement Officer for TD Bank Group.

Since the 1st Edition of this book, a lot has changed in the world of strategic procurement. While many developments have served to reinforce the business value of good procurement practices, we have also become more acutely aware of the risks associated with poor procurement. On the upside, we have seen an increasing role played by procurement in many recent mega-mergers. On the downside, we only need to look at the supply continuity issues triggered by a string of natural disasters; the reputational issues related to the supply chains of companies such as BP and Apple; and the inadvertent role played by suppliers as the weakest link in cybercrime. The 2nd Edition of Strategic Procurement has been thoroughly updated to reflect these developments. There is a whole new chapter on the role of procurement in delivering successful mergers and acquisitions as well as three new chapters exploring the mitigants to a variety of supplier-related risks. In addition, there are expanded sections on corporate responsibility, procurement proficiency, good procurement across the organisation, and new ways of supplier collaboration. The book includes updated real-life case studies taken directly from the author’s work in procurement for leading organisations.

Table of Contents 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15

No company is an island Know what your customers value Right first time Know your core Handling the complexity What’s the issue? We can all do procurement Executive sponsorship and priorities Strategy in context Knowing what the business needs Picking the right suppliers Understanding your spend The secrets of sourcing Sharing the pain in hard times Avoiding the perils of outsourcing Corporate responsibility

16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24

Good procurement across the company Becoming important to key suppliers Supply continuity Cyber crime and the weakest link Reputational risk Continuous improvement Reducing total cost Mergers and acquisitions Keeping procurement on the agenda

Logistics, Operations and Supply Chain Management

235


Leading Procurement Strategy

This book

<< Features real world case studies

from leading organizations across the world, including Tesco, BAA, Tata, Coca-Cola, P&G and IBM

Driving Value Through the Supply Chain Edition 2

<< New to this edition: updated

cases and examples, and a new chapter on the procurement process

<< Covers key strategic considerations,

Date: Price:

03/06/2018 £44.99

ISBN Paperback: e-book:

9780749481643 9780749481650

Extent: Dimensions: Subject:

256 234x156 Procurement

including: global sourcing; cost and value evaluations and cost management; supplier relationship management; information technologies and procurement; sustainable procurement and future developments

Author Information

Description

Carlos Mena is Director of the Centre for Strategic Procurement and Supply Management at Cranfield School of Management, UK, and Assistant Professor at the Eli Broad Graduate School of Management at Michigan State University.

Leading Procurement Strategy is a must-read for all senior procurement executives wishing to further enhance their skill set, master the latest developments in procurement strategy and really come into their own as procurement leaders. The expert author team explains how to effectively manage and mitigate risks in the supply chain, appreciate the key issues affecting the procurement function and develop best practice excellence in teams.

Remko van Hoek is a Visiting Professor at Cranfield School of Management and previously held positions as Global Procurement Director at PwC and SVP Sourcing and Procurement at the Walt Disney Company. Martin Christopher is Emeritus Professor of Marketing and Logistics at Cranfield School of Management. He is a regular contributor to conferences and workshops around the world.

Providing the latest thinking in procurement and supply management within the broad perspective of different industries, this second edition of Leading Procurement Strategy covers: global sourcing; supplier relationship management; cost management; information technologies; and future developments. The book is underpinned by academic theory and supported by an extensive range of real world case studies drawn from the authors’ experiences, including Tesco, Tata, Coca-Cola, BAA, P&G and IBM. This new edition provides the skills, knowledge and tools needed to articulate an effective strategy and embrace a transformational role to lead procurement teams, showing how procurement can become an influential function that delivers sustainable competitive advantage.

Table of Contents 1 Procurement Strategy 1.1 Introduction – The Strategic Role of Procurement [Dr Carlos Mena] 1.2 Procurement and the Organization – Organizing for the Future [Dr Remko Van Hoek] 1.3 The Strategic Procurement Cycle [Dr Carlos Mena] 2 Procurement and the Supply Network 2.1 Supplier Relationship Management [Dr Remko Van Hoek] 2.2 Global Sourcing [Dr Martin Christopher] 3 Delivering Performance in Procurement 3.1 Strategic Cost Management [Dr Lisa M Ellram] 3.2 From Cost to Value in Procurement [Dr Remko Van Hoek] 3.3 Supply Chain Risk Management [Dr Martin Christopher] 3.4 Information Technology in Procurement [Dr Alan Smart] 4 Sustaining Procurement Performance 4.1 Sustainable Procurement [Dr Carlos Mena] 4.2 The Future of Procurement – A Wealth of Opportunities [Dr Soroosh Saghiri and Dr Carlos Mena]

236

Logistics, Operations and Supply Chain Management


This book

<< Gain an understanding of

core principles from category management, SRM, negotiation, contract management and supply chain management

The Buyer’s Toolkit An Essential and Practical Approach for Highly Effective Buying

<< Simple toolsets and frameworks,

translated from complex models and concepts, that can be easily understood and applied with no prior training or knowledge in this area

<< Tried and tested methods that will

transform a business and increase its profit and value gained from the supply base

Edition 1

Date: Price:

03/09/2017 £39.99

ISBN Paperback: e-book:

9780749479817 9780749479824

Pages: Format (mm): Subject:

288 234x156 Procurement

Description

Author Information

In order to buy well it is important to understand a few basic principles and apply a series of tools and approaches in given situations. The Buyer’s Toolkit distills all the best practice tools for professional buying and negotiating into a simple, jargon free framework that can be picked up and applied easily by anyone who buys. It is a book that seeks to transform how individuals view and practice buying so they know when to influence a situation and what to do in order to buy really well.

Jonathan O’Brien is the CEO of the international purchasing consultancy and training provider, Positive Purchasing Ltd. With over 25 years’ experience working in purchasing, he has worked all over the world to help global organizations increase their purchasing capability through training, education and working directly with practitioners and executive teams to drive in the adoption of category management and other strategic purchasing methodologies. He is also author of Category Management in Purchasing, Supplier Relationship Management and Negotiation for Purchasing Professionals.

The Buyer’s Toolkit has a simple chapter layout, contains graphics and models and a simple flow of tools through the book, with an overarching framework, that glues them together. Covering different buying scenarios, understanding and defining the requirements, choosing the right deal and supplier, negotiation, managing the contract and the suppliers, fixing problems and sustainable buying, this comprehensive guide will help you to boost your advantage as a buyer.

Table of Contents 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

Introduction – Buying explained How to be good at buying What do we need? Power up! Selecting the right buying option Negotiating the best deal What we say, what we do The contract Ensuring we get what we agreed When things go wrong Sustainable buying Where next

Logistics, Operations and Supply Chain Management

237


Supplier Relationship Management

This book

<< Delivers a valuable toolkit and process framework for direct application in business

<< New to this edition: stand-alone

Unlocking the Hidden Value in Your Supply Base Edition 2

model on supplier management; an additional section on contract management; a useful rating table and methods for a single supplier determination; an enhanced section on segmentation

Date: Price:

03/06/2018 £49.99

ISBN Paperback: e-book:

9780749480134 9780749480141

Extent: Dimensions: Subject:

424 234x156 Procurement

<< Explores links between

procurement and supply chain management, and explains how to assemble the ‘Orchestra Model’ into a supply base and align aspects like contract management to meet all of the latest industry standards

Author Information

Description

Jonathan O’Brien is the CEO of Positive Purchasing Ltd, the international procurement consultancy and training provider. With over 25 years of experience working in procurement, he has worked all over the world to help global organizations increase their purchasing capability through training and education. He is also the author of Category Management in Purchasing, The Buyer’s Toolkit and his awardwinning title Negotiation for Procurement Professionals, now in its third edition, all published by Kogan Page.

Supplier Relationship Management enables organisations to manage their suppliers effectively and secure real, tangible benefits from the opportunities already available in their supply base. This second edition delivers a framework of resources for anyone who manages or interfaces across a supply base, orchestrating a productive flow between supply base segmentation, supplier relationship management and performance management. Written by an award-winning author and leading practitioner in the field, the fully revised second edition of Supplier Relationship Management clarifies links between procurement and supply chain management, explains how to assemble the ‘Orchestra Model’ into a supply base, and align aspects like contract management to meet all of the latest industry standards. This book is an ideal companion to Category Management in Purchasing and Negotiation for Procurement Professionals, also published by Kogan Page. Used together, these books provide a complete and powerful strategic purchasing toolkit.

Table of Contents 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

238

Logistics, Operations and Supply Chain Management

Introduction What We Need From Our Suppliers is... Five Good Reasons to Get Close to Our Suppliers Introducing the Orchestra of SRM Segmenting the Supply Base Supplier Performance Measurement Building a Supplier Performance Measurement System Acting Upon Measurement Supplier Improvement and Development Supplier Management Contract Management Relationship Management Supply Chain Management Strategic Collaborative Relationships Innovation from Suppliers The Orchestra of SRM is Ready to Play


<< Explores retail supply chain and

Managing the Retail Supply Chain

<< Includes an academic presentation

Merchandising Strategies that Increase Sales and Improve Profitability

This book merchandising from the very basics, up to strategic and senior level challenges of theories and models used to aid practical understanding

<< Includes tools and case studies to help supply chain managers and merchant planners work more effectively

Edition 1

Date: Price:

03/01/2018 £39.99

ISBN Paperback: e-book:

9780749480622 9780749480639

Extent: Dimensions: Subject:

288 234x156 Supply Chain Management

Description

Author Information

Buying, merchandising and the supply chain are inextricably linked. Product merchandisers play a key role within retail, as profits can be affected by how successfully they undertake their work. Merchandisers set prices to maximise profits and manage the performance of ranges, planning promotions and mark-downs as necessary. They also oversee delivery and distribution of stock and deal with suppliers. Their connection with and understanding of the supply chain is vital. Supported by theories, explanations and real-life examples, Managing the Retail Supply Chain looks at concepts and core themes that run across all sectors.

James Topps has worked in retail supply chain for Kraft (Formerly Cadbury), Ted Baker and Morrison’s. He currently heads up the merchandise planning (formerly supply chain) for Maplin Electronics.

Many businesses use a one-size-fits-all solution for any issues which arise, leading to big problems. Managing the Retail Supply Chain presents numerous examples of different business models adopted by a variety of companies. Covering basic principles of retail supply chain, KPIs, merchandise planning and demand planning, as well as omnichannel, vertical integration, on-shelf availability and e-commerce, Managing the Retail Supply Chain is an essential guide for anyone involved in or studying retail supply chains and merchandising.

Glenn Taylor is currently Merchandise Planning Director at Maplin Electronics. He has been merchandise and supply chain director in companies such as Dreams, B&Q and BonMarche, developing best practice through periods of expansion and growth for business on and offline, in the UK and overseas.

Table of Contents 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18

Basic Principles of Retail Supply Chain Linking Basic Supply Chain Theory to Retail KPIS Integration With Other Functions Different Supply Chain Structures (Merchandise Planning/Demand Planning etc) Job Roles Omni Channel Retailing “Single View of Stock” Vertical Integration Vs 3PL Inventory Management Modern Retail Supply Chain Professional Skill Set and Expectations The Retail Value Chain 1 Store Vs 1000 Store Operations Lean Vs Fat Supply Chains On Shelf Availability (OSA) E-commerce and Web Integration Basic Calculations and Mathematics Related to Retail Supply Chain Different Approaches to Different Industries

Logistics, Operations and Supply 239 Chain Management


Strategic Supply Chain Management

This book

<< Offers a theoretical underpinning

with supporting supply chain management tools and strategies

Creating Competitive Advantage and Value Through Effective Leadership

<< Provides examples of best

Edition 1

<< Presents essential supply chain

Date: Price:

03/04/2018 ÂŁ39.99

ISBN Paperback: e-book:

9780749478841 9780749478858

Extent: Dimensions: Subject:

practice, including case studies of companies such as NestlĂŠ and the top three organisations from the Gartner annual survey technologies, such as RFID, barcodes, logistics technology, automated warehouses, omnichannel, as well as future trends, such as big data, the Internet of Things (IoT) and autonomous systems

288 234x156 Supply Chain Management

Author Information

Description

Samir Dani is Professor of Logistics and Supply Chain Management and Head of Logistics, Operations and Hospitality Management at the University of Huddersfield, UK. He has experience leading and working on various research projects in a diverse range of management and supply chain-related topics. Professor Dani has published widely and has presented to academic and practitioner audiences. He also has experience of working in the manufacturing sector. Professor Dani won the 2015 Prix des Associations prize at the Les Plumes Des Achats & Supply Chain awards for his book, Food Supply Chain Management and Logistics, published by Kogan Page.

The increasing importance of the supply chain as a whole in the business world as the backbone of any company makes its strategy in the managerial, long-term decision making a very important leadership role within companies. Strategic Supply Chain Management provides examples of best practice and effective supply chain strategic leadership for managerial teams who have previously been operating on a tactical or operational level, as well as students who need to learn about applying the theories of strategic supply chain management in practice. There are short cases within each chapter and long cases at the end of each chapter. Strategic Supply Chain Management introduces concepts and tools which will enable successful buyer-supplier relationships and effective organisational leadership and talent management. Samir Dani also includes extensive coverage of the technological side of strategic supply chain management, including RFID, barcodes, logistics technology, automated warehouses and omnichannel. He also examines future trends, such as big data, the Internet of Things (IoT), autonomous systems and artificial intelligence.

Table of Contents 1 Strategy Requirements 1.1 Organisational Vision for Supply Chain Management 1.2 The Role of Leadership 1.3 Competitive Advantage 1.4 Financial Management 1.5 Supply Chain Structures 2 Elements of Strategic Supply Chain Management 2.1 Sourcing and Outsourcing 2.2 Procurement and Relationship Management 2.3 Demand Management and Fulfilment 2.4 SRM, CRM, S&OP 2.5 Operational Decisions 3 Future Requirements on Supply Chain Strategy 3.1 Talent Management 3.2 Risk and Resilience 3.3 Innovation Management 3.4 Technology 3.5 Conclusion

240 Logistics, Operations and Supply

Chain Management


This book

<< Discusses trends, issues and

challenges associated with integrating e-business with supply chain management, which increases the efficiency of logistics, production, distribution and other related activities

<< Provides an overview of the use of

B2B and B2C technologies in supply chains in different industries, such as HE institutions, multinational automation corporations and healthcare

<< Uses bona fide case studies from

industry and academia which highlight concerns and problems such as e-technology security and collaborative system use

E-Business and Supply Chain Integration Strategies and Case Studies from Industry Edition 1

Date: Price:

03/02/2018 ÂŁ44.99

ISBN Paperback: e-book:

9780749478452 9780749478469

Extent: Dimensions: Subject:

288 234x156 Supply Chain Management

Description

Author Information

Using e-business technologies to manage supply chains increases the efficiency of logistics, production, distribution and other related activities. E-Business and Supply Chain Integration explains how a number of tools can be integrated to produce an e-supply chain, with the overall aim of higher productivity.

Dr Ozlem Bak is Senior Lecturer at Huddersfield University, UK. She lectures on courses in operations management, purchasing, supply chain management and operations at undergraduate and MSc level. Before entering academia she worked in the automotive industry for companies such as Daimler Chrysler and Hyundai.

This essential book examines theory and bona fide cases and examples to illustrate how the integration of e-business with supply chains is largely neglected and poorly managed. Dr Bak assesses the impact of e-business on supply chain management in numerous different organizations, such as Higher Education institutions, multinational automation corporations, and healthcare organizations. E-Business and Supply Chain Integration explains the strategic implications of new technologies and provides guidance on how to make effective supply chains in e-businesses.

Table of Contents 1

E-Supply Chain Models in the Agrifood Industry [Dr Kim Bryeceson] 2 E-Supply Chain in Education [Dr Kim Bryeceson] 3 Digital Technologies in the Professional Service Industry â&#x20AC;&#x201C; Facilitating the Alignment of Human Capital Supply with Market Demand [George Juelke and Nola Stair] 4 E-business Technologies and its use in Pharmaceutical Industry [Dr Ying Xie] 5 Digitalisation of the Air Cargo [Dr Erich Tchouma Nyoma] 6 E-business Technologies and the Impact upon E-Government [Dr Ozlem Bak] 7 B2B and its Implications in Automotive Industry

Logistics, Operations and Supply 241 Chain Management


Successful Integrated Planning for the Supply Chain

This book

<< Explains Integrated Business

Planning frameworks and how they can be applied to supply chain management

<< Encourages the application of

Key Organisational and Human Dynamics Edition 1

<< Discusses change and how to

implement it through learning from examples provided by a range of supply chain professionals: academics, practitioners, consultants and service providers

Date: Price:

03/03/2018 £39.99

ISBN Paperback: e-book:

9780749477684 9780749477691

Extent: Dimensions: Subject:

academic theories to real-world problems, such as how to build an honest and open supply chain

240 234x156 Supply Chain Management

Author Information

Description

Richard Lloyd is Associate Director of the Supply Chain Centre of Excellence at TATA Consultancy Services, Mumbai. They are a leader in the global marketplace and among the top 10 technology firms in the world. The author has worked for lots of international companies designing and managing supply chains such as NOKIA, where he was responsible for driving their global supply chain. He is a visiting lecturer at Cranfield University, Bedford, UK.

Managing changes to the supply chain comes with its unique challenges. Supply chain planning presents an especially complex challenge for the change practitioner as multiple stakeholders and functions are involved. Successful Integrated Planning for the Supply Chain evaluates different approaches to change interventions and explores how Integrated Business Planning could be implemented in any organization to create sustainable improvements. Using frameworks based on extensive academic research, Richard Lloyd considers the potential blocks to an effective supply chain, and advises on how to deal with and identify uncertainties within an organization. Numerous international case studies included throughout show that every project has its own set of unique problems. Successful Integrated Planning for the Supply Chain is an invaluable guide for anyone who needs to implement change in the supply chain.

Table of Contents 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

242

Logistics, Operations and Supply Chain Management

Introduction Supply Chain Challenge An Outside-In View of an Organisation Who Works Here, and Why? Digging to Understand How We Got Here Incongruities and Uncertainties – A Look Behind the Scenes Theory of Action and Linking Behaviour to Assumptions The Politics of Information and Technology Wicked Problems – Understanding the Challenge Leadership Approaches to Change Realpolitik and Ideals – Approaches to Architecture Shaping Reality with Authentic Stories Sharing Stories that will Stick Getting to Agility Faster Case Studies Next Steps


This book

<< Examines the ‘inventory’ or

‘working capital’ angle, which is overlooked in many of the more strategic supply chain management texts

<< Includes a practical road map on

how to improve a business and facilitate an improved Return-onCapital-Employed

Supply Chain Strategy and Financial Metrics The Supply Chain Triangle Of Service, Cost And Cash Edition 1

On ine resources

<< Online Resources: Includes

worksheets covering basic financial concepts such as cash flow and working capital, with example data sets and guidelines/exercises to make it interactive

Date: Price:

03/05/2018 £39.99

ISBN Paperback: e-book:

9780749482572 9780749482589

Extent: Dimensions: Subject:

288 234x156 Supply Chain Management

Description

Author Information

Supply chain management is the management of a ‘flow of goods’ and an ‘inverse flow’ of ‘information and cash’. As consumers buy more from the store, the information of the increased sales will travel upstream in the supply chain and trigger extra production. This extra production will flow downstream to the shops. Cash is being exchanged for the goods. Organizations deliver different types of ‘service’ to their customers, which come at a certain cost and require a given amount of inventory or, more generically, cash. Supply Chain Strategy and Financial Metrics is a step-by-step guide to balancing this triangle of cost, cash and service, which is the essence of supply chain management.

Dr Bram DeSmet is the Managing Director of Solventure and a Partner at MÖBIUS Consulting, UK, where he helps global production and retail organizations in the domains of Strategy, Supply Chain and Operations. He is a Professor in Operations & Supply Chain Management at Vlerick Business School, Belgium.

Supply Chain Strategy and Financial Metrics fully reflects the ‘inventory’ or ‘working capital’ angle. Bram DeSmet examines the optimisation of the supply chain and Return-on-CapitalEmployed as well as KPI dashboarding, target setting and benchmarking. He includes case studies of supply chain transformation programmes employed in international companies, and worksheets covering basic financial concepts, such as cash flow and working capital, with example data sets as well as guidelines and exercises.

Table of Contents 1

The Supply Chain Triangle of Service, Cost and Cash 2 Strategy in the Supply Chain Triangle 3 Financial Benchmarking in Two Dimensions 4 Financial Target Setting in Two Dimensions 5 The Impact of Strategy on Financial Benchmarking and Target Setting 6 Redefining the Service Corner into a Value Corner 7 Building a Strategy Driven KPI Dashboard 8 Implementing a Strategy Driven Supply Chain 9 Appendix – Financial Templates – Inventory Management 10 Appendix – Financial Templates – The Cost of Inventory – Rent, Room, Risk

Logistics, Operations and Supply 243 Chain Management


Financing the End-to-end Supply Chain

This book

<< Provides a clear introduction to the area of supply chain finance.

<< Tackles key issues in supply chain

A Reference Guide to Supply Chain Finance Edition 1

<< Considers initiatives to harmonize

and develop cross-border financing.

Date: Price:

03/07/2016 £44.99

ISBN Paperback: e-book:

9780749471415 9780749471422

Extent: Dimensions: Subject:

finance through combining theory and practice.

368 234x156 Supply Chain Management

Author Information

Description

Simon Templar is a qualified accountant with twenty years’ industry experience as well as a lecturer on supply chain and procurement MSc’s in Cranfield.

Financing the End to End Supply Chain provides readers with a real insight into the increasingly important area of supply chain finance. It demonstrates the importance of the strategic relationship between the physical supply of goods and services and the associated financial flows. The book provides a clear introduction, demonstrating the importance of the strategic relationship between supply chain and financial communities within an organization. It contains vital information on how supply chain finance is operationalised and put into place. It is written in a user-friendly style, starting with the purchasing function, and linking together treasury, banking, supply chain, systems, IT, and key stakeholders.

Erik Hofmann is Head of Supply Chain Finance-Lab at the University of St Gallen in Switzerland. He is also Chair of Logistics Management (LOG-HSG). Charles Findlay is an experienced Business Strategy, Supply Chain and Procurement consultant and Founder at International Supply Chain Finance Community.

Financing the End to End Supply Chain will help senior supply chain and procurement practitioners to build collaboration, improve relationships and enhance trust between supply chain partners. With its combination of theory and practice it tackles vital issues including physical, information and financial flows, and tailoring supply chain finance to individual organisations’ circumstances. Recognising that supply chain finance means different things in different countries, the authors also consider various initiatives to harmonize and develop cross-border financing from the World Bank and other institutions, as well as including an agenda for national and international policy makers. Financing the End to End Supply Chain offers a mix of academic and industrial expertise and is written by three authors who are experts in the field. The book contains ground-breaking research and data from the Cranfield School of Management.

Table of Contents 1

Supply chain management and financial performance 2 The big issue: working capital management 3 Supply chain management evolution 4 The concept – a case for supply chain finance 5 The ecosystem – organisations involved in supply chain finance 6 The value proposition – options for supply chain finance 7 Implementation – bringing SCF programmes to life 8 The global setting – cross border issues for supply chain finance 9 The next thing – new frontiers for supply chain finance

244 Logistics, Operations and Supply

Chain Management


This book

<< Gives invaluable advice on

how to address the volatility and vulnerability of global inter-connected networks and build resilient, reliable and effective supply chains that drive competitive advantage

<< Provides practical examples,

strategies and recommendations that you can implement immediately, improving short-term performance as you prepare for longer-term issues

<< Features real-life case-studies taken directly from the author’s industry projects and extensive experience

Global Supply Chain Ecosystems Strategies for Competitive Advantage in a Complex, Connected World Edition 1

Date: Price:

03/06/2015 £44.99

ISBN Paperback: e-book:

9780749471583 9780749471590

Extent: Dimensions: Subject:

288 234x156 Supply Chain Management

Description

Author Information

Twenty-first-century supply chains have evolved into world-wide inter-connected supplyand-demand networks comprising vastly more complex operations, with profound interdependencies and exposure to greater volatility in our uncertain world.

Mark Millar is an internationally known industry expert who leverages over 30 years of global business experience to deliver practical knowledge and educated insights that help companies navigate the complex landscapes in Asia and improve the efficiency of their supply chain ecosystems.

The linear concept of a chain is therefore no longer adequate to describe these complex international networks of suppliers, stakeholders, partners, regulators and customers that are involved in ensuring the efficient and effective movement of products, services, information and funds around the world – we are firmly in the era of Global Supply Chain Ecosystems. Exploring the latest market trends and industry developments across emerging, developing and developed markets, in Global Supply Chain Ecosystems industry leader Mark Millar presents detailed and practical insights that will help you capitalise on market opportunities, overcome supply chain challenges and make better informed business decisions. In addition to highlighting key supply chain shifts such as the move beyond globalisation back towards regionalisation, this ground-breaking new publication explores several critical aspects of global supply chain ecosystems – including visibility, resilience, sustainability and collaboration.

Table of Contents

Acknowledged as an engaging presenter with memorable impact, Mark has completed over 350 speaking engagements at corporate events, client functions and industry conferences across 23 countries. A Visiting Lecturer at Hong Kong Polytechnic University, Mark is recognised in the ‘China Supply Chain Top 20’, as one of ‘Asia’s Top 50 Influencers in Supply Chain and Logistics’ and in the 2014 USA listing of ‘Top Pros-to-Know in Supply Chain’.

1 2 3 4 5

Global supply chain ecosystems Supply chain visibility Sustainability and green supply chains Risk and supply chain resilience Free trade for all – navigating the FTA landscape 6 The Asian Era 7 The New Silk Road connecting Europe and Asia 8 Integrated logistics hubs 9 Human capital – the talent pool 10 Omni-channel supply chains 11 Africa – is it the next Asia? 12 Supply chain innovation

Logistics, Operations and Supply 245 Chain Management


International Supply Chain Relationships

PATRICK DALY

<< Learn the practical steps

Creating Competitive Advantage in a Globalized Economy Edition 1

CREATING COMPETITIVE ADVANTAGE IN A GLOBALIZED ECONOMY

30/12/2018 ÂŁ39.99

ISBN Paperback: e-book:

9780749480035 9780749480042

Pages: Format (mm): Subject:

INTERNATIONAL SUPPLY CHAIN RELATIONSHIPS

Date: Price:

This book needed to take to develop, implement and sustain highly effective supplychain relationships

<< Understand the shared benefits and metrics which are crucial for the long term sustainability of supply chain business relationships

<< Learn from case studies of long

term strategic relationships which are critical for success as well as short term alliances designed to address specific tactical goals, projects or initiatives

288 234x156 Supply Chain Management

Author Information

Description

Patrick Daly has been a consultant for almost twenty years working in international supply chain and logistics with some of the worldâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s top international corporations including PepsiCo Worldwide Flavours, Pfizer, Proctor & Gamble, GlaxoSmithKline, Merck Millipore and many more. Patrick has worked with these clients all around the world including China, India, Middle East, Europe, North America and South America.

The systems approach provided by supply chain management is a very useful and powerful framework. However, it is the strength and quality of the relationships and connections that we build with other players that will ultimately determine the effectiveness and the success of our business. International Supply Chain Relationships covers international supply chain relationships, long term inter-organizational relationships, situational inter-organizational relationships, multi-disciplinary global engineering teams, technologies and innovations, supply chain communication, supply chain coordination, and future trends. It aims to provide supply chain practitioners in any type of business with ideas, tools and strategies, that they can readily access, interpret and put into practice speedily and pragmatically to create value for their own business.

Table of Contents 1

The globalization of business and the supply chain management concept 2 International supply chain relationships 3 Culture: An evolutionary strategy for success 4 Long term inter-organizational relationships 5 Situational inter-organizational relationships 6 Technologies and innovations 7 Supply chain communication 8 Supply chain coordination 9 Control and measurement 10 Future trends

246 Logistics, Operations and Supply

Chain Management


This book

<< Understand the process of setting up a demand-driven supply chain in your business

<< Learn about "supply chain

segmentation" as well as how to achieve your planned service levels, transform performance with up to 50% less average inventory and vastly reduce lead-times by up to 85%

<< Understand how to reduce capacity – delivering cost savings of approximately 20%

Demand-Driven Supply Chain Management Transformational Performance Improvement Edition 1

Date: Price:

03/04/2017 £39.99

ISBN Paperback: e-book:

9780749479978 9780749479985

Pages: Format (mm): Subject:

288 234x156 Supply Chain Management

Description

Author Information

Many companies are moving from traditional forecasting (forecasting push) to Demand Driven. Demand Driven can be applied in all supply chain configurations. It is an ‘end to end’ supply chain replenishment process. Only in the last 3 years or so has Demand Driven begun to challenge "forecast push". Demand-Driven Supply Chain Management is the ‘go to’ source for industry supply chain/operations executives and students because it describes, in a readable but rigorous manner, the "what, how and why" of the Demand Driven SCM process. The key themes in the book are: what is demand driven; why demand driven is the correct way to manage a supply chain; how to operate a demand-driven supply chain; and how to adopt the demand-driven process in your company.

Simon Eagle is a senior supply chain planning & strategy consultant with c20 years of international industry experience & significant expertise in S&OP & Demand Driven Supply Chain Management. Simon works with companies that wish to make a transformational improvement in their e2e Operations and Supply Chain performance through the adoption of ‘Demand Driven’ planning & execution.

Demand-Driven Supply Chain Management includes real life case studies and examples from the author’s direct experience of working with large global companies alongside illustrations and diagrams. It includes chapter summaries to aid comprehension and a comprehensive reading list and bibliography to facilitate further reading.

Table of Contents 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

Executive summary Introduction What is demand driven Why demand driven is the correct way to manage a supply chain How to operate a demand driven supply chain How to bring demand driven into your company Why demand driven is better than what we have been using What next?

Logistics, Operations and Supply 247 Chain Management


Sustainable Logistics and Supply Chain Management Edition 2

<< Provides a comprehensive overview of sustainability science, as well as an understanding of sustainability as it affects the supply chain

<< Examines all the key areas in

sustainable logistics and supply chain management

<< Examines the subject in an

Date: Price:

03/04/2017 £39.99

ISBN Paperback: e-book:

9780749478278 9780749478285

Pages: Format (mm): Subject:

This book

integrated manner and from a holistic perspective

264 234x156 Supply Chain Management

Author Information

Description

Professor David B. Grant is Professor of Logistics at Hull University Business School. He has over 175 publications and is on the editorial boards of numerous journals.

Adopting sustainable practices is crucial for all businesses in the 21st century. Sustainable Logistics and Supply Chain Management is the essential guide to the principles and practices of sustainable logistics operations and the responsible management of the entire supply chain. Based on extensive research by experts in the field, this comprehensive book covers the whole scope of sustainable logistics. The book provides carefully reviewed research-led applications and case studies that have been especially developed for this revised edition with particular attention for use in a teaching context. The mini case studies are highly topical, relating the theoretical concepts to practice and what is actually happening ‘on the ground’.

Dr Alexander Trautrims is a Lecturer in Supply Chain and Operations Management at Nottingham University Business School. His research focuses on sourcing, compliance and supply issues in supply chains. Professor Chee Yew Wong is Chair of Supply Chain Management at Leeds University Business School. He has more than nine years of industrial working and consultancy experience in operations, purchasing, production, inventory and distribution management, and supply chain design with SMEs and multinational companies.

Examining the subject in an integrated manner, this book examines all the key areas in sustainable logistics and supply chain management, including: sustainable product design and packaging; sustainable purchasing and procurement; cleaner production; environmental impact of freight transport; sustainable warehousing and storage; sustainable supply management; reverse logistics and recycling; supply chain management strategy, and much more. A vital teaching resource for any course on sustainable logistics, this revised edition of Sustainable Logistics and Supply Chain Management has been updated with new case studies and the latest information on compliance and auditing; demand and inventory planning; measuring, monitoring, and reporting; and strategic, operational and public policy perspectives. Online supporting resources include lecture slides, chapter summaries and an instructor’s manual.

Table of Contents 1

Brief overview of logistics and supply chain management (SCM) [DBG] 2 Science of sustainability and its implications for logistics and SCM [DBG] 3 Freight transport [AT] 4 Sustainable warehousing [AT] 5 Product design, cleaner production and packaging [CYW] 6 Sustainable purchasing and procurement [AT] 7 Reverse logistics and recycling [CYW] 8 Risk, resilience and corporate social responsibility (CSR) [CYW] 9 Sustainable logistics and SCM strategy [DBG]

248 Logistics, Operations and Supply

Chain Management


This book

<< Learn about business models and supply chains that regenerate rather than waste and degrade

<< Understand how to create value

instead of waste, at every stage in the supply cycle, with real examples and case studies across a range of sectors

<< Gain valuable insights from leading

A Circular Economy Handbook for Business and Supply Chains Edition 1

businesses and start-ups who are rethinking their supply chains

Date: Price:

03/12/2016 £39.99

ISBN Paperback: e-book:

9780749476755 9780749476762

Pages: Format (mm): Subject:

288 234x156 Supply Chain Management

Description

Author Information

The Circular Economy Handbook for Business and Supply Chains provides a clear explanation and comprehensive guide to the circular economy. The book provides real examples of how the circular economy works in a range of market sectors and at different stages of the supply chain. It features case studies of companies that are redesigning their supply chains in accordance with these principles, including: M&S Shwopping (clothes), InterfaceFLOR, Desso (carpets), British Sugar (energy from waste to grow tomatoes), Dutch AWearness (clothes), EcoTech Recycling (industrial rubber), and Method (household cleaning products).

Catherine Weetman is a visiting lecturer at Huddersfield University and a consultant with 25 years’ experience in logistics, having headed up logistics and planning distribution at Kellogg’s, DHL, Tesco and Exel. She also advises the Scottish Government on their policies and legislation in this area.

The Circular Economy Handbook for Business and Supply Chains provides detailed coverage of important areas, including: moving from a supply chain to a supply cycle; key sustainability principles for supply chains; waste regulations; finding markets and suppliers; seasonality, storage, perishability, transport; steps to zero waste. It also covers key issues, such as waste across borders, selling by-products, and waste as a feedstock.

Table of Contents 1 Introduction 2 An Overview of the Circular Economy 2.1 The Circular Economy – What is it? 2.2 The design and supply chain 2.3 Circular Economy business models 2.4 Circular Economy enablers and accelerators 3 How are businesses adopting Circular Economy models? 3.1 Drivers for change 3.2 Sector scenarios: The food sector 3.3 Sector scenarios: The fashion and textiles sector 3.4 Sector scenarios: Consumer electricals and electronics 3.5 Sector scenarios: Industrial manufacturing 4 What does this mean for supply chains? 4.1 Supply chain strategy and planning 4.2 Supply chains upstream – product design, sourcing and procurement 4.3 Supply chains midstream – the manufacturing process 4.4 Supply chains downstream – supplying your customers

5 Implementation 5.1 Making the business case and starting the journey

Logistics, Operations and Supply 249 Chain Management


Supply Chain Management for Humanitarians

This book

<< Offers vital insights on supply chain

management from key practitioners and academics in the humanitarian field.

Tools for Practice Edition 1

<< Provides highly practical cases and examples, written by practitioners from international companies and associations.

<< Shows how to integrate Date: Price:

03/08/2016 £39.99

ISBN Paperback: e-book:

9780749474683 9780749474690

Extent: Dimensions: Subject:

collaboration and coordination into working practices, one of the current biggest challenges in the humanitarian community.

416 234x156 Supply Chain Management

Author Information

Description

Dr Ira Haavisto is the Director of the HUMLOG Institute. She teaches Supply Chain Management and Social Responsibility at Hanken School of Economics in Finland.

Supply Chain Management for Humanitarians provides an in depth insight into the management of supply chains in the context of humanitarian logistics. This accessible and practical book considers humanitarian logistics from both a strategic and operational perspective.

Professor Karen Spens is the Dean of Education at Hanken School of Economics, and a professor in Supply Chain Management and Social Responsibility. She is widely published in the logistics and supply chain industry. Dr Gyöngyi Kovács is the Erkko Professor in Humanitarian Logistics at the Hanken School of Economics, and the Director of the HUMLOG Institute. She also lectures in supply chain management and corporate geography. She is widely published in the logistics and supply chain industry.

250

Logistics, Operations and Supply Chain Management

The overarching theme is collaboration and coordination, one of the biggest challenges in the humanitarian community. Supply Chain Management for Humanitarians takes a problembased learning approach, featuring real cases and examples from leading organisations including Oxfam, Unicef, and The Red Cross. Supply Chain Management for Humanitarians fills a much needed gap in the market and is essential reading for humanitarians worldwide.

Table of Contents 1

Logistics and supply chain management in the humanitarian context 1.1 Introduction 1.2 Exploring logistics competences and capabilities in not-for-profit environments: the case of Médecins Sans Frontières 2 Setting up a supply chain network 2.1 Setting up a humanitarian supply network 2.2 Service triad case study 2.3 Setting up a supply chain network in the Kenyan nutrition sector 3 Supply chain strategy 3.1 Supply chain strategy 3.2 Case study: partnerships – supply chain strategy 4 Decision making in the supply chain 4.1 Decision making in humanitarian logistics 4.2 Forecasts, financing and acceleration of humanitarian logistics: from supply chain to value chain 5 Procurement 5.1 Procurement in humanitarian supply chains 5.2 Joint tender for freight-forwarding services: promises and pitfalls 5.3 A procurement project in the Philippines 5.4 Partnerships and innovative procurement as enablers for sustainable development goals 6 Transportation, fleet management, delivery and distribution

6.1 6.2 7 7.1 7.2 8 8.1

Transport in humanitarian supply chains Humanitarian aid supply corridors: Europe–Iraq Warehouse and inventory management Warehousing in humanitarian logistics The ABC analysis Information technology Information systems for humanitarian logistics: concepts and design principles 8.2 GDACSmobile: an IT tool supporting assessments for humanitarian logistics 9 Sustainability, performance measurement, monitoring/evaluation and exit strategy 9.1 Logistics competency for humanitarian relief: the case of Médecins Sans Frontières 9.2 Community-managed rural water supply in Ethiopia 9.3 Managing supply chain sustainability risks 9.4 Using three-dimensional printing in a humanitarian context: challenges and solutions 9.5 Making performance measurement work in humanitarian logistics: the case of an ITsupported balanced scorecard 9.6 Boko Haram: the security and supply chain management challenges of providing relief 9.7 Measuring the supply chain performance of humanitarian organizations: the case of Thai Red Cross in Chiangmai


This book

<< Learn about suitable and safe

conditions in which to manufacture products

<< Understand waste and what it does

Supply Chain Ethics Using CRS and Sustainability to Create Competitive Advantage

to the environment

<< Learn how to analyse the impact

of the transportation of goods in terms of pollution

Edition 1

Date: Price:

03/03/2017 £39.99

ISBN Paperback: e-book:

9780749479459 9780749479466

Pages: Format (mm): Subject:

288 234x156 Supply Chain Management

Description

Author Information

It is increasingly clear that traditional supply chains which focus on sourcing products from the lowest possible cost suppliers are failing to exploit their full potential.

John Manners-Bell is Founder and CEO of Transport Intelligence Ltd which since 2002 has developed a market leading position in the provision of market research to a range of blue chip customers and governmental organisations. He is former Chair of the Logistics and Supply Chain Global Agenda Council of the World Economic Forum, attending meetings in the UAE, China and South Africa as well as speaking and moderating at the annual Davos meeting. He is regularly quoted in the trade and national press (FT, Bloomberg, Wall St Journal, Economist etc) and has spoken at conferences around the world.

Supply Chain Ethics through case studies, surveys and unique research, identifies and outlines best practice being employed by global manufacturers, retailers and logistics companies. It examines the so-called ‘triple advantage’ that accrues to businesses when strategies that combine bottom line profits, sustainable environmental practices and positive societal impact are employed. Narrow supply chain strategies which focus on only one of these three factors will inevitably fail. The book covers the following issues which affect senior supply chain, operations and manufacturing managers: ‘triple advantage’ best practice and how it can create value for global businesses; product design; sourcing and warehousing; transportation and recycling; environmental practices of logistics companies and suppliers; supply chain technologies. There is also an invaluable Ethical Supply Chains survey of top global companies.

Table of Contents 1

What is ‘triple advantage’ best practice? How can it create value for global businesses? 2 A holistic ethical approach to the supply chain 3 The use and abuse of employees in ‘outsourced’ supply chains 4 Environmental strategies of logistics operators 5 Environmental practices of suppliers in developing countries 6 Ethical supply chain survey 7 Conflict minerals 8 Subcontracted labour in the logistics market – is it fair? 9 Supply chain technologies 10 Conclusion

Logistics, Operations and Supply Chain Management

251


Understanding Planned Obsolescence

This book

<< Understand planned obsolescence and its costs and consequences

<< Gain insights on how to implement

Unsustainability Through Production, Consumption and Waste Generation Edition 1

<< Learn from real-life international

case studies illustrating the successful and unsuccessful change in strategy when companies try to move away from planned obsolescence

Date: Price:

03/01/2017 ÂŁ39.99

ISBN Paperback: e-book:

9780749478056 9780749478063

Pages: Format (mm): Subject:

different manufacturing and supply chain practices which promote sustainability

208 234x156 Supply Chain Management

Author Information

Description

Kamila GuimarĂŁes de Moraes is a lecturer and researcher of Environmental Law and Biolaw. She has had many book chapters, papers and articles published about Environmental Law, Sustainability, Planned Obsolescence and Waste Management, amongst others.

Planned obsolescence is when a product is deliberately designed to have a specific life span. This results in the overexploitation of natural resources, increased waste, with huge social impacts. It is very well known in industries such as consumer electronics, but it is now creeping into other sectors. This ground-breaking new book looks at the cost and consequences of planned obsolescence and its negative effects. It considers the sustainability, legal and economic theories behind it, how to mitigate these manufacturing strategies, and find new ways of working. Understanding Planned Obsolescence includes a wide range of case studies from Europe, the USA and South America.

Table of Contents 1

Identifying the causes, consequences and history of planned obsolescence 2 Consumer society: A product of the growthist economy 3 Planned obsolescence as an instrument of the growthist economy and its socio-environmental consequences 4 How to overcome planned obsolescence: From theory to practice 5 Sustainability in Economics and Law: The greening of sciences in the search for a new paradigm 6 The sustainability paradigm as the foundation to tackle planned obsolescence: New perspectives 7 Final considerations

252

Logistics, Operations and Supply Chain Management


This book

<< Covers all the techniques and processes needed to operate efficient logistics operations

<< Explains each tool and gives

examples of how it is used in practice

<< Covers every aspect of

warehousing, transporting, and inventory management

The Logistics and Supply Chain Toolkit Over 100 Tools and Guides for Supply Chain, Transport, Warehousing and Inventory Management Edition 2

Date: Price:

03/07/2016 £44.99

ISBN Paperback: e-book:

9780749475574 9780749475581

Extent: Dimensions: Subject:

400 234x156 Supply Chain Management

Description

Author Information

The Logistics and Supply Chain Toolkit provides practical, take-away tools for warehouse, inventory and transport managers to apply to the day-to-day challenges of logistics and supply chain management. This book offers applicable solutions to some of the most frequently encountered problems of the industry. The 2nd edition has been thoroughly revised to ensure that all research is updated to reflect the latest innovations in technology and processes. The tools have been revised to ensure the utmost relevance, and a collection of new tools has been added to ensure that the book is relevant and applicable in light of the most recent changes to the sector.

Gwynne Richards has over thirty years’ experience in warehouse management and logistics. As well as running his own successful logistics consultancy he provides a number of courses on warehouse and transport management for practitioners. He is Module Tutor for TTM full time Masters course at Warwick and Hong Kong Polytechnic University. He is also the author of Warehouse Management.

The aim of The Logistics and Supply Chain Toolkit is to provide today’s managers with a toolbox of practical ideas and information to help them in their day-to-day work. It explains a number of the major management tools and suggests areas within supply chain and logistics where they can be applied. The tools have been put into chapters, including supply chains, warehousing, transport and inventory. Electronic versions of many of the tools are available for download, once the book has been purchased.

Table of Contents 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

Susan Grinsted is an independent educator, trainer and consultant, who works with a number of educational institutions in Britain, France and Finland, as well as with multinational companies all over the world. Her work focuses on transferring knowledge and skills to enable companies to improve their performance.

Introduction Warehouse management tools and guides Transport management tools Inventory management tools Supply chain management tools Outsourcing tools General management tools Performance management tools Financial management tools and ratios Problem-solving tools

Logistics, Operations and Supply Chain Management

253


The Lean Supply Chain

This book

<< Examines the key principles behind Tesco’s success: customer loyalty, simplicity of operations and Lean thinking

Managing the Challenge at Tesco Edition 2

<< Winner of the prestigious 2016 Prix

des Associations at Les Plumes des Achats award ceremony

Date: Price:

03/12/2018 £39.99

ISBN Paperback: e-book:

9780749482060 9780749482077

Extent: Dimensions: Subject:

<< New to this edition: Chapters on rebuilding customer trust and Tesco’s Corporate Social Responsibility agenda

336 234x156 Supply Chain Management

Author Information

Description

Barry Evans’ early career involved a variety of roles in Logistics and Distribution with Watney Mann, Rank Hovis McDougall and Royal Mail, followed by roles in Tesco plc, including Lean Process Manager in Tesco Supply Chain Development. He joined the Lean Enterprise Research Centre at Cardiff Business School in 2005 and retired in 2012.

Over the last two decades Tesco has emerged as a dominant player in the UK market and a leading global retailer. The Lean Supply Chain: Managing the Challenge at Tesco, 2nd Edition explores how a key part of the retailer’s performance has been the development of highly capable supply chains to serve its needs. This second edition contains new chapters on rebuilding consumer trust and corporate social responsibility (CSR), as well as updated material on the current challenges and themes for development being considered by Tesco.

Robert Mason is a Reader in Logistics and Programme Director for the MSc Logistics and Operations Management (LOM) at Cardiff Business School and has led many business research projects with Tesco as a partner. He has a business background and held a variety of roles with M&S.

This prize-winning book examines how Tesco has used the key principles of customer loyalty, simplicity of operations and Lean thinking to drive growth, and how these ideas have been applied to the management of its supply chain. Drawing on the authors’ deep knowledge of how Tesco has developed from both an academic and practitioner perspective, The Lean Supply Chain: Managing the Challenge at Tesco, 2nd Edition challenges conventional business thinking and demonstrates Tesco’s most successful strategies through bona fide examples.

Table of Contents 1 2 3

Introduction Tesco Past and Present Tesco and Strategy – Managing the What, Why and How! 4 Customer Insight – To Drive the Tesco Supply Chain 5 Lean and the Tesco Supply Chain – ‘Mastering the Supply Chain’ 6 Tesco and their CSR Agenda 7 Rebuilding Trust 8 Tesco and Continuous Improvement – Debunking Seven Myths of Conventional Business Thinking 9 Current Challenges – Aligning Corporate and Supply Chain Strategies to a Changing Macro Environment 10 Conclusions

254

Logistics, Operations and Supply Chain Management


This book

<< Provides real-world insights and

guidance from experts in the construction industry, such as Brian Moone, Supply Chain Director of Mace, who were responsible for The Shard in London

<< Features topical and up-to-

date case studies from leading companies and huge construction programmes

<< Examines the supply chain outside of the immediate construction site

Supply Chain Management and Logistics in Construction Delivering Tomorrow’s Built Environment Edition 1

Date: Price:

03/06/2015 £49.99

ISBN Paperback: e-book:

9780749472429 9780749472436

Extent: Dimensions: Subject:

288 234x156 Supply Chain Management

Description

Author Information

The construction logistics manager plays an increasingly central role in the construction process. In fact, their decisions can crucially affect the success or failure of a project. Recognition of the critical role they play has spurred evermore interest in this budding field amongst both researchers and practitioners.

Greger Lundesjo is the owner of Lundesjo Consulting. He has spent over 20 years in logistics related businesses and has extensive international experience both in operative business roles and as a consultant. He has supported clients by applying logistics principles to construction projects, improving resource efficiency and reducing cost and environmental impact.

An accessible text on construction logistics, Supply Chain Management and Logistics in Construction provides essential guidance and expert advice for construction managers, as well as researchers and students in the field. This important new title looks at arrangements with suppliers, the use of returnable packaging and off-site manufacture and assembly, IT systems used to manage the supply chain and logistics operations, such as delivery management systems, warehouse management systems and material planning and forecasting systems. It also considers aspects of the contractual relationships between client, developer, main contractor and lower-tier contractors, all of which have an impact on how the supply chain is managed. In addition to providing a range of fresh ground-breaking case studies, the book features contributions from leading experts in the field who have been involved in projects with companies such as TFL, BAA, The Red Cross, as well as big construction programmes such as the Olympics and Cross Rail.

Table of Contents 1 Introduction – Greger Lundesjö 2 Strategic perspectives 2.1 The challenge of construction logistics – Michael Browne 2.2 Aggregating global products for just-in-time delivery to construction sites – Mark Franklin 2.3 Construction logistics – supply of bulk materials – Matthew Woodcock 2.4 Effective management of a construction project supply chain – Stephen Robbins 2.5 Construction supply chain management strategy – Brian Moone 3 The impact of BIM and new data management capabilities on supply chain management in construction 3.1 Data management for integrated supply chains in construction – Wes Beaumont and Jason Underwood

4 Construction logistics and sustainability 4.1 The role of logistics in achieving sustainable construction: a Swedish perspective – Monika Bubholz, Camilla Einarsson and Lars-Göran Sporre 4.2 Resource efficiency benefits of effective construction logistics – Malcolm Waddell 5 Logistics operations 5.1 The role of the construction logistics manager – Andy Brown 5.2 Third-party logistics operators in construction: the role they play and the role they could play – Pete Flinders 5.3 Managing construction logistics for confined sites in urban areas – Ruvinde Kooragamage 5.4 Consolidation centres in construction logistics – Greger Lundesjö 5.5 Delivery management systems – Rick Ballard and Nick Hoare

Logistics, Operations and Supply Chain Management

255


Food Supply Chain Management and Logistics

This book

<< Covers the design and governance of the food supply chain

<< Looks at innovations and future

From Farm to Fork

trends in food supply chains

<< Assesses various challenges and Edition 1

supporting mechanisms to make sure the food that reaches our plates is safe

Date: Price:

03/06/2015 £39.99

ISBN Paperback: e-book:

9780749473648 9780749473655

Pages: Format (mm): Subject:

280 234x157 Supply Chain Management

Author Information

Description

Samir Dani is Professor of Logistics and Supply Chain Management and Head of Logistics, Operations and Hospitality Management at the University of Huddersfield. He has experience of leading and working on various research projects in a diverse range of management and supply chain related topics. He has experience of working on projects related to food supply chain risks, food sustainability and food value chains. Professor Dani has published widely and has presented to both academic and practitioner audiences. He has also worked in the manufacturing sector.

With the growth of the food industry come unique logistics challenges, new supply routes, demand dynamics and investment re-shaping the future of the food logistics industry. It is therefore important for the food industry to innovate both with regards to demand management and sustainability of food sources for a growing population. Food Supply Chain Management and Logistics is an exciting new text that provides an accessible and essential guide to food supply chain management, considering the food supply chain from ‘farm’ to ‘fork’. Samir Dani shows the reader how to stay ahead of the game by keeping abreast of global best practice, harnessing the very latest technology and squeezing efficiency and profit from increasingly complex supply chains. Food Supply Chain Management and Logistics covers essential topics in food supply chain management, including: food supply chain production and manufacturing; food logistics; food regulation, safety and quality; food sourcing; food retailing; risk management; food innovation; technology trends; food sector and economic regeneration; challenges in International food supply chains; triple bottom line trends in the food sector; food security and future challenges. Samir Dani was awarded the Prix des Associations for his book, Food Supply Chain Management and Logistics. The book was commended for its comprehensive coverage of the design, governance, supporting mechanisms and future challenges in the food supply chain.

Table of Contents 1 Food Production 1.1 Food Production 1.2 Food manufacturing 2 Operational challenges 2.1 Food retailing 2.2 Food logistics 2.3 Challenges in international food supply chains 2.4 Collaboration and relationships 2.5 Food sourcing and procurement 2.6 Risk management 2.7 Technology trends in food supply chains

256

Logistics, Operations and Supply Chain Management

3 3.1 3.2 3.3 3.4 3.5

Sustainability and future challenges Food regulation, safety and quality Food innovation Sustainability challenges in food supply chains Food sector and economic regeneration Food security and future challenges


This book

<< Provides insights into different

supply chain risk strategies used by multinational corporations

<< Provides easy-to-read, experienced advice on minimizing supply chain risk and managing response programs

Supply Chain Risk Management Understanding Emerging Threats to Global Supply Chains Edition 2

<< Uses case studies to underpin

real-world relevance and practical application

Date: Price:

03/11/2017 £44.99

ISBN Paperback: e-book:

9780749480158 9780749480165

Extent: Dimensions: Subject:

264 234x156 Supply Chain Management

Description

Author Information

Supply Chain Risk Management assesses the various sources of external threat to the supply chain and how multinational corporations mitigate these at strategic level. It provides a straightforward guide on how to implement a robust set of risk strategies which minimize supply chain risk, ensuring organisations are prepared for future threats.

John Manners-Bell is founder and CEO of Transport Intelligence, leading supplier of market solutions to the global logistics industry. He is former Chair of the Logistics and Supply Chain Global Agenda Council at the World Economic Forum, and adviser to the UN and the European Commission. Prior to establishing Transport Intelligence, he was an analyst in consultancies specializing in international trade, transport and logistics. He is Visiting Professor at the London Guildhall Faculty of Business and Law, London Metropolitan University. He is author of Global Logistics Strategies and Logistics and Supply Chains in Emerging Markets, also published by Kogan Page.

As winner of the ACA Brunel Special Mention Price for outstanding contribution to the industry, the fully revised second edition of Supply Chain Risk Management provides a strong set of best practice case studies. Each case documents the company’s supply chain or production strategy and outlines the catastrophic event which occurred. These then present a valuable analysis of the supply chain consequences, material losses, management response, and the resultant changes to company’s supply chain strategy. Supply Chain Risk Management is an ideal accompaniment to academic and professional training courses which focus on risk and global threat to supply chains.

Table of Contents 1 2 3 4

Introduction A Framework for Understanding Risk Engineering Supply Chain Resilience Industry Sector Resilience to Supply Chain Threats 5 Natural Disasters, Climate Change and Pandemics 6 Economic Risks to the Supply Chain 7 Societal Risks to Supply Chains 8 Terrorism and Security 9 Corruption in the Logistics Industry 10 Cargo Crime and Piracy 11 Cyber Threats to Supply Chains 12 Emerging Risks in Food Supply Chains

Logistics, Operations and Supply Chain Management

257


Warehousing and Transportation Logistics

This book

<< Is a comprehensive guide to the

planning and implementation of transport and warehouse logistics

<< Provides valuable tools for planning

Systems, Planning, Application and Cost Effectiveness Edition 1

and making economic efficiency calculations

<< Provides more than 200 examples with worked solutions and gives the reader targeted practice with 250 questions and answers

Date: Price:

03/04/2018 ÂŁ49.99

ISBN Paperback: e-book:

9780749482206 9780749482213

Extent: Dimensions: Subject:

640 234x156 Transport

Author Information

Description

Professor Heinrich Martin was a lecturer at the University of Applied Science in Hamburg for over 30 years, and has been a visiting lecturer in universities around the world. He received his Ph.D. in logistics and business management from the Technical University of Berlin, and his areas of expertise include transportation systems, warehousing systems, order picking systems, material flow systems and factory planning. Dr Martin has lead multiple projects with numerous organizations and more than 350 students.

Current logistics planning methods use the calculation of mechanical engineering and construction to plan for logistics challenges. Warehousing and Transport Logistics covers pre-empting and responding to logistics challenges using pre-dimensioning and not precalculating. The different topics within transport and warehousing are divided into functions, presenting the advantages and disadvantages of different applications, interesting tools for planning and economic efficiency calculations. Special consideration is given to flexible ground conveyers, new storage systems and automated picking systems. Warehousing and Transport Logistics covers transportation, information systems, procurement, finance, performance metrics as well as warehousing and distribution. There are more than 200 examples with solutions outlining the disadvantages of depending, and about 250 questions to encourage independent learning.

Table of Contents 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13

258

Logistics, Operations and Supply Chain Management

Logistics Structures Within Companies Material Flow Logistics Transporting Goods â&#x20AC;&#x201C; Packaging, Loading Unit Basic Transport Logistics Continuous Conveyor Discontinuous Conveyor Switching Handling Basic Warehouse and Picking Logistics Warehouses and Shelves Picking Systems Planning System and Project Management Information Logistics


This book

<< Provides a comprehensive and

accessible guide to international transport

<< Focuses on operational models and cost structures, including multimodal

<< Covers freight transport from a global perspective

International Freight Transport A Comprehensive Overview of Operating Models and Cost Structures Edition 1

Date: Price:

03/03/2017 £49.99

ISBN Paperback: e-book:

9780749474348 9780749474355

Pages: Format (mm): Subject:

320 234x156 Transport

Description

Author Information

International Freight Transport is a comprehensive book that coherently presents the key changes and issues in the fast moving industries of trade and transport, including regional trade groupings, emergence of new large economies (i.e. BRIC countries), and pivotal regions such as the Middle East and Central America where major projects, such as new and widened canals, are underway or planned. These changes could redraw the trade map with major implications for transport patterns and solutions.

Professor Anthony Beresford is Programme Director for the MSc International Transport at Cardiff University and Director for the suite of Masters Programmes within Logistics and Operations Management. Anthony has travelled widely in an advisory capacity within the ports and transport fields in Europe, Asia and North America. He co-authored Lloyd’s Maritime Atlas of World’s Ports and Shipping Places, which is recognised as the Standard Work in its field.

Blending geography, economics, politics and trade, International Freight Transport provides insight into a wide range of topics, including: globalisation; demand versus supply; buyers and sellers; transport regulation, geography, modes and methods; transport ownership; alliances; and safety and security. The book is the only comprehensive and accessible book on international transport available.

Table of Contents 1 Overview (introduction and key modes) 1.1 Introduction 1.2 Demand for transport and transport supply – the modes: Pricing, transport space, buyers and sellers, globalisation and scale (by Jan Hoffmann) 1.3 Transport versus logistics (by Robert Mason) 2 The Complexity of transport (regional overviews) 2.1 Europe, including UK, EU, non-EU (by Mike Browne) 2.2 South East Asia, ASEAN (by Ruth Banomyong) 2.3 North America, including Panama Canal (by Mike Ircha) 2.4 South America (by David Grant) 2.5 Middle East (by Abouarghoub, Beresford and Pettit) 2.6 Southern and East Africa (by Chris Savage) 2.7 Australia and New Zealand (by Mike Bell) 2.8 Japan, Korea and Taiwan (by Suhan Woo) 2.9 China (by TY Jung and Ted Lirn) 3 Trade and transport (regional case studies) 3.1 Grain in Central Asia (by Bimaganbetov, Beresford and Pettit) 3.2 Oil and gas in the Middle East and North Sea (by Hance Smith)

3.3 Containers in the Far East – Europe; and Europe, North America and the Trans-Pacific (by Rolf Neise) 3.4 Coal in Brazil, South Africa, Australia and Europe (by Jane Haider and TL Yip) 3.5 Cars in Japan and South Korea (by Paul Nieuwenhuis) 4 Regulation, uncertainty and control 4.1 Regulation (by Andrew Grainger) 4.2 Uncertainty and crisis transport (by Peter Tatham) 4.3 Virtual Transport and ICT (by Peter Wells)

Dr Stephen Pettit is a researcher for the Transport and Shipping Research Group in Cardiff Business School. He has been involved in a range of transport related research including a groundbreaking project for the Department of Transport.

Logistics, Operations and Supply 259 Chain Management


Lowe’s Transport Manager’s and Operator’s Handbook 2018

This book

<< Provides essential information

on transport legislation, technical standards and goods vehicle operations

<< Looks at the legal, operational and environmental factors that govern the profession

Edition 48

<< Offers a definitive one-stop

reference source for the haulage industry

Date: Price:

03/04/2018 £59.99

ISBN Paperback: e-book:

9780749483159 9780749483166

Extent: Dimensions: Subject:

760 240x170 Transport

Author Information

Description

David Lowe has been involved in the road haulage industry for many years, and is an experienced consultant and freelance writer. His many books on transport include The Professional LGV Driver’s Handbook and The Pocket Guide to LGV Drivers’ Hours and Tachograph Law.

Now in its 48th edition, Lowe’s Transport Manager’s and Operator’s Handbook 2018 is the most comprehensive guide available to the operational rules and guidelines governing the UK’s road transport operators. This best-selling handbook is an essential reference and explores in detail the most pressing issues in today’s road transport industry. It includes details on professional competence, rules on working times and driving hours, licensing and penalties, insurance, road traffic law, maintenance advice and the international road haulage market.

Clive Pidgeon is Examination Database Manager for CILT Level 5 qualifications, CILT Distance Learning Advisor, an examiner and verifier for CILT and author of various CILT textbooks and training material.

Lowe’s Transport Manager’s and Operator’s Handbook 2018 is the essential reference source for any transport manager, fleet operator, owner-driver haulier or student with an involvement in the industry. This new edition has been thoroughly updated and revised to reflect the latest developments in legislation and regulations.

Table of Contents 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24

260 Logistics, Operations and Supply

Chain Management

Goods Vehicle Operator Licensing Professional Competence Goods Vehicle Drivers’ Hours and Working Time Goods Vehicle Drivers’ Records Tachographs – Fitment and Use Requirements Driver Licensing and Licence Penalties Driver Testing and Training Vehicle Registration, HGV Road User Levy, Excise Duty and Trade Licences Insurance (Vehicles and Goods in Transit) and Conditions of Carriage Road Traffic Law Goods Vehicle Dimensions and Weights Construction and Use of Vehicles Vehicle Lighting and Marking Goods Vehicle Plating, Annual Testing and Vehicle Inspections Light Vehicle (MoT) Testing Maintenance Advice The Safety of Loads on Vehicles Carriage of Livestock Special Types Vehicles UK Carriage by Road Regulations Insurance Fuel Economy Aids Safety Energy Savings Opportunity Scheme (ESOS)

25 Quality Assessment and Accreditation 26 Entry to the International Road Haulage Market 27 Unit Loads and Loading Units


Employability, Careers & Entrepreneurship Innovation and Best Practice in Business Skills Business Stories Education Entrepreneurship Finance & Investment for Entrepreneurs General Careers Information Innovation Job Seeking Skills for Entrepreneurs Small Business Specific Careers Testing Work/Life Balance Workplace Skills

www.koganpage.com

261


Featured Titles

NEW BOOK

Superconductors

Revolutionize Your Career and Make Big Things Happen Derek Loudermilk Jul 2018 9780749482367 Page 99

NEW BOOK

Confident Data Skills

Master the Fundamentals of Working with Data and Supercharge Your Career NEW BOOK

Kirill Eremenko 9780749481544 Jan 2018 Page 100

Confident Web Design

Master the Fundamentals of Website Creation and Supercharge Your Career Kenny Wood Jan 2018 9780749481001 Page 101

NEW BOOK

Confident Digital Content

Master the Fundamentals of Online Video, Design, Writing and Social Media to Supercharge Your Career Adam Waters Jan 2018 9780749480943 Page 102

262

Confident Coding

Master the fundamentals of code and supercharge your career

Discover our full portfolio of books at www.koganpage.com

Rob Percival May 2017 9780749479633 Page 103


<< Gives you a solid grounding in how

How to Write Effective Business English

<< With international real-life case

Excel at E-mail, Social Media and All Your Professional Communications

This book to use effective English in writing a CV, letter, job application or business plan studies to illustrate examples in context

<< Includes checklists to monitor your progress and take you to the next level in your career

Edition 2

Date: Price:

Better Business English 03/02/2016 ÂŁ14.99

ISBN Paperback: e-book: Extent: Dimensions: Subject:

9780749475550 9780749475567 168 216x138 Business Skills

Series:

Description

Author Information

How to Write Effective Business English gives guidance to both native and non-native English speakers on how to express yourself clearly and concisely. With case studies and real-life examples that demonstrate how English is used internationally in business, and full of ideas to help you get your communications right first time, How to Write Effective Business English sets the scene for describing the benefits of good Business English, ideal for multinational companies where communication is a priority.For native English speakers, it may mean unlearning things you were taught at school and learning how to save time by getting to the point more quickly in emails; for elementary to immediate English speakers, it focuses on the areas that are easy to get wrong.

Fiona Talbot originally co-founded a communication consultancy in Rotterdam that helped multi-nationals improve their use of English as an international business language.

How to Write Effective Business English uses real-life international business scenarios to develop your skills and provide you with some answers that even your boss might not kanow. You will learn a system to help you quickly and easily write emails, letters, CVs and more. Featuring sections on punctuation and grammar, checklists to help assess progress and now with a new chapter on how to write effectively for social media, How to Write Effective Business English has been praised by both native and non-native writers of English as an indispensable resource.

Fiona now runs TQI Word Power Skills, a Business Writing Skills Consultancy that helps both native and non-native English speakers, both in the UK and internationally. She delivers workshops and e-coaching at all levels. She has an extensive social media following for her #wordpowerskills brand and has featured in major publications such as Personnel Today, British Airwaysâ&#x20AC;&#x2122; business magazine, The Sunday Times, Accounting Technician, and Call Centre Focus amongst many others.

Table of Contents 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11

Why are you writing? Business writing for today Quality matters Telling your story through social media Defining business English Writing English for global business E-mail and instant messaging Punctuation and grammar tips Writing tips for everyday business Common confusions and how to avoid them Letter writing

Employability and Careers 263


Improve Your Global Business English

This book

<< Allows you not only to master the

basics, but to customize business English according to your own and your company’s values and culture

The Essential Toolkit for Writing and Communicating Across Borders Edition 1

<< Grows your confidence in

expressing yourself clearly and with tact, understanding and finesse

<< Includes quizzes, activities and

worksheets for practical self-study and monitoring progress

Date: Price:

03/11/2012 £14.99

ISBN Paperback: e-book:

9780749466138 9780749466152

Extent: Dimensions: Subject:

256 216x138 Business Skills

Author Information

Description

Fiona Talbot runs TQI Word Power Skills, a Business Writing Skills consultancy. In addition to writing articles for Personnel Today, British Airways and CCF magazine, she is the author of the Better Business English series, published by Kogan Page.

In a business world that spans several continents, it is no longer common for everyone to speak English as a first language. Whether you speak English as a first, second or even third language, intercultural business communication means that getting it right first time has never been more important for you and your organization.

Sudakshina Bhattarcharjee is a lecturer at the Institute of Leadership in Kolkata, where she teaches journalism and mass communications for both undergraduate and postgraduate courses. Previous posts include Lecturing for Kingston College of Further Education and The London College. She lives both in India and the UK. www.sudakshinakina.com

English can never be standardized in the global and digital marketplace; instead, we can learn how to customize business English according to our own values and culture and communicate successfully across borders. Improve Your Global Business English creates an awareness in the reader of what to avoid and how to ensure that communications are correctly understood. Very readable and hugely instructive, Improve Your Global Business English provides practical self-study with quizzes, activities and worksheets, helping you to fine-tune your written communication. By mastering the basics, defining your readers and tailoring your message to them, understanding the conventions of different media and understanding cultures, you can enhance your reputation as a truly global, modern player in today’s marketplace. If you want your messages to be perceived as you intended, to retain customers or to win new ones, Improve Your Global Business English gives you the background you need. Online supporting resources for this book include supplementary video, self-test questions and answers, templates and a case study on going global

Table of Contents 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13

264

Employability and Careers

Introduction Writing English for global business Why do we write in business? Deciding your business writing objectives in the digital age Common challenges in business English in a global workplace How does writing in a global economy affect us all? Writing e-mails Making an impact Using the global word power skills guide Report writing Writing agendas, notes and minutes of meetings Personal and company promotion in the digital age Using word power skills with social networking media

14 Quality matters 15 Writing tips for everyday business 16 The kaleidoscope effect – further perspectives for global business English


This book

<< Provides readers with tried and

tested methods to evaluate their own decision-making processes and facilitates the implementation of decisions

<< Includes practical exercises to

encourage a creative approach to problem solving

Decision Making and Problem Solving Edition 3

<< Written by the leadership guru and

best-selling author John Adair, with over 500

Series: Date: Price:

Creating Success 03/07/2016 £9.99

ISBN Paperback: e-book:

9780749475611 9780749475628

Extent: Dimensions: Subject:

96 216x138 Business Skills

Description

Author Information

In Decision Making and Problem Solving, leadership guru John Adair provides the techniques and insights you need to find solutions, spark creativity and confidently make the right decisions.

John Adair is the world’s leading authority on leadership and leadership development. Over a million managers worldwide have taken part in the Action-Centred Leadership programmes he pioneered. John was also the only British National Serviceman to serve in the Arab Legion, where he became adjutant of a Bedouin regiment. He is the author of over 50 books, many of which are published by Kogan Page, including the classics, Not Bosses but Leaders, The John Adair Lexicon of Leadership and The Leadership of Muhammad.

Being able to take innovative and creative approaches to new challenges is crucial for leadership success. Decision Making and Problem Solving will help you to learn key techniques and models to confidently make the best decisions and solve the hardest problems. Using checklists, exercises, case studies and tried-and-tested methods, Adair provides a clear framework that can generate ideas and inspire confidence in your team – so you can spot the solution in every problem, and create ideas to rival even the best strategists. The creating success series of books... With over one million copies sold, the hugely popular Creating Success series covers a wide variety of topics and is written by an expert team of internationally best-selling authors and business experts. This indispensable business skills collection is packed with new features, practical content and inspiring guidance for readers across all stages of their careers.

Table of Contents 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

Introduction Your mind at work The art of effective decision making Sharing decisions with others Key problem-solving strategies How to generate ideas Thinking outside the box Developing your thinking skills

Employability and Careers 265


How to Organize Yourself

This book

Edition 5

<< Includes information on dealing

Series: Date: Price:

<< Offers very practical tips that

are easy to implement and will guarantee to overhaul how the reader runs their work and home life

with e-mail overload, organizing digital files as well as the latest software of note that will have an immediate impact on how organised the reader is

Creating Success 03/10/2016 ÂŁ9.99

<< New content covers technological

ISBN Paperback: e-book:

9780749475772 9780749475789

Extent: Dimensions: Subject:

184 216x138 Business Skills

and software advances, the ubiquitous presence of smartphones and tablets and the ever increasing scope for distraction in readers 24/7 lives

Author Information

Description

John Caunt is a freelance writer, life coach and trainer. His previous experience includes fifteen years as a senior manager in further education

How to Organize Yourself will help you to dramatically improve the way you work. With great tips on how to determine your goals, prioritize your tasks and manage your time, it also includes practical advice on how to: focus on the things that produce results; overcome distractions; build positive work habits; avoid information overload and make effective use of technology. Now in its fifth edition, new content covers the latest software advances that can help you get organized, how to deal with the ubiquitous presence of smartphones and how to adapt to the ever increasing scope for interruption and procrastination in our 24/7 lives. How to Organize Yourself will enable you to take control of your workload, reduce stress and fatigue, and free up time for the things that really matter. The creating success series of books... With over one million copies sold, the hugely popular Creating Success series covers a wide variety of topics and is written by an expert team of internationally best-selling authors and business experts. This indispensable business skills collection is packed with new features, practical content and inspiring guidance for readers across all stages of their careers.

Table of Contents 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11

266

Employability and Careers

Introduction Know where you are going Organize your time Understand the way you work Organize information Organize the way you work with others Organize your space Organize filing systems Use technology to assist Organize yourself at home and away Keep up the good work


This book

<< Helps the reader face their

performance demons, improve their skills and enhance their career prospects

<< Provides advanced, in-depth advice

on how to cultivate successful interaction with audience members, find an authentic voice and judge what people expect from a presenter

<< Includes a new chapter on

presentations in action, or when asked to present at short notice

Develop Your Presentation Skills Edition 3

Series: Date: Price:

Creating Success 03/07/2016 £9.99

ISBN Paperback: e-book:

9780749475659 9780749475666

Extent: Dimensions: Subject:

200 216x138 Business Skills

Description

Author Information

Develop Your Presentation Skills offers step-by-step realistic advice to improve your confidence, prepare effectively and nail that presentation.

Theo Theobald is a seasoned presenter, freelance writer and business consultant with a track record that includes positions in senior sales and marketing positions with the BBC and a creative writing career embracing major internet and audio production. He is the author of On Message, also published by Kogan Page.

Going beyond just handling nerves and presenting PowerPoint slides, Develop Your Presentation Skills provides you with a practical toolkit for developing a belting presentation and improving your confidence along the way. It includes practical help with unpicking the original brief, understanding just what the audience wants, facing your performance demons and constructing compelling content that will keep your audience rapt with attention. Complete with anecdotes and expert input to help you avoid disaster, this new edition also includes two brand new chapters, which help you to deliver a presentation ‘stripped bare’ and to use new media to engage with your audience. Develop Your Presentation Skills will help you find your voice and use it with style; to inform, to persuade, to impress. The creating success series of books... With over one million copies sold, the hugely popular Creating Success series covers a wide variety of topics and is written by an expert team of internationally best-selling authors and business experts. This indispensable business skills collection is packed with new features, practical content and inspiring guidance for readers across all stages of their careers.

Table of Contents 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19

Introduction What’s your motivation? Where do you begin? What on earth are you going to say? It’s time to write...now! The power of storytelling Using humour What’s the point of PowerPoint? Other visual aids Rehearsal Finding your voice Openings Endings Handling your nerves Handling your audience Question and answer sessions Getting ready – some practical aspects As the moment approaches Stripped bare

20 21 22 23

Advanced interactivity Progress report Presentations in action What next

Employability and Careers 267


Essay Writing Skills

This book

<< Covers a range of different types of essay assignments, including exam essays and dissertations

Essential Techniques to Gain Top Marks Edition 1

<< Supported throughout by examples of real essays from The Open University, with accompanying analysis

<< Helps you to correctly interpret Series: Date: Price:

Elite Students Series 03/04/2012 ÂŁ12.99

ISBN Paperback: e-book:

9780749463915 9780749463922

Extent: Dimensions: Subject:

152 240x170 Business Skills

your brief, research the content and improve the speed of your writing as well as the quality

Author Information

Description

Jacqueline Connelly has a wealth of experience of universities, including holding senior managerial posts at both Lancaster and Kent Universities.

A well-written essay can make the difference between a pass and a fail, and these essays provide you with the stepping stones that take you towards the degree, qualification and career that you desire. Nothing will expose your uncertainty or lack of knowledge more than a poorly written essay; what Essay Writing Skills does is let you know what is expected of you and how best to go about your research, thus allowing you to get on top of your workload quickly.

Patrick Forsyth is a consultant, trainer and writer. Mark Connelly, who wrote the foreword and contributed to the book is an author and a lecturer in Modern History at Kent University.

Essay Writing Skills offers practical and proven ways to maximise your success in all aspects of essay writing. From planning your first essay to assessing primary and secondary sources, it will help you to write in a systematic way that presents a convincing and academically sound argument. A comprehensive guide, it provides guidance and advice on good research techniques, grammar and accuracy, creating an essay plan and correctly citing your sources.

Table of Contents 1 Introduction: destination graduation 1.1 New realities 1.2 Future realities 1.3 How to use this book 2 The academic essay: its nature and role 2.1 What is an essay? 2.2 Essay conventions 2.3 The essay as assessed coursework 2.4 Developing your academic skills through essay writing 3 The foundation for success 3.1 Using clear language 3.2 Detail that makes for good writing 3.3 If your first language is not English 4 Researching the content 4.1 Deciding which topic to write on 4.2 Understanding the essay title 4.3 Gathering material and using bibliographies 4.4 Developing your academic skills 4.5 Making notes 4.6 Using essay banks 5 Preparing and writing 5.1 A systematic approach 5.2 When it all goes wrong

268

Employability and Careers

6 The structure and detail of an essay 6.1 The introduction: making a good start 6.2 The central content 6.3 Referencing 6.4 An appropriate conclusion 6.5 Writing essays in examinations 6.6 The purpose and form of a dissertation 6.7 Example essays and the art of learning from experience 6.8 What your lecturer wants 6.9 A checklist 6.10 The nature of the examples 6.11 An example of guidelines 6.12 Examples 6.13 Dealing with criticism 6.14 A helping hand 6.15 Top tips 7 Looking ahead


This book

Confident Coding

<< Gives the reader insightful and

How to Master the Fundamentals of Code and Supercharge Your Career

<< Teaches the reader how to code

Edition 1

<< Provides the reader with the

Series: Date: Price:

Confident Series 03/05/2017 ÂŁ14.99

ISBN Paperback: e-book:

9780749479633 9780749479640

Pages: Format (mm): Subject:

224 240x170 Business Skills

practical guidance on how to make themselves more employable, and enhance their career, through coding skills using the programming languages of HTML, CSS, JavaScript and Python in a concise, straightforward, step-by-step format professionally valuable skills of being able to debug and problem solve, as well as create their own websites and apps

Description

Author Information

Want to master the fundamentals of coding and kick start a career? Confident Coding is the answer. Everyone has a digital life, but too few truly understand how the software behind it actually works. Coding is one of the most in demand skills on the job market and grasping the basics can make someone stand out from the crowd.

Rob Percival is a web-developer and entrepreneur who has taught over 370,000 students how to code through his online courses on Udemy. His courses have been translated into over five different languages and have taught people all around the world to become proficient and confident webdevelopers.

Rob Percival offers a step-by-step learning guide to HTML, CSS, JavaScript, Python and debugging skills. On reading this book, the reader will be able to hone skills through practising, learn to code in each of these languages, build a website, build an app and have the confidence to supercharge career chances. Confident Coding provides the roadmap needed to enhance someoneâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s professional life through coding, with insightful and inspirational guidance, including real life success stories, on how to use the new skills learned. The ability to code can give a CV the edge on the competition, give greater autonomy and improve work performance. For the selfemployed entrepreneur, being able to create a website or app can grant valuable freedom and revolutionize a business.

Table of Contents 1 Introduction 2 Why coding? 2.1 Why coding is important and what it can do for you 2.2 What coding is 3 Languages 3.1 HTML 3.2 CSS 3.3 JavaScript 3.4 Python 4 In practice 4.1 Website development 4.2 Building an Android app 4.3 Building an iPhone/iPad app 4.4 Debugging 5 Futureproofing your career with coding 5.1 Using coding to enhance your career prospects 5.2 Coding and entrepreneurship: creating your own business or product 5.3 Pursuing coding further: becoming a developer

6 7

Advice on further resources and study List of other books and courses Conclusion

Employability and Careers 269


Confident Data Skills

This book

<< Covers the most important

techniques of working with data including visualization, modelling, preparation, presentation and communication

Master the Fundamentals of Working with Data and Supercharge Your Career Edition 1

<< Contains several inspiring case

studies that enable the reader to see how data skills are applied in real companies from around the world, including Netflix, LinkedIn, Goodreads, Deep Blue and AlphaGo

Series: Date: Price:

Confident Series 03/01/2018 £14.99

ISBN Paperback: e-book:

9780749481544 9780749481551

Extent: Dimensions: Subject:

224 234x156 Business Skills

<< Demystifies the seemingly

difficult world of data and makes complicated techniques easy to understand through clear language and step-by-step instructions

Author Information

Description

Kirill Eremenko is a data science entrepreneur, instructor and consultant. He is the Founder and CEO of SuperDataScience, an online educational portal for data scientists. He is an expert in leveraging big data to drive business strategy, revamp customer experience and revolutionize business processes. Eremenko is also passionate about delivering high-quality accessible digital education and runs over 20 online courses, taken by over 100,000 students worldwide.

Data science is the most exciting skill you can master. Data has dramatically changed how our world works. From entertainment to politics, from technology to advertising and from science to the business world, data is integral and its only limit is our imagination. If you want to have a vibrant and valuable professional life, being skilled with data is the key to a cutting-edge career. Learning how to work with data may seem intimidating or difficult but with Confident Data Skills you will be able to master the fundamentals and supercharge your professional abilities. This essential book covers data mining, preparing data, analysing data, communicating data, financial modelling, visualizing insights and presenting data through film making and dynamic simulations. In-depth international case studies from a wide range of organizations, including Netflix, LinkedIn, Goodreads, Deep Blue and Alpha Go show successful data techniques in practice and inspire you to turn knowledge into innovation. Confident Data Skills also provides insightful guidance on how you can use data skills to enhance your employability and improve how your industry or company works through your data skills. Expert author and instructor, Kirill Eremenko, is committed to making the complex simple and inspiring you to have the confidence to develop an understanding, adeptness and love of data.

Table of Contents 1 2 2.1 2.2 2.3 3

Introduction – Why You Need Data Science What is Data Science – Key Principles Key Data Movements Defining Data Using Data What Can I Get out of Data Science – Data Gathering and Analysis 3.1 Identifying the Problem 3.2 Data Preparation 3.3 Data Analysis 4 How Can I Present It – Communicating Data 4.1 Data Visualization; Data Presentation 4.2 Making Your Data Ideas Happen and Careers in Data Science

270

Employability and Careers


This book

<< Contains inspiring interviews

with content experts from Sky, Mumsnet, CNN International, The Red Cross, Crocstar Media, Bunsters Hot Sauces, the UK Government Communication Service, Gatwick Airport and Innocent

Confident Digital Content Master the Fundamentals of Online Video, Design, Writing and Social Media to Supercharge Your Career

<< Is relevant to and can empower

Edition 1

<< Offers a full guide to the basics

Series: Date: Price:

Confident Series 03/01/2018 ÂŁ14.99

ISBN Paperback: e-book:

9780749480943 9780749480950

Extent: Dimensions: Subject:

224 234x156 Business Skills

all career paths, from the creative industries, media and marketing, to technology, education and science of video creation, graphic design skills, photography skills, digital journalism and writing skills specialized to the digital world

Description

Author Information

Confident Digital Content gives you the opportunity to become digitally multi-skilled and learn the fundamentals of the most important types of digital creativity. Whatever your career path, being able to produce exciting and creative content online, whether through video, design, digital journalism or social media, can supercharge your professional career and empower your entrepreneurial pursuits.

Adam Waters has been producing digital content for over 10 years. Previously a Senior Digital Producer at Bloomberg, he is currently Head of Digital at the British Forces Broadcasting Service. Waters is also a juror for the Royal Television Society Journalism Awards and regularly serves as a digital adviser to charities and the UK government. He is passionate about digital skills and modern journalism and regularly runs classes and mentorship programmes for young people and graduates.

Confident Digital Content teaches you valuable hard skills, including how to create and upload great video content, graphic design, photography for social media, community management, digital strategy and metrics, and helps you learn them through practical exercises in every chapter. It also provides insightful guidance on how to boost your career and employability by honing your leadership, creativity and entrepreneurial skills in the world of digital. Case studies from inspiring individuals at organizations including CNN International, the Red Cross, Mumsnet, Bunsters Hot Sauces, Sky, Gatwick Airport, and Innocent show you real world examples of excellent digital content in practice. This book is your ultimate guide to achieving the technical proficiency and confidence to start an inspiring digital career path, whether your ambition is to rise to the top of your chosen industry, be a successful freelancer or become an entrepreneur.

Table of Contents 1 2

Introduction Why Digital Content Skills are Essential for Your Career 3 How to Write for Digital 4 Making Great Video 5 Graphic Design, Photography and Audio 6 Digital Community Building 7 Social Media 8 Evaluation and Measuring Digital Success 9 Becoming a Creative Digital Leader 10 Conclusion

Employability and Careers

271


Confident Web Design

This book

<< Covers the essential skills and

concepts that readers need to understand the end-to-end process of web design, including coding languages, tools, creating the website, enhancing the website and publishing the website

Master the Fundamentals of Website Creation and Supercharge Your Career Edition 1

<< Provides a step-by-step guide

Series: Date: Price:

Confident Series 03/01/2018 £14.99

ISBN Paperback: e-book:

9780749481001 9780749481018

Extent: Dimensions: Subject:

224 234x156 Business Skills

which enables the reader to have built their own basic website by the end of the book

<< Contains helpful tables, figures and

boxed features, and is written in an accessible language to make the complex world of web design easy for the reader to understand

Author Information

Description

Kenny Wood has over 12 years of experience in web design and is the founder and director of IndigoMelody, a digital agency that specializes in creating websites, web apps, visual branding and social media strategies for a wide range of businesses. Based between London and Leamington Spa, Kenny has created websites and apps for organizations including SkillPill, Globelynx, the University of Warwick, Crenshaw Associates, Lennon Wright, Gadfly Media and the British Forces Broadcasting Service. He is a regular blogger and created IndigoMelody’s ‘How we Made It’ web design blog and is passionate about digital education.

This is your ultimate beginner’s guide to the skills of web design. Confident Web Design takes you on a practical journey during which you will discover the techniques to allow you to publish a basic website from scratch. Whether you want to develop web design skills to set yourself apart in a competitive job market, power your entrepreneurial pursuits by creating a new website to showcase your product or business idea, or simply boost your professional performance in your current job, Confident Web Design is the perfect beginner’s resource. In Confident Web Design, each chapter is supported by exclusive online exercises to allow you to put your knowledge into practice and perfect the techniques. The book’s structure is designed to break down each skill into manageable chunks, aided by helpful examples, technical term glossaries, tables and images to support you as you learn. Written in accessible and engaging language, author Kenny Wood shares his passion and enthusiasm for modern web design through this essential guide.

Table of Contents 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

Introduction How the Web Works The Tools of Web Design The Languages of Web Design Creating Your First Website CSS JavaScript Enhancing Your Website Publishing Your Website How Web Design Skills can Supercharge Your Career 11 Conclusion

272

Employability and Careers


This book

<< Contains brand new content for 2018 on digital and technology careers

<< Provides job-seekers with crucial

and concise information: what qualifications are required, what does the job entail, what are the starting salaries and what are the opportunities in the industry

<< Functions as an easy-to read

and non-intimidating guide that is perfect for young people considering their career options

The A-Z of Careers and Jobs Edition 25

Date: Price:

03/05/2018 £19.99

ISBN Paperback: e-book:

9780749482305 9780749482312

Extent: Dimensions: Subject:

368 234x156 Employability

Description From accountant to zoologist, this new edition of The A-Z of Careers and Jobs is your one-stop guide for insightful guidance on more than 300 different career areas in the UK. This book is a quick and informative way to find out about what jobs and careers are out there, from traditional roles to brand new opportunities in the digital world. For those looking for their first job after school or university, or for anyone considering a change of career, this book provides reliable and up-to-date advice on a wide range of professions to help you choose the right path for you. The A-Z of Careers and Jobs covers the practical issues you need to understand, such as the extent of job opportunities in each industry, what personal skills are needed, what experience is required, entry qualifications, training, as well as typical earnings and starting salaries. In an ever more competitive and changing job market, information will help maximize your chances of success. This book is designed to help identify what personal strengths fit to what kinds of work, what skills you should highlight on a CV and what you need to know to be well informed about each job. The A-Z of Careers and Jobs is also a valuable resource for careers advisers working in schools, colleges and universities who need to keep track of new developments – such as new roles and routes of entry, professional associations and exams – to offer the very best guidance to today’s job hunters.

Employability and Careers

273


Ultimate Cover Letters

This book

<< This is the companion title to the highly successful Ultimate CV by best-selling author Martin John Yate.

The Definitive Guide to Job Search Letters and Follow-up Strategies

<< Includes a wide selection of letters Edition 4

that can be adapted for individual use across a variety of industries.

<< Contains a wealth of key phrases Series: Date: Price:

Ultimate Series 03/08/2015 ÂŁ14.99

ISBN Paperback: e-book:

9780749474539 9780749477479

Extent: Dimensions: Subject:

280 240x170 Employability

for creating a compelling letter that differentiates you from other letters.

Author Information

Description

Martin John Yate is an internationally bestselling author. He has held major posts as a director of training and personnel for several international companies. His best-selling book Great Answers to Tough Interview Questions is now in its 8th edition and has sold over 5 million copies. He is also the author of the highly successful Ultimate CV (both published by Kogan Page).

In the competitive world of job-hunting everything rests in the balance of first impressions, so it is of vital importance to know how to write a compelling opening letter when you apply for a position. Ultimate Cover Letters, from best-selling author and careers expert Martin John Yate, describes how to do just that, helping you to open doors to job interviews and offers of employment, and outshine all other candidates. From the very popular Ultimate series, the book offers, as well as sound advice on assembling letters and how to use key â&#x20AC;&#x2DC;power phrasesâ&#x20AC;&#x2122; to get results, over 100 sample letters to cover a variety of situations. These include e-mail responses to on-line applications, speculative letters, letters to answer advertised vacancies, follow-up letters, networking letters and even acceptance and resignation letters. Now including a chapter on how to develop your professional image and integrate it into your job search letter, Ultimate Cover Letters covers all aspects of this crucial part of the job-hunting process in an engaging and approachable way, ensuring you put every chance of success by your side.

Table of Contents 1

Cover letters: the secret weapon in your job search 2 The six types of job search letters 3 Know the job, know your customer 4 Develop your professional identity 5 Elements of a great cover letter 6 Assembling your job search letter 7 How to polish and edit your letters for maximum impact 8 The plan of attack 9 Sample letters

274

Employability and Careers


This book

<< From renowned careers expert

Martin John Yate, author of the best-selling careers title Great Answers to Tough Interview Questions.

<< Contains everything you need to

know to produce the perfect CV that will differentiate you from the competition.

<< Includes 100 samples of winning

CVs, tailor-made for different job descriptions and special situations.

Ultimate CV Over 100 Winning CVs to Help You Get the Interview and the Job Edition 4

Series: Date: Price:

Ultimate Series 03/08/2015 £14.99

ISBN Paperback: e-book:

9780749474546 9780749477462

Extent: Dimensions: Subject:

328 240x170 Employability

Description

Author Information

With the current job market overcome with competition, it can feel daunting and inadequate to reduce your whole career experience and ambitions to a single document for Human Resources representatives to review. Ultimate CV, now in its fourth edition and part of the successful Ultimate series, provides you with the key guidance you need to create an irresistible CV that will grab the recruiter’s attention, help you to stand out from other candidates, opening doors to job interviews and maximising the potential for offers of employment. Covering all aspects of this crucial part of the job-hunting process, and with hundreds of sample CVs tailored to specific jobs and industry specifications, careers and CV guru Martin John Yate shows you how to position plain facts into a powerful sales pitch that will get you the job you want. With advice on hunting for jobs, this indispensable book will give you all the guidance you need to create a distinctive, professional CV that will help you get that dream job you have been going after.

Martin John Yate is an internationally best selling author and renowned expert on career matters. He has held major posts as a director of training and personnel for several international companies. His top selling title Great Answers to Tough Interview Questions, published by Kogan Page, is now in its 8th edition.

Table of Contents 1 2 3 4 5 6

How to make your CV shine Get inside your customer’s head The basic ingredients Building your professional identity Choose your format The simplest, smartest, fastest way to write your CV 7 How to give your CV impact 8 Getting the most from your CV 9 Ready to launch 10 The CVs…

Employability and Careers

275


Ultimate New Job

This book

The Definitive Guide to Surviving and Thriving As A New Starter Edition 1 Date: Price:

<< New in the successful Ultimate

series and written by career expert and leading author James Innes, a regular contributor to the Guardian’s ‘CV Clinic’

<< Fully supported online with

extra material available from The CV Centre’s website, offering interactivity, forums and a video blog.

03/03/2012 £14.99

<< Includes essential advice, such as

ISBN Paperback: e-book:

9780749464097 9780749464844

Extent: Dimensions: Subject:

232 240x170 Employability

managing a difficult new boss and managing your image.

Author Information

Description

James Innes is an accomplished author and the Founder and Managing Director of The CV Centre – the UK’s leading CV consultancy. Following more than a decade of experience heading up The CV Centre, James is widely considered to be one of the UK’s leading careers experts. Visit his website at: http:// www.ineedacv.co.uk/.

How long do you stay in each job? Millions of us change roles on average every three years. A nation of job-hoppers, every promotion or change presents the same issues and worries and there’s no getting away from those first day nerves. Ultimate New Job will prepare you for the toughest few months of your life, when fitting in is everything and first impressions count. Covering every aspect of starting a new job or internship, it tackles the top fifteen questions that people ask when starting a new position, from handling the offer and resigning from your current post, to researching the organisation, networking and finding your place within the team. With realistic, practical advice, Ultimate New Job tackles all of your concerns head on, making your first weeks and months as smooth a transition as possible – for you and your new employer.

Table of Contents 1 Introduction 2 A new job 2.1 Handling the offer 2.2 Leaving your last job 2.3 Being prepared 3 The first week 3.1 D-Day – your first day 3.2 Understanding your purpose 3.3 Knowledge is power 4 The people 4.1 Managing your new boss 4.2 Finding your place within the team 4.3 Handling your subordinates 4.4 Networking and socialising 5 The learning curve 5.1 Planning and organisation 5.2 Time management 5.3 Communication 5.4 Writing skills 5.5 Presentations 5.6 Meetings 5.7 Remote working 5.8 Working abroad 5.9 Coping with problems 5.10 Dealing with difficult people 5.11 Handling office politics 5.12 Pressure and stress 5.13 Coping with change at work 5.14 Imposing change at work 5.15 Feel like jumping ship?

276

Employability and Careers

6 Onwards and upwards 6.1 Training 6.2 Performance appraisals 6.3 Time for a pay rise? 6.4 Getting promoted 6.5 Moving on 7 My five top tips to survive and thrive in your new job 7.1 Survive and thrive


<< Provides everything job hunters

Ultimate Job Search

<< Includes insightful comments from

Master the Art of Finding Your Ideal Job, Getting an Interview and Networking

<< Contains sample CVs for different

Edition 5

This book need to know in one book on how to maximise their chances of securing a new role industry experts giving a real-life view of the job market

types of jobs and sector specific interview questions

Series: Date: Price:

Ultimate Series 03/07/2018 £14.99

ISBN Paperback: e-book:

9780749481407 9780749481414

Extent: Dimensions: Subject:

256 234x156 Employability

Description

Author Information

Do you want to find your ideal job? Do you need to able to prepare an excellent CV, answer tough interview questions and impress prospective employers? A ‘one-stop shop’ for all job hunters, Ultimate Job Search takes the stress out of job hunting and provides advice on every stage of the job hunting process, from preparing a powerful CV that will get you noticed; sample cover letters and emails that come across as genuine; making a great impression at interviews; to dealing with offers and rejections in a positive manner.

Lynn Williams is a career counsellor and trainer who runs workshops on CV writing and interview techniques, and writes regularly on job search and career issues. She is the author of the best-selling Ultimate Interview, Readymade CV and Readymade Job Search Letters (all Kogan Page).

From the best-selling Ultimate series, the guidance in this book will help you shine and will demonstrate to future employers that you’re the person for the job. With an exhaustive breadth of detail and real-life up-to-date comments from employers and recruitment professionals, Ultimate Job Search is invaluable to anyone looking to get their dream job at any stage of their career.

Table of Contents 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21

Introduction First Things First The Highly Employable Candidate Making a Start The Skills they Want from Everyone Your CV CV Problems CVs with Special Considerations CVs for Specific Jobs Application Forms Covering Letters Telephone Calls The Job Search Your Online Job Search Job Search Strategies Interviews – Making a Great Impression Answering Interview Questions Questions for Specific Jobs Questions for School and College Leavers Interviews and More Offers and Rejections

Employability and Careers

277


Ultimate Interview

This book

Master the Art of Interview Success with 100s of Typical, Unusual and Industry-specific Questions and Answers Edition 5 Series: Date: Price:

<< Contains 100s of sample

interview questions, as well as sample answers, from a diverse range of job types including management, sales and marketing, administration, customer relations, technical jobs, creative jobs and practical jobs

<< Helps you to prove yourself as an

ideal candidate and covers the soft skills that will help you succeed at interview such as rapport building, communication and confidence

Ultimate Series 03/07/2018 £14.99

<< Gives insightful guidance on

ISBN Paperback: e-book:

9780749481384 9780749481391

Extent: Dimensions: Subject:

232 234x156 Employability

how best to impress employers through giving the best answers to common, difficult and unusual interview questions

Author Information

Description

Lynn Williams is a career counsellor and trainer who runs workshops on CV writing and interview techniques. She writes regularly for a wide range of publications on job search and career issues and is also the author of Ultimate Job Search, Readymade CVs and Readymade Job Search Letters (all published by Kogan Page).

Are you preparing for an upcoming interview? Are you nervous about making a good impression or want to practice for difficult questions? From the bestselling Ultimate series, Ultimate Interview will give you all the guidance you need when preparing to ace the interview for your dream job. When preparing for an interview, it’s essential that you understand what the organization is looking for and how you can prove yourself. In today’s ultra competitive job market, the only way you can beat your competitors is by preparing in the very best way possible. Renowned careers expert, Lynn Williams, will give you the edge on: understanding your interviewer and what they are looking for, highlighting the evidence that you are the perfect candidate through skills and industry knowledge, standing out from the competition, answering questions professionals, navigating the beginning of the interview, coping with difficult questions, dealing with off-the-wall questions, looking the part and knowing how to behave in telephone, video, panel and assessment center interviews. Ultimate Interview is a must-have for all serious job-seekers. It contains 100s of sample interview questions, with answer examples, tailored by industry to give you a personalized resource. It covers jobs in management, sales and marketing, administration, customer relations, technical industries, practical industries and creative industries.

Table of Contents

278

Employability and Careers

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23

Introduction Know Your Enemy Prepare Yourself Standing Out Answering Questions Starting in the Interview Questions they Ask Everybody Questions for Practical Jobs Questions for Creative Jobs Questions for Clerical and Administrative Jobs Questions for Sales and Marketing Jobs Questions for Technical Jobs Questions for Management Jobs Questions for Customer Relations Jobs Questions for School and College Leavers Tackling the Difficult Questions Dealing with Tricky Questions Answering Off-the-Wall Questions Your Questions for the Interviewer Variations on the Theme Interview Extras Looking the Part What Happens Next?


This book

<< The biggest book of IQ practice

tests available with 1000 psychometric test questions – substantially more than the nearest competitor.

<< Perfect for those facing an IQ test or for puzzle enthusiasts. << Covers every aspect of IQ testing,

including verbal reasoning, diagrammatic reasoning and lateral thinking.

Ultimate IQ Tests 1000 Practice Test Questions to Boost Your Brainpower Edition 3

Series: Date: Price:

Ultimate Series 03/08/2015 £14.99

ISBN Paperback: e-book:

9780749474300 9780749474317

Extent: Dimensions: Subject:

320 240x170 Employability

Description

Author Information

IQ tests are routinely encountered in recruitment for various industries, including for jobs in the government, armed forces, education as well as industry and commerce. Competition is fierce and employers are determined to cut the weak from the strong so it is essential for candidates to be prepared. Ultimate IQ Tests is the biggest book of IQ practice tests available. Written and compiled by experts in IQ testing and brain puzzles it contains 1000 practice questions organized into 25 tests, with a simple guide to assessing individual performance. With a brand new test in this edition, designed to be more challenging than the others so you can track progress, this is the best one-stop resource to mind puzzles. Working through the questions will help you to improve your vocabulary and develop powers of calculation and logical reasoning. From the best-selling Ultimate series, Ultimate IQ Tests is an invaluable resource if you have to take an IQ test, but it’s also great fun if you like to stretch your mind for your own entertainment – and boost your brain power.

Ken Russell and Philip Carter are IQ test experts who are continually devising new IQ tests and puzzles. They have produced over 60 books covering all aspects of testing, crosswords, puzzles and reasoning. These include the best-selling Test your IQ published by Kogan Page.

Table of Contents 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25

Philip Carter is also the author of IQ & Psychometric Tests, The IQ & Psychometric Test Workbook, Test and Assess Your IQ, Advanced IQ Tests, IQ and Aptitude Tests, IQ and Personality Tests, Succeed at IQ Tests, all published by Kogan Page.

Test 1 – Questions Test 2 – Questions Test 3 – Questions Test 4 – Questions Test 5 – Questions Test 6 – Questions Test 7 – Questions Test 8 – Questions Test 9 – Questions Test 10 – Questions Test 11 – Questions Test 12 – Questions Test 13 – Questions Test 14 – Questions Test 15 – Questions Test 16 – Questions Test 17 – Questions Test 18 – Questions Test 19 – Questions Test 20 – Questions Test 21 – Questions Test 22 – Questions Test 23 – Questions Test 24 – Questions Test 25 – Questions

Employability and Careers 279


Ultimate Aptitude Tests

This book

Over 1000 Practice Questions for Abstract Visual, Numerical, Verbal, Physical, Spatial and Systems Tests

<< Includes detailed explanations of

Edition 4

<< Contains essential practice for

recruitment tests and aptitude assessment procedures answers to aid learning and test scoring abilities

<< Comes with a free suite of online

tests which allow the reader to practice and score themselves against others

Series: Date: Price:

Ultimate Series 03/07/2018 ÂŁ14.99

ISBN Paperback: e-book:

9780749482084 9780749482091

Extent: Dimensions: Subject:

232 234x156 Employability

Author Information

Description

Jim Barrett is a chartered psychologist with years of experience in advising organizations on their selection procedures. He is a bestselling author and has written many testing books, including The Complete Personality Assessment, How to Pass Advanced Aptitude Tests, The Aptitude Test Workbook and he is coauthor of Test Your Own Aptitude, all published by Kogan Page.

Do you need to prepare for an aptitude test as part of an interview or selection process? Do you want to be able to practice, improve and measure your scores? Ultimate Aptitude Tests, now in its fourth edition and part of the best-selling Ultimate series, is the largest and most comprehensive book of its kind, boasting over 1000 varied practice aptitude questions with accompanying detailed answers and explanations. In such a competitive job market, this is the perfect book to ensure youâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;re entirely prepared to get those high scores and impress potential employers.

Tom Barrett runs a online software development consultancy. He specialises in web software architecture, web standards, usability and content management. Tom is a psychology graduate and has developed the software for the online psychometric tests available at insight-tests.com.

Businesses use aptitude tests to gain a greater level of certainty when recruiting and sometimes even to fast track potential leaders. Providing essential practice, Ultimate Aptitude Tests it includes psychometric tests that mirror those you are likely to encounter, including abstract visual tests, verbal and numerical reasoning aptitudes test, practical skills and understanding tests, spatial and systems potential tests and logic and intuition tests of different types. This new edition also now includes a brand new section on online testing environments as well as free access to a separate full online test to evaluate your abilities. Ultimate Aptitude Tests is brilliant preparation for candidates wishing to outshine their competition on the job market and secure their dream job.

Table of Contents 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

280

Employability and Careers

Introduction Abstract Visual Tests Abstract Numerical Tests Abstract Verbal Tests Physical Tests Spatial Tests Practical Numerical Tests System Tests Practical Verbal Tests Online Testing


This book

<< Is the biggest ever psychometric test book boasting over 1000 practice questions

<< Is designed to be an ideal

companion to self study and practice of psychometric tests to help you land your dream job

<< Offers sample questions from every major type of test including verbal reasoning, numerical reasoning, personality questionnaires, nonverbal and diagrammatic reasoning tests, spatial and recognition tests, situational awareness questions, quantities and conversions

Ultimate Psychometric Tests Over 1000 Practical Questions for Verbal, Numerical, Diagrammatic and Personality Tests Edition 4

Series: Date: Price:

Ultimate Series 03/08/2018 £14.99

ISBN Paperback: e-book:

9780749481636 9780749481629

Extent: Dimensions: Subject:

280 234x156 Employability

Description

Author Information

Are you faced with an upcoming psychometric test as part of a job application? Do you want to practice your technique and perfect your score? The best-selling Ultimate Psychometric Tests, now in its fourth edition, is the biggest book of its kind, containing over 1000 practice test questions of a multitude of different types of tests with accompanying answers and explanations. Providing sample questions from all the major types of test, including verbal reasoning, numerical reasoning, personality questionnaires, non-verbal and diagrammatic reasoning, new tests also now include spatial recognition and visual estimation, situational awareness tests as well as quantities and conversion tests.

Mike Bryon is an expert in psychometrics and training solutions. He is the author of many testing books, including How to Pass Graduate Psychometric Tests, The Graduate Psychometric Test Workbook, How to Pass Advanced Numeracy Tests, The Advanced Numeracy Test Workbook and How to Pass the Civil Service Qualifying Tests all published by Kogan Page.

Ultimate Psychometric Tests also includes an overview of which companies employ which tests, including L’Oreal, Sony, HMV, Toyota and IKEA among others and it has plenty of advice on how to get test-wise and seriously improve scoring. The use of psychometric tests in job selection procedures is more prominent than ever and for unprepared candidates they represent a considerable challenge that can get in the way of them successfully landing a new job. This is your definitive guide to acing any type of psychometric testing you encounter as well as keeping your mind sharp and active.

Table of Contents 1 2

Psychometric Tests – What Are They? How to Pass Psychometric Tests and How to Use this Book 3 Verbal Reasoning 4 Numerical Reasoning 5 Personality Questionnaires 6 Non-Verbal Reasoning, Mechanical Comprehension and Data Interpretation 7 Answers and Explanations

Employability and Careers

281


Great Answers to Tough Interview Questions

This book

<< The original and still the best guide to preparing for interviews and interview techniques

<< Over 5 million copies sold of previous editions

Edition 9

<< Includes updated information

on how to highlight your useful transferable skills along with teamworking and manageability skills.

Date: Price:

03/04/2014 ÂŁ9.99

ISBN Paperback: e-book:

9780749471453 9780749477486

Extent: Dimensions: Subject:

280 216x138 Employability

Author Information

Description

Martin John Yate is an internationally bestselling author. He has held major posts as a director of training and personnel for several international companies and is widely respected as the expert on all career matters. He is also the author of The Ultimate CV and The Ultimate Cover Letters, both published by Kogan Page.

Great Answers to Tough Interview Questions is the best-selling job-hunting book of all time and the essential companion for all jobseekers. It takes you through the whole process, from composing your CV and preparing for interviews to interview techniques, answering tough questions and even negotiating your new salary. This fully revised new edition includes valuable advice on highlighting your transferable skills and tips for using the internet and social networking as part of your job search. Full of examples of difficult questions that interviewers like to throw at you, Great Answers to Tough Interview Questions is suitable for anyone at any stage of their career, providing all the guidance needed to land that dream job. An indispensable guide that blows the competition away, no serious job-hunter can afford to ignore it.

Table of Contents 1 Introduction 2 The Well-Stocked Briefcase 2.1 The realities of job hunting 2.2 The productive CV 2.3 Networking and the successful job search 2.4 Network-integrated job search tactics 3 Getting to Square One 3.1 Making contact 3.2 The telephone interview 3.3 Dressing for interview success 3.4 Body language 3.5 The curtain goes up on the job interview 4 Great Answers to Tough Interview Questions 4.1 The five secrets of securing a job offer 4.2 Why interviewers do the things they do 4.3 How to knock â&#x20AC;&#x2DC;em dead 4.4 Questions of manageability and team spirit 4.5 The stress interview and illegal questions 4.6 Welcome to the real world 4.7 The graceful exit 5 Finishing Touches 5.1 Out of sight, out of mind? 5.2 Snatching victory from the jaws of defeat 5.3 Negotiating the offer 5.4 Multiple interviews, multiple offers 5.5 Conclusion: the glittering prizes

282

Employability and Careers


This book

<< Fully revised best-selling guide with over 100000 copies sold.

Readymade CVs Winning CVs and Cover Letters for Every Type of Job

<< Now includes a guide to writing the

perfect covering letter to showcase your CV, with advice on style, presentation, wording and common mistakes to avoid.

<< Online Resources: downloadable sample CVs

Edition 5

Date: Price:

03/04/2012 £12.99

ISBN Paperback: e-book:

9780749465056 9780749465063

Extent: Dimensions: Subject:

248 216x138 Employability

Description

Author Information

This best-selling guide sets out the ground rules for preparing a CV by showing how to select which details go in and which stay out, how to lay out and present a CV and how to make a great first impression. It includes sample CVs for a wide variety of jobs: practical, creative, administrative, sales and marketing, technical and management, with online template CVs and covering letters ready for you to download and customise. Readymade CVs also looks at specific ‘tricky’ situations such as getting your first job, returning to work after a career break, continuing in work as a mature employee or after retirement. With the addition of action words and positive phrases to help you put together the perfect CV for any job or situation, this is a truly comprehensive and indispensable resource.

Lynn Williams is a career counsellor and trainer who runs workshops on CV writing and interview techniques. She writes regularly for a wide range of publications on job search and career issues and is also the author of Readymade Job Search Letters, Ultimate Interview and Ultimate Job Search.

Table of Contents 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

The basic CV Your CV section by section The tailor-made CV Covering letters Your online CV Problems, problems Starting out Starting again Keeping going CVs for practical jobs CVs for creative jobs CVs for clerical and administrative jobs CVs for sales and marketing jobs CVs for technical jobs CVs for management jobs Never be lost for words

Employability and Careers 283


Superconductors

This book

Revolutionize Your Career and Make Big Things Happen Edition 1

<< Contains inspiring interviews with

cutting-edge experts including Jordan Harbinger, Vanessa Van Edwards, Derek Muller and Jason Zook to help the reader master the skills they need to take back control

<< Pushes the reader to triumph over Date: Price:

03/07/2018 £14.99

ISBN Paperback: e-book:

9780749482367 9780749482374

Extent: Dimensions: Subject:

232 234x156 Employability

increasingly disrupted career paths by fully developing themselves with the original, practical and handson exercises at the end of every chapter

<< Shows the reader how they can

become irreplaceable, get an edge on the competition and stay valuable in a context of growing automation, AI, and increased outsourcing

Author Information

Description

Derek Loudermilk is a serial entrepreneur, business coach and international speaker. A dedicated professional adventurer and digital nomad, he is also the host of the Art of Adventure Podcast and the Uncharted Family Podcast.

The steady career path is a thing of the past: disruption is here to stay. You need to be able to keep learning, growing and reinventing yourself to stay valuable in the midst of this change. Those who succeed in this new world will be the ones who have skills that are always in demand and cannot be replaced. Creativity, charisma, confidence, constant learning, storytelling, adaptability and tribe building are the keys to having a thriving professional life and turning ideas into reality. Superconductors is your treasure trove of exclusive interviews and hands-on self-development exercises to inspire you and push you into action. Derek Loudermilk brings together some of the best minds to coach you on every skill, including entrepreneurs, podcasters, venture capitalist experts, human behaviour hackers, journalists and digital storytellers. Michael Margolis, Vanessa Van Edwards, Derek Muller, Jason Zook, Linda Rottenburg are just some of the people giving you original insights and advice to help you form your own path. If you’re ambitious and you want to carve your place in this chaotic, but exciting, new world of work then you need to be a superconductor: you need to have the creative energy, the ability to build great networks and the charisma to make big things happen. Whether you want to live as a digital nomad, an entrepreneur or be a formidable force in your chosen industry, Superconductors gives you the unique insight and hands-on tools to be the best you can be.

Table of Contents 1

Introduction – How to Be Valuable in a World Where Value is Constantly Changing 2 Harnessing the Value of Your Relationships and Networks 3 Achieving Big Things in Shorter Time Frames 4 Optimizing Your Creativity 5 Doing Your Best Work 6 Accelerating How You Learn 7 Telling Your Story 8 Portraying Your Best Self – the Science of Charisma and Confidence 9 Building Extraordinary Relationships 10 Dreaming Big 11 Finding the Fun in Innovation and the Healthiness in Competition

284

Employability and Careers


This book

<< From the bestselling author of Preparing the Perfect CV

<< Practical tips on how to make your job interview presentation stand out from the crowd

<< Vital tips on difficult situations

and how to rise above them and impress the panel

Knockout Job Interview Presentations How to Present with Confidence Beat the Competition and Impress Your Way into a Top Job Edition 1

Date: Price:

03/02/2010 ÂŁ7.99

ISBN Paperback: e-book:

9780749457150 9780749459253

Extent: Dimensions: Subject:

144 216x138 Employability

Description

Author Information

Presenting in a job interview can be incredibly daunting. Candidates often lack the confidence and skills so they fail to do themselves justice and impress the panel.

Rebecca Corfield is an expert in career management, presentation skills and organizational development. A former President of the National Institute of Career Guidance in the UK, she advises individuals and companies on career issues and personal change and her interview advice for students regularly appears on Times Online. She is the author of the bestselling titles Preparing the Perfect CV, Successful Interview Skills, Preparing the Perfect Job Application and The Redundancy Survival Guide all published by Kogan Page.

Knockout Job Interview Presentations takes you through the whole process of planning and making a presentation as part of a job interview and helps you to understand what employers are looking for and learn how to provide it. It will help you to have a positive outlook, plan so that you know what to include and how, cope with seen and unseen briefs, make all of the practical preparations, then get it right on the day, handling nerves and making an impact. Rebecca Corfield also looks into difficult situations that may occur and gives advice on how to rise above them and continue with your presentation unscathed. This practical, inspiring book will give you the advantage over other job candidates so that you make a presentation with ease and confidence and trump the competition.

Table of Contents 1 2 3 4 5 6 7

Introduction The basics Planning your presentation Preparation Presentation Learning and improving Facing tricky situations

Employability and Careers 285


Preparing the Perfect Job Application

This book

<< From the bestselling author of Preparing the Perfect CV

<< Practical tips on how to make job

Application Forms and Letters Made Easy Edition 5

applications stand out from the crowd

<< Sample questions and answers and downloadable application forms and letter templates

Date: Price:

03/10/2009 ÂŁ7.99

ISBN Paperback: e-book:

9780749456535 9780749458546

Extent: Dimensions: Subject:

176 216x138 Employability

Author Information

Description

Rebecca Corfield is an expert in career management, presentation skills and organizational development. A former President of the National Institute of Career Guidance in the UK, she advises individuals and companies on career issues and personal change and her interview advice for students regularly appears on Times Online. She is the author of the bestselling titles Preparing the Perfect CV, and Successful Interview Skills, both published by Kogan Page.

Application forms are designed to filter out unsuitable applicants and to ensure candidates for interview can be assessed objectively. How do you make sure that you pitch yourself properly and ensure your job application is more successful than those of others in the candidate pool? This book holds the answer. Preparing the Perfect Job Application is written for todayâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s candidate, seeking success in an ever-competitive and more unforgiving jobs market. The book brims with focused, pertinent and insightful advice designed to help you highlight your real talents and demonstrate how they would be useful to your prospective employer on your application form or letter. Online supporting resources for this book include downloadable sample application forms.

Table of Contents 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

286

Employability and Careers

Introduction The process of applying for jobs Using the internet What are employers looking for? What to put in your application Presentation Guidelines and examples Letters of application How to get that job!


This book

<< Contains one of the highest

numbers of practice exercises and questions on the market, developed and sourced by an expert Assessment Centre planner

<< Is full of insider tips and tricks from

author Tony Weightman who has run Assessment Centres for major clients including GSK, Nestle, Virgin Atlantic and Transport for London

<< Helps job seekers gain confidence by giving them the tools to practice showcasing the kinds of skills that top employers are looking for – from leadership and team work, to decision making and keeping calm under pressure

Assessment Centre Success Your Ultimate Resource of Practice Exercises and Sample Questions to Help you Ace the Activities, Beat the Competition and Impress Employers Edition 1

Date: Price:

03/07/2018 £14.99

ISBN Paperback: e-book:

9780749483135 9780749483142

Extent: Dimensions: Subject:

240 234x156 Employability

Description

Author Information

Assessment Centre Success is your road map to mastering the skills, exercises and challenges that you’ll be faced with when trying to secure that prized job offer. An Assessment Centre can be daunting: you are likely to face a full day of challenging exercises, tests and skilled competitors. However, with the right level of practice and preparation, you will be able to confidently tackle whatever employers may throw at you.

Tony Weightman has over thirty years’ experience as a HR consultant for major organizations including GSK, Nestle, Virgin Atlantic and Transport for London. He has developed and run assessment centres for some of the UK’s largest organizations across several industries including food, engineering, hospitality and the charity sector, as well as for MBA candidate development.

Written by experienced Assessment Centre planner, Tony Weightman, Assessment Centre Success contains a bank of practice exercises and insider tips to help you succeed. Individual exercises are covered, including how to deliver good presentations, reports, interviews and analysis under pressure as well as group exercises such as problem solving and team presentations. Expert guidance on how to demonstrate the key skills employers are looking for helps you understand how to show yourself in the best possible light under challenging circumstances: including leadership, team work, industry knowledge, keeping calm under pressure, decision making, analytical skills, confidence and communication skills.

Table of Contents 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

Introduction – The Importance of Assessment Centre Skills What an Assessment Centre is, Why They are Used and Why You Need to Learn How to Excel at Them What Employers Are Looking For How the Assessment Centre Works and What Will Happen How to Prepare for an Assessment Centre Practice Exercises and Explanations – Individual Practice Exercises and Explanations – Group Psychometric Tests The Interview How to Perform Well on the Day Gaining Feedback After the Event and Improving Your Performance Conclusion

Employability and Careers 287


Developing Employability and Enterprise

This book

<< Shows how to support clients in

developing resilience, confidence, motivation, interpersonal skills and entrepreneurial skills-important outcomes missed by traditional career support which focuses on how to find a job

Coaching Strategies for Success in the Workplace Edition 1 Date: Price:

<< Enables you to help clients develop

attributes and behaviours that are valued by employers as well as useful in developing opportunities and managing careers

03/10/2016 £29.99

ISBN Paperback: e-book:

9780749478476 9780749478483

Extent: Dimensions: Subject:

296 234x156 Employability

<< Provides credible psychometric measures and tools, CARRUS and MTQ48, for assessing and developing employability

Author Information

Description

Doug Strycharczyk is Managing Director of AQR, a consultancy and provider of psychometric tests, tools and development programmes. Doug has held a variety of HR and consultancy roles in the private and public sectors. He is the co-author of Developing Mental Toughness, co-author of Developing Resilient Organizations and a contributor to Psychometrics in Coaching, all published by Kogan Page.

Developing Employability and Enterprise shows how to help others develop the behaviours and attributes needed to thrive in the modern workplace. It offers coaches, career advisors and educators a complete guide to what employability looks like in the 21st century, both for new entrants to the world of work and those finding themselves in situations where they need to secure a new job or even career. The book shows how employability can be measured and how skills and attributes such as resilience, confidence, motivation, dealing with others, overcoming challenges and entrepreneurship can be developed through coaching and mentoring.

Charlotte Bosworth is Director of Skills and Employment at OCR, which develops employability and enterprise programmes for schools and colleges around the world.

Supported by the latest research from academia, government bodies, and practitioners, Developing Employability and Enterprise brings together some of the most influential thinkers around the world to offer a new approach to career management that looks beyond simply offering advice on résumés and CVs, job applications, job searches and interviews. It offers practical guidance on what attributes to develop and tools for how to do this including assessment options, sample exercises, notes on how to use the concepts in practice and global case studies.

Table of Contents 1 2

Why employability The growing importance of employability – schools 3 Models of employability 4 Developing employability and enterprise: Tackling the challenge of youth unemployment and social mobility 5 Developing mental readiness for the world of work – building confidence and understanding employment journeys 6 Assess myself for jobs and careers 7 Giving young people a clear line of sight to work 8 Helping individuals develop self-confidence and inter-personal skills 9 Skills in dealing with people – team working, altruism, emotional intelligence, assertiveness and co-operation 10 Making the best choices for jobs, careers and study 11 Presenting personal information for employers

288

Employability and Careers

12 Selection – Interviews and assessments centres/tests 13 Delivering effective work experience 14 More than being Richard Branson 15 Coaching for employability and enterprise 16 Developing mindset and mental toughness 17 Global perspectives – China and the Far East 18 Lifelong learning is the key to employability and economic vitality 19 Employability and enterprise 20 Employability training and coaching to clients with mental health problems 21 The role of sport in developing life skills, employability and enterprise


<< Showcases innovative solutions

Social Entrepreneurship and Innovation

<< Draws out the lessons learned by

International Case Studies and Practice

This book to social problems through case studies from Africa, India, the United States and Europe each innovator, enabling the reader to learn from their successes and mistakes

<< Bridges the gap between business and social entrepreneurship by exploring new business models to support social innovation

Edition 1

Date: Price:

03/03/2016 £29.99

ISBN Paperback: e-book:

9780749475918 9780749475925

Extent: Dimensions: Subject:

304 240x170 Entrepreneurship

Description

Author Information

Social innovation and social entrepreneurship look for creative and affordable solutions to specific societal problems. Fuelled by the spread of the internet and the ubiquity of mobile phones, there are more people working to solve pressing social and environmental problems in the world today than ever before in human history. Social Entrepreneurship and Innovation presents the journeys of pioneering – and often accidental – social innovators who, faced with a problem, used their courage, tenacity and creative thinking to find a solution.

Ken Banks, founder of global non-profit organization kiwanja.net, devotes himself to the application of mobile technology for positive social and environmental change in the developing world. He is a PopTech Fellow, a Tech Awards Laureate, an Ashoka Fellow and a National Geographic Emerging Explorer. He was appointed Entrepreneur in Residence at CARE International in 2015, elected a Fellow of the Royal Society of Arts in 2012, and in 2013 he was nominated for the prestigious TED Prize.

Using their own words to reflect upon their experiences, these cases do not gloss over the setbacks and the dead-ends social entrepreneurs can face. Instead, readers will gain a realistic insight into the challenges and an engaging look at the problem-solving mindset needed to overcome them. From a life-saving project to bring solar-powered lighting to midwives in Nigeria, to a news dissemination service that’s grown from small beginnings to have a global impact, each case study draws out the lessons learnt by the innovators, providing guidance and advice for those looking to follow in their footsteps. Social Entrepreneurship and Innovation is an invaluable resource for social entrepreneurs and innovators looking for new ideas and insight into what really works – and what doesn’t.

Table of Contents 1 2

Introduction, by Ken Banks of kiwanja.net ‘Wonders of the Solar System: Reducing Maternal Mortality in Developing Regions’, by Laura Stachel of We Care Solar 3 ‘Closing Latin America’s Digital Divide’, by Rodrigo Baggio of Centre for Digital Inclusion (CDI) 4 ‘Patent Wars: Fighting Big Pharma to Enable Access to Drugs for All’ by Priti Radhakrishnan of I-MAK 5 ‘Data Science, Technology and Design for Social Justice’ by Jessica Anderson and Joumana al Jabri of Visualizing Impact 6 ‘Bringing the Silicon Valley Revolution in Technology and Business to Global Health’ by Joel Selanikio of Magpi 7 ‘Food Waste Meets Food Poverty: Closing the Loop’ by Kelvin Cheung and Michael Norton of Foodcycle 8 ‘Innovation in Africa’s Silicon Savannah’ by Erik Hersman of Ushahidi

9 10

11 12

13 14

‘Touch-Based Treatment for Autism’ by Louisa Silva of Qigong Sensory Training Institute (QSTI) ‘Reconnecting the Disconnected: A Story of Technology, Refugees and Finding Lost Family’ by David and Christopher Mikkelsen of Refugees United ‘Let a Billion Readers Bloom’ by Brij Kothari of Planet Read ‘Keep Calm and Dream in Tunisia: Supporting Sustainable Development in Tunisia and North Africa Through Empowering Youth, Women and Farmers’ by Sarah Toumi of Dream in Tunisia ‘The Reluctant Geneticist’ by Sharon Terry of Genetic Alliance ‘Power to the People: Reengineering Democracy’ by Tarik Nesh Nash of Govright

Employability and Careers 289


A Practical Guide to Entrepreneurship

This book

<< Accessible, light weight but

prescriptive guide to setting up a business

How to Turn an Idea into a Profitable Business

<< Can be used as a core or

Edition 1

<< Includes online study materials for

supplementary text on any course which includes entrepreneurial modules/electives

students and lecturers

Date: Price:

03/11/2012 £24.99

ISBN Paperback: e-book:

9780749466886 9780749466893

Extent: Dimensions: Subject:

304 240x170 Entrepreneurship

Author Information

Description

Michael Morris has taught for university business schools and contributed regular columns to business magazines, as well as writing three titles published by Kogan Page. After senior management experience in smallto-medium sized firms he advised small firms for over a decade before moving to academia.

A Practical Guide to Entrepreneurship combines well-researched understanding of entrepreneurship issues with practical guidance in the form of case studies, exercises, advice and tips. Developed as a textbook based on the bestseller Starting a Successful Business by the same author, it’s ideal for teaching undergraduates, postgraduates and MBA students, offering a solid learning experience and a contemporary overview of the subject. It will also appeal to students who are looking for a supplementary text or indeed anyone who is thinking of starting their own business. It includes a section on generating and screening ideas, summaries of academic models and theories, information on new developments in the field and useful supplementary online material for students and teachers. Online supporting resources for this book include a business plan template, instructors manual, budget figures and lecture slides for each chapter.

Table of Contents 1 Introduction 2 Entrepreneurship 2.1 Entrepreneurship today 2.2 Becoming and being an entrepreneur 2.3 Not-for-profit (NFP) entrepreneurship 3 Evaluations 3.1 Business ideas – creation and evaluation 3.2 Running a business yourself 3.3 IT strategy 4 Customers and profits 4.1 Markets, market research and forecasting 4.2 Your proposition and pricing 4.3 Channels of distribution 4.4 Marketing communications 5 Financial management, raising finance 5.1 Costing 5.2 Controlling cash 5.3 Further financial planning 5.4 Credit control 5.5 Sources of finance 6 The law and the firm 6.1 Business legal entities and business names 6.2 Criminal and civil law as they affect business 6.3 The law of contract 6.4 Premises, operations, records and taxation 6.5 Premises – options and implications

290

Employability and Careers

6.6 Planning, control and purchasing 6.7 Safety and quality 6.8 Financial records and taxation 7 Employing staff 7.1 Why employ, planning to employ and employment law 7.2 Executing the recruitment plan 8 Managing risk, developing the firm 8.1 Risk management and insurance 8.2 Expansion and culture 8.3 Leadership and management 9 A systematic approach to growth 9.1 The PLG© Programme


This book

<< Endorsed by the Institute of Directors.

<< Highlights the latest ideas,

techniques and solutions for maximising growth and controlling risk.

<< Fully updated with new

case studies and latest fiscal developments.

The Growing Business Handbook Inspiration and Advice from Successful Entrepreneurs and Fast Growing UK Companies Edition 17

Date: Price:

03/07/2016 ÂŁ39.99

ISBN Paperback: e-book:

9780749477905 9780749477899

Extent: Dimensions: Subject:

272 240x170 Entrepreneurship

Description

Author Information

The Growing Business Handbook, now in its 17th Edition, provides a comprehensive account of the underlying challenges for growing companies, offering insight into techniques and solutions for maximizing growth and controlling risks during the course of 2016/17.

Adam Jolly is a business writer and editor specializing in the management of growth, innovation, technology and risk. He is Consultant Editor on a number of Kogan Page titles including The Handbook of European Intellectual Property Management; Clean Tech Clean Profits and The Innovation Handbook.

The Growing Business Handbook will highlight challenges that are likely to be making an impact on SMEs, including the implications of the UK governmentâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s new Enterprise Bill, the development of alternative sources of finance and the recommendation that business schools become more engaged in actively supporting SMEs. High growth and high performing businesses of the year ahead will depend less on their type of business and more on their ability to manage the growth process. In markets of all kinds, there will be scope to spot an opening, make a plan, create a compelling offer, find a route to market, develop a financial strategy, become more professional and inspire everyone within a team. The Growing Business Handbook will bring readers up to speed on how best to lead and manage the growth process. By offering an insight into the techniques and solutions for maximizing growth and controlling risks within an enterprise, this must-have offers practical advice and concrete suggestions to help an enterprise reach maximum potential.

Table of Contents 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11

Planning for growth Ideas and innovation Building the brand People and performance Cashflow and working capital Digital technology and systems Leading growth Risk and compliance Growth models International expansion Growth capital

Employability and Careers

291


Innovation

This book

How Innovators Think, Act and Change Our World Edition 1 Date: Price:

<< Draws on the author’s interviews with 100 of the world’s greatest innovators

<< Provides insights into what drives successful innovators and what makes innovations take off, with advice on how to apply them yourself

03/10/2013 £19.99

ISBN Paperback: e-book:

9780749469665 9780749469672

Extent: Dimensions: Subject:

264 234x156 Entrepreneurship

<< Supported by analysis of ground-

breaking innovations in a range of fields from computer games, food and drink, and technology, to fashion and healthcare

Author Information

Description

Kim Chandler McDonald is the Co Founder and EVP of KimmiC, a company specializing in lateral thinking and international innovation implementation. A former writer/editor for national and international newspapers and magazines and host/producer of an award winning radio/TV program, Kim is a sought after speaker, columnist and advisory board member. She currently sits on Griffith University’s Enterprise Advisory Board, the Advisory Board of Frost and Sullivan’s – Global Innovation and Leadership Community and is an Academy Fellow of the International Entrepreneurship Academy.

Any organisation looking to succeed in the global digital economy of today — and tomorrow — must innovate. Innovation introduces the global pioneers whose ideas and products have driven the changes that have revolutionised our world in every field. It showcases the pioneers who have broken the mould and led the pack in every field from business and technology to food, fashion, culture and healthcare. Drawing on exclusive interviews with more than 100 leading innovators from around the world, Innovation highlights the common denominators linking these highly creative people. It presents the inside track on who’s done what, how they did it, what drives them on, and why innovation is so critical to individuals, businesses and to society as a whole. This book is a fascinating, fast-paced read and more importantly, it will empower you and your business to be more innovative too. Online supporting resources for this book include a bonus chapter on the key to innovation.

Table of Contents 1 2 3 4 5 6 7

292

Employability and Careers

The me-conomics of the GDE The state of the nation addressed Flat world navigators connecting the dots Me-health Innovating educating The power of the me-dia Being grounded when the sky’s the limit


This book

<< Arms the reader with the tools

required to create a successful business plan by taking them step-by-step through each phase of its development, using 29 actively engaging assignments, which comprise case studies from companies such as Hotmail, Amazon, Honest Burgers and BrewDog, examples, and questions that can be applied to their own plan

<< New to this edition: Includes

fresh case studies and a brand new assignment focusing on competing online: covering creating online content, key words, SEO, Social Media, traffic tracking, affiliate marketing and online advertising

<< Online Resources: Provides a

comprehensive guide to online courses, lectures and case studies, supporting lecture slides, test questions and answers

The Business Plan Workbook A Step-By-Step Guide to Creating and Developing a Successful Business Edition 9

Date: Price:

03/02/2018 ÂŁ19.99

ISBN Paperback: e-book:

9780749481797 9780749481803

Extent: Dimensions: Subject:

352 234x156 Entrepreneurship

Description

Author Information

One of the most important steps in launching or expanding a venture is the creation of a business plan. The absence of a written business plan can lead to failure for new businesses, and inhibit growth and development. Based on methodology developed at Cranfield School of Management, The Business Plan Workbook takes a practical approach to the topic of business planning. Perfect for those growing businesses, as well as a range of academic and professional courses, this title takes the reader step-by-step through each phase of the development of a business plan, from creating a competitive business strategy to its writing and presentation. With 29 corresponding assignments that each includes case studies such as Hotmail, Cobra Beer, IKEA and Amazon, actively engaging questions and worksheets, it will enable you to validate your business idea, brand your business, research your market, and raise finance.

Colin Barrow has lectured in business schools in the UK, America, Australia, the Far East and throughout Europe and is currently a visiting fellow at Cranfield University. He is also the author of The 30 Day MBA series, Financial Management for the Small Business and Starting a Business from Home (published by Kogan Page).

This new edition includes an additional assignment covering online content, key words, SEO, Social Media, traffic tracking, affiliate marketing and online advertising. With a range of fresh case studies including BrewDog, Chilango and Honest Burgers, this fully updated ninth edition of The Business Plan Workbook is an invaluable and comprehensive guide to all aspects of business planning. Online supporting resources for this book include lecture slides, test questions and answers, and a new guide to online courses, lectures and case studies.

Paul Barrow is a Visiting Fellow at Cranfield, and also a consultant advising SMEs on growth strategies. Robert Brown is a Visiting Fellow at Cranfield and directed the Graduate Enterprise Programme there, where he led a course on entrepreneurship.

Table of Contents 1 2 3 4 5 6 7

Strategy and Purpose Market Research Competitive Marketing Strategies Operations and Staffing Forecasting Results Business Controls Writing Up and Presenting Your Business Plan

Employability and Careers 293


Starting a Successful Business

This book

<< Covers all the crucial information

needed to make a new business stable and profitable, from guidance on business planning and marketing, to financials and people management

Your Guide to Setting Up Your Dream Start-up, Controlling its Finances and Managing its Operations Edition 8

<< Is part of the Business Success

series which offers ambitious entrepreneurs the practical advice they need to succeed

<< New to this edition is brand new

Series: Date: Price:

Business Success 03/08/2017 ÂŁ14.99

ISBN Paperback: e-book: Extent: Dimensions: Subject:

9780749480868 9780749480875 256 216x138 Entrepreneurship

content on digital businesses, environmental sustainability and cloud computing

Author Information

Description

Michael J Morris is a tutor for the Open University Business School with extensive experience consulting to small businesses. He is also the author of The First Time Manager, published by Kogan Page.

The first 18 months of your business is crucial. This is when the majority of new businesses fail and where a lack of proper preparation and forward planning can be your downfall. This eighth edition of Starting a Successful Business is your definitive guide to setting up a business that will thrive. Starting a Successful Business contains the crucial, practical information needed to turn your exciting new idea into a stable and profitable business. It covers each important step in the start-up process in a clear and accessible way. The major problems facing any new business are discussed, potential pitfalls are highlighted and practical advice is offered on key topics such as: ideas for new start-ups, business planning, marketing, franchising, selling and advertising, finances and financial control, taxation, business law and employing staff. Case studies from around the world provide inspiration and real-world guidance to support you as an entrepreneur. Brand new content on cloud computing, digital developments and making your business environmentally sustainable makes this Starting a Successful Business a cutting-edge and modern resource to show you how to make your business a success.

Table of Contents 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15

294

Employability and Careers

Preface First thoughts and foundations Getting orders, making profits Controlling the money Raising the money Your business name and legal status Business and the law Premises Managing operations Financial housekeeping, VAT and tax Employing people Risk management and insurance Sources of help After a successful launch...developing your firm The PLG programme for growth


<< This new edition contains brand

Starting a Business From Home

<< Is part of the Business Success

Your Guide to Planning Your Home Start-up, Reaching a Market and Creating a Profit

This book new content on social media, crowdfunding and digital businesses

series which offers ambitious entrepreneurs the practical advice they need to succeed

<< Offers hundreds of innovative ideas for setting up a profitable and successful home-based business and reveals how to find and exploit lucrative business opportunities to help readers grow their businesses

Edition 3

Series: Date: Price:

Business Success 03/08/2017 ÂŁ14.99

ISBN Paperback: e-book:

9780749480844 9780749480851

Extent: Dimensions: Subject:

312 216x138 Entrepreneurship

Description

Author Information

For aspiring entrepreneurs and business owners, the possibilities are limitless. The flexibility, freedom and cost-effectiveness that starting-up in the home offers means that more and more entrepreneurs are choosing this as the best location to agilely launch their business. Starting a Business from Home gives you the valuable advice you need on how to run a successful business from your own desk and, crucially, how to rise to the challenge of business expansion.

Colin Barrow has spent 15 years applying the principles and knowledge acquired through his own MBA to successfully running companies. He has lectured, researched and collaborated with colleagues in business schools in the UK, America, Australia, the Far East and throughout Europe and is currently a visiting fellow at Cranfield University and teaches there regularly. He is also the author of The 30 Day MBA series, The Business Plan Workbook and Financial Management for the Small Business (all published by Kogan Page).

Packed with practical advice, Starting a Business From Home covers how to research your market, business ownership and titles issues, raising money and managing your finances, building and operating a website, writing a business plan, preparing your accounts, taking your product to market and expanding overseas â&#x20AC;&#x201C; all from your home. Exercises, end of chapter actions and technical resources in the appendices mean that this is the ultimate practical guide for home-based entrepreneurs. Case studies from around the world showcase best practice and provide inspirational stories from successful businesses that began in the home.

Table of Contents 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15

Introduction Finding the right business opportunity Picking the right business for you Researching the market Business ownership and title issues Operating from home Keeping the communication lines open Bringing your product or service to market Building and using your website Doing the numbers Raising the money Preparing a business plan Taking on employees Growing profitably Starting up overseas

Employability and Careers 295


How to Prepare a Business Plan

This book

<< Helps readers create business plans to appeal to potential financial backers and obtain the investment they need to successfully launch their business

Your Guide to Creating an Excellent Strategy, Forecasting Your Finances and Producing a Persuasive Plan Edition 6

<< Includes in-depth real life examples and analysis of business plans to show readers the process of creating a successful business plan in action

<< New to this edition Series: Date: Price:

Business Success 03/08/2017 £14.99

ISBN Paperback: e-book:

9780749481100 9780749481117

Extent: Dimensions: Subject:

200 216x138 Entrepreneurship

are brand new case studies and guidance on creating business plans for digital businesses

Author Information

Description

Edward Blackwell is a consultant on small business affairs and, as a former accountant, ran his own business for many years. He is the author of several Kogan Page books.

An excellent business plan impresses financial backers, provides a clear blueprint for the future of your company and functions as a benchmark against which to measure future growth. How to Prepare a Business Plan explains the process of creating an excellent business plan in an engaging and accessible way. It includes essential coverage of producing cash flow forecasts, planning a business expansion, planning your borrowing and monitoring business progress. Global case studies containing real business plans provide inspiration and real-life practical insight by analyzing the plans, monitoring the business’ progress and discussing their problems. Sample business plans also show you the process in action and provide useful examples for creating your own. How to Prepare a Business Plan helps new business owners to consider what they really want out of their business, and to map their own journey and gain a new understanding of their product’s place in the market, as well as writing a business plan with the clarity, brevity and logic to keep bank managers interested and convinced. Whether looking to start up or expand, this practical advice will help anyone to prepare a plan that is tailored to the requirements of their business – one that will get the financial backing they need.

Table of Contents 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14

296

Employability and Careers

Introduction Writing a business plan Simple cash flow forecasts The very small business Retail and catering Manufacturing The digital business Expanding a business The market Planning the borrowing How not to write a business plan Maintaining the plan Small business and the trade cycle Monitoring progress


OV RE CO ER LAU PI 1 M N ES I CH SO LLI LD ON

With over one million copies sold in over 30 languages, the Creating Success series covers 13 key skills and features bestselling authors Michael Armstrong and John Adair.

9780749475598

9780749475673

9780749475758

9780749475796

9780749475697

9780749475772

9780749475635

9780749475734

9780749475611

9780749475659

9780749475833

9780749475819

9780749475710

creating success OV

ER

CO P I

MILLIO

ES SOLD

N

@KPEmployability www.koganpage.com/creating-success


Kogan Page is delighted to be CELEBRATING

YEARS

of independent publishing Established 1967

Kogan Page is the leading independent global publisher of specialist professional books and content with over 900 books in print.

www.koganpage.com


Are you a lecturer? Join the Kogan Page Academic Community! Upgrade to an academic account at www.koganpage.com/register so you can • Request free print and eInspection copies of hundreds of titles* • Save time by requesting all the books you need from a single portal on our website • Get 25% off all orders with discount code KPACADEMIC *Print inspection copies are available for certain books and countries only. We will consider inspection copy requests from any instructor with a registered academic address, teaching a class of 12 or more students.

Learn more about our inspection copy service by visiting www.koganpage.com/academic


Index of Titles 50 Top Tools for Coaching (9780749482329)

133

Contract Management (9780749480646)

50 Top Tools for Employee Engagement (9780749479879)

137

Corporate Governance Ethics and CSR (9780749463854)

100

50 Top Tools for Employee Wellbeing (9780749482183)

145

Crisis, Issues and Reputation Management (9780749469924)

 70

A Circular Economy Handbook for Business and Supply Chains (9780749476755)

249

Cross-Cultural Management in Work Organisations (9781843983675)

105

Culture, Conduct and Ethics in Banking (9780749482909)

 90

A Practical Guide to Entrepreneurship (9780749466886)

290

Customer-Centric Marketing (9780749472092)

 53

A Practitioner’s Guide to Account-Based Marketing (9780749479893) Accounting and Finance for Managers (9780749481148)

 40

Cyber Risk Management (9780749482596)

117

 79

Data-Driven HR (9780749482466)

161

Accounting for Non-Accountants (9780749480769)

 80

Data-driven Organization Design (9780749474416)

160

Anti-Money Laundering (9780749481896)

 89

Decarbonising Logistics (9780749480479)

227

Armstrong on Reinventing Performance Management (9780749478117)

198

Decision Making and Problem Solving (9780749475611)

265

Decoding the Irrational Consumer (9780749473846)

 27

Armstrong’s Handbook of Human Resource Management Practice (9780749474119)

146

Armstrong’s Handbook of Management and Leadership for HR (9780749478155)

169

Armstrong’s Handbook of Performance Management (9780749481209)

Defence Logistics (9780749478032)

218

Demand-Driven Supply Chain Management (9780749479978)

247

Design Management (9780749478414)

 62

195

Designing and Developing Digital and Blended Learning Solution (9781843984221)

182

Armstrong’s Handbook of Reward Management Practice (9780749473891)

201

Designing, Delivering and Evaluating L&D (9781843983606)

181

Develop Your Presentation Skills (9780749475659)

267

Armstrong’s Handbook of Strategic Human Resource Management (9780749476823)

155

Developing and Using Consultancy Skills (9781843984269)

184

Artificial Intelligence Marketing and Predicting Consumer Choice (9780749479558)

 58

Developing Employability and Enterprise (9780749478476)

288

Developing Leadership and Management Skills (9781843984559)

173

Assessment Centre Success (9780749483135)

287

Developing People and Organisations (9781843983132)

180

Audio Branding (9780749478575)

 15

Developing Skills for Business Leadership (9781843983163)

171

Aviation Logistics (9780749472702)

216

Digital Branding (9780749481698)

 14

B2B Customer Experience (9780749481858)

 12

Digital Marketing Strategy (9780749474706)

 28

B2B Marketing Strategy (9780749481063)

 11

E-Business and Supply Chain Integration (9780749478452)

241

Brand Psychology (9780749471736)

 24

E-Logistics (9780749472665)

215

Branded Beauty (9780749461812)

 26

Economics for Business (9780749470197)

 83

Branding Inside Out (9780749478902)

 17

Effective HR Communication (9780749476168)

157

Brands with a Conscience (9780749475444)

 20

Emerging Markets (9780749474492)

106

Business Ethics in Practice (9781843982722)

101

Employee Engagement (9780749472016)

136

Business Operations Models (9780749473310)

231

Employee Relations (9780749469764)

143

Business Research (9780749468958)

 97

Employment Law (9781843984382)

138

Business Research Methods: A Practical Approach (9781843982289)

 98

Employment Law (9780749469740)

140

Category Management in Purchasing (9780749472306)

 72

Employment Relations (9781843982685)

142

Chartered Public Relations (9780749473723)

 67

183

Coaching and Mentoring (9780749477622)

135

Enhancing Participant Engagement in the Learning Process (9781843984238)

Commercial Lending (9780749482770)

 88

Essay Writing Skills (9780749463915)

268

Confident Coding (9780749479633)

269

Essential Leadership (9780749477400)

108

Confident Data Skills (9780749481544)

270

Essentials of Advertising (9780749478391)

  7

Confident Digital Content (9780749480943)

271

Ethics in Public Relations (9780749477264)

 65

Confident Web Design (9780749481001)

272

Evaluating Public Relations (9780749468897)

 68

Consultancy, Organizational Development and Change (9780749478636)

188

Event Planning and Management (9780749471392)

 36

Excellence in Coaching (9780749474454)

132

Container Logistics (9780749481247)

223

Experiential Marketing (9780749480967)

 50

Content – The Atomic Particle of Marketing (9780749479756)

 51

Facilitating Collective and Social Learning (9781843984542)

185

 95

Fashion Brands (9780749464462)

 25

Fashion Logistics (9780749472986)

217

Continuing Professional Development (9781843981664)

300

 94

Index of Titles


Financial Management for Technology Start-ups (9780749481346)

 84

Leadership and Management Development (9781843982449)

172

Financing the End-to-end Supply Chain (9780749471415)

244

Leadership Team Coaching (9780749478490)

134

Food Supply Chain Management and Logistics (9780749473648)

256

Leading Change (9780749471682)

131

Forensic Accounting and Finance (9780749479992)

 81

Leading Cultural Change (9780749473037)

129

Fundamentals of Risk Management (9780749479619)

115

Leading Digital Strategy (9780749473099)

 30

Geodemographics for Marketers (9780749473822)

 56

Leading Procurement Strategy (9780749481643)

236

Global Business Ethics (9780749473952)

103

Leading, Managing and Developing People (9781843984122)

170

Global Liner Shipping (9780749481087)

222

Learning and Development (9780749469887)

179

Global Logistics (9780749471330)

225 245

Learning and Development Practice in the Workplace (9781843984085)

174

Global Supply Chain Ecosystems (9780749471583) Great Answers to Tough Interview Questions (9780749471453)

282

Learning and Talent Development (9781843982500)

176

Green Logistics (9780749471859)

213

Learning for Organizational Development (9780749477448)

178

Logistics and Retail Management (9780749468231)

214

Logistics, Supply Chain and Operations Management Case Study Collection (9780749475956)

210

Growing Business Handbook (9780749477905)

291

How Cool Brands Stay Hot (9780749477172)

 18

How to Organize Yourself (9780749475772)

266 296

Lowe’s Transport Manager’s and Operator’s Handbook 2018 (9780749483159)

260

How to Prepare a Business Plan (9780749481100) How to Write a Marketing Plan (9780749475710)

 61

Making Sense of Change Management (9780749472580)

124

How to Write Effective Business English (9780749475550)

263

Malcolm McDonald on Key Account Management (9780749480776)

 37

Human Resource Management (9781843984160)

153

Malcolm McDonald on Marketing Planning (9780749478216)

 60

Human Resource Management at Work (9781843983712)

148 150

Managing and Leading People Through Organizational Change (9780749474195)

128

Human Resource Management for MBA and Business Masters (9781843984429)

Managing Change: A Critical Perspective (9781843982418)

125

Human Resource Management in a Business Context (9781843984047)

151

Managing Employment Relations (9781843983781)

141

Managing the Retail Supply Chain (9780749480622)

239

Human Resource Management in Context (9781843983583)

154

Marine Insurance (9780749482633)

220

Human Resource Practice (9781843984061)

149

Humanitarian Logistics (9780749481445)

211

Implementing Key Account Management (9780749482756)

 39

Improve Your Global Business English (9780749466138)

264

Inclusive Talent Management (9780749475871)

205

Innovation (9780749469665)

292

Innovative B2B Marketing (9780749480806)

 10

Internal Communications (9780749469320)

158

International Finance (9780749480011)

 77

International Freight Transport (9780749474348)

259

International Human Resource Development (9780749461065)

168

International Human Resource Management (9780749480981)

165

International Human Resource Management (9781843983750)

166

International Human Resource Management (9781843983002)

167

International Management (9780749465285)

107

International Supply Chain Relationships (9780749480035)

246

Introduction to Employment Law (9781843984078)

139

Introduction to Global Logistics (9780749478254)

212

Introduction to Human Resource Management (9781843983590)

147

Introduction to Organisational Behaviour (9781843982470)

194

Inventory Management (9780749473686)

230

Investment and Portfolio Management (9780749480059)

 85

IT Governance (9780749474058)

104

Kapferer on Luxury (9780749474362)

 43

Key Account Management (9780749469405)

 38

Knockout Job Interview Presentations (9780749457150)

285

Maritime Logistics (9780749472689)

219

Market Research in Practice (9780749475857)

 45

Marketing Analytics (9780749482169)

 54

Marketing and Logistics Led Organizations (9780749478735)

226

Marketing Communications (9780749473402)

 49

Marketing Value Metrics (9780749468972)

 55

Media Interview Techniques (9780749474720)

 66

Mobile Marketing (9780749479794)

 31

Motivation and Performance (9780749478131)

199

Myths of Leadership (9780749480745)

109

Myths of Management (9780749480233)

 93

Myths of PR (9780749479596)

 64

Myths of Work (9780749481285)

163

Native Advertising (9780749481162)

  8

Neuro Design (9780749478889)

 48

Neuroscience for Organizational Change (9780749474881)

127

On Purpose (9780749471910)

 21

Organization Design (9780749470593)

192

Organization Development (9780749470173)

186

Organizational Behaviour (9780749463601)

193

Organizational Change Explained (9780749475475)

126

Organizational Management (9780749468361)

191

Packaging Logistics (9780749481704)

224

Paid Attention (9780749473600)

 22

People and Organisational Development (9781843982692)

190

People Risk Management (9780749471354)

120

Index of Titles

301


Performance Management (9780749469979)

302

197

Supply Chain Risk Management (9780749480158)

257

Performance Management: Theory and Practice (9781843983057)

196

Supply Chain Strategy and Financial Metrics (9780749482572)

243

Persuasive Copywriting (9780749473990)

  9

248

Planning and Managing Public Relations Campaigns (9780749468736)

 63

Sustainable Logistics and Supply Chain Management (9780749478278) The A-Z of Careers and Jobs (9780749482305)

189

273

Port Management (9780749474324)

221

The Agile Organization (9780749482657)

Practical Consultancy Ethics (9780749478537)

113

The Business Model Handbook (9780749481872)

 91

Practical Statistics (9780749468460)

 99

The Business Plan Workbook (9780749481797)

293

Practical Text Analytics (9780749474010)

 59

The Business Skills Handbook (9781843982180)

 92

Predictive Analytics for Marketers (9780749479930)

 57

The Buyer’s Toolkit (9780749479817)

237

Predictive HR Analytics (9780749473914)

159

 32

Preparing the Perfect Job Application (9780749456535)

286

The Definitive Guide to Strategic Content Marketing (9780749482220)

Professional Practice in Learning and Development (9780749477424)

177

The Effective Change Manager’s Handbook (9780749473075)

130

The Escape Industry (9780749473501)

 16

Professional Services Leadership Handbook (9780749477349)

110

The Handbook of International Trade and Finance (9780749475987)

 78

Questionnaire Design (9780749481971)

 46

209

Radical Business Model Transformation (9780749480455)

121

The Handbook of Logistics and Distribution Management (9780749476779)

Readymade CVs (9780749465056)

283

The Inventory Toolkit (9780749482121)

232

Relationship Management in Banking (9780749482831)

 86

The Leader’s Guide to Lateral Thinking Skills (9780749481025)

111

Research Methods in Human Resource Management (9781843983088)

164

The Leadership Skills Handbook (9780749480332)

112

The Lean Supply Chain (9780749482060)

254 253

Researching and Writing Dissertations (9781843983026)

 96

The Logistics and Supply Chain Toolkit (9780749475574)

Resourcing and Talent Management (9781843983576)

204

The Luxury Strategy (9780749464912)

 41

Responsible Business (9780749480608)

102

The Management of Luxury (9780749481827)

 42

Retail and Digital Banking (9780749482718)

 87

The New Strategic Brand Management (9780749465155)

 13

Retail Marketing Strategy (9780749476915)

 71

The Operations Advantage (9780749473549)

229

Rethinking Prestige Branding (9780749470036)

 44

The PR Professional’s Handbook (9780749468422)

 69

Rethinking Reputational Risk (9780749477363)

118

The Psychology of Work (9780749468347)

162

Reward Management (9781843983774)

202

The Risk Management Handbook (9780749478827)

119

Reward Management (9780749469801)

203

The TV Brand Builders (9780749476687)

 19

Risk Management (9780749468385)

116

Ultimate Aptitude Tests (9780749482084)

280

Sales and Marketing Channels (9780749482145)

 73

Ultimate Cover Letters (9780749474539)

274

Social Entrepreneurship and Innovation (9780749475918)

289

Ultimate CV (9780749474546)

275

Social Media Risk and Governance (9780749474577)

 35

Ultimate Interview (9780749481384)

278

Starting a Business From Home (9780749480844)

295

Ultimate IQ Tests (9780749474300)

279

Starting a Successful Business (9780749480868)

294

Ultimate Job Search (9780749481407)

277

Strategic Internal Communication (9780749478650)

156

Ultimate New Job (9780749464097)

276

Strategic Procurement (9780749472283)

235

Ultimate Psychometric Tests (9780749481636)

281

Strategic Sourcing and Category Management (9780749473976)

234

Understanding Digital Marketing (9780749478438)

 29

Strategic Sourcing Management (9780749476991)

233

Understanding Islamic Financial Services (9780749480516)

 82

Strategic Supply Chain Management (9780749478841)

240

Understanding Organisation Development (9781843984306)

187

Strategic Tendering for the Professional Services (9780749478513)

114

Understanding Planned Obsolescence (9780749478056)

252

Studying Human Resource Management (9781843984153)

152

Understanding Project Management (9780749470555)

200

Studying Learning and Development (9781843984146)

175

Understanding Social Media (9780749473563)

 34

Successful Integrated Planning for the Supply Chain (9780749477684)

242

User Research (9780749481049)

 47

Valuable Content Marketing (9780749473273)

 52

Superconductors (9780749482367)

284

Video Marketing Strategy (9780749481599)

 33

Supplier Relationship Management (9780749480134)

238

Warehouse Management (9780749479770)

228

Supply Chain Ethics (9780749479459)

251

Warehousing and Transportation Logistics (9780749482206)

258

Supply Chain Management and Logistics in Construction (9780749472429) Supply Chain Management for Humanitarians (9780749474683)

255

Wellbeing at Work (9780749480684)

144

What is a 21st Century Brand? (9780749472627)

 23

Index of Titles

250

Kogan Page Academic Catalogue 2017-18 (Semester 1)  
Kogan Page Academic Catalogue 2017-18 (Semester 1)